How to create a bubble ponytail

October 02, 2020

There’s something to be said about a ponytail hairstyle. Whether a classic version or something a bit more outside-of-the-box, ponytails can be worn for just about any occasion—not to mention they’re one of the first styles most of us learn to create. While you may be a pro at smoothing your strands into a traditional pony that’s perfect for hitting the gym, we’re here to talk about a ponytail that’s a bit more intricate: the bubble ponytail. This trendsetting hairstyle will have your long locks looking straight out of a fairytale. Even better, it only takes a few minutes to create. Read on for a step-by-step tutorial on how to create the perfect bubble ponytail.

What Is a Bubble Ponytail?

Real quick—let’s talk about what a bubble ponytail is. This hairstyle involves pulling your hair into a traditional ponytail. Then, using hair elastics tied down the length of the ponytail to create smaller, round sections that look like bubbles (we’ll dive more into how to get the look below). Basically, it’s a seriously gorgeous yet easy-to-create hairstyle—one of our favorites, might we add. Here’s how to create one.

Step #1. Prep Your Strands

Before we get into styling, it’s important to prep your strands with the proper hair-care routine. For your bubble ponytail, it’s a good idea to give your mane an extra boost with a volumizing shampoo and conditioner. Wash your hair with the L’Oréal Paris EverPure Volume Shampoo and L’Oréal Paris EverPure Volume Conditioner to do just that.

Step #2. Smooth Your Locks

Next, you’ll want to follow one more preparation protocol: ridding your hair of frizz, flyaways, and baby hairs. First, apply a hair serum, like the L’Oréal Paris EverSleek Frizz Finish Oil-In-Serum, throughout your mane to tame frizz. Then spritz a bit of hairspray onto a clean toothbrush and brush any baby hairs and flyaways back for a smooth, sleek finish.

Step #3. Gather Your Ponytail

You should already be familiar with this step. Gather your strands into a mid or high ponytail, ensuring there are no bumps, knots, or tangles. Then, secure with an elastic.

Step #4. Create Your Bubbles

It’s time for the moment you’ve been waiting for: your bubbles. One to two inches down the length of your ponytail, depending on how long your hair is, place another hair elastic. Gently tug at the sides of this newly created section to add volume and form a rounded, bubble-like shape. If needed, you can use the end of a rattail comb to carefully create your bubble. Repeat this process down the length of your ponytail.

Step #5. Tug And Perfect

After all of your bubbles are created, you’ll want to ensure your style is neat and even. Gently tug at the sides of any bubbles that need perfecting, making an effort to maintain approximately the same bubble size going down the length of your ponytail.

Editor’s tip: If you accidentally pulled too much hair when volumizing your bubbles, don’t stress. Instead of starting over, use a bobby pin or two to tuck the protruding strand back into the bubble. Nothing to see here!

Step #6. Seal In Your Style

Now that your bubble ponytail looks pretty sweet, we’re sure you’ll want this style to stay looking just as amazing throughout the day (or night). To keep everything in place, mist the L’Oréal Paris Elnett Satin Hairspray Extra Strong Hold Volume over your mane.

3 Ways To Take Your Bubble Ponytail Up A Notch

If you want to add something extra to your bubble ponytail hairstyle, here are three easy options for upgrading your pony.

#1. Pop On A Headband

Headbands are one of our favorite hair accessories at the moment, and while adding a headband to your hairstyle may take less than 30 seconds, it’s sure to make an impact.

#2. Add Some Sparkle

Wearing a bubble ponytail for prom or your wedding calls for extra glitz. Pop small, bedazzled hair pins throughout your bubble ponytail to leave a little sparkle wherever you go.

#3. Play With Color

If you want to add a bit of spunk to your ‘do, a temporary hair color spray (or two) will do the trick. Color each of your bubbles in one or more shades from the L’Oréal Paris Colorista Hair Makeup Temporary 1-Day Hair Color Spray collection, or try coloring only every other bubble. Get creative with it!

Next up: For another way to upgrade your classic pony, check out How to Achieve an Effortless Messy Ponytail.

Do you know how to create Bubble Ponytail Hairstyle?

  1. Pull up half of your hair, and use clear elastic to secure it.
  2. In the half-up ponytail, take a section of the hair. Then, wrap it round the clear elastic until you get to the end of your hair. Next, find the clear elastic underneath the ponytail and pull the small section of hair through the elastic. If you don’t wrap the hair super tight at first, you will have enough “give” to find the elastic. You can pull downwards to tighten the hair wrapped around the pony once the hair is threaded through the elastic.
  3. Tease the ponytail to make it has plenty of volume for this ponytail is going to be your first “bubble”!
  4. Repeat steps 1-3 until you get to the end of your hair!
    • You have to tug a little at this section because there’s not much of a “bubble” yet.
    • You can easily create a fuller effect, for you have teased this part of your hair for volume.
    • In this step, you also have to tease the ponytail!
    • Repeat all the same steps until you reach the end of the ponytail!
    • Tug and loosen the bubble, giving it more volume!
  5. Tug at all of the bubbles, losing them up a bit and giving them a little personality. If you want the overall look to be messy, you should need all of the bubbles to be about the same size (vertically & horizontally). You should continue tugging and teasing ponytail if it looks a little too polished for your taste.

Are you a ponytail kinda gal? Looking to up your game a bit and try out a bubble ponytail? You’ve come to the right spot!

I’ve loved doing this style on my own hair for years (both with and without my extensions) and now get to do them on my daughter’s hair!

This ponytail hairstyle is a great option for long hair to give you regular ponytail a bit of a facelift. If you have short hair you could create this as a french braid style, starting at the top of your head with a small chunk of hair and continually adding to it.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Paisley + Sparrow is a participant in the Amazon Services LLC Associates Program. This post may include affiliate links which means I may earn a small commission if you shop using the links below at no additional cost to you.

Today I’m going to walk you through a step by step bubble ponytail tutorial. I first found this ponytail through one of my absolute favorite hair bloggers Amber Fillerup of Barefoot Blonde and loved it!

The first time I did it, I was heading to my 10 year old niece’s basketball game so I decided even if it looked crazy I would be surrounded by 10 year old’s who maybe wouldn’t know the difference. 😉

How to create a bubble ponytail

I was surprised when a few of the mom’s complimented on me on my cute hair! Winning!! (Scroll to the bottom for that one!)

Since then I’ve done tons of different variations including a simple half up style. This simple hairstyle will create endless options for you!

How to create a bubble ponytail

This is legitimately one of the easiest hairstyles to do. I’ve literally put it up in 5 minutes while running around the house getting Penelope in her carseat and Roy’s shoes and jacket on, right before I’ve left on a date night and while P finished up breakfast!

Check out the full tutorial, I hope you try it too!

Check out what’s in this post!

Bubble Ponytail Tutorial

How to create a bubble ponytail

Now that Penelope is old enough to sit for a few minutes, I’ve tried to do some fun hairstyles on her hair.

Since she’s only 2 I don’t get too crazy on her hair and it’s far from perfect but it stayed in for most of the day even through a nap!

Things You Need

Here’s how to do it.

1. Get any tangles out.

I know, this kinda seems like a no brainer but it’s worth mentioning. If you start with tangled hair it’ll make the ponytail look funny and it make it so hard to work with.

I love this detangle spray from Amazon! It’s meant for curly hair (which P doesn’t really have) but it works so well. Spray it on, brush it out and step 1 is done.

2. Put it in a ponytail.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Obviously there are a ton of varieties of this ponytail but for the most basic and beginner style, this is the easiest way to do it. When you get more advanced you can add in 2 ponytails or do a “french” style.

3. Cover the elastic hair tie

How to create a bubble ponytail

This part is totally optional! If you do it, simply take a small chunk of hair from underneath your ponytail. Wrap it around your hair tie until there is a small tail left underneath the ponytail.

Using a bobby pin, pin the tail under the base of the ponytail. Easy peasy!

4. Tie another clear elastic slightly below the first

How to create a bubble ponytail

You can use make this as big or as little of a gap as you want. This will depend on how much hair you have and how you want the ponytail to look.

5. Create the bubble

Next, you’ll want to gently tug a bit of the hair above the second elastic but below the first.Slightly tugging it loose will give it a full, bubble look to it.

6. Cover the elastic hair tie

Again, a totally optional step. You can either tuck the hair inside the hair tie itself or use a bobby pin at this point.

7. Repeat the process until you’re all done!

How to create a bubble ponytail

For both me and Penelope I create 3 “bubbles”. She absolutely loved this hairstyle and even more loved that it was super quick!

Tips & Tricks

If you’re looking for a few additional tips to make this work for your hair, here’s a few!

1. If you have thin hair, tease your hair in sections. When I did P’s, I didn’t tease it but I always tease mine. I have way less hair than her!

The easiest way to do this is to pull up half of my ponytail and tease that and then do the underneath section. My hair isn’t super thick so this helped it thicken up a bit.

How to create a bubble ponytail

2. I didn’t wrap my hair around the middle sections. Again, because my hair isn’t super thick I wanted to make sure the bottom sections filled out! However, with Penelope’s I did because she had enough hair.

3. I used Oribe Texturizing Spray to help everything hold better in my own hair. My hair was freshly washed so this kept everything filled out and the elastics in place. (I only wrapped the elastics around once since they’re so tiny!)

How to create a bubble ponytail

And there you have it! A super simple Bubble Ponytail! What do you think?

Be sure to check out my fishtail braid tutorial next! It even includes a video!

Related Posts:

  • the Easiest DIY Painted Glitter Pumpkins
  • The Easiest DIY Sea Salt Spray for Beachy Waves
  • The Easiest Pom Pom Wreath DIY (Boho Christmas Decor)
  • Superhero Mask Template + Tutorial
  • 11 Best Ponytail Holders for Thin Hair
  • Easiest Pipe Cleaner Candy Canes (for Toddlers!)
About Jen

Jen is a mom of 3 who loves frozen cookie dough, plants and a generous pour of creamer in her coffee. Her biggest joy is helping others find joy in their life, style and home through tips, tutorials and encouragement. She also runs 2 additional blogs. Feel free to send Jen a message or join the fun on Instagram!

How to create a bubble ponytail

If you’re already planning your first post-lockdown beauty look, you might want to try a bubble ponytail – the hairstyle that’s currently flooding our social media feeds.

For many of us in lockdown, our beauty routines fell by the wayside a bit. Morning routines that involved high-tech hair tools and nourishing oils were ditched and, instead, quick and easy (and for me, often greasy) buns were favoured. Meanwhile, the colourful contents of our make-up bags quietly collected dust as we turned to our skincare routines.

But now, with the end of lockdown on the horizon, the beauty industry is reflecting our excitement with fun and nostalgic trends. Case-in-point: the bubble ponytail.

So what is it? A bubble ponytail starts off as a traditional ponytail. But then, you tie hair elastics along the length of the ponytail, creating rounded sections that look like bubbles. Cute, right?

Countless celebrities and hairstylists have been flooding our social media feeds with pictures and videos of this trendy hairstyle. One of the first places it came under the spotlight was when RuPaul’s Drag Race star Olivia Lux styled her hair into numerous bubble ponytails for a runway challenge.

TV host Laura Whitmore also wore a bubble ponytail recently to film a new episode of Celebrity Juice.

You may recognise the hairstyle. When the Stylist digital team discussed the look, many pointed out that it reminded them of hairstyles they did as a child. And we’re all for revisiting fun, child-like trends as we emerge from lockdown.

“The beauty of this style is that it is minimum effort and maximum effect, it can be done on all hair types and needs no major prep,” says Adam Reed, UK editorial ambassador for L’Oréal Professionnel. “The key to this is that you make sure the bubbles are big.”

To do this, Reed recommends to prep your hair by giving it a dusting of texturising powder, like L’Oréal Professionnel’s Tecni.Art Super Dust, £13.20, to create shape and hold.

“My top tip would be to make sure the bands are tied super tight,” he adds. “This will make sure the bubbles are super ‘bubbly’ and ensures the hairstyle holds for longer.”

For extra volume in your hair bubbles, hairstylist Justine Marjan posted a tutorial on Instagram, in which she backcombs the top of every section.

“With this look you don’t need heaps of finishing products really other than a bit of texturing spray, ” says Reed. “This look is great at the moment as so many people have been growing their hair out while they can’t get to the salon.”

That’s our first hairstyle out of lockdown sorted.

Women are very fond of creating many kinds of fancy braids from fishtail to a normal messy braid. They complement all the outfits and are a hit for formal as well as informal looks. But when it comes to creating a bubble ponytail, it gets tricky to get the right volume and length.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Diva Divine is here to show you how you can make an easy bubble ponytail with the best volume and length. This hairstyle can be created with curly, straight, wavy or even any crazy hair. Follow the steps for the gorgeous hairdo!

Step 1 The first thing you want to do is to clip-in your favorite Diva Divine Hair Extensions so that there’s enough length to create bubbles and the volume is sufficient too. Tie half your hair from the crown with a clear elastic at the top and pull out tiny strings so that the head does not look without any volume.

Step 2 Take a hair strand from this half up ponytail and wrap it around the clear elastic so that it’s not visible. Pull the hair strand through the elastic to keep it in place.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Step 3 Tease the ponytail to create the first bubble and tie a clear elastic at a gap of 3 inches. Once you’re done, pull out some sections lightly to create some volume in the bubble. For volume, choose the Diva Divine Hair Extensions that suit your requirements best.

Step 4 Go on creating these bubbles until you reach the end of your hair and don’t forget to tease every section to create good volume. Try and keep all bubbles of equal length to get an even look. If you want to create many bubbles, go for Diva Divine Hair Extensions of at least 24” length.

Own that ponytail, work that updo.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Last time on The Braid Up, we featured faux locs, giving all the people with commitment issues a way to dip their toes into the low-maintenance trend (if you still haven’t watched our video, WYD?). But if hearing the words “permanent hairstyle” doesn’t cause you to break out in hives, you’re going to absolutely love this week’s look.

Yes, I know there’s been a lot of locs content lately, but that’s only because the style is so damn versatile. I mean, they’re kind of like the Shapeshifters of the hair world. So this week, our hair-braiding expert, Stasha Harris, whipped up an eye-catching loc bubble ponytail—and it’s just as dope as it sounds.

Down to try out this look? Here’s everything you need to know:

1. Re-twist your locs. This is a must for making sure your locs look sleek and for snuffing out any pesky flyaways. Be sure to use a moisturizing, lightweight curl cream to help hydrate your locs and give them long-lasting hold.

2. Sew on a ponytail. I mean, I guess you could attach it with something less permanent, but listen—it won’t be a good look if you whip your fake ponytail around and it flies off. Have your stylist take the extra time to secure it with a needle and thread.

3. Add black rubber bands to the ponytail to create the bubble effect. Stasha doesn’t do this in the video, but it’s pretty damn hard to find ponytail extensions that are already bubbled, so you’re going to have to go full DIY.

4. Lay down your baby hairs. What’s a Braid Up look without snatched edges? Load up on one that’s lightweight and non-flaky so you can avoid those white specks.

Regardless of cut, colour, or style, we are consistently enamored with Priyanka Chopra’s hair. It’s safe to say that over the years, Priyanka Chopra has mastered the art of red-carpet dressing, and her latest look is proof. Lucky for us, the actress served up a jaw-dropping ponytail look and we are 100 percent smitten. Yes! We are talking about the bubble ponytail that just got a high-fashion makeover by our very own Pee Cee. This trendsetting ponytail will have your long locks looking straight out of a fairytale. It’s undoubtedly practical, can be wholly chic, and is, in fact, the perfect party hairstyle for 2021 that anyone can do. So keep scrolling to know the steps to whip up an eye-catching bubble ponytail— and it’s just as dope as it sounds.

The Step-By-Step Guide To Create Priyanka Chopra Jonas’s Bubble Ponytail

Prep Your Strands

Give your strands an extra boost with a volumizing shampoo and conditioner. This is a must for making sure your locks look sleek and for snuffing out any pesky flyaways. Be sure to use a moisturizing, lightweight curl cream to help hydrate your locks and give them a long-lasting hold.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Smooth Your Locks

Next, you’ll want to follow one more preparation protocol: ridding your hair of flyaways, frizz, and baby hairs. First, apply a hair serum, throughout your mane to tame frizz. Then spritz a bit of hairspray onto a clean toothbrush and brush any baby hairs and flyaways back for a smooth, sleek finish. You can use dry shampoo to add texture, volume and set the shape of your ponytail.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Gather Your Ponytail

You should already be familiar with this step. Gather your strands into a mid or high ponytail, ensuring there are no bumps, knots, or tangles. Then, secure with an elastic.

Create Your Bubbles

It’s time for the step you’ve been waiting for: creating bubbles! One to two inches down the length of your ponytail, depending on how long your hair is, place another hair elastic. Gently tug at the sides of this newly created section to add volume and form a rounded, bubble-like shape. If needed, you can use the end of a rattail comb to carefully create your bubble. Repeat this process down the length of your ponytail.

Tug And Perfect

After you’ve created all your bubbles, you will want to ensure your style is neat and even. Gently tug at the sides of any bubbles that need perfecting, try maintaining approximately the same bubble size going down the length of your ponytail.

Pro Tip: If you accidentally pulled too much hair while volumizing your bubbles, don’t stress. Instead of starting over, use a bobby pin to tuck the protruding strand back into the bubble.

This minimum effort, maximum impact hairstyle will be your new fave

As the possibility of the end of lockdown creeps into the horizon, we are starting to think about what post-pandemic life looks like – and what post-pandemic us will look like. With experts predicting a second coming of the roaring 20s, you can bet that when we are finally allowed out again the outfits will be elaborate, the hair will be big, and the make-up turned up to 10. Anticipating this return to the outside world, a new trend has appeared on TikTok that encapsulates the fun and excitement perfectly: the bubble ponytail.

The bubble ponytail has been around for a while, mostly seen on red carpets and high fashion editorials – Doja Cat rocked the style during her performance at the Grammys this year, as did models at Molly Goddard’s SS17 show. Singer Griff has made the oversized bubble ponytail her signature look alongside mallen streaks and sharp winged liner. Now the style is making its way off the runway and into our bedrooms. Equal parts chic and playful, it’s an edgy twist on an old classic and requires minimum effort for maximum impact – our favourite kind of hairstyle.

Reply to @deepfriedturkeyballs bubble braid tutorial 🖤 #fyp #hairtutorial

The look is very easy to create for yourself, and mostly just requires that you have the correct number of hair ties. A texturising powder or volumizing spray also helps, particularly if you have fine hair, but dry shampoo will work in a pinch.

Start off by gathering your hair into a regular ponytail and securing it in place. Then add another hair tie around an inch down from the first one. Depending on how sleek or full you want the style to look, you can tease the hair with a brush or comb to add volume and create wider bubbles. Make sure that you are tying the elastics super tight so that the style holds for longer and the bubbles stay bubbly. Add another hair tie, an inch down from the previous one and then continue down the hair until you reach the end. In each section, you can gently pull the hair between the elastics to create larger bubbles.

Finish the look with some hairspray to hold everything in place. You can also add different hair ties, scrunchies, ribbons, bows and so on to accessorise the look. Check out some of our favourite examples below for inspo.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Introducing the low bubble ponytail!

In a world of high maintenance updos, tight curls, and messy buns, a go-to style that you can use no matter what time of day or occasion is a ponytail, especially the low bubble ponytail.

Ponytails are especially helpful during hot and humid days. They’re the easiest hairstyles create when you need to get your hair out of your face. From cute braided ponytails to the trusty low ones, there are many stylish hairstyles that you can try out!

A low bubble ponytail is a n example of a fun style that adds volume. It features a simple ponytail that has multiple sections of about two inches or so that are secured with elastics. It may look difficult to execute, but it’s surprisingly simple. And best of all, you can style a bubble ponytail with accessories like barrettes and scrunchies for that extra pop of color . Here’s how to do it.

Easy Steps to Create a Low Bubble Ponytail

Start with healthy hair

In order to pull off this low bubble hairstyle, you need to boost the volume of your hair. By shampooing with Dove Oxygen and Nourishment Shampoo and finishing off with Dove Oxygen and Nourishment Conditioner, you nourish your hair and help make it bouncy.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Get rid of tangles

A paddle brush is handy for minimizing damage as it reduced hair pulling. Run the brush gently along your hair to get rid of tangles before styling it.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Tease your hair

Use the tail end comb to tease the top part of your hair for extra volume. The fluffier , the better.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Start creating ponytails

It’s finally time to start on that ponytail! Gather the topmost section of your hair and tie it into a half ponytail using an elastic.

# HairHack : Wrap a small section of your hair around the elastic to create a seamless look. Secure with a bobby pin afterward , but make sure it is hidden well .

How to create a bubble ponytail

Make bubbles

Pick up a new section of hair from the side and tie it together with the first ponytail. Gently tug your hair to make a bubble. Repeat the process until you’ve created three or more bubbles, depending on the length of your hair. Use the grooming brush to put unruly hair strands back in place. Your low bubble hairstyle is almost done!

How to create a bubble ponytail

Set with hairspray

Spray TONI&GUY Body Amplify Creation Hairspray all over your hair to keep it secure. That way, your bubble ponytail can last all day!

How to create a bubble ponytail

Try these ponytail hairstyles aside from the low bubble hairstyle

Low ponytail hairstyles may not be uncommon but they are quick to do and easy to wear. Here are some examples of how you can wear this classic hairstyle.

1. Greek low ponytail

This hairstyle needs a thin headband which you will use a guide for rolling-in your hair. Simply wear the headband the way the ancient Greek goddesses did and slowly insert strands of your hair on both sides of your head into the headband. Do this until you reach your nape area. Then, tie your hair with an elastic and twist them if you want to. You can also create bubbles with this.

2. Sleek low ponytail

Whatever the occasion or season, a simple and sleek low ponytail always steals the show. Achieve this look by simply gathering your hair into a ponytail and setting it low, just a little above your nape. You can cover the elastic by taking a few strands and wrapping it around the elastic. Comb your hair and smoothen it out for the best finish.

Editor’s tip: This hairstyle is even sexier if your hair is not frizzy. After setting your hair into a ponytail, add a few drops of TONI&GUY High Shine Serum Drops to make it sleek and shiny!

3. Twisted low ponytail

This hairstyle looks complicated but it is actually simple. Just comb your hair to remove tangles, then, bring together both sides of your hair, laying the left side over the right one. Secure with bobby pins as you go along. Tie the hair with an elastic at your nape to complete the low ponytail.

4. Voluminous low ponytail

You can wear this hairstyle for evening appointments. Start by teasing your entire hair using a tail comb. Then, gather them loosely into a ponytail and tying it near your nape area. Tug on the strands to create volume. Voila! You are all set!

5. Side-swept low ponytail

Get rid of boring ponytail hairstyles with this side-swept low ponytail which is a great variation to the low bubble ponytail. You can simply tie your hair and bring it over towards one side of your hair. Then, secure with bobby pins. You can also add a little ribbon on it to accessorize.

Whether it’s for a day out with friends, a party, or even just a day in the office, a low bubble ponytail is a great way to add life to your hair. This volumizing hairstyle is perfect for keeping your hair in place, especially if it’s layered. And it looks just positively stylish to boot!

Now, you have several ideas for your next ponytail hairstyle. Have fun trying these out!

Something we love about trends is that they always seem to make their way back around into popularity. This summer, the “afro-bubble ponytail” has swung back into a trending rotation and, from the looks of it, many nautralistas have been put their own spin on the classic style.

With the addition of beads, gold/silver hair clips, funky parting patterns and more, the refreshing reinvention of the style has caught our attention and has us running to the beauty supply store for all the materials we need to achieve this look.

Popular hair stylist and influencer, Susy Oludele, shared her process and necessary products with Allure to help us all rock these textured afro-puff ponytails. First, you want to section off your hair into the number of ponytails you desire. Next, add gel to the mini section before placing your hair in the rubber band to slick down the section. Next, grab your marley or afro hair and lay it flat against your own ponytail. Secure the hair, with your hair in the middle, and secure with a rubber band. After that, once the hair is attached, blend your hair with the added hair and scope out the first section you want to create your first “afro puff ball.” Once located, twist a rubber band around that section to create the “ball.” Continue that process down the length of the ponytail until you reach the end and TA-DA!

If you’re like us and need a visual aide as well, Oludele recently gave this look to content creator/influencer Nneoma Okorie which Okorie shared on her YouTube channel:

So now that you’ve read the steps and watched the tutorial, here are some inspo pics to get your creative juices flowing:

Ready. Set. Boss. Our daily email is pouring out inspiration with the latest #BlackGirlBossUp moments, tips on hair, beauty and lifestyle to get you on track to a better you! Sign up today.

The bubble ponytail is the kind of hairstyle Carrie Bradshaw would wear in Sex and the City. It is equal parts flirty and chic but offers a new twist on an old classic that’s a little more fun. It also happens to be a big hairstyle trend for 2021, so if you’re looking for a cute go-to that’s easy yet impactful, this one’s for you.

After all, who doesn’t want to be able to look cute without the need to heat style, spend hours sitting in front of a mirror, or even wash our hair, really? It’s a tall order, but the bubble ponytail fits the bill. You’ve probably seen this chic updo all over Instagram and TikTok, but what you may not realize is just how easy it is to re-create at home.

To start, gather your hair into a normal high ponytail at the middle or crown of your head and secure it in place with not one but two ponytail elastics. “I use two because the first elastic gets stretched out while securing the ponytail, so the second elastic is extra support and gives you more lift from the head, which you want for this kind of ponytail,” Mark Townsend, Dove celebrity hairstylist, told POPSUGAR. “You don’t want a droopy bubble ponytail, trust me.” His favorite hair ties for this are Blax Clear Hair Elastics ($12) and Scunci Effortless Beauty Large No-Damage Elastics ($6).

Next, grab your dry shampoo (the secret to every good updo, to be honest) to add fullness and texture without making hair stiff. “Liberally spray the ponytail with Dove Volume and Fullness Dry Shampoo ($5) and give the hair at the base of the ponytail a little teasing with a comb or brush to widen the ponytail and add volume,” Townsend said. After you tease, brush out the rest of your ponytail so it’s smooth and knot-free.

Now it’s time to create your first “bubble” by securing a new elastic a few inches down from the base of the ponytail. “Pull the hair between the elastics apart a little to stretch out the hair,” Townsend said. Repeat this until you reach the end of your ponytail, and leave about two or three inches of hair free at the bottom.

To finish off the look, give your whole head a light spritz of hairspray and smooth down flyaways with either a natural-bristle toothbrush or clean makeup spoolie. “Fun tip: you can use different-color elastics for a pop of color in the ponytail or to match your outfit of the day or your face mask.”

Keep scrolling for more bubble-ponytail inspiration.

Bubble Braid Hairstyle: Bubble braids are for those days when you don’t want to put too much effort into your hairstyle yet look fabulous.

How to create a bubble ponytail

This is how you can bubble braid your hair

As far as hairstyles go, a simple ponytail is just about as easy as it gets. But if you’re feeling a little experimental today, it’s time to acquaint yourself with bubble braids. Bubble braids are great not only because they work for most hair types, but they can also be styled in different ways. Worn as pigtails or half-up braids, this is one Insta-worthy hairstyle you don’t need to be a pro to perfect. Bubble braids have been around for a while, but we’ve recently seen a resurgence of them on our Instagram feeds. The style is Insta-friendly and easy to achieve even in different variations, and all you’ll need to complete it are a couple of clips, rubber bands and a comb. It’s this low fuss hairstyle that you can even create while on the go and look your glamorous best.

This Is How You Can Create A Bubble Braid

1. Prep Your Hair

Prepare your hair with a styling cream to create a frizz-free foundation that is perfect for styling. You can even start out by blow-drying your hair with a round brush and a styling cream.

2. Do A Ponytail

Start by tying your hair into a ponytail. You can make it high, medium or low according to your preference and style look and secure it with a rubber band.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

Online searches for bubble braids are up 135% year on year in 2020 as forecasted by social media platform Pinterest Predicts, an annual look at trends for the year ahead.

In 2021 it’s thought that we will spend more time and money on self-care, skin care, and hairstyles that are easier to do and maintain.

Today’s top videos

And these quirky bubble braids feature heavily, but here’s the thing, they look incredible and they are really easy to do without damaging the hair in any way. Here’s all the ways to make them.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Pic: Single bubble braid/Instagram user @olga.pallikara

The two basic ways of making bubble braids are to create one single braid from a ponytail, or two braids, one on either side of the head (this works better with beanies or hats).

For the first, you need to make a ponytail, put it up high for a fun braid, midway down the head for a casual braid, and a low pony for a more chic braid. Leave a few strands free at the front to make the look appear more relaxed.

Take another hairband and tie to the hair two to three inches lower, repeat until the end of the hair. You’re almost done, now tease out each section along the ponytail creating a ‘bubble’ effect. This is how to make the second bubble braids style.

Hello everyone!. You probably have heard or seen bubble ponytail hairstyle but you were wondering how to do it. Or maybe you like Disney especially Jasmine in Alladin and you want to replicate her hairstyle but don’t know how!. Or you are looking for a hairstyle that is not a braid nor a boring ponytail but as easy as a ponytail technique. Well, rest assure. this bubble ponytail hairstyle will be your go-to hair look. In fact, it is that easy and chic, you will wish you knew how to do it before.

Bubble ponytail hairstyle

Bubble ponytail hairstyle is such an easy and chic hairstyle. It doesn’t require any experience in doing hairstyles. In fact, You will be done in 5 minutes once you know how to fan the bubble. Besides, It is basically doing a couple of ponytail on your hair and pull them out to create the bubble effect or more precisely the balloon shape. Whenever I do this hairstyle, the child in me resurface and I feel like Jasmine in Alladin ( Disney movie). Does anyone relate? nop! Just me!. Anyway, I am that addicted to Disney hairstyles that I did a Minnie Mouse hairstyle and it was my one of my favorite hairstyle. Moreover, for some reason, this hairstyle reminds me in technique with my fake dutch braid hairstyle.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to start

Before I start, This hairstyle works with any hair; oily, clean, messy or sleek. It also go with any hair length but if you are going for Jasmine look. Then, the longer the better. I started with second-day hair as most of my hairstyle which means I showered and blow dry my hair the day before. Also, All you need for this hairstyle is few clear or black elastic tie, brush and maybe bobby pins. I used the latter to secure my short bangs.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Step-by-step how to

  • Brush your hair all the way to the back. Then if you have short bangs as I do, leave them out and secure with a clip for now.
  • Then pick two sections of hair from each side of your forehead. Brush them out to smooth the hair and pull them to the back and secure above the crown with an elastic band. This will be your first section.
  • Note: You can cover the elastic with a hairpiece or you can leave it as I did. Also, you can tease your ponytail if you have thin hair.
  • Now for your second section, grab your hair above your ear and combine it with your first ponytail right on the crown and secure with elastic band.
  • Next, start fanning your first bubble. Take your both hands and with index and thumb pull the hair from both sides between the elastic to create your first bubble.
  • Then, go to your third section. grab the hair from each section behind your ear and combine with your second ponytail and secure it with an elastic band.
  • repeat the fanning process.
  • If you have short hair, you will stop at this point. However, if you have long hair, you will keep grabbing hair and combining them to create a ponytail.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Final touches

  • When you have no hair to put in a ponytail, you can put another elastic band a few inches down the ponytail to create your fourth or even your fifth bubble. I stopped at my fifth bubble. I pulled my hair to give volume to my bubble ponytail hairstyle.
  • Finally, I took my short bangs from each side and secure them behind my ears with bobby pins.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Viola, It is really easy to recreate than you think. You can even pull the hairstyle while you are half asleep.

How to create a bubble ponytail

At last, What do you think of this bubble hairstyle? Do you like it? Are you thinking to recreate the bubble ponytail hairstyle? let me know in the comment below what do you think.

Don’t forget to snap it, pin it, share it or tag it or even hashtag it with #chez_rama if you decide to create it. Also, I would love to see how you style your hair. Tag chez_rama on Instagram and I will share your look and don’t forget to follow me for all tips and trick to style your outfit, hair and more.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Have a wonderful day!

Don’t forget you are one wash away, so don’t hold from all hair possibilities

This surprisingly easy hairstyle will be your new go-to.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

There’s nothing like a fuss-free, easy-to-recreate updo. And what’s even better is when said hairstyle can take you from the gym, into work to a night on the town. That’s why the bubble braid, a playful yet simple hairstyle, is gaining in popularity with all types of hair. Good Housekeeping asked celebrity hairstylist Andrew Fitzsimons for all the details for the popular style, plus step-by-step instructions for how to do a bubble braid on your own har at home.

What are bubble braids?

A bubble braid is a playful twist on a traditional ponytail, Fitzsimons says. In fact, it’s actually not a braid at all. “Instead, it’s putting your hair up in a ponytail and tying it evenly spaced throughout with elastic bands in a way that resembles bubbles,” he explains. Consider it a trendy upgrade to this otherwise classic style.

FYI: Bubble braids are so versatile and can be recreated on all hair types, Fitzsimons says. A quick Google search will bring up bubble braids on curly hair, bubble braids that look like pigtails and even bubble braids incorporated into half-up, half-down styles.

And even though you’ll mostly see this style on long hair, short hair gals can wear it too, though your ponytail may be shorter than you’d like. “To remedy this, you can play around with the placement and amount of bubble braids on your ponytail,” Fitzsimons says, “or consider adding hair extensions.”

How to style bubble braids

Thankfully, the bubble braid process is pretty simple and straight-to-the-point. Whether you want to try a single bubble braid, small bubble braids or bubble braid pigtails, this tutorial will help you create any kind of style.

  1. Gather the supplies. Fitzsimons recommends grabbing a styling cream and hairspray, as well as multiple elastics, depending on the amount of bubbles you want to create.
  2. Apply your styling product.“Use your styling cream to create a frizz-free canvas to work with, which also helps hold the style in place,” he suggests. If you have fine hair, stick to a lightweight cream so your hair won’t look greasy or weighed down. Thicker and textured hair types can choose a medium to heavy styling cream or butter that helps to keep moisture locked-in throughout the day.
  3. Create the ponytail. Now that your hair is primed with your styling product, it’s time to pull your hair up. “Bring your hair up into a slicked-back ponytail at the height that works best for you, and wrap it with an elastic at the point closest to your scalp,” Fitzsimons says. At this point, you can also decide how many bubble braids you’d like to create for your style. If you’re looking to do bubble braid pigtails, part hair in half down the middle and secure two ponytails, one on both sides of the head. If you want a half-up, half-down bubble braid, split the hair horizontally and secure the bottom portion of the hair in an elastic to separate. Then, secure the top portion of the hair into a ponytail.
  4. Add your elastics. You can totally customize your bubble braid to be uniquely you. “Add another elastic hair tie a few inches down from the initial one, and continue to add more further down at equal distances,” Fitzsimons recommends. There’s no need to get out a ruler for this, but be sure to keep the space between elastics as uniform as possible. This will result in a more professional-looking braid. To add even more personality to this look, consider using colorful elastics.
  5. Create the bubbles. Once you’ve added all of your elastics, loosen the hairs between them by pulling at each section to create a ‘bubble’ look, he says. If you have naturally thick hair, this process will be super easy. Those with fine or thin hair, you may want to tease the strands or even add a thickening spray for bigger bubbles.
  6. Finish the look. Once your bubbles are complete, Fitzsimons recommends lightly spritzing hairspray all over to set the style in place and avoid any stray hairs or flyaways. You can also add your own styling pizazz, from bedazzled headbands to flowy hair scarves, the possibilities are endless.

Ponytail hairstyles have always been our favorite ones just for being the easiest hairdos to achieve. Apart from it, ponytails stand out because of their brilliance in versatility. A regular ponytail requires just pulling the hair up and securing it on the top of the head. But there are so many types of ponytails that are more than a traditional up style. We have compiled the best-bubbled ponytails for 2021 to prove that you may wear a different ponytail every day.

Table of Contents

Best Bubble Ponytail Hairstyles 2021

1. Bubble Ponytail for Long Hair

How to create a bubble ponytail

It goes without saying that bubble ponytails look exceptionally good on women with long and thick hair, but that doesn’t mean that those with thin and a bit shorter hair can’t give it a try. This particular ponytail is easy to get, and you can sport it formally too. The trick of achieving a textured bubble ponytail like this is to tease your hair or apply texturizing hair spray and then divide the locks into sections and tie them with a hair elastic.

2. Sleek Bubble Ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

Sleek bubble ponytails look as good as textured ones. The best example is displayed above. The headdress is effortless, and it can be matched with various outfits, including casual and formal. Before getting this ponytail, you will need to smoothen your hair as much as possible and then gather all the strands together in a regular ponytail. Use a black ribbon to get a sectioned effect. This ponytail should be rocked with statement earrings.

3. Mermaid Inspired Bubble Ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

What about this impressive style? You can’t go wrong with it. It is not a simple bubble ponytail as it requires using twists to enhance the look. The style is loose and messy. Apart from gorgeous styling, rich blonde hair color also comes in handy to make the look complete. However, it is a style that you can achieve by yourself as well.

4. Pom Ponytail for Afro-American Women

How to create a bubble ponytail

There is a great bubble ponytail for Afro-American women as well. One of the best looks you can see above. It requires nothing more than pulling the strands up in a ponytail and sectioning it for a great pom style. Keep the hair on the front sleek for a near and impressive style like this.

5. Half Bubble Ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

It is not necessary to go for a full ponytail if you don’t want to. If you haven’t tried the half version of the style, it is the right moment to do that. A half bubble ponytail will not only provide you with a striking appearance but also show off your texture and amazing hair length.

Bubble ponytails have become a must-have! These trendy updos have been worn by celebs like Kendall Jenner and Bella Thorne. We love this hairstyle because it is a fun ponytail with a twist and the ponytails can be worn for any occasion too. There are lots of different ways to create the style but usually you will put the hair into a ponytail then use hair elastics to create sections down the ponytail. Then you should tease each section to add volume. You can find many tutorials for all different versions of the ponytail online. If you love these ponytails or haven’t heard of the hairstyle, then this is the place to be. Today we have 23 amazing bubble ponytails to show you. We have accessorized updos, cute styles, edgy looks and more.

1. Trendy and Simple Bubble Ponytail

The first bubble ponytail is simple and trendy. For this look, the hair is styled into a high ponytail and four bubble sections. This is an easy to wear version of the ponytail and it will suit everyone. You can recreate or try using more or less sections. To keep the hairstyle subtler, use hair ties that match your hair like the ones featured in the image.

How to create a bubble ponytail

2. Bubble Ponytail with Braids

Braids can be added to your bubble ponytail and next we have a stylish way to wear the look. Here we have a low ponytail with three bubble sections and there is a braid running down the center of the ponytail too. You can create this style by keeping a section of the hair out of the ponytail, braiding it and then secure it with the hair ties you will be using for your bubbles. You can use a fishtail braid or you can use the classic three strand braid.

How to create a bubble ponytail

3. Half Up Bubble Ponytail

Another way that you can style your bubble ponytail is with a half up style. It is just like the classic half ponytail but with trendy bubbles. As you can see, the two different hairstyles look so cute together. It is a pretty and easy to wear hair idea that will suit everyone. This will look great with shorter hair too.

How to create a bubble ponytail

4. Short Ponytail Idea

Speaking of short hair here is a shorter version of the bubble ponytail. As you can see, this only has two bubble sections. The style looks beautiful on shorter hair and you can recreate this or have more bubbles by using smaller sections of hair. You can try the style on even shorter hair than this but you will only have one bubble section. This ponytail is perfect for the summer.

How to create a bubble ponytail

5. Chic Low Ponytail Idea

Next, we have a chic ponytail and this is one of our favorite versions of the style. For this look, the hair is styled into a low ponytail. There are two bubble sections and each section has hair wrapped around the top and bottom to hide the hair ties. The style is finished off with loose hair and side swept bangs at the front. This is more sophisticated version of the fun style and it would be perfect for special occasions.

How to create a bubble ponytail

6. Formal Ponytail Idea

The next bubble ponytail is super glam! Here we have a long ponytail with a braid running down the center. There is also an elegant accessory added to each of the bubble sections. The accessories have a pearl and rhinestone design. We love this because it is a glitzy version of the style. Something like this would be great for bridesmaids, proms and other special events. Recreate a similar look or you can use different hair accessories with different colors and designs.

How to create a bubble ponytail

7. Two Low Ponytails

Like wearing two ponytails? If so, this idea is for you. This look features a bubble version of the classic and cute hairstyle. As you can see, the hair is split into a center part and two bubble ponytails have been created. It is such a pretty and fun hairstyle. This style only has one bubble section but you can add more. Hair like this is great for casual days.

How to create a bubble ponytail

8. High Bubble Ponytail

High ponytails have become a must-have look. This next hairstyle steps up the game even more because it has bubble sections. With a high and long ponytail, you can add many bubbles just like the style featured. This is a trendy and glam hairstyle that can be dressed up or down to suit any occasion.

How to create a bubble ponytail

9. Unique and Accessorized Hair Idea

Prefer more unique and statement making hairstyles? If so, you need to check this out. Here we have an accessorized bubble ponytail – the hair is styled high and has three bubbles. Each section of the hair has been accessorized with glitzy clips, bows, initials and more. As you can see, the result is amazing! Hair like this would be great for a party or night out. You can recreate something similar or go wild and experiment with all different kinds of clips, bows, beads and other accessories.

How to create a bubble ponytail

10. Half Ponytail with Pearls

Next, we have another half bubble ponytail. This time the hair has a more elegant look. The loose hair is curly and the actual ponytail is quite soft. Pearls have also been added to the hair. It is a beautiful version of the style and it would be great for a special occasion. A ponytail with pearls can even be worn for a wedding!

How to create a bubble ponytail

Bubble ponytails or bubble braids not only look pretty cool, they are also super quick to make. Behind the fancy name is nothing more than a braid that is divided into individual sections with several hair ties, which are then plucked into a ball shape. Sounds simple? It is! Tikbow shows in the video how you can style the hairstyle in a few minutes.

There is no way around bubble ponytails right now, stars and influencers wear the hairstyle up and down – and that is no wonder. After all, there is hardly a hairstyle that is so simple and can be worn both in everyday life as well as for evening events. We explain step by step how to do the special braid! All you need is five minutes of your time, at least medium length hair, a hairbrush, volumizing spray and three to six braids.

Bubble Ponytail styling – simple instructions

1. for a bubble ponytail, first tie a tight, medium-high braid and fix it with a hair tie. It is important that it is really tight! If necessary, adjust with a second hair tie. If you like, use a scrunchie for an even more stylish look.

2. then spray the hair with volumizing spray so that the bubbles look fuller at the end. Work the spray well into the hair with your hands!

3. for the portion of extra volume the braid now again slightly antoupieren.

4. then it goes to the shaping of the balls: To do this, simply section off a part of the braid about the width of your hand, secure it with another hair tie or scrunchie, pluck it into a bubble shape – and continue in this way until the entire braid is divided into bubbles. It is important that the braid bänders are fixed at the same distance from each other, so that the ponytail looks neat.

Tip: If you want it less voluminous, but neater, work some hair into the braid instead of volume spray and then divide the bubbles. This way, the individual strands do not stick out so much from the hair balls.

How to create a bubble ponytail

“I love looking cute.. but I also love sleeping in.” – said every girl at least once in her life. Is this you?

  1. Home
  2. Hair Extensions
  3. Clip-in Hair Extensions
  • Posted on 02 May, 2021
  • Clip-in Hair Extensions
  • By Anonymous

Today I will be sharing my review on the Luxy Hair Halo set and showing you guys how I put them in! Hope you guys enjoy it! в™Ў

➕Click to Subscribe! ☞ https://goo.gl/xMRazC​

♡Love Sade Mowatt: https://www.lovesademowatt.com/​

♪ TikTok: https://bit.ly/2YaMLRZ​

✎ Blog: https://sademowatt.co/​

LINKS: code – LX-SADE

Music by Fiji Blue – It Takes Two – https://thmatc.co/?l=B35DD4A4

Music by Cassette Tapes – Sugar Rush – https://thmatc.co/?l=21F8D89F

Music by Cassette Tapes – This Year – https://thmatc.co/?l=50413F2A

Luxy, luxy hair, luxy hair extensions, hair extensions, seamless extensions, mocha brown extensions, mocha brown, hair, beauty, lifestyle, hairstyle, clip in hair extensions, hair extensions for beginners, long hair, short hair, hair extensions for dummies, easy hair extensions, clip-in extensions, luxy hair review, thicker hair, before and after, hair, hair how to, hair tutorial, Sade, sade mowatt, lifestyle, Montreal, easy hairstyles

#luxyhair #extensions #hairtutorial #bubbleponytailtutorial

Captions

Welcome back to another video, if you guys are new here, my name is shade and, as you can tell today, i’m going to be doing another luxie hair tutorial and i will be showing you guys how i create the bubble ponytail. I do have the ponytail luxy hair extensions, but for this video i’m actually going to be using my seamless, hair extensions in the color mocha brown. Everything will be listed in the description, so i’m going to show you guys how i create that look, and here we have my luxie hair carrier. I guess you would call it so they are in here right now, i’m going to take them out and show you guys, which wefts i’m going to be using and how i do it right here. I have one of the three clip wefts along with two of the two clip wefts. So these are the pieces that i’m going to be using here’s my luxie brush so just make sure to brush it out and make sure that there are no tangles in there once that is set here. We have them now, i’m going to show you guys how i put them in and create that look. My hair is all brushed through. I also have my luxy hair comb just to separate the sections, and now i’m going to turn around and then just show you guys how i create the look here. We have the three clip weft, i’m going to flip it upside down to clip them in. If i wake up and what, if i would go sorry if i said something something that made you mad wishing that i could call you got my brush to create that very sleek once you have your ponytail set, now we’re going to go ahead with another elastic And start creating the bubbles to create that bubble effect, we’re just going to go ahead and pull it out a little bit from the elastic. Then you just keep repeating until you get to the end, just dance with me right now and voila it’s as simple as that, so there we have it the bubble, ponytail. Of course, you can always go back and fix any of the bubbles that you’re not happy with. I would be able to add in another three clip weft, probably just to make it a little bit more full and not so thin looking, but for the most part it still looks really good. I am happy with it. I think it’s such a cute hairstyle. It’S perfect for the spring and the summer, especially on a really hot day. If you just don’t want your hair sticking to you with the sleek look, i find it gives it that very chic vibe, so you could always dress it up. You could dress it down. It’S just a perfect go-to super simple super, easy hairstyle, so that is it for this little tutorial. Hope you guys enjoyed. If you guys have any questions, feel free to leave them in the comments down below and don’t forget to like comment and subscribe, and i will see you all in my next video bye.

Comments

Luxy Hair: Thank you for sharing this fun and easy bubble ponytail tutorial, Sade! We love this cute, summery style

Allyson Rose: Loved this video cause I have hair extensions!! Now I have the sewn in ones but I never knew how to wear my hair up with my clip ins this was so helpful and it looks so cute I love the bubble ponytail trend

Siera Alexis: the hair extensions look so natural! such a cute hairstyle

Monique Bushee: I love the bubble pony!! These extensions look so good on you!

Toula DeLeon: Love this hairstyleYour extensions are also so pretty!

Alemarie : These extensions look so natural.

Sade Mowatt: Thank you so much for watching

COIFFURE CREATOR//PRODUCT PREACHER

This style isn’t going anywhere anytime soon…

Bubble braids are such a statement for me now, as much as they where when I was a kid. I remember my mum creating a look not too dissimilar from this one (it was probably pigtails or ponytail) but instead of clear elastics it would be hair ties or bobbles in my school colours… or sparkly ones if it was the school disco of course.

Basically this style holds a place in my heart, and I’m so happy that it appears, along with a few other nostalgic styles, to be trending again this year… how fun!

Whilst creating a bubble braid is relatively easy… it’s a simple case of create a ponytail, place a hair tie underneath with a 1cm gap, pull to create bubble shape and repeat… see how easy is that?!

I thought I would run through some key products and tools I use…

Texturising spray is a must. This adds grit as well as texture to the style, which is important as this will create a good foundation for the braid, meaning it will hold throughout the day too.

Hairspray. I always opt for a light-medium hold hairspray, something that has movement and flexibility still, but also seals the style into place .

Serum. Whilst texture and grit is important as a good base, we do want the bubble to be as smooth and high shine as possible. That’s where a serum comes in… I always add this after creating the style, but before hairspray.

Pintail comb. For creating smooth, neat and clean sections.

Hair ties. Snag free elastics are a must. I get mine from Primark, which makes them really inexpensive. They just slide out of the hair easily and effortlessly.

Hair today, gone tomorrow! Check out the latest chat, hair and beauty trends at our Blog.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to style and care for your hair type

How to create a bubble ponytail

The Mid-Wedding Haircut

How to create a bubble ponytail

CLOUD NINE – We Care for All Hair

Free Express Shipping**

Pay Later With Afterpay

Three Year Warranty

Most Satisfied Customers 2020 – Canstar Blue Award winner Shop Now

International

Australia

  • Stocking Fillers
  • All
  • Straighteners
  • Curlers
  • Hairdryers
  • The Cordless Iron Pro
  • Accessories
  • Deals
  • Students

Products +

  • The Evergreen Collection
  • The Premium Collection
  • Product Registration
  • Product Manuals
  • Product FAQs
  • Product Care & Security
  • Product Warranty

Links +

  • Home
  • About Us
  • Be Fiercely You
  • Hairstyles
  • Blog
  • Sustainability
  • Affiliates
  • Recycling Service
  • Careers
  • Compare Straighteners
  • Compare Wands
  • Contact Us
  • Delivery
  • Payments
  • Klarna
  • FAQs
  • Klarna FAQs
  • Returns
  • Afterpay

Social

  • Instagram
  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • YouTube

Australia

Social

  • Instagram
  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • YouTube
  • Terms & Conditions|
  • Privacy Policy|
  • Terms and Conditions of Sale

©2021 CLOUD NINE ANZ Pty Ltd, All rights reserved. ABN: 65 640 337 015. Balgowlah, New South Wales 2093, Australia

* Offer available with purchase of electrical styling tools. Excludes The Micro Iron.
** Free Express Shipping is not available in Western Australia and North Territories.

  • Home
  • News
    • Latest News
    • Clovis Toons
    • Regional
    • Regional
    • Environment
    • Health
    • International
  • Business
    • Social Love
  • Sport
  • Entertainment
  • Lifestyle
    • Page 2
    • Food
    • Fashion
  • All Woman
  • Webinars
  • Classifieds
    • Employment
    • Property
    • Motor Vehicles
    • Place an Ad
  • More
    • Jobs & Careers
    • Study Centre
    • Jnr Study Centre
    • Letters
    • Columns
    • Editorial
    • Supplements
  • HOME
  • NEWS
  • BUSINESS
  • SPORT
  • LIFESTYLE
  • ALL WOMAN
  • REGIONAL NEWS
  • ENTERTAINMENT
  • ENVIRONMENT
  • HEALTH
  • AUTO
  • OLYMPICS
  • Editorial
  • Columns
  • Career
  • Food
  • Letters
  • Clovis Toons
  • Page2
  • Weather
  • Supplements
  • Football
  • Study Centre
  • Jnr Study Centre
  • RSS Feeds
  • Contact Us
  • Feedback
  • Privacy Policy
  • Change Consent
  • Site Map
  • Terms and Conditions
  • Editoral Code of Conduct
  • Advertising

The best TikTok hair trends are the ones that are easy to recreate, and the platform’s obsession with bubble ponytails fits the bill. True, the bubble ponytail has been around for a while. As a matter of fact, it was a huge 90s trend, but lately, the folks on #hairtok seem to have rediscovered the style.

Equal parts flirty and chic, the bubble ponytail offers a new twist on an old classic that’s a little more fun. It’s been a mainstay on the red carpet for years. Bollywood actress Priyanka Chopra brought the sleek bubble ponytail to the 2021 BAFTA Awards in London. If you’re a fan of the American sitcom Grown-ish you would have spotted American starlet Yara Shahidi in a few bubble ponytails of her own.

The fun look is arguably one of the biggest hair trends of 2021. So if you’re looking for a cute go-to that’s easy yet impactful, this one’s for you. We got some expert tips on how to create the style from House of Neahlis principal Lisa McIntosh. Plus a list of the Zimii Essentials and Zimii Styles products she used.

STEPS

#1 Prep Your Strands

Before we get into styling, it’s important to prep your strands with a good wash. Wash hair with the Moisture Recovery Detangling Shampoo and condition with the Moisture Recovery Conditioner.

#2 Smooth Your Locks

Next, you’ll want to follow one more preparation protocol: Ridding hair of kinks and frizz. Apply a hair serum, then brush for a smooth, sleek finish.

Gather strands into a high ponytail, ensuring there are no bumps, knots, or tangles. Then secure with an elastic band. Next, hide the elastics with a skinny braid. Take a small section from underneath the ponytail, braid it, and then just wrap it around the base of the ponytail, and secure it with a couple of pins.

#4. Create Your Bubbles

One to two inches down the length of your ponytail, depending on how long the hair is, place a hair elastic. Gently tug at the sides of this newly created section to add volume and form a rounded, bubble-like shape. Repeat this process down the length of your ponytail.

Teasing a little bit, add hairspray to the length of the ponytail.

#6 Seal In Your Style

Now that your bubble ponytail is perfect, ensure that it stays that way. To keep everything in place, McIntosh recommends a healthy dose of hairspray. “Sometimes I spray hairspray on my hand to smooth out the little baby hairs and flyaways,” she says.

We all love to do hairstyles, and a beautiful hair style can totally change the entire look. Summer is here, and during this hot season, it is better to keep hair away from the face as opened hair irritates a lot. I am not a hairstyling person because any hairstyle needs time and I am that ‘last minute’ girl who only has 15 minutes to get ready. That’s why I have never tried any hairstyle except normal braid and messy bun. Thanks to Jomol Di, who told me to do some hair tutorial, and this is the first time I am trying to create some hairstyle. I am so happy that, finally, I am taking the advantage of my long hair. If she hadn’t told me, maybe I would have never tried anything new. This is the story of a lazy girl and now, I am going to share a very cute summery hairstyle called ‘Bubble Ponytail’. It is easy to create and gives a very beautiful romantic look, which can be created on all hair lengths. Now, let’s get into the tutorial.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

Step 1:

How to create a bubble ponytail

You need to comb your hair smoothly and detangle them well.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Step 2:

Next, you need to make a normal side ponytail with a black elastic and leave your bangs casually.

Step 3:

Now, simply make a partition on the upper area of your ponytail.

Step 4:

How to create a bubble ponytail

Next, twist down the ponytail through that parted space.

Step 5:

It actually creates a nice knot in that area and you can pull the knot slightly to create a soft look.

Step 6:

To hide that elastic, use a small section of your hair and wrap it around the black elastic, and do this until the end of the hair, and then secure it in that same black elastic.

Step 7:

Now, again add a black elastic below the first one and make sure you maintain a proper distance while creating the ponytail.

Step 8:

Now, to get the bubble look, you have to tug a little at that section as it gives that volume to the hair. Keep tugging until you get fuller bubble look. But if you have layers, then make sure to not tug a lot. You must work slowly to get that perfect even bubbles.

Step 9:

How to create a bubble ponytail

After that, again take a small section of your hair and wrap it around the black elastic to hide it.

Step 10:

Now, continue the steps 7, 8 and 9 until you reach the end of the ponytail.

Step 11:

How to create a bubble ponytail

Once you are done with all the bubbles, then you can slightly tug and loosen them to get a little more volume, and it will give a romantic soft look. I always prefer a messy finish that looks more natural than super-polished look.

Step 12:

Coming to the bangs, as I have long bangs, so I prefer to curl them with the help of my Philips curling iron. I used a medium to small wand to create these soft curls.

Step 13:

How to create a bubble ponytail

Make sure to use a hair setting spray to set everything well.

How to create a bubble ponytail

I hope that you enjoyed this easy and simple hair tutorial which looks super cute. It brings a change to our regular ponytail, and also, you can wear this hairstyle to your summer party. It can also be nice hairstyle for a date. I really had fun creating such look.

How to Make Your Ponytail Look Fuller:

After giving birth to my daughter my hair appears thinner, especially around the hairline. I started trying out hair powders and serums to improve the appearance a few weeks ago. In total, I tried 5 different powders and 3 different serums. By far my favorite was the Nanogen Keratin Hair Fibers. It was an instant difference!

The fibers adhere to your hair and scalp, unlike powder that just sits on the scalp and can look clumpy. I start with a small amount and then work up. The fibers are totally buildable and customizable in coverage. They are my go-to secret for how to make your ponytail look fuller.

I start with one pump of the HAIR GROWTH FACTOR TREATMENT SERUM massaged into my scalp.

Next, I apply the Nanogen Keratin Fibers c/o. I like to sprinkle the fibers into my hair and then rub them in with the bottle. Follow that up by massaging the fibers into the scalp and hair and setting the fibers with the locking spray.

To boost volume into the ponytail I spray a volumizing/texturizing spray into the hair. Then tease my hair a bit to add even more volume.

To get the bubble look I did the same thing with multiple sections of hair. I topped each section with these retro bubble ties from by Jen Atkins.

Loving this how to make your ponytail look fuller feature? Take a look here for more of my beauty + skincare favorites!

We can show you the world… of creating a Princess Jasmine inspired look just in time for Halloween! This step-by-step tutorial using your favorite CHI styling products (including the CHI Lava Hair Dryer and CHI Spin N Curl) will have you feeling like royalty.

How to create a bubble ponytail How to create a bubble ponytail

Get The Look:

Step 1: Prep the hair with CHI 44 Iron Guard.

Step 2: Smooth out the hair using the CHI Lava Hair Dryer with the comb attachment.

Step 3: Taking small sections, curl the hair around the face using the CHI Spin N Curl.

Step 4: Leaving out the curled sections, create a low ponytail with the remaining hair in the back. Secure with CHI Enviro 54 Hairspray and a small band.

Step 5: With the front curled sections, create a 2-strand twist braid. Take a 2-inch section, and split into 2 pieces. Cross the front section over the back piece and twist. Continue this process, working down the hair.

Step 6: Pull 2-strand twist braid to loosen, and create volume. Pin back into the ponytail area. Repeat on the opposite side.

Step 7: On the back area of the ponytail, place a hair cuff accessory at the base.

Step 8: Split the ponytail in half, twist 4 inches downward, and secure with a small band. Pull to loosen, and create a bubble.

Step 9: Add a hair cuff accessory under the ponytail bubble. Repeat two more times.

Step 10: Finish the look with Royal Treatment Rapid Shine, and a add crown accessory.

How to create a bubble ponytail

I’ll start with a disclaimer: I’ve never been a huge fan of Valentine’s Day. It’s just not my thing. With the recent move to Michigan and our wedding coming up, I felt like this year it would be nice to celebrate “us” and appreciate the fact that we are able to live together and be together. We don’t have any plans yet, but I’m hoping they include dinner in our new city (hint hint, James).

This hairstyle is one that is easily completed in less than five minutes and can be dressed up or down. That’s my speed. I love including different hair accessories depending on the season and this ponytail gives the perfect canvas to do so.

The steps are simple and do not require a ton of tools.

How to create a bubble ponytail

1. Brush the major tangles out
2. Put your hair in a low pony using the clear hair elastics. The messier the better. Wrap a section of hair around to cover the elastic, and tuck it into the elastic under the ponytail to hide he tail.

How to create a bubble ponytail

3. Create a section by using a second elastic a few inches down, depending on how long your hair is.
4. Pull the sides of your first section to add more volume and create a “bubble” effect.

How to create a bubble ponytail

5. Repeat to create a second “bubble.” I only added in two this time, but you could do as many as you like.

How to create a bubble ponytail

6. Add in your favorite hair scarf or scrunchie and you’re ready for cocktails.

TIP: The dirtier your hair, the better. I have straight hair and dirty hair is the only way for me to get any type of texture or wave to stay.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Head over to my Instagram account and let me know what your best hair styling trick is!

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

If you’re wondering what style to try with those lockdown lengths, the bubble braid could well be the most stylish way to try a new look.

The easy-to-do hairstyle, as seen on Laura Whitmore this week, requires little skill and looks great, as a bonus it’s chicer than a regular ponytail and it will keep you cool if it gets warmer outside.

Today’s top videos

How to create a bubble ponytail

Laura Whitmore. Pic: Instagram

To try it out all you need is a comb and a couple of elastic hairbands, and you’re ready to go.

For inspiration check out the #bubblebraid hashtag on Instagram where you can find all sorts of styles of the braid from a single plait to double braid styles and plenty more.

To elevate the look for finer hair, spritz a little dry shampoo or volume powder at the roots (even on clean hair), this keeps the crown looking fuller.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Pic: Bubble Braid/Instagram @lydiacaitlinmakeup

To start, you need to create a ponytail. As a rule, a high pony creates a fun bubble braid, midway down the head gives you a more casual braid.

A low pony creates a really chic braid, remember to leave a few strands free at the front to make the look appear more relaxed, whichever ponytail you choose to wear.

Laura Whitmore wore her bubble braid with a centre parting and a pony at the midsection of her head for a recording of Celebrity Juice this week.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Now, take another hairband and tie to the hair two to three inches lower, repeat this process until you get to the end of the hair.

You’re almost finished, now tease out each section along the ponytail creating a bubble braid effect.

We’ve seen the bubble braid all over social media from young girls to women in the 30s, it’s a great style for school to keep the hair tied back and in place, but it is a very chic look done properly.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Another plus is that if you try the dry shampoo trick you should get two, maybe three, days from the look.

If you need to make third-day hair look more matte at the roots sprinkle a little more of the powder on before bed to let it mop up oil and moisture while you sleep.

To maintain the shape of your bubble braid while you sleep pin it up around the head and tease out in the morning, easy!

How to create a bubble ponytail

Braids are perfect for nearly all hair types and textures. We all know the classics like cornrows, French, and fishtail braids. But now a new and totally fresh technique is taking over the internet. A quick Google search results in loads of different bubble braid styles, but the most basic method is fairly simple.

A quick and easy way to get the look is to create a pair of bubble braids that at the top of your pigtails. This method is a great intro to the technique. First, gather some materials to make the process as simple as possible. You’ll need small clear or hair color-matched ties, a rattail comb, and texture cream or hair spray.

To get started, Girl Get Glamorous recommends parting your hair down the center and clip half out of the way, then tease your hair a bit around the crown of your head with the comb. Next, create a pigtail on one side, then wrap hair around the tie and tuck the end of your hair back through. Add your second tie about two or three inches down the shaft of your pigtail to create the first bubble. Fluff the bubble and add some texture cream or hairspray to make sure it maintains its poof level. Repeat on both sides and add as many bubbles as you want. When you’re finished, fully spray your hair to make sure the look holds all day.

How to get the French bubble braid look

How to create a bubble ponytail

If you are looking for a more traditional French braid look, you can opt for a single or double bubble braid down the back or sides of your head. To start a single braid, Camille Styles recommends taking a small section of hair from the front of your head and twist the end of the section. Pin the section back and create a little puff in the untwisted portion. Take another section from underneath the twisted portion and create another twisted poof, then tie the two sections together into a single ponytail. Collect another small section beneath the ponytail and repeat the twist-poof-connect technique. Continue down with this process until you arrive at the bottom of the neck. Once you’ve collected all the hair into a single ponytail, create bubbles down the shaft every couple of inches by simply tying a tie and poofing the hair. Spray with hairspray to hold the style. For a double bubble braid, simply repeat this process on each side of your part.

The effervescent and easy technique is totally fun and customizable, so master the basics and then branch out and create your own unique bubble look.

Finding a chic alternative to the classic ponytail might be easier than you think! We’ve got a new look that is even simpler to style than the braid or the twisted ponytail…the bubble ponytail.

The bubble ponytail. Recently spotted on the Valentino runway show, all you need to create the bubble ponytail is long hair and a few elastic hair ties. The photo above perfectly demonstrates the concept behind this simple hairstyle which instantly gives the wearer a sophisticated edge. To nail this look, make your spacing equal and precise.

Who can wear the trend? Anybody who wants a quick-to-create hairstyle that incorporates their super-long lengths. If you weren’t born with Rapunzel-worthy hair (sigh), don’t worry. You can get the same effect by clipping in extensions at home. Skip the salon versions as this will give you more versatility and choice over when and where you wear your longer lengths.

Get the catwalk look. Don’t be put off with how complicated this catwalk hairstyle may seem at first glance! The bubble ponytail couldn’t be simpler, meaning even hairstyling novices can give this one a go! On the runway, models wore their locks in a centre parting with a low ponytail, however you can change the positioning of yours to the top of your head if you prefer. The key part to this look is to tie your ponytail into place, then repeatedly tie further elastics every 3cm. Ideally, you should have around 5 or 6 hair elastics when complete. Spray all over with hairspray to give your style staying-power.

© Getty Images © Jean Louis David

Related topics

How to create a bubble ponytail

The winter months generally bring with them more polished and refined hairstyles. Unlike the looks we often associate with summer, such as loose waves, winter hair often has a sleeker appeal and.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

From up-dos to blow-dry styling, find out which hairstyles are in store for you next season as we take a closer look at 4 styles that you simply have to try from September onwards! Messy-styled.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

The ponytail is a look that never dates. For winter 2014 the ponytail is being worn high up top and sleeked back to perfection, meaning frizzy flyaways are a big no-no! So, how can you tame these.

How to create a bubble ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

Elegant and sophisticated looks were big news on the Valentino Haute Couture runway this season. The graceful, clean lines worn by models were complimented beautifully by simple, yet daring.

This article inspired you? Take action and find your salon Take action and find your salon

New ponytail hairstyles to try & how to get them

From the article : New ponytail hairstyles to try & how to get them

Anyone who has ever had long hair knows the beauty of the ponytail whether you love it for style or simply because it allows you to pull your hair back away from your face and neck. High or low, sleek or full of texture, the ponytail is a staple for long-haired women across the globe, from the red carpet to the laundromat.

Cast your eye over the gallery above for a serious injection of chic new ponytail inspiration.

New ways to style a low pony

The low pony is an easy solution that can add a classy dimension to any outfit. This look works best with longer hair and can be styled messy or sleek, depending on what kind of vibe you want to create. For a messy look, flip your head over and brush your hair toward the floor to create added lift and volume. Gather your hair into a loose ponytail and tie it just above the nape of your neck. You can leave some strands out to frame your face if you don’t have bangs. This will give everything a more romantic feel.

Smoother low ponytails work really well when styled totally straight (heat protection spray and flat irons at the ready!) and a center part can help sharpen things up even more.

Another truly chic option is to wear a low ponytail with a French twist hairstyle. This involves combing your hair to one side and clipping into place before smoothing hair on the opposite side and rolling it back over itself. When doing this, you should leave a medium-sized section of hair loose at the nape of your neck to create a low pony with when you’re done.

Add detail to any pony

For a classic, volumized style, tease your hair before securing it and apply a generous amount of hairspray to hold everything in place. Add a glamorous touch by taking a large strand from the pony and wrapping it around the base to hide the hair elastic. Secure it in place with a bobby pin underneath and you’re good to go.

Alternatively, you could go for a braided or bubble pony. After pulling hair back into the pony, braid it all the way down and fasten with a hair elastic. For the bubble effect, tie extra elastics at regular intervals and then pull hair apart to create the “bubbles.”

After all that, ponytails need never seem overly simple again! Unless you want them to, that is.

Chromat celebrated 10 years of fashion fun for its NYFW S/S 2020 presentation on Saturday (Sept. 7). Known for her bold color combinations and inclusive sizing, designer Becca McCharen-Tran showed remixed versions from some of the line’s most popular looks. The models stomped the runway in vibrant asymmetrical dress and skirt combos, caged corsets and skirts, swimwear and other sporty looks.

Of course with bold fashion, comes bold hair moments — and TRESemmé lead hairstylist Justine Marjan did not disappoint. We saw loads of texture, sleek ponytails, and free-flowing tresses. Our fave hair looks of the day, however, were the parted and layered bubble ponytails.

“This look is for a sporty, fun and confident woman who isn’t afraid to play with her style and express her creative flair,” said Justine.

The look was great for both textured and straight hairstyles — and, luckily, Justine shared how to recreate the fire look at home. The key to this slay, she said is in the parting, as some models rocked mohawked versions, while others rocked double-sided versions.

For the mohawked look, starting on freshly washed, conditioned and dried hair, gather a triangular section of hair at the front hairline. Spray on TRESemmé Compressed Micro Mist Hair Spray Hold Level 4 Extend at the roots to create a strong, holding foundation.

Then brush hair into a ponytail. For added control and/or sleekness, use a toothbrush or soft boar brush to shape and smooth edges.

Once the ponytail is secure, tease out the roots above the ponytail, spraying on TRESemmé Between Washes Volumizing Dry Shampoo ($5.49) massage throughout hair for added volume.

Next, brush into a loose bubble-like shape and clip the section out of the way in order to create another triangular pony beneath the first following the similar steps from above.

While Justine and her team looped the first ponytail into the second while they were wrapping, we suggest adding a second elastic to connect the two ponytails. This will give you some added control and ability to tease and shape the top ponytail.

Repeat the ponytail parting and looping process throughout the length of the hair, using French pins and bobby pins to shape the bubbles throughout.

To achieve, the double-sided ponytails, simply start by parting the hair down the middle and creating ponytails on each side, following the above instructions.

Once finished, spray the Micro Mist onto a toothbrush to smooth flyaways on the sides of the head for hair outside of the bubbles.

How To Achieve The Natural Afro Ponytail Look

Afro ponytails are making its comeback and they’re more loved than ever, a once trending hairstyle finding its way back to relevancy, many “naturalists” (women boasting the natural growth of their hair) have put their own unique touch on the classic style.

How to create a bubble ponytail

This trend keeps popping up on the natural hair circuit, especially the bubble pony version. Though the style itself is not new, people on Instagram have been showing their unique versions of the beloved hairstyle. To achieve this look, one must find the right products and patience, in this post, we have provided you with a step-by-step guide on how to achieve the natural afro ponytail look, read on to find out more.

Why Are Afro Ponytails So Popular?

This hairstyle has been modernized using texture hair to let it pop and bring it to a new level of visual interest. It is a fun protective style that is perfect all throughout the different seasons.

More and more people will make their hair to Afro Ponytails. This elegant updo is perfect for all occasions. This hairstyle is making its constant comebacks because every afro ponytail style is a statement that stands out anywhere.

Items Need To Create The Look

The items needed for recreating the afro ponytail vary from each person, but here are the common materials needed in creating the look:

•A Wide-tooth Comb – For detangling excess lumps of hair.

•Tail Comb – Used for styling the actual ponytail.

•Natural extensions – Curl and Wave extension options catered to the customer’s specific needs available at lavividhair.com. You can also send them hair samples for a fully personalized curl pattern just for you!

•Hair gel – To straighten and harden your edges.

•Water – For detangling.

•Accessories – Adding accessories to the look depends on you.

How To Create The Natural Afro Ponytail Look

Here we featured two processes in achieving the trendy look.

Susy Oludele is a popular and renowned hairstylist and influencer here is the process of creating her version of the afro ponytail (bubble pony version).

1. Firstly, section off your hair into the number of ponytails to your liking.

2. Add hair gel to the mini section.

3. Place your hair in a rubber band to slick down the mini section.

4. Grab your afro hair extensions and lay it flat against your ponytail.

5. Secure the hair (in the middle) with a rubber band.

6. Once attached and secured, blend your hair with the extensions and scope out the first section of your afro ponytail and tie with a rubber band and continue till your each the end.

Here is another process of recreating the trendy style:

1. Apply water to dampen and soften your hair for easier styling.

2. Detangle any loose hair strands with your hands.

3. Using a wide-toothed comb, continue to detangle excess lumps in your hair.

4. Use the tail comb to style your ponytail to your desired look.

5. Smoothen your hair using hair gel and continue to brush, creating a ponytail.

6. Create your bun accordingly with your natural extensions and continue until reaching the end.

How To Put On A Drawstring Ponytail?

If you are looking for a quick fix of recreating the style, “afro puffs” drawstring ponytails are also an option, to recreate this look, make sure your natural hair is detangled and moisturized.

Here is how you put on a drawstring ponytail:

1. Gather some of your hair in a small and secure bun.

2. Most afro puff ponytails have two small combs to easily attach it to your natural hair and a string to secure the ponytail into your natural bun.

3. Attach the drawstring ponytail and secure it to your bun to avoid it being easily removed.

This is the easiest and fastest way to achieve that natural afro ponytail look and it is perfect for any occasion.

Tips On Making Your Ponytail Extensions Look Natural

•When choosing extensions or a wig to dramatically enhance your afro ponytail’s effect, make sure to choose the color that is closest to your natural hair color. Wigs at LaVivid are made to impress and they cater to your specific needs.

•Be sure to fluff your ponytails out to increase its volume and density, giving you a more natural look.

•Brushing is also recommended to make your extensions or wig pop out more.

Looking for a pretty holiday ponytail? It’s that time of the year again where we start getting ready for parties, family gatherings, and everything in between. It doesn’t matter if you’re preparing for an evening out with your loved ones or a day at the office – ponytails are always a good idea!

Pretty Holiday Ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

With holiday parties and holiday festivities, you need to make sure you have a holiday look that will dazzle. It’s not just about having that perfect outfit, you want to dress it up with some holiday hairstyles, too. Whether you’re rocking a high ponytail or low ponytail, the holiday season is the time to experiment with some really cool and different hairstyles.

This pretty holiday ponytail hairstyle is perfect for any occasion, no matter what time of year it may be. I love this pretty holiday ponytail hairstyle because it’s a classic hairstyle, but it’s also a great one when you’re looking for festive hairstyles, too. You’re going to need medium or long hair length to make this one work, but I promise to share others that don’t require long hair. You can make this work, too if you have curly hair.

This pretty holiday ponytail is a showstopper and a great option when you’re looking for that perfect go-to hairstyle. I love this hairstyle because there are lots of hairstyles (like a dutch braid, french braid or a top knot) that can be tough for people to do on their own, but this one is an easy one. This one requires very simple steps and you don’t need to have a ton of hair accessories to make it work.

How To Do a Holiday Ponytail

How to create a bubble ponytail

It really is the most wonderful time of the year to do this beautiful holiday hairstyle. I love this one because you’re basically starting with a sleek pony, but amping it up to make it POP. The best part is that it’s a quick way to change it up. It’s also an awesome way to UP your beauty game. This is essentially a bubble ponytail that you will be creating with some red ribbons for that holiday classic style.

All you need for this hairstyle is:

    1. clear elastics(if you don’t have clear any hair elastic will do)
    2. bobby pins

  1. Take your own hair and pop it up into a ponytail. Don’t worry about making a center part or any kind of part, just take a moment to create a ponytail. You can add some shine serum in to make it really pop, too!
  2. Then add in elastics down the section of hair in the ponytail. My advice is to pop them about 2 to 3 inches down the ponytail. Since Victoria’s hair is on the longer side, I can add 3, but if your hair is longer… add more!
  3. Slowly go through each section and bubble them out. The utmost importance here is to make sure you don’t pull too tightly. You don’t want them to come undone. Make sure they look like little bubbles or circles.
  4. Then for that “happy holidays” look, you’re going to add the red ribbons. I bought these ribbons at Michael’s, but you can buy them anywhere you can find ribbon. Last year I bought a ton of ribbon and I’m super excited to use it this year.
  5. You can adjust and tweak however you want after the ribbons are in. This will add to the perfect holiday ensemble. I just love this Easy Christmas Hairstyle.

If you wanted to do a quick and easy holiday hairstyle with only half up, it’s just a quick fix. Take the easy half and just do a quick bubble braid in the hair. You can allow the rest of your hair to be done with relaxed strands. Don’t worry about making it in the ponytail if you don’t want to, that’s the thing about hair… you can ALWAYS play with it to make it work for yourself. It’s all about creating the right hairstyles for you.

How to create a bubble ponytail

If you’re looking for a red carpet look, this pretty holiday ponytail will do the trick! Also, feel free to do this hairstyle down the side of your head, you know the right place to put your hairstyle, so make it work exactly how you want it, too. The holidays are a perfect time to have some fun with your hair. Ditch the messy bun on Christmas Eve for this perfectly pretty holiday ponytail.

As POPSUGAR editors, we independently select and write about stuff we love and think you’ll like too. If you buy a product we have recommended, we may receive affiliate commission, which in turn supports our work.

The bubble ponytail is the kind of hairstyle Carrie Bradshaw would wear in Sex and the City. It is equal parts flirty and chic but offers a new twist on an old classic that’s a little more fun. It also happens to be a big hairstyle trend for 2021, so if you’re looking for a cute go-to that’s easy yet impactful, this one’s for you.

After all, we all want to be able to look cute, but without the need to heat style, spend hours sitting in front of a mirror, or even wash our hair, really. It’s a tall order, but the bubble ponytail fits the bill. You’ve probably seen this chic updo all over Instagram and TikTok but what you may not realise is just how easy it is to recreate at home.

To start, gather your hair into a normal high ponytail at the middle or crown of your head and secure it in place with not one, but two ponytail elastics. “I use two because the first elastic gets stretched out while securing the ponytail, so the second elastic is extra support and gives you more lift from the head, which you want for this kind of ponytail,” Mark Townsend, Dove celebrity hairstylist, told POPSUGAR. “You don’t want a droopy bubble ponytail, trust me.” His favourite hair ties for this are Blax Clear Hair Elastics (£8) or Scunci Effortless Beauty Large No-Damage Elastics (£10).

Next, grab your dry shampoo (the secret to every good updo, to be honest) to add fullness and texture without making hair stiff. “Liberally spray the ponytail with dry Shampoo and give the hair at the base of the ponytail a little teasing with a comb or brush to widen the ponytail and add volume,” said Townsend. After you tease, brush the rest of your ponytail out so it’s smooth and knot-free.

Now it’s time to create your first “bubble” by securing a new elastic a few inches down from the base of the ponytail. “Pull the hair between the elastics apart a little to stretch out the hair,” said Townsend. Repeat this until you reach the end of your ponytail and leave about two or three inches of hair free at the bottom.

To finish off the look, give your whole head a light spritz of hairspray and smooth down flyaways with either a natural bristle toothbrush or clean makeup spoolie. “Fun tip: you can use different colour elastics for a pop of colour in the ponytail or to match your outfit of the day or your face mask.”

Keep scrolling for more bubble ponytail inspiration.

How to create a bubble ponytail

Bubble braids are the latest hair trend taking over the streets and social media alike. Fun, stylish and easy to do, they’re popularity is only going to continue to grow. Bubble braids are extremely versatile, allowing you to create countless trendy hairstyles. Significantly easier to do than braids, but with the same final vibe, bubble braids are super on trend and a must-know for every gal. Check out 9 bubble braid hairstyles for all hair lengths.

What Are Bubble Braids?

Bubble braids are similar to normal braids, but they’re quicker and easy to do. They consist of bunches of hair made into “bubbles” and can be worn in pigtails, ponytails, and beyond. Some are easy to create and some are more complicated, but with a bit of practice, you’ll be able to do them in no time. Bubble braids are great because there’s really no limit to what you can do with them. They’re super fun and stylish and are incredibly on trend. They’re the new Dutch/boxer/French braid, and you can dress them up or down depending on your mood and the occasion.

3 Tips and Essentials for Gorgeous Bubble Braids

1. Create The Bubble Before Adding The Next Band
While some tutorials will tell you to place all the hair elastics in your hair and then pull out the “bubbles”, you’ll get a better result if you pull out the bubble before adding the next band. As you tie each section, use your fingertips to gently spread the hair apart creating a soft, round bubble, then go on to the next section.

2. Nail The Spacing
Play around with spacing until you find the right sized bubble for you. For longer hair, leave about two inches between each elastic, and if your hair is shorter, place them closer together. Of course, if you have longer hair and want more bubbles, you can leave less in between the elastics – it’s all up to you and what you prefer!

3. Add Some Grit
To ensure your bubbles stay put, add some grit with a holding product to help shield against frizz and wind and keep your hairstyle in place for hours on end. A finishing spray or dry shampoo will prep your hair and make it last.

3 Bubble Braid Hairstyles for Short Hair

Bubble Braid Tutorial on Short Hair | Sophie Hannah

Follow this easy step by step tutorial to create bubble braids on short hair. It’s a super simple style to create and very wearable all year round. You can jazz them up with different coloured hair bands and play around with them to make them your own! You’ll need small hair bands and a coconut oil hair cream for frizz and flyaways for this half up half down bubble braid look.

Super Easy Gym/Workout Hairstyle for Short Hair | Milabu

This bubble braid hairstyle is super cute and perfect if you’re hitting the gym! It will keep your hair out of your face and ensure you’re looking stylish while you’re doing weights or on the treadmill. This faux braid boxer hairstyle is easy and fast to do and all you need is a hair clip and clear hair elastics!

How To Do Bubble Braids | Easy Hairstyle | Vianney Moda

This bubble braid hairstyle gives off more of a 90s vibe and is super cute for short hair. You’ll need a brush, a rat tail comb to part your hair and little clear elastics. She provides great tips for how to create the small bubble braids and the end result is just fab!

3 Bubble Braid Hairstyles for Medium Hair

Bubble braids are often referred to as faux braids because they give you a similar look with less effort. These faux braid french pigtails are amazing for those with fine hair that have trouble getting their braids to look bulky and thick. Follow her steps as she shows you exactly how to get the look. You’ll need clear hair elastics, an alligator clip and a scrunchie to separate your hair.

Bubble Braids Tutorial (2 Different Ways) | Mae Sitler

These two bubble braid hairstyles are chic and stylish. One is simple and the other is a little more advanced, but with practice and patience, both will be a piece of cake. As well as small hair elastics, she also uses an alligator clip, comb and dry shampoo powder. This is particularly helpful if you have super fine, straight hair.

Bubble Braid Tutorial | Add Volume and Thickness To Your Hair With This Cute Hairstyles | Effortless Beauty

This bubble braid look has a boho vibe and it is seriously stunning. This everyday look will add volume and texture to your hair, while still keeping it out of your face. Learn how to do this bubble braid hairstyle in minutes, using products like dry shampoo, texture spray and the 1-inch Babyliss Pro Curling Iron.

3 Bubble Braid Hairstyles for Long Hair

How To Do: Bubble Braids! Super Simple and Easy Hair Tutorial | Megan Ingraham

If you have long hair, these pigtail bubble braids will look absolutely gorgeous on you. She begins by putting some hair serum in her hair to help manage flyaways and uses a comb to make her hair straight in the back. You’ll also need small hair elastics and a scrunchie to help separate your hair. While this hairstyle can take time to get the hang of, once you do you’ll want to do it all the time!

Bubble Pigtails Hair Tutorial | Trendy Hair Ideas | Sosi & Den

These baby bubble pigtails are super fun and trendy! Pigtails and bubble braids are two of the biggest hair trends right now, so combining them in one look is a surefire way to look amazing. You’ll need a rat tail comb to create sleek parts and of course small elastics for the bubbles! She recommends pulling out the bubbles before putting the next band in for a stunning end result.

4 Easy Bubble Hairstyles | Missy Sue

With this tutorial, you get not one, not two, but four bubble braid hairstyles! Each one just as stunning as the last, and you’ll learn how to do a range of ponytail and half up bubble braids. She uses products like the topsy tail hair tool, a hair brush, and a medium-hold hairspray that won’t make your hair crunchy.

Bubble braid hairstyles are the new it hairstyle to know. Try out these products and tutorials to get the look yourself!

This post contains affiliate links.

Did you love these bubble braid hairstyles? We’d love it if you shared this post on Pinterest!

How to create a bubble ponytail

Looking for more quick and stylish hairstyles? Make sure to follow our Beauty Board on Pinterest!

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

How to Eat Beavertails?

Beavertails are easy to eat, thanks to the fact that their shape makes them easy to hold. As such, the answer to how to eat beavertails is simply to eat them by hand! They are generally topped with a variety of different sweet toppings before being served; these toppings could include whipped cream, bananas, or just sugar—the choice is yours!

Beavertails Recipe: How to Make Beavertails

Making beavertails is not that difficult, and so if you want to try these unique treats, why not give it a try? Our beavertails recipe will allow you to make your own variant on this much loved Canadian dish!

Beavertails Recipe with a Bread Maker

  1. Mix all of the ingredients in your bread maker and set the machine to a standard dough cycle.
  2. Once the dough cycle has finished, knead the dough in a little sprinkled flour until it forms a ball that is firm and holds its shape.

How to Make Beavertails Without a Bread Maker

  1. Start by mixing together the dry ingredients—most of the flour, salt, and sugar.
  2. Then, incorporate the wet ingredients: the milk, vanilla extract, egg, and oil.
  3. Turn out the dough onto a surface covered with the remaining flour and knead the dough until it cannot take up any more flour, when the dough forms a ball that is firm and holds its shape.

Cooking the Dough

  1. Separate the dough into even-sized balls and then stretch to the desired shape.
  2. Carefully lower the dough into a deep fryer with oil at 375 degrees Fahrenheit.
  3. Fry for approximately 1 or two minutes, until the beavertail is golden.

Finishing Your recipe

To finish, top the beavertails with your chosen toppings and enjoy! Beavertails are best served warm, but can also be enjoyed cold as well, depending on when you made them.

Wrap yourself in the warm embrace of some Canadian comfort food with a home version of a BeaverTails® pastry—the recipe’s straight from the source

How to make beavertails

As we all continue social distancing and staying home as often as possible, there are two things we can be sure of: The desire for comfort foods at an all-time high, and you’ve probably been baking more bread than you can eat. Until we can get out and about to enjoy all of our favourite spots, why not take some of that bread dough you’ve got and wrap yourself in the warm embrace of freshly made BeaverTails® pastry?

A popular pastry in Canada and abroad, BeaverTails® are hand-stretched, fried pastries that are served piping hot with a range of toppings, from a classic Killaloe Sunrise with cinnamon, sugar and a slice of lemon to chocolate spreads or vanilla icing and breakfast cereals.

BeaverTails® started in Killaloe, Ontario in 1978 and now operates 150 locations in six countries: Canada, the United States, Mexico, the United Arab Emirates, France and Japan.

Here’s how you can make a home version with a recipe coming straight from the company’s own Research and Development chef Audrey Laferrière, using either the dough from bread you make at home or using pre-made pizza or bread dough from the store.

These are best devoured warm. Enjoy at home and stay safe, eh!

Here’s what you’ll need:

  • Bread or pizza dough, homemade or store-bought
  • A deep, heavy-bottom pot or fryer
  • Vegetable oil
  • Salted butter for brushing
  • Toppings (see below the recipe)

Instructions:

  1. Put on a plaid shirt and wash your hands!
  2. Divide and shape your dough into the size of hockey pucks (that’s right, plural! You’re going to want to eat more than one and your self-isolation buddies will definitely want some too!). Three to six should do the trick.
  3. Fold each puck in half, roll into a ball, cover loosely and proof at room temperature for 30 minutes.
  4. When your pucks have proofed, preheat vegetable oil in a fryer (or deep heavy bottom pot) to 370°F.
  5. Similar to stretching pizza dough, start stretching the outside of the puck, working your way around the edge. Then gently pull and stretch until the puck is the shape and size of a beaver’s tail.
  6. Slowly place the dough in the hot oil, releasing it away from you.
  7. Flip often using tongs until lightly golden brown.
  8. Take it out and put it onto a plate lined with a paper towel.
  9. Repeat steps 3-6 for remaining pucks.
  10. Dress it up! Melt salted butter and brush it onto the fried pastries

Use tasty toppings that you have in your fridge and cupboard to make a truly custom BeaverTails-inspired pastry, or follow these suggestions for some of our crave-worthy favourites!

The “Killaloe Sunrise”

  1. Mix equal parts cinnamon and sugar in a wide shallow dish
  2. Dredge the buttered pastry in the cinnamon sugar mix
  3. Squeeze on juice from a lemon wedge
  1. Brush on warm chocolate hazelnut spread
  2. Top with 8 banana slices
  3. Sprinkle on icing sugar
  1. Brush on warm chocolate hazelnut spread
  2. Sprinkle some Reese’s pieces candy
  3. Drizzle warm peanut butter

Published on March 19, 2017 – Updated on March 8, 2022 by Chef Rodney – 35 Comments – This post may contain affiliate links.

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

Cinnamon Sugar Beaver Tails? What the heck is that and what is it doing on my Food blog? Well because Canadian Beaver Tails are a popular pastry (basically fried dough coated in cinnamon sugar) from my birthplace of Ottawa, Canada (home of the NHL Hockey Team the Ottawa Senators). They are so good that I think everyone needs to try a beaver tail once in their lifetime.

How to make beavertails

Growing up in Ottawa, I spent many hours skating on the world’s longest skating rink, the Rideau Canal. They used to have these little huts on the world’s longest outdoor skating rink that sold coffee, hot apple cider, and beaver tails!

What I remember from my younger days is that beavertails were a yummy pastry that you could get with different toppings like jam, sugar and cinnamon or garlic and cheese. Apparently, it’s now big business. But why bother when you can make your own at home with simple ingredients?

When I started writing my cookbook and launching this food blog, I was on a mission to find an authentic Beaver Tail recipe. After experimenting with different techniques, this is the recipe that I believe is the closest to the beavertails I had 40 yrs ago. So whether you spell it beaver tails or beavertails, this is one pastry recipe you will not want to miss!

💭 Ingredient Substitution

I often used Canola Oil when I am deep frying but you can use whatever type of oil you have on hand as long as it has a neutral flavor. Vegetable Oil is fine as well as Peanut Oil except the latter is usually more expensive. I like to buy my oil in bulk at Costco.

How to make beavertails

By the way, have you tried one of the most popular recipes on this blog yet? Then you must try my Cinnamon Donut Bread recipe. Similar to this beaver tail recipe in that they are both cinnamon sugar-coated.

Looking for another delicious pastry dessert you can make in the comfort of your own kitchen? Then check out my Awesome Baklava recipe.

While you are here I suggest you check out all my other delicious Canadian Recipes. Some of the recipes are new while others are well over 50 years old but they all originated in Canada.

For more great recipes like this one, I suggest you check these recipes out:

📋 What Ingredients do I need

You will need the following ingredients for this Cinnamon Sugar Beaver Tails recipe (see recipe card for quantities): Active Yeast, White Sugar, Milk, White Sugar, Salt, Vanilla Extract, Eggs, Canola Oil, All Purpose Flour, Corn Oil, White Sugar and Ground Cinnamon.

🥣 How to Make Cinnamon Sugar Beaver Tails

MAKE THE DOUGH
In a large bowl, mix the yeast, warm water, and ¼ teaspoon of sugar. Allow the water mixture to stand for a couple of minutes to allow the yeast to swell and dissolve. Depending on various factors (temperature, humidity, etc.) this could take as long as 10 minutes.
Add the ⅓ Cup of sugar, milk, vanilla, eggs, oil, salt, and most of the flour to the yeast mixture. Knead for 5 to 8 minutes using a dough hook, adding flour as needed to form a firm smooth, elastic dough.
Place dough in a lightly greased bowl. Place a warm towel on top of the bowl and “seal”. If you are not going to use the dough right away, you can refrigerate the dough at this point. Let rise for about 30 to 40 minutes.
Gently deflate the dough. (If the dough is coming out of the fridge, allow to warm up for about 40 minutes before proceeding).

MAKE THE BEAVER TAILS
Pinch off a golf ball-sized piece of dough. Roll out onto a floured surface into an oval and let rest, covered with a tea towel, while you are preparing the remaining dough.
Heat about 4 inches of corn oil in the fryer (or whatever you usually use for frying). The temperature of the oil should be about 385 degrees.
Stretch the ovals into a tail shape, like a beavers tail, thinning them out and enlarging them as you do. Add the dough pieces to the hot oil one at a time.
Turn the beaver tail once to fry until both sides are a deep brown. Lift the beaver tails out with tongs and drain on paper towels.
Fill a large bowl with a few cups of white sugar and cinnamon. Toss the beaver tails in the sugar mixture, coating both sides and then shake off the excess.

These fried pastry pockets are named after their resemblance to a beaver tail! They are usually sweet and come with maple syrup or powdered sugar, but are sometimes savory. This is probably the most Canadian dessert ever. There is a whole chain that originated in Killaloe, ON called BeaverTails, where that’s all they sell!

Makes 8

How to Make Beaver Tails:

  1. Mix ½ cup sugar + 1 tsp cinnamon, for dusting and set aside in a large bowl.
  2. In a large bowl, mix the yeast, warm water and ¼ teaspoon of sugar. Allow to stand a couple of minutes to allow yeast to swell and dissolve.
  3. Add sugar, milk, vanilla, eggs, oil, salt, and most of the flour to the yeast mixture. Knead for 5 to 8 minutes using a dough hook, adding flour as needed to form a firm smooth, elastic dough.
  4. Place dough in a lightly greased bowl and cover. Place in a warm spot and let rise for 1 hour.
  5. Pinch off a golf ball sized piece of dough. Roll out onto a floured surface into an oval and let rest, covered with a tea towel, while you are preparing the remaining dough.
  6. Heat the oil in a deep fryer to 375F.
  7. Add the dough pieces to the hot oil one at a time. Turn the beaver tail once to fry until both sides are deep brown. Lift the beaver tails out with tongs and drain on paper towels. While warm, toss the beaver tails in the sugar mixture, coating both sides and then shake off the excess.
    Comment
  • Chef’s Pencil Staff

Chef’s Pencil Staff

Our editorial team is responsible for the research, creation, and publishing of in-house studies, original reports and articles on food trends, industry news and guides.

How to make beavertails

  • Print
  • One Comment
  • write a review

Print Options

Description

Beaver tails are fried pieces of dough that are covered with cinnamon sugar, sugar and lemon juice, nutella, or chocolate and strawberries. They originate in Canada and are only found in select cities nation wide. Lucky for you, I’m posting a nearly perfect replica! Reminds me of home! Enjoy!

Ingredients

  • ¼ cups Hot Tap Water
  • ¼ cups Granulated Sugar, Divided
  • ¼ ounces, weight Quick Rise Yeast (1 Envelope)
  • ¼ cups Milk
  • 3 Tablespoons Butter
  • 1 whole Egg
  • 1 teaspoon Salt
  • 2-¼ cups All-purpose Flour
  • Oil, For Fryer
  • Cinnamon Sugar Or Topping Of Your Choice

Preparation

1. In a large bowl pour in hot water and 1 teaspoon of the measured sugar. Sprinkle yeast over top and stir. Set aside to proof, about 5 minutes.
2. Meanwhile, in microwave safe bowl, heat milk, butter and remaining sugar just long enough to melt butter and dissolve sugar. Stir to cool–you want it to be a little warmer than room temperature, but not so hot it will kill the yeast.
3. Pour butter liquid into yeast mixture and stir. Whisk in egg and salt. Stir in the flour using 1/2 cup increments until it forms a dough. Knead dough 2-3 minutes until a slightly sticky dough has formed, adding more flour when necessary.
4. Place dough into bowl and cover with plastic wrap. Store in a draft free, warm spot in your kitchen for an hour or so to let dough rise. Punch dough down and cut into 8 equal pieces.
5. Preheat oil in fryer or deep skillet to 350 degrees, or medium heat on the stove top. Roll the 8 pieces of dough out into long ovals that are 1/4-1/8 inch thick. Carefully place in hot oil and fry 20-30 seconds per side.
6. Once beaver tail has finished cooking remove from oil and hold the beaver tail over the pan to let the excess oil drip off of it. Then immediately coat in cinnamon sugar (a classic combination for a beaver tail) or any desired toppings. Be sure to serve warm and fresh!

How to make beavertails

The must have item when visiting the Canadian capital of Ottawa is a beaver tail. This fried dough pastry has become synonymous with Byward Market where a chain called BeaverTail® serves thousands of these long oval shaped pastries. BeaverTails® are made of a half wholewheat flour mix risen, spread and deep fried. A donut in another form if you will. And on a recent trip to Ottawa I was passed the recipe by lovely Canadian food writer Paula Roy!

Most people have a Winter memory of eating BeaverTails (although they’re popular year round) when the Rideau Canal is frozen solid. There are four BeaverTail® branded huts situated along the canal and people skate along the ice covered canal and buy the pastries with hot chocolates.

They come in a variety of toppings from the heavily laden down numbers like the “Triple Trip” aka chocolate, peanut butter and Reese’s pieces to savoury ones like garlic butter and cheese (where they resemble a Hungarian Langos). The most popular though is the Killaloe Sunrise with cinnamon sugar and lemon which is a balance of tart and sweet. They’re soft and light and now you can make your own BeaverTail® style pastries using a copycat recipe inspired by the original.

How to make beavertails

When Paula offered to send me the copycat BeaverTail® recipe for these after dinner I was delighted to try making them from scratch (because realistically it is going to be a while until I get back to Ottawa). It took me a while because I don’t really like deep frying but I will make an exception for donuts.

One of my friends Miss America is a donut nut. He loves pastries and donuts more than anyone else I know. After dinner we were giving him a lift home and driving through a rather dark and deserted area of the inner city of Sydney. Miss America piped up and said that he wouldn’t have felt safe walking home or going home by public transport. But he had a solution.

“A woman that I worked with was a little eccentric but she used to bring a frozen chicken to work with her,” he said. “It had to be frozen so she could use it as a weapon in case anyone attacked her,” he explained. Apparently every day she left for work while it was dark and worked long hours so it would often be dark when she walked home, especially in Winter. So the chicken would go in the work freezer (I guess there’s no chance of anyone pinching a frozen raw chicken for lunch) and it would accompany her to work day in and day out.

“Really? Did you see the chicken?” I asked.

“Yes I did sight the chicken,” he said nodding his head. “It was real,” he said sighing, before adding perhaps a little superfluously, that she really was a little eccentric.

So tell me Dear Reader, do you have safety protection when you go out? And have you ever considered carrying a frozen chicken? 😉 Have you ever eaten a Beaver Tail style pastry?

DID YOU MAKE THIS RECIPE? Share your creations by tagging @notquitenigella on Instagram with the hashtag #notquitenigella

Beavertail® Style Pastries(Killaloe Sunrise Style)

Preparation time: 10 minutes (pus rising time)

Cooking time: 15 minutes

  • 1/4 cup lukewarm water
  • 2.5 teaspoons dry yeast
  • 1/2 cup warm milk
  • 1/4 cup granulated sugar
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1 egg
  • 2 tablespoons melted butter or coconut oil
  • 1 1/4 cup plain flour
  • 1 1/4 cup wholemeal plain flour
  • Oil (for frying)
  • 1 cups granulated sugar
  • 2 tablespoons ground cinnamon
  • Lemon wedges

Step 1 – In a large mixing bowl (a stand mixer is ideal), combine the yeast and warm water. Let stand 3 minutes to activate. Add sugar, milk, eggs, salt and melted butter to the bowl, stir to combine.

Step 2 – Mix both flours together and add to make a soft dough. Knead for about 5 minutes using a dough hook or 8 minutes by hand. The dough should be smooth and elastic. Place the finished dough in a greased bowl; cover with plastic wrap and let rest about 45 minutes to an hour.

Step 3 – Punch down dough to deflate then divide into 10 equal sized portions. Let rest, covered with tea towels, for 10 minutes. While dough balls rest, combine sugar with cinnamon in a broad, shallow dish.

How to make beavertails

Step 4 – Working with one ball at a time, roll out into an oval about 1/4 inch thick; cover again with towel and make sure that they lie on a floured surface. Heat about 4 inches of oil in a deep fryer or large, tall saucepan. The oil is ready for frying when it reaches about 196C/385F.

Step 5 – Give the ovals one last gentle stretch and then add them to the hot oil (as many as will fit at one time without being too crowded). Cook about 2-3 minutes per side or until golden brown on both sides.

How to make beavertails

Step 6 – Remove from hot oil with tongs and drain on paper towels for a moment. Dredge the beaver tails in the dish with cinnamon and sugar; flip to coat both sides and shake off any excess. Squeeze fresh lemon juice over the pastry and eat while warm. Paula says the key is to serve them straight away while they are hot rather than waiting for them all to finish frying.

I first tried these soft, oval-shaped doughnuts while skating down the Rideau Canal in Ottawa. A classic Canadian treat, these delicious snacks are fried to perfection then sprinkled with cinnamon sugar. But toppings can vary from lemon juice with sugar, nuts, chocolate sauce and even caramel. Whichever topping you prefer, just be sure to eat them warm!

Ingredients

Classic Canadian Fried Dough Treat

Cinnamon Sugar Topping

Directions

In the bowl of a stand mixer combine the warm water, warm milk, yeast and 1 tsp sugar. Let stand until foamy, about 10 minutes.

Add melted butter, sugar, salt, vanilla and eggs. Give everything a good mix together. Add flour and mix with the dough hook (or with a wooden spoon if you’re not using a mixer) and mix until the dough comes together and no longer sticks to the sides of the bowl. Knead for about 6 minutes in the mixer and 10 minutes by hand, until the dough is smooth, silky. Use extra flour if dough is sticky.

Place dough in a lightly oiled bowl and cover with a damp towel. Leave to rise until doubled in size, about 1 hour.

Punch down dough and place onto a lightly floured countertop. Shape into 8 equal sized pieces. Using a rolling pin, roll out each piece of dough into an oval shape. If you like, score a crisscross pattern in the top of dough.

Place on a lightly floured baking sheet and leave to rise, covered, for 30 minutes or until doubled in size.

Make cinnamon sugar by combining sugar and cinnamon in a large bowl.

Heat a large wide pot with about two inches of oil. Heat to 350F/176C. If you don’t have a thermometer, check the oil’s temperature by tearing off a small piece of dough and see if it sizzles and floats to the surface. Keep a close eye on the oil, adjust temperature as needed to prevent it from getting too hot. If you see it smoking or crackling take off the heat to cool down before frying.

Fry your doughnuts on each side for 30-60 seconds until they are golden brown. Dunk immediately in cinnamon sugar or top with lemon and sugar, Nutella, jam or my favourite, maple syrup!

Beavertail pastry

Canada’s favourite snack food pastry is actively seeking franchisees. Our 100+ points of sale have served our pastries to presidents & celebrities at some of Canada’s favourite leisure sites. Thousands of customers enjoy this treat at amusement parks, resort villages, tourist towns, boardwalks & waterfront areas. Simple operations, reasonable investment and a diverse menu, including our signature pastry & bites, smoothies, gelato, frozen yogurt & poutine make this a delicious opportunity!

It’s time to give yourself permission to build your days around what’s important to you! You’re in Control!
For more information, complete our FREE FRANCHISE ADVICE form!

How much does it cost to open a BeaverTails Franchise?

Individual Unit Costs

  • Initial Investment:
    $15,000-$500,000
  • Initial Franchise Fee:
    $30,000
  • Royalty Fee:
    5%
  • Advertising Fee:
    3%

News and Press Releases

Beaver tails from Bytown: The story behind Ottawa’s favourite pastry
The story behind Ottawa’s signature food, the addictively rich flaps of fried dough known as BeaverTails, is especially fitting for the capital of a country known for its multiculturalism.The snack comes from a family recipe handed down to entrepreneurs Grant and Pamela Hooker. The husband-and-wife .

BeavertailUSA needs Brand Ambasadors
If you are passionate about new innovative products and have a gift for selling, BeavertailUSA would love to talk with you! BeavertailUSA offers great profit sharing opportunities based on performance and contracts you bring to the table. If you are interested simply bring an order of 100 or more Be.

Faster, Higher. Sweeter Canada’s Beavertails A Hit With Olympic Visitors
Canada’s signature BeaverTails’ pastries have become a hit with curious international visitors attending the 2010 Winter Olympic Games in British Columbia. Grant Hooker, co-founder of BeaverTails Canada Inc., said the reaction of first-time customers “has been very positive and many Canadians at th.

BeaverTails News & Press Releases

BeaverTails Franchise Growth History

When did the first BeaverTails open? 1978
When did BeaverTails start Franchising? 1989

Hungry for a Beaver Tail? No Canadian winter can pass without eating at least one. These sweet, flat, donut-like pastries were a staple among early settlers, who stretched dough into the shape of a beaver’s tail in order to bake them easily over an open fire. Zoom forward to 1978 when BeaverTails Canada Inc. trademarked the treat and began selling them to skaters on Ottawa’s Rideau Canal. They’re now a sold in iconic outdoor stalls at winter destinations across the country, including Muskoka. But you can make your own, too. We’ve got a recipe courtesy of The Food Network plus a how-to video right here!

  • How to make beavertails
  • How to make beavertails
  • How to make beavertails

Beaver Tail Recipe

Ingredients:
1/4 cup warm water
8g pkg or 2-1/2 tsp active dry yeast
1/2 cup milk, warmed
2 Tbsp butter, melted
2 Tbsp sugar
1/2 tsp salt
1/2 tsp vanilla
1 eggs
2-1/2 cups all purpose flour, plus extra for dusting

1 L vegetable oil for deep-frying

Cinnamon Sugar Topping:
1 cup sugar
1 Tbsp cinnamon

1. In the bowl of a stand mixer combine the warm water, warm milk, yeast and 1 tsp sugar. Let stand until foamy, about 10 minutes.

2. Add melted butter, sugar, salt, vanilla and eggs. Give everything a good mix together. Add flour and mix with the dough hook (or with a wooden spoon if you’re not using a mixer) and mix until the dough comes together and no longer sticks to the sides of the bowl. Knead for about 6 minutes in the mixer and 10 minutes by hand, until the dough is smooth, silky. Use extra flour if dough is sticky.

3. Place dough in a lightly oiled bowl and cover with a damp towel. Leave to rise until doubled in size, about 1 hour.

4. Punch down dough and place onto a lightly floured countertop. Shape into 8 equal sized pieces. Using a rolling pin, roll out each piece of dough into an oval shape. If you like, score a crisscross pattern in the top of dough.

5. Place on a lightly floured baking sheet and leave to rise, covered, for 30 minutes or until doubled in size.

6. Make cinnamon sugar by combining sugar and cinnamon in a large bowl.

7. Heat a large wide pot with about two inches of oil. Heat to 350F/176C. If you don’t have a thermometer, check the oil’s temperature by tearing off a small piece of dough and see if it sizzles and floats to the surface. Keep a close eye on the oil, adjust temperature as needed to prevent it from getting too hot. If you see it smoking or crackling take off the heat to cool down before frying.

8. Fry your doughnuts on each side for 30-60 seconds until they are golden brown. Dunk immediately in cinnamon sugar or top with lemon and sugar, Nutella, jam, whipped cream, fruit maple butter … or be creative! Set up a a toppings bar and allow your family to create their own.

Watch How

Need a visual? YouTube chef Vijaya Selvaraju offer’s a step-by-step how-to:

What’s Your MuskokaStyle?

Share a photo of your favourite MuskokaStyle on Instagram. Tag #MuskokaStyle for a chance to be featured. @MuskokaStyleMag

Want to read more from MuskokaStyle? SIGN UP for our e-news: SUMMER IN YOUR INBOX!

These Homemade Beaver Tails are made with pizza dough for an easy treat you can make at home – no need for deep frying either!

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

Gain access to my free 4-week meal prep magic ebook!

Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription – in order to take part in the challenge you MUST press that confirm button! Check your “other” folder if you don’t see that confirmation email. In the meantime, add me to your contacts to ensure that you receive my Challenge emails 🙂

How to make this recipe

  1. Add seasonings to pizza dough and mix together in a large bowl.
  2. On a heavily floured surface, roll out dough then cut it into 6 pieces.
  3. In a large, deep frying pan, pour in sunflower oil, then fry each piece.
  4. Meanwhile, prepare a plate of cinnamon sugar.
  5. Move beaver tails to a paper towel lined plate to drain.
  6. Transfer to the sugar plate, coating on all sides.
  7. Decorate with your favorite toppings. Ex: Nutella, coconut and strawberries.

How to make beavertails How to make beavertails How to make beavertails How to make beavertails How to make beavertailsHow to make beavertails

Ingredients and substitutions

  • Sunflower oil – vegetable oil, canola oil, or coconut oil can be used in place of sunflower oil.

Dough

  • Pizza dough – make your own dough or use a store-bought pizza dough as I’ve listed for easy assembly.
  • Brown sugar – pre-made cinnamon sugar or white sugar can also be used in place of brown sugar.
  • Vanilla extract – there is no exact substitution for vanilla extract so if you don’t have it, leave it out entirely. Or you can substitute it with another extract of your choice.
  • Flour – use cornstarch or pastry cloth as substitutions for flour in this recipe.

How to make beavertails

What is a Beaver Tail?

A Beaver Tail is a Canadian staple! It’s the go-to dessert paired with a hot chocolate after a day of skiing or skating. It’s essentially a stretched dough that is deep fried and covered with cinnamon sugar. You can enjoy it as is or add just about any topping that you can think of on top! The most popular one available at the Beaver Tails chain is the Killaloe Sunrise, which is cinnamon sugar and fresh lemon juice! Another favourite is the Chocolate Hazelnut, which is a Beaver Tail covered with a chocolate hazelnut spread.

Topping ideas

The best part about making your own Beaver Tail is being able to mix and match the toppings to your liking! Not sure where to start? Here’s some delicious options:

  • Nutella
  • Fresh fruit (strawberries, bananas, apples, etc.)
  • Shredded coconut
  • Chocolate chips
  • Mini marshmallows
  • Butterscotch chips or toffee
  • Caramel sauce
  • Pretzels
  • Oreo crumble
  • Fresh lemon slice
  • Chocolate/candy (Reese’s pieces, Skor, etc.)

How to make beavertails

Storing and reheating

If you have any leftovers, which is doubtful, or you’ve made a few extras for a later date, store them in the fridge in an airtight container or freezer bag. Store them with no toppings so they stay fresh and are easy to reheat the next day. To reheat you can microwave them but I prefer to oven bake them so they don’t get too soggy. Once reheated, add your favourite toppings and enjoy!

Freezing leftover Beaver Tails

Freeze any leftover pizza dough for a later date. You’ll be able to use it for a future pizza or if you’re hoping to create even more of these delicious Beaver Tails!

You can also freeze any extra Beaver Tails that you’ve made for a later date! Once they’ve cooled to room temperature, store them without toppings in the freezer in an airtight container or a freezer bag (make sure there’s no extra air in the bag). When ready to enjoy, bake them in the oven until warmed all the way through and then add your desired toppings!

How to make beavertails

“You’re going to make what AND put them on your blog?”

This was the confused/horrified reaction of a few friends when I told them I was cooking up ‘beaver tails’ for my next post. They thought I had gone completely mad, and no doubt were also wondering where, in fact, I would find some beaver tails in Australia? Then I explained….

I first discovered this Canadian pastry while living in Canada in 2000 and working the ski season in Banff. For my non- Canadian readers, a “beavertail” is a fried sweet cakey pastry dusted in cinnamon not unlike a flat donut and is a Canadian institution to be found on the ski hills. The shape is like a beaver tail owing to its name. I used to inhale them hot, slathered with melting nutella or caramel and it was always the perfect ending to a day of snow boarding without fail.

I was recently reminded of these little pockets of hot crispy, donut-y goodness when giving my good friend Bea travel tips on her impending trip to Canada last month. You can read about her incredibly romantic reunion with her other half on her very funny blog here .

While in Canada, Bea was going out for a day of skiing with “Bill” (not his real name – “Bill” is a little blog shy). I imagined her being reunited at the bottom of the slopes at the end of the day with pastry in hand, untold love in her eyes (or was it her stomach?) and nutella accidentally smeared on her face that Bill would find sweetly endearing.

Unfortunately, Bea was so distracted by Bill that she managed to ski right on past the beavertails shop and straight into the car park. This may or may not be a little creative fabrication on my behalf, but either way, she did not get to experience the untold joy and wonder that is a ‘beavertail. So, in the face of this tragedy, I promised I would post a recipe on the blog so she could still relive little bit of Canada, post holiday. Happy eating Bea!

Particularly wonderful eating when the weather is awful, but so good anytime, you really need no excuse to eat beavertails. A word of warning though, my other half thought Christmas had come early on trying the samples and ate so many he actually made himself ill (this was rather amusing). Stopping at one is extremely difficult – Good luck!

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails

Canadian Beaver Tail Pastries

Makes 20-30 Beavertails

*This recipe is adapted from Food.com and is in no way associated with the actual Beavertails company.

Beaver Tails

1/2 cup warm water
5 teaspoons dry yeast
1 pinch sugar
1 cup warm milk
1/3 cup sugar
1 1/2 teaspoons salt
1 teaspoon vanilla
2 eggs
1/3 cup oil
5 cups self raising flour
Vegetable oil (for frying)
Cinnamon Sugar

Caramel

6 Tbl of butter
1/2 cup of cream
1 cup of brown sugar
  1. In a large mixing bowl, stir together the yeast, warm water and pinch of sugar.
  2. Allow to stand a couple of minutes to allow yeast to swell or dissolve.
  3. Stir in remaining sugar, milk, vanilla, eggs, oil, salt, and most of flour to make soft dough.
  4. Knead 5-8 minutes (by hand or with a dough hook), adding flour as needed to form a firm, smooth, elastic dough.
  5. Place in a greased bowl. Place bowl in a plastic bag and seal. (If not using right away, you can refrigerate the dough at this point).
  6. Let rise in a covered, lightly greased bowl; about 30-40 minutes.
  7. Gently deflate dough. (If dough is coming out of the fridge, allow to warm up for about 40 minutes before proceeding).
  8. Pinch off a golfball-sized piece of dough. Roll out into an oval and let rest, covered with a tea towel, while you are preparing the remaining dough.
  9. Heat about 5cm of oil in fryer in a wok. After a few minutes, drop a little dough in the oil. If it sizzles and browns up, then the oil is ready.
  10. Add the dough pieces to the hot oil, about 1-2 at a time.
  11. BUT — before you do, stretch the ovals into a tail shape, like a beaver’s tail – thinning them out and enlarging them as you do.
  12. Turn once to fry until the undersides are deep brown. Do not walk away from the stove as the tails will quickly burn
  13. Lift the tails out with tongs and drain on paper towels.
  14. Immediately toss the tails in cinnamon sugar and shake off excess
  15. To make caramel, add butter and brown sugar to cream in a saucepan and stir continuously over a low heat until thick and all ingredients have dissolved into each other.
  16. SMOTHER your beavertail with your favourite topping such as jam and cream, salted caramel, stewed apples and icecream, nutella or maple syrup.

How to make beavertailsIn a few recent posts, we’ve talked about beaver tail — from what they are and how they’re processed to a few reasons why you should use them in your next exotic leather project. However, there is one more question that needs to be answered: what kind of exotic leather projects are the best for beaver tail skins based on their size, shape, durability and appearance?

Some of the top uses for beaver tail include:

Watch Bands

The small, tight grain pattern of a tanned beaver tail makes for a beautiful appearance on small items such as watch bands. Where many other skins have patterns that are too large to really notice on something as small as a watch band, the grooves in the surface of beaver tails are intricate enough to be noticed even on men’s and women’s watch bands.

When ordering beaver tail for use in making watch bands, it’s generally a good idea to order smaller skins whenever possible. Watch bands don’t require a lot of material, so you can still get about 3-4 bands from a small tail with ease.

Phone Cases

Many smartphone users love to splurge on attractive cases for their mobile devices. The thickness, scratch-resistance, and waterproof qualities of beaver skin makes beaver tails an ideal material for making protective (and attractive) phone cases.

The size of the skins you order may vary based on the type of phone you’re making the case for. Smaller smartphones—where you’re only making an inlaid case — may only need smaller skins. However, larger phones may require bigger tails. You also may need a mid- to large-sized skin if you’re making a wrap case that will go around the edges of the phone.

The only drawback to using beaver tail skin for phone cases is that the hides are fairly thick, which can make it difficult to work with when wrapping edges. In these cases, it may be necessary to split down the hide to make it easier to manipulate.

Footwear

The scratch and water resistance properties of beaver tails make for excellent footwear, such as cowboy boots. Additionally, the small, intricate groove pattern can make for a striking and unique piece of footwear that is very distinct from both cow- and snake-based leathers.

When ordering beaver tail for footwear, it’s better to go with larger tails. Even then, if you aren’t making whole shoes/boots from beaver tails, it is likely that you’ll need to use two or more tails to fill some of your panels.

Alternatively, you can use beaver tails just to make the counters or trim on a shoe to create a textured look that contrasts with the rest of the shoe’s appearance.

Wallets

Beaver tails are often used for making high-quality men’s wallets because they’re attractive enough to draw attention, but tough enough to stand up to everyday use.

The big challenge in making men’s wallets with beaver tails, however, is finding the right size for your needs. To create one “full” large men’s wallet from a single hide, you’ll need to order a large or XL-sized tail. Alternatively, you could use two small or medium sized skins and join them down the center of a bi-fold wallet.

These are just a few of the potential uses for beaver tail skins. Need a scratch and water-resistant hide for your next exotic leather project? Contact the experts at Pan American Leathers! We look forward to helping you find the right exotic leather to meet your project’s needs.

How to make beavertails

Do you want some sweets for easter, thanksgiving, and Christmas and wondering where to go for buying and ended up with going to Beaver Tails? I would like to say is that you’ve come to the right place. In this article, we will discuss the menu of Beaver Tails in depth.

Beaver Tails is a restaurant which is famous for its finger food like coco vanilla, hazel amour, bananarama, brownie, apple pie, pastries and drinks also. You can have a great meal for around $10.00.

In the coming lines, I will tell you about the Beaver Tails menu prices, contact information, nutritional facts, and franchise details. But, before that, I would share some information related to beaver tails.

BeaverTails is a Canadian Restaurant Chain specializing in pastries and it was started in Killaloe, Ontario, in 1978 and opened its first permanent store in Ottawa two years later. By 2018, it had 140 franchise and license locations in six countries: Canada, the United States, the United Arab Emirates, Mexico, France, and Japan.

Without waiting more, I will tell you about the menu prices of Beaver Tails.

What’s In The Post

Beaver Tails Menu Prices

How to make beavertails

In the Beaver Tails menu, you will find different varieties of pastries like Cinnamon and Sugar, Coco Vanil, and Maple Butter, and many more.

Beaver Tails serves the best pastries in the world and they always offer you the best as their staff is very friendly and helpful.

Instead of pastries, you will find different varieties of drinks, ice creams, and pie’s here everything is affordable in the Beaver Tails and lies between $5 to $ 15 and they will serve fresh food always. So, without waiting more, let’s check out the Beaver Tails menu prices.

Your Favorite

Mehple CAD 7.25
The Classic CAD 7.25
Coco Vanil CAD 7.25
Killaloe Sunrise CAD 7.25
Hazel Amour CAD 7.25
Avalanche CAD 9.25

Choco Luv

Bananarama CAD 8.25
Brownie CAD 8.25
Triple Trip CAD 8.25

Pie Oh My!

Apple Pie CAD 9.25
Strawberry Cheesecake CAD 8.25

BeaverTails Packages

4 Classic Pastries CAD 26.00
6 Classic Pastries CAD 36.50
12 Classic Pastries CAD 73.00

Drinks

Root Beer CAD 3.25
Diet Coke CAD 3.25
Coke CAD 3.25
Dasani Water CAD 2.50

Beaver Tails Nutritional Information

Nutritional Information myfitnesspal.com/beavertailsnutritionalinformation/

To check the nutritional breakdown of all the items present on the Beaver Tails menu, you can visit the link mentioned above.

Beaver Tails Franchise Details

How to make beavertails

There are 84 units of this franchise open today, Canada, and Quebec, the United States, the United Arab Emirates, Mexico, France, and Japan. So if you want to open a Beaver Tails, then this is how much it will cost you.

Minimum Investment $85,000
Location Investment $150,000
Franchise Fee $30,000

Important Links

Official Website beavertails.com/
Careers beavertails.com/careers/
Book a Food Truck beavertails.com/book-a-food-truck/
Shops beavertails.com/shops/

Contact Details

Beaver Tails Corporate Office Address: 3700 St-Patrick #106, Montréal, QC H4E 1A2

Beaver Tails Corporate Phone Number: (514) 392-2222

To make a BeaverTail doughnut, whole wheat dough is hand-stretched into an oval shape and fried in canola oil. It’s still warm when the pastry is served, topped with cinnamon and sugar or more extravagant additions like cheesecake spread sprinkled with Skor bits. In Canada, it’s an indulgent favorite found at theme parks, ski lodges, and summer festivals in the eastern half of the country. And unlike your average doughnut or pastry, part of the BeaverTails experience is watching the decadent treat being prepared in front of you.

BeaverTails are new to much of the United States. There are currently just eight places to find them outside Canada, where the fried treats were invented in the 1970s by Ontarians Grant and Pam Hooker. As a snack for the family, the Hookers would fry up the dough leftover from whatever meal they cooked that day. Their daughter remarked that the end result looked like a beaver’s tail, and a Canadian classic pastry was born.

The Hookers began selling BeaverTails in their hometown of Killaloe, Ontario, in 1978. The first permanent store followed two years later in Ottawa’s ByWard Market (where Barack Obama famously sampled the treat a few years ago during a trip to the country’s capital) but prior attempts at spreading the brand didn’t hold. That changed once Pino Di Ioia, who started off working part-time at Montreal‘s first BeaverTails store in the 1990s, took over the business with his wife Tina and twin brother Anthony in 2009. The three are responsible for the company’s recent successful expansion to 120 outlets today, including franchises in Dubai, South Korea, and Japan.

Between Canada and the United States, Di Ioia hopes to open 150 new BeaverTails outlets in the next five years. “Our future development will be in the US,” Di Ioia explained over the phone, en route to a recently opened BeaverTails store along the Wildwoods Boardwalk on the Jersey Shore.

Popular attractions like the Wildwoods Boardwalk represent Di Ioia’s strategic expansion, skipping shopping mall food courts in favour of tourist and leisure spots like amusement parks, zoos, and aquariums. “Locations make the biggest contribution to maintaining our uniqueness,” Di Ioia says.

By restricting their footprint, BeaverTails are seen as an occasional indulgence for special occasions as opposed to an everyday snack. Think of them as the Canadian contender for funnel cakes—or the wintertime equivalent. Toronto veterinarian Lucy Fernandes associates the fried pastry with snowy weather and alpine cabins. “I definitely think of BeaverTails as a treat after snowboarding,” says Fernandes, who last ate the banana-chocolate-hazelnut variety during a snowboarding trip north of the city this past winter.

The cold weather association is more common among eastern Canadians, many of whom have childhood memories of wintertime in Ottawa. Along the city’s Rideau Canal, where skating is a popular winter pastime, BeaverTails have been sold seasonally along the frozen 7.8 km stretch of ice since 1981.

If Di Ioia has his way, this fond nostalgia will slowly span borders and BeaverTails’ friendly origins could help him accomplish that. “On an international level, we’re amazed at how Canada’s favorable public image is always sought after,” Di Ioia explains. The company isn’t shy about showing off their roots. Canadian flags and maple leafs are prominent motifs in the brand’s signage and decor. Inside stores, antler chandeliers help illuminate the fried treats as customers devour them.

Following Donald Trump’s Super Tuesday victory, Google Trends showed that searches for ‘how to move to Canada’ jumped by over 1,000 percent. A similar rise in searches was also reported when Britain voted to leave the European Union earlier this year. Positive inferences like this could promote the growth of Canadian food outlets abroad which are currently limited in number. “They often associate franchising with America,” Di Ioia says, referring to international groups in Mexico, Egypt, and India that have expressed interest in bringing BeaverTails to their home countries.

From just a handful of US outlets recently opened in the past two years—including Lagoon Park in Utah and Dollywood in Tennessee—Di Ioia reports that the stateside reception has been warm. “In the few stores we have, it’s amazing how many other Americans are picking up on it,” he says. A sign, perhaps, that log flumes and roller coasters may inspire cravings for Canadian fried pastries in generations of Americans to come.

The sweet aroma as you approach the little red-roofed chalet signals fresh pastries straight ahead. But these aren’t just any baked goods. They’re a giant, deep-fried delicacy called BeaverTails, and they’re as symbolically Canadian as the buck-toothed rodent they’re named after.

They’re not real beaver tails, of course (although a smaller number of people eat those as well). This BeaverTail is a ball of whole-wheat dough that’s hand-stretched into a long, flat oval — the same shape as its namesake. It’s then deep-fried in canola oil and served piping hot in a paper sleeve. The traditional version is sprinkled with a mix of sugar and cinnamon, but you can also slather your pastry with toppings like chocolate hazelnut spread, maple cream, crushed chocolate bars or cookies, fruit, and even another Canadian classic — poutine.

BeaverTails can be as national or as local as you want, the latter paying homage to Canada’s regional food specialties. In Vancouver and Whistler on the west coast, for example, you can top the deep-fried dough with fresh salmon, cream cheese, and capers. At Mont-Tremblant Ski Resort near Montreal, there are steak tails and ham-and-cheese tails, both a tribute to Montreal’s famed smoked deli meats. There’s even a decadent lobster tail in the east coast city of Halifax.

BeaverTails are so iconic they’ve popped up as nods to Canada on television shows like Jeopardy and South Park and in the board game Trivial Pursuit. There’s even an ObamaTail, which was created specifically for President Barack Obama during his trip to Ottawa during his first official trip to Canada in 2009. For the record, his pastry was topped with cinnamon, sugar, and a large chocolate and maple-syrup-flavored “O.”

The gooey goodness started in 1978 when Grant Hooker and his wife Pam began selling the classic version of their pastries at a local community fair near Ottawa. According to Grant, the recipe came from his German-Canadian grandmother who called them “keekla.” He says she would make the treats for breakfast and top them with either sugar and cinnamon, butter and jam, or butter and honey.

When the couple’s daughter observed that the oblong pastries looked like beaver tails, a light bulb went off. After all, beavers are Canada’s national animal and are even featured on Canadian currency. The Hookers renamed their treats “BeaverTails,” and the rest, as they say, is history.

The Hookers opened their first shop two years later in Ottawa’s historic ByWard Market. In the winter, they also sold their pastries along the landmark Rideau Canal, which is home to one of the world’s longest outdoor ice skating trails. The sugary snack was a hit with skaters, who welcomed the quick burst of energy and warmth.

Visitors and local residents alike fell in love with the BeaverTail’s crisp-yet-chewy texture and doughnut-like flavor. Word spread, and over the years so did the number of franchises. Four decades later, you can find BeaverTails kiosks and food trucks in more than 140 locations worldwide. They’re sold in high-traffic tourist spots across Canada, from Niagara Falls to the Toronto waterfront to the mountain resort town of Banff. There are also franchises in the US, Mexico, France, the United Arab Emirates, and Japan. BeaverTail popularity far surpasses its Midwestern US counterpart, the Elephant Ear, which is essentially a less oblong (but equally large) piece of fried dough.

BeaverTails have come a long way since that first shack. Every year, nearly 50 tons of chocolate hazelnut spread is used to make BeaverTails. According to the company, if you lined up every BeaverTail sold since 1978 it would stretch longer than the length of Canada. A mascot called Beav (that’s far less creepy than Gritty) has traveled more than 30,000 miles to spread the word about BeaverTails around Canada.

BeaverTails are as Canadian as poutine and Tim Hortons. It doesn’t really matter how you eat a BeaverTail, it just matters that you do. That said, there are a few things to keep in mind. First, the ideal technique is front to back (or back to front). Side to side will leave you with a long, skinny, floppy piece of pastry that’s hard to hold. You might be tempted to roll them up, but according to Grant Hooker, that’s going to hit your stomach too fast. Whichever way you choose to eat them, just be sure to grab a couple of paper napkins — you’ll need them.

How to make beavertails

(This article originally appeared on our sister site, Travelandescape.ca, by Maria G. Yates.)

What could be tastier than dollops of gooey dough dropped into hot oil, deep fried to golden deliciousness, then sprinkled with cinnamon and sugar and served to you warm?

It is said that every nationality has its own version of fried dough. New Orleans has beignets, Spain has churros, Italy has zeppole, Canada has, well, we have BeaverTails (Queues de Castor in French).

So, what exactly is a BeaverTail? A true Canadian culinary treat, they are batches of dough that are stretched by hand to resemble the tail of a beaver. Then these deliciously addictive, traditional whole-wheat pastries are deep-fried in canola oil and served piping hot, drizzled with butter and your choice of toppings.

The current BeaverTail evolved from a family recipe passed down through at least three generations and is similar to a yeasted, crack wheat treat enjoyed in early Canadian and American farms. The first commercially produced BeaverTail was sold in 1978, and the first storefront opened in June 1980, in Ottawa’s Byward market, one of Canada’s oldest and largest public markets.

In February 1981, BeaverTails made their first appearance along Ottawa’s most famous winter attraction and the longest skating rink in the world, the Rideau Canal Skateway, which stretches 7.8 kilometres through downtown Ottawa. Today, skating on the canal and enjoying a BeaverTail go hand in hand. These warm, delicious, crispy treats are so popular along the canal that even on the coldest of Canadian winter days, the lineups can be lengthy, so be prepared to wait. It will be worth it.

Through the years a variety of toppings have been developed to further enhance the sinful indulgence to the BeaverTail experience. Add Oreo cookie crumble sprinkled on top of vanilla icing, with chocolate sauce drizzled on top of that or banana slices layered over a thick coat of hazelnut spread. My favourite toping is still The Classic: cinnamon and sugar. Why mess with perfection?

On February 19, 2009, BeaverTails made international headlines when President Barack Obama, on his first official visit to Canada, dropped into Byward Market with the sole purpose of indulging in this iconic pastry. President Obama’s visit was later dubbed The BeaverTail Summit.

How to make beavertails

You Know You’re Famous When:

  • The Barenaked Ladies change the lyrics of their song If I Had A Million Dollars to If I Had A Million BeaverTails during a music festival.
  • A question about BeaverTails makes it into the Canadian version of Trivial Pursuit.
  • “What is a BeaverTail?” is the answer to a Jeopardy question, the U.S.-television show hosted by Canadian-born Alex Trebek.
  • During an interview with The Globe and Mail, Canadian singer-songwriter Bryan Adams states that his most Canadian trait is his ability to differentiate a BeaverTail from a Tim Hortons Timbit. Now, that’s Canadian.

Other Fun Facts:

  • BeaverTails uses 21.1 tons of chocolate hazelnut spread per year. That’s the equivalent weight of five elephants and 12 beavers.
  • Since BeaverTails’ debut in 1978, enough BeaverTails have been sold to make a straight line of tails, end-to-end, from the BeaverTails store in Cavendish, Prince Edward Island, to the store in Whistler, British Columbia.
  • Since 1981 more than 8,000 young Canadians have worked at the BeaverTails operations in the Ottawa stores alone.
  • Along with the 80 franchised operations spread across Canada, there are now two stores in Saudi Arabia and two stores in Colorado’s ski country, spreading Canadian pride around the world.

Beavertail Snowshoes

The art of making the most refined and highly esteemed snowshoes of the Mistassini Cree
VHS, PAL format, DVD: 40 minutes

Henri Vaillancourt

How to make beavertails

The rounded snowshoes of the Cree, Montagnais and Naskapi Indians of Quebec and Labrador represent one extreme of Native American snowshoe design. Strong and lightweight -their shape provides the maximum flotation needed for the light powder snow of the far north. Their short length (some examples being wider than they are long) make them well suited for climbing and descending hilly terrain and for quick maneuvering while doing camp chores or travelling over rough ground.

The beavertail snowshoe with its tightly bent squarish or rounded tail is the most aesthetic and highly finished of the rounded snowshoe styles. To make a good pair of beavertails requires the consummate skill of a master craftsman and as such these snowshoes are usually highly esteemed by their owners. Beavertails are almost never used as a basic working snowshoe and are often reserved for the traditional hunting of big game, where the hunter pays respect to the animal spirit by “dressing up” for the hunt.

How to make beavertails How to make beavertails
Bending a beavertail snowshoe frame ; Assinica Lake, Quebec ; photo Henri Vaillancourt 1980 Filing smooth the finished beavertail snowshoe frames; Assinica Lake, Quebec 1980; photo Henri Vaillancourt 1980

How to make beavertails

When not in use, beavertail and other types of snowshoes are hung in a small tree, usually a birch sapling, cut for the purpose and placed in front of the camp. Here they remain displayed as long as the weather is fair. When snow or rain threatens, they are usually taken down and placed in an unheated storage tent to keep them dry . They are never taken in a heated tent , except for brief periods to dry them during wet snow conditions ; in such a case, they are hung from the tent poles well away from the intense heat of the stoves to prevent the woven mesh from being ”burned”.When stored for the season , beavertail snowshoes in particular are wrapped in canvas or other material to keep them clean.

How to make beavertails

How to make beavertails How to make beavertails
Old Montagnais beavertail snowshoes of an extremely wide pattern in the Chateau de Ramezay , Montreal ; photo Henri Vaillancourt 1973 Sarah Bosum lacing the tail of a beavertail snowshoe, Mistassini Quebec, 1977 ; photo from the video ”Beavertail Snowshoes ” , Henri Vaillancourt

For more information not included on this website

or write Henri Vaillancourt
PO Box 142
Greenville, New Hampshire, 03048

Video Vault

Many factors will influence the viability of your business. We certainly cannot guarantee your future profitability, nor can we make financial representations for your investment. However, we can offer examples of performance levels some of our existing franchisees have achieved.

Access our video vault and learn how to receive these performance averages in a convenient next step!

How to make beavertails

Meet the Development Team

This isn’t just a job. This is a family enterprise and a way of life.

  • Left to right:
  • Tina • Creative Director
  • Pino • CEO
  • Patrick • Development Manager
  • Anthony • CFO

How to make beavertails

Over 110 years of combined experience!

The BeaverTails’® development team is extensively familiar with our brand values and our development strategies.

Becoming a franchisee means sharing a future full of delicious memories with us!

What Motivates You?

Being a BeaverTails® franchisee might be a fantastic idea if:

  • You want a job that makes you happy
  • You want to be your own boss
  • You’re looking for work
  • You want to build a business for your kids
  • You want to build financial success
  • You want to build personal equity
  • You want to plan for retirement

But carefully consider your motivations and be sure you’re doing this for the right reasons

This is what we look for in a candidate:

positive individual
autonomous & responsible
energetic
good communicator
good physical shape
disciplined
follow directives
resourceful

The Perfect Franchisee

Over the years, we have developed a clear picture of the perfect candidate. Do you recognize yourself in the description below?

We like to work with people who are generally happy — after all, we do serve a deliciously happy product to very happy clients!

We’ve found that dynamic, engaged, disciplined and perseverant individuals are more likely to find success at BeaverTails®.

We’re here to help, but you’ll need to put in the passion and effort!

How to make beavertails

  • Team player
  • Intuitive business sense
  • Family support & commitment
  • Great communicator
  • Experience recruiting & managing
  • Passionate about customer service

How to make beavertails

Join the Journey

Joining our franchise family is one of the most important decisions you will ever make. And we’re here to provide all the information you need!

We only win if you make a successful decision.

Let’s get to work and continue the process so we can find the best path forward together!

How to make beavertails

The next big step is yours to take! Are you ready?

Sign up now to access our video vault to learn how to choose the best location for your BeaverTails® shop!

Join the BeaverTails® Family!

Complete the form below

United States

Address
BeaverTails USA Inc.
Wilmington, DE 19801

  • Phone number
    1-(877)-778-2457
  • Canada

    Address
    3700, St-Patrick #106
    Montréal, QC H4E 1A2

  • Phone number
    (514) 392-2222
  • Legal | BEAVERTAILS® and the BeaverTails® logo are trademarks owned by BeaverTails Brands Inc., used under license.

    Any content on this website including without limitation, any franchise sales information contained therein, does not constitute an offer to sell a franchise. It is for information purposes only. An offer of a franchise can only be made subsequent to the delivery of a franchise disclosure document. Certain provinces and states require that we register and/or deliver a franchise disclosure document in accordance with applicable laws in said province and/or states. If you are a resident of one of these provinces and/or states, are receiving any messages in one of these states, or intend to operate a franchise in these provinces and/or states, please note that we will not offer you a franchise unless and until we have complied with any applicable pre-sale registration and/or disclosure requirements in the applicable jurisdiction.

    The information contained on this website is not an offering of a franchise. In the state of New York (USA), an offering of a franchise can only be made by prospectus that has been previously filed and registered with the Department of Law of the State of New York. Such filing does not constitute approval by the Department of Law.

    BeaverTails USA Inc., 1209 Orange St., Wilmington, DE 19801; (514) 392-2222

    How to make beavertails

    These delicious fried pastry pockets are named after they resemble beaver tails. This beaver tails recipe is a sweet delicacy garnished with maple syrup and sprinkled with some powdered sugar to give you a lovely meal to begin your day with.

    When Grant and Pam Hooker turned their family recipe of fried dough into a corporate business, this is where beaver tails became famous in Canada. Their first pastry was sold at Killaloe Craft and Community Fair in 1978. Two years after that fair, they opened their first beaver tails stand in the Byward Market in Ottawa, and since then, this dish has been a staple in Canadian homes!

    Toothsome Beaver Tails Breakfast Recipe!

    This Canadian staple is the go-to-dessert dish paired with hot chocolate and tastes amazingly delicious after a day of skiing or skating. In simple words, it is a stretched dough that is deep-fried and smothered with cinnamon sugar. You can eat it as it is or add loads of toppings to enhance its taste!

    Fry these beaver tails to perfection and sprinkle loads of cinnamon sugar to make your mornings amazingly delicious and full of sweetness. You can choose toppings such as sugar, nuts, chocolate sauce, and caramel! Whichever you choose, ensure you eat them warm for heavenly taste!

    So, let’s see how you can make this delicious Canadian breakfast delicacy at home!

    Quick Stats

    Prep time: 10 minutes

    Cooking time: 10 minutes

    Servings: 6 beaver tails

    Ingredients

    • 1/4 cup warm water
    • 2-1/2 tsp active dry yeast
    • 1/2 cup milk, warmed
    • 2 Tbsp butter, melted
    • 2 Tbsp sugar
    • 1/2 tsp salt
    • 1/2 tsp vanilla
    • 1 egg
    • 2-1/2 cups all-purpose flour, plus extra for dusting
    • 1 L vegetable oil for deep-frying

    Cinnamon Sugar Topping

    • 1 cup sugar
    • 1 Tbsp cinnamon

    Method to Prepare

    • Add water, warm milk, yeast, and one teaspoon of sugar to the stand mixer bowl. Let the stand run for about 10 minutes until foamy.
    • Then, add melted butter, salt, sugar, vanilla, and eggs. Give everything a good mix.
    • Change the hook to a dough hook and add flour. Knead the dough until it comes together and stops sticking to the sides of the bowl.
    • Knead the dough for about 5 minutes in the mixer and 10 minutes by hand. Knead it until it is smooth and silky. Use extra flour if you find the dough to be sticky.
    • Lightly oil a bowl and place the dough. Cover it with a damp towel and leave it to rise until it is double in size for an hour.
    • After an hour, punch down the dough and place it on a lightly floured surface—shape eight equal pieces.
    • With a rolling pin, roll out each dough into an oval shape.
    • Place it on a lightly floured baking sheet and keep it aside for half an hour for rising.
    • Take a large bowl and combine sugar and cinnamon sugar. You will dip your beaver tails into this mixture for heavenly taste!
    • Meanwhile, heat a large wide pot with two inches of oil. Tear a small piece of dough and see if it sizzles and floats to the surface. If the piece of dough does that, then your oil is ready for frying.
    • You need to keep an eye on the oil as you don’t want it to be too hot. If it is crackling hot, take it off the flame and let it cool for a few minutes.
    • Once the oil reaches the desired temperature, fry your doughnuts on each side for a minute until they are golden brown.
    • Immediately, dunk them in cinnamon sugar and top them with your favorite topping and enjoy!

    Final Words

    These flat, fried, doughy, and delectable beaver tails are Canada’s favorite breakfast obsession. Beavertails are easy to make and can be prepared quickly. Hence, try these Canadian beaver tails for breakfast and kickstart your morning deliciously!

    Both Grit Guy and Randy Shuff make items from beaver tails.

    Wallets, check book covers, key ring fobs, lots of other small leather items. With a bit of experimenting they could probably make iPhone covers!!

    Please check out my updated inventory of Native American books.

    How to make beavertails

    How to make beavertails

    Was born in a Big City Will die in the Country OK with that!

    Both Grit Guy and Randy Shuff make items from beaver tails.

    Wallets, check book covers, key ring fobs, lots of other small leather items. With a bit of experimenting they could probably make iPhone covers!!

    Yep. belts , suspenders, hatbands, maybe even steering wheel covers

    breathin to much cold air I guess But that’s funny

    Most tail projects need a backer of some sort due to the tail being flexible to the extent that it could break if pushed or bent to far, after being tanned.

    The can take large round bends fairly well and smaller ones if a good backer is there, say a heavier leather underneath like a wallet which has several pockets.

    You can use tail material back to back and have it fairly stout, but them kernels like to break if pushed to far, and then you cannot fix that.

    Hand grips, wallets, belts, dress boots, vest’s, various types of gun belts/scabbards and knife sheaths, bow handles and length decorations, most anything you can sew, stitch or lace or glue the tail to that is not to overly flexible will work, these are just some ideas,

    The difficult part is cutting the tail to the shape to make it look nice and lay correctly, especially on curved things.

    Sorry if my opinions or replies offend you, they are not meant to !

    How to make beavertails

    How to make beavertails

    I recently finished a leather game bag for my small game hunting and added a bit of tanned beaver tail from the first beaver I ever caught. I have some other ideas for using tail leather as accents on a leather quiver I plan to make some day but haven’t had time to finish. I also think a belt buckle would be nice, simple but functional beauty.

    How to make beavertails

    NRA and NTA Life Member
    [email protected]

    Wambli, that is a work of art!

    Snowy, did you make that?

    Wambli >>> very nice!

    Pawnee >>> no, I didn’t but I could can see one built from a tail, though.

    Snowy, I could see it too.

    Great idea! I can barely write my name, much less make something like that

    How about a ceiling fan that would be original. Antler and beaver tail..

    • How to make beavertails
    Alberta state of emergency lifted – Wood Buffalo imposes their own
    • Environment
    • June 30, 2016
  • Northern Journal ‘cleans up’ at awards ceremony
    • Northerners
    • June 22, 2016
  • How to make beavertails
    Wood Buffalo wildfire recovery (Jun 15)
    • Environment
    • June 15, 2016
  • Semblance of ‘normal’ returns to Fort McMurray
    • Environment
    • June 13, 2016
  • How to make beavertails
    Alberta Wildfire Update (June 3 at 2:00 p.m.)
    • Environment
    • June 3, 2016
    • In Education
    • June 22, 2015
    • Meagan Wohlberg
    • 7806 Views
    • 0 comments

    The tail of a beaver is so rich and buttery when it is cooked, it’s almost easy to forget that it’s meat. But the delicacy has been an important source of protein, as well as fat, for indigenous people in the North for centuries.

    Henry Beaver of Fort Smith spent last week teaching youth about the parts of the beaver and their various uses during a culture camp for elementary school students.

    Apart from the luxurious, warm pelt that beavers provide for hats and mitts in the North, he said beavers are a popular traditional food source, and the tail is the most coveted piece of the animal.

    The Journal asked him what’s the best way to go about cooking a beaver tail. He gave us a basic run-down of preparing the dish.

    • After cutting the tail off, take a stick – preferably a green willow – and insert it where the tail was once attached to the body.
    • Hold the tail flat over an open fire, rotating it until the outer black skin bubbles and dries, and can be peeled off easily. The tail will curve from the heat as it cooks.
    • Peel the charred skin off like you would a baked potato, revealing the white, greasy flesh underneath.
    • Boil the tail over the fire in a pot of water for an hour or more, or until the flesh is tender and easy to cut.
    • Enjoy with salt and pepper, or a little ketchup or mustard. The tail should cut easily and be easy to chew.

    Photo: Meagan Wohlberg

    Henry Beaver roasts the outer skin off a beaver tail before it is boiled for lunch.

    Beaver said the tail can also be roasted on a stick over a fire. In that case, instead of removing the outer skin, keep the dark skin on while the flesh underneath cooks. Check by removing a bit of the skin to tell when the meat is cooked through.

    All other parts of the beaver can also be eaten. Some like to throw the liver right on a fire and cook it that way. The animal is typically cut into pieces and boiled over the fire or stove. If it is small enough, it can be roasted right in the oven, even stuffed like a turkey.

    Cooked slowly and with enough moisture, beaver meat should be tender and easy to pull apart with a fork. Beaver meat is dark meat, resembling rabbit, and has a mild taste that can be easily enhanced with a bit of salt.

    Beaver meat is an excellent source of iron, protein and vitamin B, and the livers are high sources of vitamin A, as well.

    Not only is beaver delicious and affordable, but it keeps people connected to the land while trapping, which is also a good way to keep fit.

    So next time you have the chance to have a taste of Canada’s national animal, make sure to give it a try!

    I am not a monnite, nor female, but I cook. I found this site in search for a recipe. Beaver tails in Italian (depending on exactly the town) call them SFGINGIA (sf-een-ja) or Zepolli (like the hindenburg), and are sprinkled with powder sugar, they are a simple dough , pizza dough actually, no particular shape. In Boston area they make them like huge taco’s (9 inch disks), they are dipped in Melted butter and sprinkled with powder sugar or PS with cinnamin. The French make a version called Bingnettes and they are found in Canada France and New Orleans.

    I would love a bread recipe that some of your people use.

    a simple pizza dough

    4 cups flour (16 ounces scaled)
    6 ounce water
    2 teaspoons salt
    1 packet(2.25 teaspoons) active dry yeast (I buy 2 pounds every other year and freeze it. Vacum sealing works easily as well and can be home made.
    1 tablespoon sunflower /corn oil/ shortening ( I do not like Canola my entire family senses a smell and taste that makes it inedible to us)
    1 tablespoon sugar(optional)

    proof yeast in water, (I like to make a biga or sauer by proofing overnight with cup of flour and 1/2 the water 3/4 of the yeast, then adding in the rest the next day, for pizza or bread) mix in salt sugar to dissolve add flour , (all of it, but check by feel). After it is all in a ball rest 5 mins scrape board, knead 10 minutes. Oil cover 30-60 mins. tear off fritter sized pieces roll out, (or stretch out), while oil is heating. few at a time till golden flip till golden drain. Sprinkle with powder sugar. Sme People make a simple syrup or heat water and honey and mix in Anisette. The Alcohol burns off (you cannot possible get a buzz), and they lightly drizzle with it, (no powder sugar)

    I wil ltry to find this place tommorrow. I just found your group again after losing the url.

    chris
    Long Island NY

    My son often wants me to make these. Call me lazy, but I found the frozen bread or bun dough is the easiest. The frozen buns thaw quickly. Then you just need to flatten them to a “tail” and fry them up. If you see all the recipes that are online, you will find a thousand ways to top them. Or simply, cinnamon sugar.

    Franchise Facts

    This franchise is for the operation of a BeaverTails treat shop specializing in the business of selling cooked dough, freshly prepared with various toppings, and served direct to the customs, along with specialty French Fry products, various beverages, including a specialty dairy bar/juice bar, and thematic merchandise.

    How much does a BeaverTails franchise cost?

    BeaverTails has a franchise fee of up to $30,000, with a total initial investment range of $176,200 to $435,300.

    • Initial Franchise Fee: $30,000
    • Total Investment: $176,200 to $435,300
    • Working Capital: $12,000 to $15,000

    The initial cost of a franchise includes several fees — Unlock this franchise to better understand the costs such as training and territory fees.

    How much does a BeaverTails franchise make?

    Franchise revenue and profits depend on a number of unique variables, including local demand for your product, labor costs, commercial lease rates and several other factors. We can help you figure out how much money you can make by reviewing your specific situation. Please unlock this franchise for more information.

    How many franchise locations do they have?

    As of the 2018 Franchise Disclosure Document, there are 4 franchised BeaverTails locations in the USA.

    Are there any BeaverTails franchise opportunities near me?

    Based on 2018 FDD data, BeaverTails has franchise locations in 3 states. The largest region is the South with 2 franchise locations.

    This franchise is expanding into new markets and might be available near you. One of our franchise experts will have detailed knowledge about this brand. Unlock to learn more and connect with our experts.

    for those passionate about foodservice and food safety

    How to make beavertails

    Hailing from Canada, we bring you the BeaverTail. These flat, fried treats can be described as the Canadian version of a donut. First introduced at the Killaloe Fair, founder Grant Hooker was inspired by his German-Canadian grandmother, who made a deep-fried bread for breakfast and topped it with cinnamon sugar, butter and jam, or butter and honey. His daughter said the treats looked like a beaver’s tail and the name stuck! BeaverTails are a national symbol for Canadian culture and are sold across Canada. Ontario BBQ grillmaster Steph Bouchard shares his BeaverTail recipe with us so you make these treats for yourself!

    Items Needed

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup warm water
    • 5 tsp active dry yeast
    • 1 tsp white sugar
    • 1 cup warm milk
    • ⅓ cup white sugar
    • 1 ½ tsp salt
    • 1 tsp vanilla extract
    • 3 eggs beaten
    • ⅓ cup vegetable oil
    • 5 cups whole wheat flour
    • Vegetable oil for frying
    • 2 cups white sugar
    • 1 tsp ground cinnamon
    • Chocolate syrup
    • M&Ms
    • Nutella
    • Anything you want!

    Directions

    1. Add warm water, dry yeast and 1 tsp sugar to a bowl. Let stand for 5 minutes for yeast to bloom.
    2. Stir in milk, 1/3 cup sugar, salt, vanilla extract, eggs and 1/3 cup vegetable oil until combined.
    3. If using a mixer, attach a dough hook and add 4 cups of whole wheat flour. Add remaining 1 cup of flour slowly until dough starts to pull away from the sides. Knead for another 2 to 4 minutes. Transfer to a lightly oiled Cambro container. I loosely place the cover on top and let rise for 1 hour or until the dough has roughly doubled in size.
    4. Punch down dough and knead a bit more on a lightly floured surface. Grab a piece of the dough and roll into a ball roughly the size of a golf ball. Using a rolling pin roll it out to approximately 1/4 of an inch thick. Keeping the dough in an oval shape (like a beavertail!)
    5. Prepare the cinnamon sugar by mixing 2 cups of granulated white sugar and 1 tsp of cinnamon. Feel free to adjust to your preferred taste. I like to use Camwear food pans as it makes it easier for coating later.
    6. Drop the flattened dough into oil that is around 375°F for 30 to 45 seconds a side. When golden brown, remove the pastry from the pan, shake off excess oil and drop it into the cinnamon sugar mixture, making sure to coat both sides. Transfer coated pastries to paper towel or wire rack.
    7. Here’s where you can get creative! One of my favourite culinary quotes coined by the Queen of BBQ herself Danielle Bennett (DivaQbbq on social media) is that “It’s your house!” This means grab all of your favourite treats, go crazy and experiment. I use things like chocolate sauce, M&M’s, Nutella etc.

    Enjoy this tasty classic Canadian carnival treat and feel free to tag @Maxemum_bbq with your end results!

    A beaver, with a pastry-shaped tail!

    This, my friends, is a beaver!!

    Sadly, I didn’t take this photo and haven’t seen a beaver in real life – yet! I have however seen a beavertail.

    Let me catch you up!

    Way back in 1978 a new pastry hit the streets in Canada. It was long and flat and shaped like a beaver’s tail, so naturally it was called just that!

    Choc-hazlenut beavertails – photo from BeaverTails site

    Since then beavertails have become part of Canada’s cultural identity. There are over 80 BeaverTails outlets across Canada and even two in Saudi Arabia. Rumour has it that there may soon be outlets in Japan, Lebanon and Egypt.

    Whenever visitors from Australia arrive I always make sure they experience a beavertail. The pastry tastes similar to a dounut, but you can get a variety of toppings. You can play it safe and order an original beavertail with cinnamon, sugar and lemon, or you can order one of the savory toppings available such as cheese and garlic, or if you are feeling like a sugar rush, you have an array of choices. Here’s just a few:

    Cinnamon and apple beavertails – photo from BeaverTails site

    • Maple butter (this isn’t really butter; it’s a pure maple syrup product)
    • Chocolate hazelnut
    • Banana and chocolate
    • Apple and cinnamon (with swirls of caramel)
    • Cheesecake
    • Vanilla icing with crumbled Oreo
    • Chocolate hazelnut with Reese’s Pieces and peanut butter drizzle

    To be left in no doubt as to their popularity, the BeaverTails company use 21.1 tons of chocolate hazelnut spread per year – equivalent to the weight of five elephants and 12 beavers.

    Special notice: No beavers were harmed in the writing of this post.

    • Posts
    • Latest Activity
    • Photos

    Putting a beavertail to a car hauler trailer.

    My buddy built this, and its a bit too low to load on his trailer without major contortions of the raise-the-truck-bumper dig-a-hole-for-the-trailer-tires type.

    Well, if you don’t want to drag the headers that is.

    Anyways, after showing it for a season, he has changed it up some with cal-tracs, lighter drag wheels and drag radials, nitrous, etc.

    He likes to trailer it to the drags just to eliminate the drama in case of breakage. To each his own, right.

    So we are going to use the tie-downs in the barn-shop floor to do some creative cutting, heating, and jacking to do a controlled bend and add a beavertail to his trailer to improve the breakover angle and make it easier to load. The trailer needs refreshed anyways, so shorter wheels/tires and dropping the floor on on the “soon” list too.

    But first we are deciding the amount (or degrees) of bend to add.

    My green trailer has 5 degrees. It sits on 14″ ranger wheels with ST tires with torsion axles and 4′ ramps. Its low and easy to load.

    The yellow trailer has 12 degrees (subtract one for the deck being 1 degree off level). It is a converted boat trailer with leafs and 15″ ST tires, and 5′ ramps Somewhat taller but still easy to load.

    (Don’t mind the coon poop on the trailer deck. I’m addressing THAT particular problem.)

    So he just needs to decide how many degrees he wants to add. I’m thinking 12 might be a bit much, his ramps are 5′, his trailer sits higher too.

    Welcome to our series, Iconic Canadian Food! You may know which classic Canadian dishes you like, but do you know the stories behind them? Gabby Peyton shares the back stories of a smorgasbord of iconic Canadian dishes. This month Gabby explores the history of the Beaver Tail, one of Canada’s most emblematic foods (through its connection to our national animal) .

    How to make beavertails

    Ah, the mighty beaver. Canada’s national animal, found on the flipside of the 5-cent coin and also a beloved pastry.

    There aren’t many things that taste better after an outdoor skate than a Beaver Tail. Deep fried to perfection in hot oil — crispy on the outside and soft on the inside — then covered in cinnamon sugar. This Canuck crowd-pleaser has become an emblem of Canadiana, as synonymous with the country as poutine or the butter tart, but its connection to the national symbol sets it apart, somehow.

    Are Beaver Tails the most Canadian treat of them all? Well, you know you’ve hit it big when Obama drops by during his first official presidential visit to Ottawa in 2009, you’re a question in Trivial Pursuit (which was invented in Halifax, in case you were wondering) and on Jeopardy, and the term Beaver Tail can be found in the Canadian Oxford dictionary.

    What is A Beaver Tail Pastry?

    The Beaver Tail is a fried-dough pastry made with whole wheat flour and pulled by hand to resemble the long, flat tail of a beaver. It’s then topped with a myriad of delicious garnishes — anything from the classic cinnamon and sugar to whipped cream and Nutella are fair game.

    Contrary to popular belief, the Queues de Castor as they are known in Canada’s other official language weren’t invented in Quebec. But did you know they weren’t invented in Ottawa either?

    The Short Tale of the Long Beaver Tail

    In the late 1970s, Grant and Pam Hooker began selling the iconic Canadian dainty west of Ottawa at the Killaloe craft and community fair. Grant Hooker asserts the recipe they use is third generation, handed down to him by his German-Canadian grandmother. She called the deep-fried pastries she made for breakfast keekla, German for “little cake.” The Hookers used this very recipe for keekla, but it wasn’t until their daughter likened the long flat pastries to beaver tails that the name was coined and quickly trademarked.

    But the roots of this tail also go back well before the Hookers’ ingenious daughter named the pastries. Before the arrival of European settlers, Indigenous peoples would cook beaver tails on an open flame in order to access the meat inside the thick tail skin. New arrivals were later inspired to cook their fried dough in the same manner.

    Similar to bannock, another Iconic Canadian Food explored in this series, Beaver Tails don’t require rising. Early settlers referred to this type of bread as “baking day bread,” and there’s a similar version of it in the United States called Elephant Ears (though it has never reached the same fame as its Canuck cousin).

    Beaver Tails Take Flight

    The flagship BeaverTails store opened in Ottawa’s favourite Byward Market in 1980, offering a variety of toppings to please hungry market goers. But when the Beaver Tail made its appearance along the Rideau Canal in the winter of 1981 it really became the iconic dish it is today. The donut-bannock hybrid has become associated with a good skate along the canal, another iconic Canadian landmark, with the convenience of a counter right on the canal. The 20,000 daily skaters sporting mittens and toques, which are almost as Canadian as Beaver Tails themselves, have been devouring them by the million ever since. There’s always a lineup.

    In the early 2000s, long-time employee Pino Di Loia took over the business with his wife Tina and brother Anthony and began a larger expansion of the brand across the country and the world. Today there are more than one hundred places to enjoy a Beaver Tail across Canada, from the Loop skating rink in St. John’s, Newfoundland to the top of Grouse Mountain in British Columbia.

    There are also outlets in Japan, South Korea and the United Arab Emirates. Regardless of where the franchise opens, their classic Canadiana decor, decked out with antlers on the wall and lots of red plaid, echoes the iconic sweet treat loved by Canadians all over.

    MORE READING

    • Iconic Canadian Food: The History of the Butter Tart
    • Iconic Canadian Food: Canada’s Love of Ketchup Chips
    • Iconic Canadian Food: The Evolution of Poutine

    Iconic Canadian Foods is written by Gabby Peyton. Gabby is based in St. John’s, Newfoundland and blogs at The Food Girl in Town. She’s a culinary adventurer and freelance writer, focusing on travel, food and drink writing with a dash of historical work. You can follow Gabby on social media at Facebook, Twitter and Instagram.

    U.S. President Barack Obama gave a local high school student the thrill of her life when he decided to satisfy his sweet tooth with a Canadian delicacy: that sugar-coated, deep-fried pastry called a Beavertail.

    “I looked at it like why not come here to look close at history – as close as I can.” – Jose Casimiri, 19, on why he showed up at Parliament Hill

    OTTAWA–U.S. President Barack Obama gave a local high school student the thrill of her life when he decided to satisfy his sweet tooth with a Canadian delicacy: that sugar-coated, deep-fried pastry called a Beavertail.

    “I was screaming up and down,” said 17-year-old Jessica Milien when a U.S. Secret Service agent appeared at the window of the Beavertail hut on George St. and said the president had asked for one of the hot pastries during a surprise stop in the historic ByWard Market.

    “My co-worker was nice enough to be like, `Go ahead, Jessica, we know you love him so much. Go ahead,'” said Milien.

    She chose to make him the Obamatail – a version of the dessert coated with cinnamon and sugar and topped with a whipped-cream O drizzled with chocolate sauce and maple butter. Ottawa-based Beaver Tails Canada Inc. created it in his honour and served it at the Canadian embassy in Washington, D.C., during last month’s presidential inauguration.

    Milien delivered the treat to Obama as he was emerging from the indoor market across the street, where his unexpected visit had drawn screams and cheers from shoppers as he wandered through the aisles and paused to chat with vendors and buy gifts for his family.

    Hundreds lined the streets to catch a glimpse of the presidential motorcade as it sped through downtown Ottawa. And the thousands gathered on the lawn of Parliament Hill roared when Obama paused to wave from behind bulletproof glass as he arrived for his meeting with Prime Minister Stephen Harper, and then again when he left the building.

    His stroll through the market was a return to the easygoing style he displayed on the campaign trail. It was a seemingly impromptu visit from a master at endearing himself to the public, with just the right gestures – buying maple leaf sugar cookies for his girls, a scarf for his wife and paying with Canadian currency – to turn this brief working visit into an indelible local memory.

    “He’s really just a down-to-earth guy,” Milien said of Obama, who asked her name and posed for a photo with her.

    Adnan Ustun was thrilled when Obama stopped to buy a key-chain with a moose on it for his daughter at OXXO, the gift store he manages in the market. But Ustun also got a souvenir – the $5 bill Obama used to pay for it.

    “It was (an) absolutely amazing day for me,” Ustun said as he wrapped the bill in plastic.

    There were no such intimate moments for the crowd on Parliament Hill, but the mood was nonetheless one of joyous anticipation as about 2,500 people planted themselves in the snow behind barricades – some as early as 7 a.m. – to wait for a chance to see the president.

    Alison Smith and her 14-year-old son Thomas left their home in Rockland, outside Ottawa, around 5:30 a.m. and began scouting for the spot that would give them the best chance to see the motorcade.

    They had started out at the barricades below Centre Block, where they knew Obama would be stepping out of his limousine to greet Harper, but then an RCMP officer had suggested the motorcade would follow the same route as Harper.

    When the Prime Minister arrived they scooted far away from the crowd to a snow-filled corner outside the East Block building.

    “I always look for the best spot, not where the sheep are,” Smith said. Things did not turn out as she had hoped, however. There were flashing lights, the sounds of a helicopter overhead – but the pair didn’t get their close-up glimpse of Obama.

    Jose Casimiri, 19, who arrived on Parliament Hill holding a Canadian newspaper from the day after Obama won the election, said just the chance to be part of history was enough to convince him to join the crowds, even though he knew there was little chance of seeing him.

    “I looked at it like, why not come here to look close at history – as close as I can,” he said. “I saw his hand and I was like `Yeah!’ and then the truck pulled up and blocked the view, but still. At least I’m walking away with a piece of Obama.”

    When you go to culinary school, you expect that you’ll get all the basics in fast: chopping, sautéing, grilling, braising. From there, you might move onto advanced topics, like classical French sauces or Indian spices. But what comes after that? Sous vide cookery? The use of liquid nitrogen to make sake sorbet?

    Try “beaver tail cooking” — at least if you’re among a certain group of culinary students at the International Culinary Center of New York.

    That’s right: the furry creatures are good for things beside being cute, building dams and providing pelts for retro hats. They also make for some interesting eating.

    Jeff Butler, the instructor leading the lesson, which you can see in the video above, admits that he’d never before cooked a beaver tail. But he sees that it’s a fatty, tough muscle, so he decides to crisp up the skin on the outside before finishing the cooking in the oven.

    How does it taste? Tough, greasy and bland, according to the students in the class. One says he “wouldn’t kill a beaver” to get a taste of the tail. But if you happen to be killing one anyway, why not be sustainable about it?

    Indeed, beaver may actually be having something of an unlikely moment. You can also find a recipe for braised beaver tail in the new cookbook by Martin Picard, the chef of world-renowned Montreal restaurant Au Pied de Cochon.

    CORRECTION: This post initially mentioned that beaver pelts are used to make shaving brushes. They are not. Badger pelts are.

    When it’s time to spice up your diet, you can’t go wrong with cactus!

    Cactus, also called prickly pear, has three edible parts, each with its own unique flavor. You can use the body of the plant–also called the cactus leaf, pad, or “nopales” in Spanish–as a vegetable, fresh or cooked. In spring and summer months, you can enjoy its fruit as a sweet and healthy and dessert. Finally, if you’re lucky enough to catch this plant’s bright flowers in bloom, you can add them to salads, or use them as a festive garnish for desserts and drinks.

    Read on to learn all about this delicious plant: how it tastes, what to serve it with, and how to cook cactus for any occasion.

    What Does Cactus Taste Like?

    Before we learn how to cook cactus, you must be wondering how this unusual ingredient will interact with the other flavors on your plate. Cactus leaves, or nopales, are most commonly used in savory dishes. They are tart, fresh, and herbaceous with a lemony bite, adding an earthy but refreshing dimension to any dish. Some say the flavor is like cooked green beans. Others find they taste more like bell peppers. They’re perfect for vegetarian meals because their texture is thick, hearty and filling, earning them the nickname “green steak.” Nopales are acidic, so they pair well with hearty fats, like Mexican cheese or grilled red meat.

    How to make beavertails

    The flavor of the cactus fruit is more like melon: sweet, but without the tangy bite of citrus. It’s called a cactus pear due to its resemblance in shape and size rather than similarity in taste or texture. Beneath its thick skin, the flesh is juicy, not mealy or grainy. Its flavor is bland enough to pair with lots of breakfast and dessert options, from yogurt and granola to sorbets and baked goods. It can be made into jam, syrup, or juice, mixed into lemonade, or blended into cocktails.

    Now that you know what exciting flavors are in store, you must be anxious to learn how to cook cactus for your next meal! But to make the most of this versatile ingredient, you’ll want to ensure it’s properly prepared first, which means thoroughly cleaning it, and removing all of its sharp thorns.

    Learn all about cactuses:

    How to make beavertails

    How To Prepare Cactus Leaves

    Plenty of experienced chefs have no idea how to cook cactus, mostly because they are afraid to prepare it! The process is easy, though, so long as you’re armed with the right tools. Some markets sell nopales with their spines already removed, which will save you some time. If not, though, you’ll want to protect your hands with kitchen gloves as you shave off the skin and needles with a large knife.

    Lay the cactus pad flat on a sturdy cutting board, and be sure to aim the blade away from your body as you work in case the knife catches or slips. Since the narrow edges of the cactus leaf can be especially tough, use a vegetable peeler to remove any thorns that are deeply rooted in the plant. Go over these edges a few times to make sure you don’t miss any!

    After the spines are removed, give the cactus pads a thorough rinse. Drain them in a colander, pat dry, or leave them wet if you plan to boil them.

    The Sawdust Factory Presents

    Paddle Making

    Episode Three: A Simple Beavertail Style Canoe Paddle

    Here is a basic and good-looking canoe paddle that’s very easy to make using straightforward methods, utilizing western red cedar to keep it cheap, light and strong. The finished paddle is 57″ overall, blade is 6 1/4″ wide by 28″ long by 5/16″ thick, and the loom, or shaft, is oval in cross section, measuring 1 1/8″ x 1 1/4″, which doesn’t sound like much, but feels very distinct. The handle is a basic T-grip, and final weight is a hair over one pound.

    First things first: get a plan, or draw one up. Here at The Sawdust Factory we happen to have the fine old book “Canoe Paddles” by Graham Warren & David Gidmark (search ISBN 1552095258 on Bookfinder.com), and from a table of offsets given in it, have lofted and cut out a half-blade shape to a thin piece of plywood for a durable pattern we can use over and over if we wish. Half-plans are ever the order of the day for boat stuff around here, to guarantee perfect symmetry.

    Building gets started with lumber selection. First, we grab a board with unusual and uneven coloration to make interesting and pretty blade features, and then a chocolate colored board is picked for the central lamination piece that gives a decorative dark center stripe feature, and runs end to end for continuity — or in other words, the center “strip” will connect blade, loom, and grip into one unit. The center strip is 1 1/8″ wide (width of the loom) x 5/16″ thick (thickness of the blade) x 57″ long (overall length of the paddle). For the blade, 5/16″ thick strips are ripped off the colorful board, and then ripped again to a width that’ll cause a 6 1/4″ wide blade to happen. Here at The Sawdust Factory, we adhere to a strict policy of never doing math in public, so you’re on your own on that one. The inner blade pieces will be 28″, or the length of the blade; and the outer two will be shorter, use the pattern to determine.

    The blade will be essentially flat, with rounded edges. A “squashed oval” cross section is more typically used on this sort of paddle, but a flat one is far easier to make; and since ease of manufacture is a very desirable feature in a homemade paddle, we will just have to try it and see how it works.

    Cover it with Saran Wrap. Then clamp or screw a solid chunk of wood to one side to act as a fence, as seen at top in this photo.

    Do a dry run with all your paddle blade pieces, lay ’em all down against the fence. Now screw or clamp a few blocks of scrap wood along the side opposite the fence, leave just the right amount of room for some wedges, which we use to apply clamping pressure. Now take apart, apply glue, reinstall, and give it a big ol’ wedgie by tapping ’em in gently with a light hammer.

    Stack weights on top to prevent bowing, and keep it flat. Use more Saran Wrap to keep the weights un-gluey.

    Incidentally, we like Titebond II waterproof wood glue best. You should use whatever you are most comfortable with.

    In this case I messed up a little, and cut the outer panels of the blade a little short. No problem, I just used the pattern as kind of a French curve to fake it. Don’t sweat the little things.

    I cut out the top outline right away so the corners won’t catch on things, but leave the end square so it can absorb any abuse while I work on the shaft and grip. Shaping the blade edges is always the very last step in paddle making, otherwise repairing dings along the edges will be a recurring theme.

    In the photo at right, I add two face pieces to the loom, each of which has been ripped to a thickness painstakingly calculated by experts in the field to arrive at a total overall thickness of 1 1/4″.

    Now to start on the handle. I never was any good at visualizing how to work up a laminated blank, so I just play it by ear and use the final result as a model to work from to get the next one right.

    Gotta start somewhere, so here we have two 1 1/4″ thick blocks glued to the sides of the loom, after the loom sides have been planed or sanded flat and true for a good glue joint.

    Draw your outline, and take it to the band saw for a little loving attention. Profiling may not be politically correct, but it’s just the thing for wood carvers.

    Here are the tools of the trade: large and small draw knife; round bladed micro plane; the ever-efficient Shinto rasp; the beloved block plane, and last but not least: the 25-pound bag of no. 8 bird shot.

    In order to arrive at uniformly round surfaces, it is exceedingly wise to stay very flat and un-round until the very last minute. Chamfers are your friend at this critical time in your young paddle’s highly impressionable life.

    Chamfers are easy to gage by eye for consistency, and easy to maintain halfway accurately as you work. Start with four at 45 degrees, or so, to create an octagon cross section. The more accurate your chamfers are, the more consistent your finished roundness will be.

    Please scroll down towards the bottom of THIS PAGE for more on accurately shaping symmetrical roundy-round things.

    Not so sure I like the lamination scheme on the grip, though; but at least I’m confident it’ll be strong and comfortable.

    In fact, it is my experience that first paddles are seldom, if ever, much more than prototypes. My first stab at an beavertail paddle, the one on the right in photo at right, is a perfect example: it’s not easy to love because it’s a little heavy, and because the grip isn’t all that comfortable. But it certainly has potential, and is still lots of fun to use. So voila: A new and improved version! Why not? Making it was a fun and pleasant diversion.

    Final weight for the new paddle is 16.1 oz. I can already tell it’s plenty strong; Plan B was to add fiberglass, but I am going to skip it as unnecessary. The original came in at 22.8 oz. Now that’s what we call progress here at The Sawdust Factory.

    Finishing Note: There’z at least a million options for paddle finishes, everything from bare wood, to oil, to epoxy & fiberglass. Consistent with my OCD for lightest weight to strength and durability ratio, in most cases I give the wood a very light coating of epoxy that’s immediately smeared/rubbed off with a rag, and then a second, more normal coat applied with a brush. This method keeps raw wood from sucking up too much resin, yet results in a nice hard shell surface for ding resistance. I then sand the blade smooth, and apply varnish for a pretty finish; but leave a plain epoxy finish on the loom and grip to prevent a slippery feel. It’s a tough thing, whereas you want a nice shiny glossy finish to be proud of, but an oily slippery paddle is not a lot of fun to honk on.

    User Report: This paddle turns out to be an outstanding success on the water, have no idea why there was ever any doubt. While I generally play with my homemade paddles for a dutiful amount of time so I can say I did, I almost always revert back to my beloved Zaveral Power Surge for huffing it back to the put-in because I am an aggressive paddler and cherish high performance stuff. But this one remained in my paws all the way back, and that’s really saying something. It just has a very pleasant and fun feel. Who knows, maybe it’ll even encourage me to slow my pace down a little . nah.

    A gooey Canadian country specialty comes to life in Queens

    By Aaron Goldfarb | Published Oct 28, 2015 8:00 PM

    How to make beavertails

    Luckily my wife was already asleep when I drunkenly stumbled in the front door soaking wet, smelling like I’d cleaned chimneys all night, sporting a cheesy denim jacket with a flaming “Aaron” airbrushed on the back of it. I was glad I wouldn’t have to explain what had transpired over the previous four hours.

    I’d spent the drizzly evening at M. Wells Steakhouse in Long Island City, ostensibly celebrating the stateside launch of Forty Creek Whisky, an emerging Canadian brand. I should have known it wouldn’t be your typical, closely-managed PR event when I arrived at the restaurant’s unmarked garage door entrance. I could already smell searing meat the second my Uber turned onto Crescent Street, still two blocks from M. Wells. By the time I made my way to the restaurant’s patio I was engulfed in the potent smell. And finally aware what was causing it.

    Beaver tail roasting over a massive fire pit set up right next to a bar where bartenders wore comical, oversized Mountie hats.

    How to make beavertailsThe tails on the fire. Gabi Porter

    The party invite had specified a preferred attire of “Canadian tuxedos.” Though I’m not exactly one to follow dress codes, I’d nonetheless arrived in a pair of jeans and a blue chambray shirt. Inside the restaurant—closed to the public this Tuesday—was a table where guests could select an ’80s-style denim jacket to get airbrushed with any number of “Canadian” images, from a maple leaf to a moose to, well, flames. Canadian music played on the sound system. Barenaked Ladies, Tegan and Sara, and, of course, Rush.

    Luckily—so you don’t think we were being insensitive bigots—we had the blessing of actual Canadians, including M. Wells owner and chef Hugue Dufour. Hugue is Canadian—Quebecois no less!—but he’s also a gastronomic mad man. A mad man who actually thought it would be a good idea to serve a bunch of city slicker New Yorkers grilled beaver tail.

    “You eat it just like bone marrow,” he explained to me as we stood near the fire, watching it sizzle. “Slice it open, then dip the bread in the goo.” Most guests faced the tail with a mixture of repulsion and curiosity—but we’d have a couple hours before deciding whether to munch on beaver or not.

    How to make beavertailsHugh Dufour, keeper of the flame.

    Before then, we would be served a Bacchanalian feast, family-style. It proved much better than my previous Canadian meals of poutine and Labatt Blues. Canapés of saucissons and chicken liver mousse-smeared rye bread. Appetizers like trouts meuniere, herring with potatoes, and, my favorite, Coquilles St. Hugue, crab bordered by pastry and pureed potato and smothered in cheese. Later courses included a deliciously dressing-drenched chef’s salad (“I am the chef. I made a salad. Chef’s salad!” smirked Hugue), duck and foie gras served inside a roasted pumpkin, a pork tagine made with massive hunks of blood sausage and cotechino, and a truly spectacular pâté chinois.

    Of course, since this was a whisky launch party, there was enough booze to go around, too. Four expressions of Forty Creek whiskies were offered neat, or lovingly turned into cocktails by Karin Stanley, a bartender at Queens’ best cocktail bar Dutch Kills…and another Canadian to boot. They were even good enough to make you rethink your attitude toward Canadian whiskey—packed with a dark fruitiness and rich cakey qualities.

    But enough dawdling. It was time to dig into the tail.

    It had been cooked skin on, just barely above the flames. Sometimes Hugue even cooks it directly on the coals, so the skin turns as black as the coals themselves. Once you peel away the blistered skin, you encounter fat. Lots of it. There’s also some tendons, a few muscles, and a single bone right down the middle.

    How to make beavertailsGabi Porter

    Almost completely devoid of actual meat, the white tail fat was delicate and creamy, quite rich, and, gooey like brains.

    “This used to be a native Canadian thing,” Hugue explained, “But it is not something people commonly eat these days.”

    Like barbecue squirrel, which hit the table next, just as the skies began falling. As the rain pounded down we nibbled on tiny squirrel legs, like buffalo chicken wings but with less meat and more teensy bones getting in the way of every bite.

    “Did you catch these suckers in Central Park?” some wiseguy cracked.

    “Oh no. They’re actually expensive as fuck!” Hugue retorted, grabbing a bottle of whisky and a blow torch, ready to flambé our Canadian dessert.

    MORE TO READ

    • How to make beavertails

    This Restaurant Reveals Your Favorite Thai Dishes Might Actually Be Lao

    The sibling duo behind the new Oklahoma City eatery is giving the lesser-known cuisine its due.

    How to make beavertails

    In These AAPI Communities, Meals Arrive With a Pleasant Surprise

    How restaurants and cooks are thanking loyal customers.

    How to make beavertails

    This Glorious Root Is Northeast Argentina’s Pantry Staple

    Meet the cooks and farmers bringing it to a national audience.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Do you ever find yourself cooking something and then having trouble removing it from the pan?
    If so, you might want to try these three simple tips.
    If you’re looking for ways to keep food from sticking to the bottom of your pots and pans, there are several things you can do.
    Here are three of my favorite methods.
    These tips will help you remove food from your pots and pans without burning yourself!

    How to prevent the rice from sticking to the pot?

    Rice is a grain that contains gluten. Gluten is a protein found in wheat, barley, rye, and oats. It is used to thicken sauces, bind ingredients together, and give structure to baked goods. In addition to being used in baking, gluten is also used to make pasta and other types of bread. Gluten is present in many different forms. It exists in two main forms: soluble and insoluble. Soluble gluten includes proteins called gliadin and glutenin. Insoluble gluten includes proteins called prolamins. Proteins are chains of amino acids. Amino acids are the building blocks of proteins. Gluten is formed when these chains of amino acids link together. There are three ways to remove gluten from your diet. First, avoid products containing gluten. Second, try to reduce the amount of gluten you eat. Third, if you still have problems with gluten after trying to cut back on gluten, talk to your doctor about using a gluten-free diet.

    What are the health benefits of eating rice?

    Rice is a staple food in many countries around the world. Rice is a good source of carbohydrates, fiber, iron, magnesium, phosphorus, potassium, zinc, copper, manganese, vitamin B1, niacin, folate, riboflavin, pantothenic acid, thiamine, and selenium. These nutrients help maintain overall health and well-being. Rice is also a great source of energy. One cup of cooked white rice provides approximately 200 calories. This is comparable to 1/3 cup of cooked oatmeal or 3/4 cup of cooked beans.

    How to prevent the rice from sticking to the bottom of a rice cooker?

    To prevent the rice from sticking, place a piece of aluminum foil under the bottom of the rice cooker. It helps to prevent the rice from getting stuck to the bottom of the rice pot.

    What makes the rice stick to the pan?

    Rice sticks to the bottom of the pan because of the sticky nature of the starch. Starch is found in many types of grain, such as wheat, corn, barley, oats, rye, millet, sorghum, and quinoa. Starchy vegetables such as potatoes, sweet potatoes, carrots, peas, beans, and lentils also contain starch. Starch is composed of two parts: amylose and amylopectin. Amylose is a long chain molecule that forms strong bonds between molecules. Amylopectin is a shorter chain molecule that forms weaker bonds between molecules. As the starch cooks, the amylose chains begin to break down into smaller pieces, forming new bonds with other molecules. This process creates a network of weak bonds that holds the starch together. How does the starch get stuck to the bottom of a pan?

    How to cook rice the correct way in a pot?

    To cook rice correctly, you need to follow these steps. 1 Wash the rice thoroughly. 2 Drain the rice well. 3 Add the rice to the pot. 4 Cover the pot and bring the liquid to a boil. 5 Reduce the heat to low and let simmer until the liquid is absorbed and the rice is cooked. 6 Fluff the rice with a fork and serve.

    Other FAQs about Rice which you may be interested in.

    1How to cook rice properly? 2What is the difference between white and brown rice?

    How to cook rice the correct way in a rice cooker?

    Rice is a staple food in many countries around the world. It is used as a side dish, main course, snack, dessert, breakfast, lunch, dinner, and even supper. In addition to being a healthy food, it is also very versatile. It can be cooked in different ways depending on what you want to achieve from it. For instance, if you want to eat it plain, you can simply boil it. However, if you want to enjoy it with other dishes, you can sautee it. If you want to serve it as a dessert, you can bake it. And if you want to enjoy its health benefits, you can steam it.

    Related Posts

    Rice is a staple food in Asia, especially in China. Rice is also known as…

    Rice is a staple food in Asian countries and is also commonly eaten in other…

    I’m always confused when it comes to cooking rice. How much water should I put…

    The type of cooking pots used will very much determine if rice will stick at the bottom of the pot or not. The non-stick cookware for example was a much-anticipated savior but they too fell victim to the stubborn rice grains that stuck at the bottom of the pot. There are up to 40,000 varieties of rice that behave differently during cooking. Some types of rice take a lot of time to cook and might require you to add more water.

    Adding water at times is not very wise because the already cooked rice at the bottom of the pot will overcook and stick to the cooking pot.Other types of rice must be properly rinsed before cooking, failure to which starch will make the rice stick to the bottom of the pot. If you cook rice with less water, it will also stick at the bottom of the pot, and if you use a light cooking pot that transmits heat fasterthen the rice grains will stick at the bottom of the pot, or worse still it will get burnt.

    How to keep rice from sticking to the bottom of the pot

    By now is it very obvious that rice cooking is not just about boiling water and dumping the grains in the hot oily and salty water. You have to stay put and adjust the heat with regards to the type of rice that you are cooking and the type of pot that you are using. Some rice will cook without sticking in low heat and some other types will cook perfectly well in a lightweight pot but with the heat reduced. Below are other methods to keep rice from sticking to the cooking pot.

    Ensure that all the starch is washed from the rice

    You might be thinking that by not thoroughly washing your rice grains, you are conserving nutrients. On the contrary, you are leaving all the starch that will make it stick to the bottom of the cooking pot. Ensure that your rice is thoroughly washed to get rid of the starch and to prevent the cloudy or sticky look after cooking.

    Cook rice with enough water

    If you cook rice with less water, it will start to stick at the bottom of the pot and if you are not close-by it will burn. Ideally, if it starts sticking and is uncooked then best you add water to it but chances are still high that the rice will still stick to the cooking pot.

    Cook rice on low heat

    Once you get your rice going on the stove, you will have to reduce the heat and let it cook slowly. Be sure to stick around so that you can take it off just in time to prevent it from sticking to the cooking pot.

    Loosen the bottom layer

    You might not have succeeded in preventing your rice from sticking to the pan but you can loosen up the bottom layer. Once your rice is cooked, don’t remove it from the cooking pot, instead remove the pot from the heat, retain the cover and let it sit for 10 minutes or more and then serve, the sticky grains will have loosened up. This process works for almost all types of rice including low-quality types of rice.

    Use olive oil

    Olive oil will not only prevent the rice from sticking to the pot but it will also add flavor.Add the olive oil to water and then rice, when it starts to boil, it will be dispersed to the bottom part of the cooking pot. Olive oil is a good alternative to butter and the perfect flavor enhancer for the good quality but flavorless rice.

    Avoid stirring the rice when cooking

    Stirring rice while cooking encourages the release of starch, which then makes the rice stick together and in the long run it will stick to the bottom of the cooking pot. The best way to cook rice is to leave the lid tightly covered and cook on moderate heat. Once cooked let it rest before serving.

    Batter your rice cooking pot

    Greasing is a known method of keeping food from sticking to the cooking pot or the baking tin, and which can be convenient when it comes to making rice. Before cooking your rice you could grease the pot with oil or butter to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

    Understanding the different types of rice and their cooking quality

    • The Ponni boiled rice- this is the best type of rice, it is of high quality known to give a good yield and will never stick at the bottom of the pan.
    • The Deluxe raw rice- can also be described as low-quality rice, and is usually sold to middle-class individuals.The rice doesn’t have the best characteristics as far as not sticking to the pot is concerned, and will require a lot of attention and skills when cooking, to prevent them from sticking to the bottom of the cooking pot.
    • Basmati parboiled rice- is an average quality type of rice, and needs special treatment and a lot of water during cooking to not stick to the cooking pot. The export quality long grain rice must be soaked and needs more cooking.
    • The Basmati raw rice-basmati rice is sweet, and quite fragrant, but requires a lot of attention during cooking for it not to stick to the bottom of the pan.
    • The Pongal rice- If you don’t have the best cooking pot, better keep away from the Pongal rice because it is usually cooked for mashing, and will surely stick but not completely.
    • The Deluxe rice boiled- this is a poor grade type of rice, and will break during cooking, it is not flavorful and will surely stick at the bottom of the cooking pot.

    Conclusion

    If different types of rice constantly stick to the bottom of your cooking pot, could because you are using a poor quality cooking pan. The quality of the rice also plays a significant role. Too much heat will encourage the rice to stick and burn and less cooking water is also a recipe for disaster. Anytime that you cook rice, be sure to stay close by so that you can take it off the heat on time thus prevent it from sticking.

    FAQs

    What is the best method of preventing rice from sticking to a stainless cooking pot?

    Before cooking add oil first to the stainless cooking pan.

    How can I make my rice less sticky?

    Ensure that you have rinsed away all the starch in your rice.

    If used correctly, a rice cooker should cook rice without any sticking and without any water left in the bottom of the pan.

    Rice sticking to the bottom of a pan is because of; a lack of water, overcooking or too much starch. You can avoid this by adding more water, rinsing the rice before cooking, adding a tablespoon of oil, or steaming the rice once cooked.

    It’s important to remember is that there are many different types of the rice grain that all require their own specific ratio of water and their own cooking time.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    For example, brown rice requires more water and longer cooking time than white rice. Also, starchy short-grain sushi rice will require a different ratio of water to a long grain basmati rice.

    Though it will mostly be down to the quantity of water added, if your rice is constantly sticking after adjustments, it is also worth checking to see if the bottom of your pan hasn’t been damaged and if the non-stick lining (if included) has not been scratched; this damage may also be causing your rice to stick unnecessarily.

    How To Prevent Rice From Sticking From The Bottom Of The Rice Cooker

    Firstly check that your inner pan of the cooker has not been damaged in any way or that the non-stick lining (if included) has not been scratched. If there is some damage, you may have to purchase a new inner pan.

    Most of the time sticking can be prevented by preparing and cooking the rice correctly. Again this depends on the type of rice grain you are using.

    The best thing to start doing is to follow the cooking instructions provided on each packet of rice that you buy or finding the correct water ratio online for your specific grain. However, there are a few little extra tips that you can follow that will help prevent your rice from sticking in your rice cooker.

    Rinse The Rice Before Cooking

    Using a muslin cloth bag or mesh strainer, rinse and drain the rice in cold water to release some of the scratches from the grain. Do this about 3 times and you will notice the water will become slightly clearer every time you rinse it.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Again depending on the type of grain you are cooking will vary how much starch you can wash off. However, washing some of the scratch-off any rice grain will reduce the amount of scratch released while cooking which in turn can make the rice more likely to stick.

    Stir The Rice Into The Water

    Once rinsed, add the rice to the cooker with the correct ratio of water according to the packet instructions and the type of grain you are using.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Before turning on the machine, stir the rice a couple of times with a wooden spoon. This ensures that every grain of rice is separate and that you start the cooking process without any grains already stuck to the bottom.

    Add A Teaspoon Of Oil

    Adding a little bit of fat such as a teaspoon of vegetable oil will help lubricate the rice and encourage the grains not to stick to each other during the cooking process.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Add the oil just before turning on the cooker; the oil will sit on top of the water initially but once it starts cooking it will immerse with the rice.

    Once Cooked, Leave The Rice To Steam

    Once the cooker clicks off and has finished cooking. Leave the rice on the warm setting for about 5 minutes before removing the lid. This allows the rice to steam and any remaining to water to evaporate.

    Allowing a little bit more time for the cooker to release any excess water will mean the rice will be dry and fluffy rather than wet and stodgy.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Preparing a potful of rice isn’t a tough task to do. Whether as a main course or a side dish, rice serves to charm your cooking table with much taste and scrumptious smell. Despite being remarkably easy, few cooks still fail to cook rice in a way that doesn’t stick to the bottom of the rice cooker. Maybe a lack of effective cooking strategies makes their rice left sticking to the bottom of the rice cooker. Well, it is not something that you can’t learn. All you need a little push in the right direction.

    In this article, we will make you go through some cautions and the easy go-to steps to avoid your deliciously cooked rice from sticking to the corners and bottom of your rice cooker or pot.

    Rice Sticking To Bottom Of Rice Cooker

    Not only does rice sticking to your cooker makes it tough for thorough washing, but it also alters the original pure taste of freshly cooked rice. Why risk the trouble and taste of your rice? Refer to the following steps:

    1. Use Cool Chilled Water:

    Before cooking, make sure to go through your quantity of rice under chilled cold water for a minute. Wash until the starch is gone. Take a mesh strainer, place your rice grains inside and rinse them with cold water as well inside the sink. Make sure to wet each grain of rice.

    This step is important as it removes the excessive layer of the starch out of your rice which usually makes it sticky to your rice cooker.

    1. Add Water To Cooker:

    Make sure to take a 1:1 ratio of rice and water and run it in your cooker. Reassure that the quantities of water aren’t less as it would burn your rice and stick it so baldy in your cooker. Besides, using excessive water would end up making your rice extra soggy and tasteless. So take care of that. If you are risking to add much water, then remember to add a bit of salt to the rice water for a good flavor.

    1. Use An Air Tight Lid:

    You don’t want your rice to catch extra moisture? Well, simply cover your rice cooker with a tight-fitting lid over it to catch an excessive stream. You rice would continue to cook in moisty space which will ultimately stop the rice sticking to the bottom of the cooker.

    1. DO NOT STIR!

    Please make sure to never stir your rice inside the cooker unnecessarily it would make 40% of your rice quantity to stick to the cooker’s bottom. Now you know why we have written that into CAPITAL. Hah.

    1. Rice Simmering:

    Make sure you simmer your rice for 15 to 18 minutes. Set the timer in your cooker to make it work efficiently.

    1. Splash A Layer Of Butter Inside Your Cooker:

    It is one of the many effective ways to make your rice stop sticking to the bottom of the cooker.

    Cooking rice may be one of the easiest chores in the kitchen, but knowing how to keep rice from sticking to rice cooker and how to cook the perfect rice is not everyone’s cup of tea. If there is a layer of rice stuck to the pot after cooking, cleaning it can be a bother. Not to mention, it potentially ruins the batch with a slight burnt smell.

    Many factors contribute to this problem. Pouring too little water, overcooking, not letting the rice sit for a while after cooking, a faulty rice cooker and others can be some of the most common reasons. While a new micom rice cooker often solves this problem, there are ways you can avoid rice sticking to rice cooker, with your old appliance too.

    To help you, we have put together a guide on how to cook perfect, fluffy and grainy rice in a rice cooker. This is your ultimate resource on how to keep rice from sticking to rice cooker.

    How to Keep Rice From Sticking to the Bottom of Rice Cooker

    Use a Rice Cooker with a Nonstick Inner pot

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Instances where rice sticks to bottom of rice cooker, happen more often with one that has a scratched inner pot; whether or not it was initially coated with a nonstick coating. To begin with, make sure that your rice cooker’s inner pan is not scratched in any way and that the nonstick lining is not scratched. If the rice cooker insert appears to be scratched or damaged in any other way, you may be better off with a new inner pot purchased for your model. Newer rice cooker models with stainless steel inner pots are known to be non-stick and are celebrated by users for this attribute.

    To remove the sticky rice from your cooker, use a wooden or a silicone spoon that doesn’t damage the nonstick enamel from the cooker. Metal spatulas will leave scratches on the surface. Also, when you are cleaning the rice cooker, use gentle exfoliating cleansers or nylon cleaning pads instead of metal scrubbers. This ensures longevity for your rice cooker. Not to mention, you won’t have to deal with rice sticking to your rice cooker just as often.

    Always Rinse the Rice Before Cooking

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    It’s always a good option to soak the rice for a few minutes and wash it off before putting it in the cooker.

    When rice is packed and stored, it develops a thin starch coating. Rinse and drain the rice in cold water using a muslin cloth bag or mesh strainer to remove some of the scratches from the grain. Repeat this process two to three times, and you will notice that the water becomes slightly clearer with each rinse. With less starch, your rice will be fluffier and less prone to sticking together. Fluffier rice is also less likely to stick to the bottom of the rice cooker.

    Lightly Spray the Pot With Cooking Spray

    Greasing your rice cooker properly prevents rice from accumulating at the bottom. To keep rice from sticking to the bottom of your rice cooker, lightly coat the sides and bottom of your cooker or pot with cooking spray. Spraying or lightly rubbing the cooking pot with a nonstick cooking spray or butter can also help keep the rice from sticking to the rice cooker. This method is particularly useful if your cooker lacks a nonstick liner or if the lining is scratched and/or damaged.

    Don’t Go Overboard with the Amount of Water

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    One of the most common mistakes that people do leading to a sticky batch of rice is that they put in a lot of water. It is a common blunder made by beginners.

    The general ratio of water to rice in a rice cooker is 1:1. Meaning, you only need 1 cup of water to cook 1 cup of rice. This ratio is applicable to white rice, however. A batch of brown rice will have different requisites. Similarly, if you’re making rice for sushi, the water requirement will be different. If you want to perfect these, we’d advise you to do a little trial and error and use special rice cookers for brown rice and sushi rice.

    Coming back to the point, anything above a 1:1 ratio will make your rice soft, mushy and sticky. In case you put too little water in a batch of rice than required, the rice will be hardened and still stick to the bottom of the rice cooker. Getting the water quantity right is where most people will resolve their problem sticky rice.

    Cook it, taste it and change your rice-to-water ratio accordingly for a larger rice cooker in the following time.

    Use A Teaspoon of Oil While Cooking Rice

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    If you don’t want to use cooking spray, add some oil to the rice cooker or rub it lightly with butter.

    One teaspoon of vegetable oil, for example, will help lubricate the rice and keep the grains from sticking together throughout the cooking time.

    Before turning on the cooker, add the oil; the oil will initially sit on top of the water, but after cooking begins, it will be submerged with the rice.

    Let Your Rice Rest After Cooking

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Once that rice is cooked, leave it in the cooker to stay warm for at least 10 minutes or up to a half-hour. The remaining steam will diffuse throughout the rice, and any stuck rice at the bottom of the cooker will slowly soften as it absorbs the steam.

    This resting period also allows the starches in the rice to cool and get a nice shape. After you open the rice cooker, fluff it with a fork. It will help the grains keep their structure rather than shattering or collapsing into a gooey mush.

    Conclusion

    Rice cooking is a simple task but the process can have its own complications if the basic rules are not followed. Furthermore, it’s no one-size-fits-all for all types of rice. White rice is different and requires different cooking procedure than brown rice or red rice for that matter. Our advice for you is to maintain a personal notebook and write down exactly what you did whenever your cooking results are flawless.

    Closely follow the above mentioned tips and we believe you wouldn’t have to worry about how to keep rice sticking to pot.

    Samantha runs the BKB Kitchen Appliances Lab where she oversees the content and testing related to kitchen and cooking appliances, tools, and gear; she’s an experienced product tester and developer, as well as recipe creator, trained in classic culinary arts and culinary nutrition. She has worked in test kitchens for small kitchen appliance brands and national magazines, including Family Circle and Ladies’ Home Journal.

    Rice is a staple part of different meals. In most parts of the world, most of the recipes have some rice in them. Cooking rice is not hard at all. If you have a rice cooker, it is the easiest meal to prepare. That is the main reason why a rice cooker is the most recommended method of preparing rice.

    If you use it correctly, the rice sticking to the rice cooker should not be a problem. Rice sticks to the bottom of a rice cooker for several reasons such as inadequate water, excessive starch, or overcooking. This post helps you learn how to keep rice from sticking to the bottom of a rice cooker. Let’s get started.

    Preventing Rice from Sticking to the Bottom of a Rice Cooker

    Before anything, you need to check to make sure that your cooker is not damaged. If it has a nonstick interior, you have to make sure that it is not scratched. If you notice any damage to the interior of the cooker, you might need to get yourself an inner pan.

    In most cases, you can prevent sticking by correct preparation and cooking of rice. This might depend solely on the type of rice you are cooking.

    First, you have to follow any instructions that come with the packet.

    There are additional tips that should help you prevent the rice from sticking to your cooker.

    Rinsing the Rice.

    You should use a mesh strainer or a muslin bag for this task. You should then rinse the rice using some cold water. This should help in releasing excess starches from the rice grains. Repeat this process around three times. The water should get clearer each time you rinse the rice.

    The amount of starch you can wash off depends on the type of grain. Reduction of starch reduces the likelihood of rice sticking.

    Stir the Rice

    After you rinse, you should add an adequate amount of water and the rice to the cooker. But before you turn the cooker on, you should stir the rice and water several times so that each grain becomes separate. If the grain is not already stuck to the bottom, it might not stick at all.

    Adding some Oil

    If you add some vegetable oil to the grains, they will be lubricated and they will not stick to each other when cooking.

    You should add a teaspoon of oil before turning on the cooker. You will notice that it sits at the top at first. However, once the cooking process starts, it will immerse.

    Leave it to Steam

    After it has cooked, you should leave it for a couple of minutes, around five, before you remove the lid. The rice will steam and all remaining water should evaporate. The result? The rice will be fluffy and dry, not stodgy and wet.

    Conclusion

    Cooking rice should be very simple. The best meals should have well-cooked rice. The tips we have provided above should help you cook the best rice for your family. Have fun cooking!

    Also, read:

    Feel free to share your observation with me in the comments section!

    Also, if you find the information in this post to be useful, be sure to share this post with your friends on Facebook, Twitter, and Pinterest.

    Table of Contents

    Lightly coat the sides and the bottom of your cooker or pot with butter, oil, or spray (Like Pam) to help keep rice from sticking to the bottom of your rice cooker. Pro Tip: Add some additional olive oil or butter to the water can help keep the grains from sticking together or to the pot.2 days ago.

    How do you keep rice from sticking to a stainless steel pan?

    For cooking rice, it will turn to Keep Warm mode automatically after the cooking is completed. It takes about 13 minutes to cook. For the best result, leave the lid closed and the cooker switched off for an additional 10-15 minutes after cooking is completed – this helps greatly to avoid sticking.

    Does rice stick to stainless steel?

    The best pots for cooking rice usually measure 3-5 quarts and are made with stainless steel and aluminum. These materials help distribute heat evenly, so rice is less likely to stick to the bottom. It’s also a good idea to use pots with a thick base, as this will prevent uneven hotspots.

    How do you stop rice from sticking to the bottom of the pan?

    Put your rice into a fine mesh strainer and run it under cool water in the sink. Try to rinse it for about 1 minute, or until all of the rice gets wet. Rice often has a layer of starch on it that can make it super sticky when it gets wet. Rinsing this off will help prevent it from sticking to your pot.

    Why do chefs use stainless steel pans?

    Chefs, professional cooks, and restaurants use stainless steel cookware. They prefer it because it’s practically indestructible. The construction and material offer superior heat distribution, and when used properly, a stainless steel pan can keep food from sticking.

    Will rice stick in stainless steel rice cooker?

    Many people wonder if the rice will stick to the bottom when it’s not non-stick. When you try to remove hot rice from the cooker, some grains stick to the hot surface. However, when the rice and pot cools down, the rice is easily removed with a spatula. The stainless steel inner pot can go into the dishwasher as well.

    Why does my rice always stick to the pot?

    The main culprits for rice sticking to the bottom of a pot or rice cooker are usually scratched or worn off non-stick coating and/or not using enough water. Adding proper lubrication and about 10% more water than the directions call for will usually solve the problem.

    How do you cook jasmine rice in a stainless steel pot?

    Stovetop Method Add the rice and 1 1/3 cups water to a saucepan with a lid. I prefer using a stainless steel saucepan for this. Reduce the heat to low, and let the rice simmer for another 9 to 10 minutes, until all the water has been absorbed. Turn off the heat, and leave the saucepan covered for about 10 to 15 minutes.

    What is the disadvantage of stainless steel?

    DISADVANTAGES OF STAINLESS STEEL Some of the primary disadvantages include its, high cost, especially when considered as the initial expense. When attempting to fabricate stainless steel without using the highest technology machines and proper techniques, it can be a difficult metal to handle.

    Does stainless steel mean non stick?

    Stainless steel pans are not non-stick. Unlike their non-stick counterparts, they’re not coated with a teflon surface. Instead, a stainless steel pan’s cooking surface is made of bare steel. If you know how to cook with a stainless steel pan, you can keep food from sticking to it.

    Is stainless steel better than non stick?

    Stainless steel pans and surfaces are the best for browning ingredients-and since they’re usually uncoated, unlike nonstick varieties, they are more durable and resistant to slip-ups in the kitchen. Pittman believes that the stainless steel fry or sauté pan is the best all-around option for home cooks. Jul 16, 2019.

    Can you make rice in stainless steel?

    Stainless steel pots are another great option for cooking rice. Not only is this material elegant, but it’s also easy to clean and helps retain the flavor of your food.

    Why is my jasmine rice sticky?

    When the now starch-coated rice hits the boiling water, the starch blooms and gets sticky. As the water is absorbed, and the rice grains get closer and closer together, they will begin to stick to one anther and form large clumps. The very simple solution is to rinse.

    Why is jasmine rice bad for you?

    Like all rices, jasmine rice is relatively high on the glycemic index. Even brown jasmine rice can cause your blood sugar levels to spike, which may cause complications for people with Type II diabetes. Arsenic is a toxic heavy metal found in soil, rock, and water.

    Why is stainless steel bad?

    Through normal wear and tear, the metals in stainless steel will leach into food (source). Cooking acidic foods will cause the pot to leach higher amounts. In general, nickel leaches in higher amounts than the other metals. If you have a nickel allergy, you may need to avoid stainless steel entirely.

    Can you cut food on stainless steel?

    Stainless steel has all the qualities needed for an indestructible kitchen worktop. That said, stainless steel, like many materials, shows scratches, especially if sharp knives and other tools are used directly on it. (And stainless itself will damage knives, so it’s wise to cut on a cutting board.)Jan 19, 2017.

    Is stainless steel or aluminum better for cooking?

    Great heat conductor: aluminum is one of the best metals for conducting heat, far better than stainless steel, in fact. Aluminum heats up quickly which allows you to get your cooking done faster and more efficiently. The heat is distributed evenly throughout the cookware, so your food is cooked evenly too.

    I have a Cuisinart dedicated rice cooker and I love the benefits.

    However I get a little bit of stickiness around the sides of the cooker. A friend recommends a capful of oil while cooking the rice to prevent it from sticking, but I am not sure if that’s a good idea?

    The rice is sticking to side of the pot itself but it doesn’t get burnt per se, just enough to make clean up a hassle.

    7 Answers 7

    One thing to try is to let the cooked rice rest for a while. My rice cooker’s pot is non-Teflon and scratched, but I’ve found that if I remove it from the heating element and let it rest 15-30 minutes, there is virtually no sticking. If I try to remove the rice immediately, there is significant sticking.

    I have been using Rick cooker for my whole life. The simple answer I can give you is the problem of your rice cooker.

    There are older models of rice cooker that sticks a lot and there is very little you can do about it. It happened to me when I was little that some of the rice cookers just did that regardless of what we did. The newer models won’t do it unless inside it’s scrated. The Japanese brand rice cookers are very reliable, so you won’t have problem like this. I don’t recommend you putting oil in your rice as I don’t think it’s an healthy option.

    If there is no obvious scratches inside your rice cooker, then I think it’s time to get a better rice cooker.

    In my experience, it has little to do with your rice cooker model, the amount of water (so long as it’s reasonable i.e. not extremely scarce), or adding oil whatsoever (frankly, greasy white rice sounds pretty disgusting to me).

    As a red-blooded Asian who loves rice and have been cooking it all my life, in various rice cooker models, using various types of rice, I used to have this problem when I was a wee beginner but eventually figured out a method to eliminate that stubborn crust:

    The key is to let your rice rest for awhile after it’s cooked. When the rice cooker tab pops up to indicate your rice is done, do not immediately open the lid. Instead, let it simmer down for a minute or two, allowing all those boiled water bubbles to settle.

    Following this, open the lid (I usually pop the cable off the socket for good measure) and let the rice steam out until cooled to your taste. I personally leave it for five to ten minutes, and that results in just the right level of rice warmth for me, which is on the cooler side. Your mileage may vary so test this out with different times to find a temperature that suits your liking. And If you want to reheat the rice, it should be fine by now to simply pop the setting back on to “warm”.

    Voila–no more crusting on the pan. Take into account that rice is sticky by nature, and a small amount of sticking on the pan is inevitable, but this should work to reduce that overall layer of crusting.

    This is my way to prevent a hard crust on the bottom of the rice cooker pan. I’m sure others have other ways that have been proven to work, but this one works great for me.

    Note: this works for white rice in general, which is the most common and the type I’m assuming the asker was talking about. Other types such as red or black rice would require more water and tend to crust more around the top, I have yet to successfully handle those.

    Anetta
    Published on December 18, 2013 / Last updated on March 27, 2022

    Here’s exactly how to cook perfect rice, so you never end up with mushy rice or hard pieces ever again!

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Let me start by saying how difficult it is to take pretty pictures of rice. It’s just…… rice, you know?

    I feel a bit odd sharing this “recipe” as it’s hardly a recipe so much as it is a method.

    Rice was one of those things that took me a while to really “nail.” I tried following recipes on the bags of rice themselves or following the advice of friends and family but I always seemed to end up with a huge pot of mess. I kept asking myself, “Why is my rice mushy?”

    Sometimes the rice would still be crunch, other times it was total mush. Sometimes I’d find a pool of water in the bottom of the rice pot, other times the bottom half-inch of rice was a blackened burnt mess.

    This method produces tender, fluffy rice like the kind they serve in Thai restaurants. You know what I’m talking about, right? When you can see each individual grain of rice, rather than just a glob of white mush? Yeah, that’s the good stuff. I had to find out how to make rice not sticky.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Now that I cook rice about 17 times per week, I’ve got the whole thing figured out and figured I’d share it with you!

    This method is not just how to cook white rice. This method will work with long-grain white rice, Jasmine rice, and basmati rice. Don’t try to use brown rice!

    The recipe below will make about 5 cups of cooked white rice – enough for a side dish at a family meal.

    Since it’s just the husband and me at my house, I like to make this rice and then save the leftovers in the fridge to make Thai-style fried rice.

    OKAY. Take a breath.

    Here’s the looooong explanation for what is really a SIMPLE process. I promise.

    I also think it’s an absolute MUST to rinse your rice properly before you put it over heat.

    I’ve tried rinsing mine in a strainer with running water, but I’ve found the most effective way is to measure the rice, put it into your cooking pan, then add about an inch of water over the top and use your fingers to swirl the water around. You’ll be able to see the starch coming off of the rice as the water turns murky.

    Then, pour the contents of the pot (both rice and water) into a fine strainer to let the water drain off. Return the wet rice to the pan, add another inch of water, swirl again, and drain again. Repeat that process one more time and you’re good to go.

    I’m really not kidding about doing it 3 times. It’s essential!

    Once you’ve drained the rice for the final time, return the rice to the pan and add the measured amount of water. Stir. Set it on your stove and set turn the burner on to medium heat. Wait patiently as it comes to a boil.

    Don’t make a rookie mistake and turn the heat up to get it to boil faster. That will turn your rice into a mess of mushy nasty grossness. No one likes mushy nasty grossness.

    Oh, and another thing. Don’t stir the rice EVER except for the one time you did it when you added the measured water.

    Once it comes to a boil, keep an eye on it and wait until the water level dips below the level of the rice. Once you can see a few mounds of rice peeking out above the water you’re ready to use your…

    SECRET RICE WEAPON.

    Intrigued?

    Well don’t get too excited, because it’s just a regular old kitchen towel.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Lay the kitchen towel over the top of the pot, then put the lid on the pot and ensure the whole thing is as sealed up as it can be.

    Lift the hanging edges of the towel up off of the burner so you don’t burn your house down, and fold them up onto the top of the pot lid.

    What’s with the towel, you ask? Well, it absorbs the condensation coming off of the rice as it steams so it doesn’t “rain” back down onto the top of the rice, which makes it soggy. SCIENCE!

    Turn the heat down to the lowest setting. Set a timer for 15 minutes and walk away. Have a drink and peruse my latest pins on Pinterest in the meantime.

    When the timer goes off, turn the heat off and set another timer for 10 minutes. Leave the lid on the pot. Do not peek.

    When that second timer goes off, remove the lid and the towel and use a fork to fluff the rice into those perfect individual grains.

    Voila! Now you know how to cook perfect rice.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Phew! That was kind of a long post to write all about plain old rice. But hey, there’s no point in you making a delicious Panang curry or a fragrant Indian Chicken Korma if you completely botch the rice, right?

    Then your food is just sad and lonely and all of that yummy sauce goes to waste because there’s nothing to soak it all up! Tragic, I tell you.

    How Do You Reheat Rice?

    It is quite simple to reheat rice. All you need to do is stick it in the microwave for a couple of minutes and it will be as good as new. In fact, simply adding a few drops of water can help create steam which will soften up those grains just like when it was freshly cooked.

    Rice To Water Ratio

    The most common mistake that people make when cooking white rice is to use too much water. When making rice, it is recommended that you use 1 and a half cups of liquid for every cup of rice that you cook. That means if you want to serve four people, you should be using 6 cups of water or stock to get the job done.

    What To Serve with White Rice

    This delicious (and Vegan!) Chickpea Tikka Masala recipe hits the spot when you’re craving Indian food. Serve it up over rice and garnish it with plenty of fresh cilantro!

    This Asian Salmon recipe tops healthy salmon fillets with a boldly flavored Asian glaze of hoisin sauce, garlic, and siracha.

    Enjoy this delicious, easy-to-make Thai Tilapia Curry recipe with a Thai Coconut Curry Sauce that adds a bold flavor to a mild fish and to the side of rice.

    This Indian Tomato Cilantro Chicken is full of flavor from tomatoes, cilantro, garlic, Serrano chilies, onion, ginger and several spices that will make your mouth water before you even taste this deliciousness!

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Save this to Pinterest:

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    OK friends, so you don’t have to try to extract the “recipe” out of the above instructions, here’s a handy printable for you to keep in your kitchen (might I suggest the awkward cabinet above your stove?) until you have it memorized.

    I have been having this problem with my macaroni and I’m hoping that I’ll finally be able to find an answer here!

    I make my noodles in a pot on the stove. But I find that a lot of my noodles are sticking to the bottom of the pot. This severely complicates the pot cleaning process – plus it is hard to make sauce in the pot when there are noodles stuck there. Anyone know why this happens and how it can be prevented?

    3 Answers 3

    When noodles or pasta is cooked in too little water, the starch released during cooking has nowhere to go, hence the stickiness.

    If you are cooking plain noodles or macaroni, I would use at least twice the volume of water to noodles, preferably more depending on the size of pot available to you.

    If you are cooking the “instant” variety that comes in a packet with pre-made flavourings, I would follow the package instructions but use a lower heat setting on your cooker, and ensure you give them a stir every so often. That way, the sauce will not thicken or evaporate so quickly.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    While Greybeard’s answer is correct in any regard, if you want to make the now so trendy one-pot-pasta this of course is not an option. Here, in a best case scenario, you have exactly the right amount of water/liquid for the noodles to absorb and to result into a creamy sauce. The starch the noodles release is used to thicken the sauce, which of course is prone to sticking or even burning to the bottom of your pot. This method isn’t as easy as many cooking videos (especially on youtube) want you to believe, but if you stir often enough (for some thick sauces even constantly) it shouldn’t be too much of a problem.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Both Greybeard and Gretel are right. You need plenty of water (because pasta expands as it cooks and absorbs water), probably a lot more than you’re using (at least 3 times as much as if you were making rice, for instance). AND you need to stir. In my experience, stirring early is the most effective. You put the pasta in, you stir a couple times by the time the water is back to a roiling boil (that’s another point, no simmering here). And then you stir really well before you let it really cook. Keep stirring every couple minutes. I’m not saying you have to stand there and stir the whole time like it was polenta, but you really have to keep it moving, that’s what keeps your pasta from lying wanly at the bottom of the pot and sticking to it.

    Cooking rice may seem like an easy task, but many of us struggle with it as they stick to the bottom of the pan. Prevent that from happening with these easy tricks.

    Highlights

    Rice is one of the staple foods of our cuisine. Easy to prepare, rice is a versatile food ingredient and can be mixed/cooked with anything – from veggies to chicken and to even milk and sugar. You can throw in any vegetable, masala or meat, and plain rice will turn into a wholesome meal. However, there’s one thing that often troubles us while cooking rice is that they always stick to the pan. You might have tried greasing your pan with excess oil or butter but still, you cannot prevent the rice from sticking. And when that happens, we all know the struggle of scratching out the sticky rice from the bottom. So, if you also find yourself in the same situation every now and then, fret not, we have just the solution you need!

    Here we bring you a quick and easy tip by celebrity Chef Kunal Kapoor, where he explains how to avoid your rice from sticking into a pan. He posted this video on Instagram under his series “Kunal’s Tips and Tricks” and wrote “I know many of you struggle with rice sticking to the pan while making fried rice. So, here is a simple solution.”

    In his solution, the chef first told his followers to first heat the pan on very high heat. Then add in some oil and keep it till it becomes smoky. Then in a separate bowl, take the oil out. Lastly, heat the pan again. This way, the pan will become non-stick for a while.

    With this easy trick, you can cook both rice and noodles without them sticking inside the pan! Take a look at the chef’s video here:

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Making rice in an Instant Pot can be tricky, especially if you are not adept at cooking. It can come out too watery, too sticky, too dry, or a range of other textures.

    Because of this, you have to know what to do and how to cook the rice properly so that you can make perfectly textured rice for you and your family to enjoy.

    Rice is one of the most commonly cooked grains, but it can become complicated to make in the right manner.

    The Instant Pot is a godsend for many people. It simplifies cooking and makes matters much easier for the average person who wants to cook delicious meals without going through all the trouble.

    The Instant Pot is versatile and convenient to use and packs a range of options that make cooking incredibly fun.

    Why Is My Instant Pot Rice Too Sticky?

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Many people choose to make their rice in a rice cooker because it seems easier and more convenient.

    But if you have not experienced the power of an Instant Pot yet, you don’t know what you are missing out on.

    It can make the most delicious rice that you have ever tasted in your life, as long as you know how to cook it the right way!

    Like most other appliances, the Instant Pot can be an amazing appliance to use in the kitchen, but you need to understand its strengths and weaknesses.

    If you don’t, you are going to have difficulty in making even the simplest of dishes.

    If you have recently bought the Instant Pot, it would be a wise idea to go through its manual to understand how to cook different dishes.

    Sticky rice is always a problem, especially when you consider that most people like to pair their rice with other dishes. But, not all is lost.

    There are ways to fix this issue and make sure that the rice you make in your Instant Pot comes out fine.

    What Does it Mean if Your Rice is Sticky?

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    If your rice comes out too sticky when using the Instant Pot, there is often a valid reason for it being so.

    In many cases, sticky rice is an indication that there is not enough water or liquid in the pot to begin with.

    It can be frustrating when you follow a recipe as carefully as possible, only to find that the rice in your pot is all sticky by the end.

    Thus, you have to experiment and find what works best depending upon the quantity of rice you are making.

    However, it is easier to start with less water and go up from there because you can reduce stickiness, but you can’t reduce the moisture levels once it is too high.

    This is not something that you can perfect right from the start. It’s recommended that you experiment with different amounts of water and rice to find the perfect balance.

    It’s usually not easy, and it does require a bit of experience to get it right.

    How to Cook Perfect Rice

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    To help you, we have found the ideal method for making perfect rice.

    However, with that being said, the definition of perfect is different for everyone, especially when it comes to food, so you may need to adjust it a little bit to your liking.

    Below are the steps for making your rice perfect using the 1:1 method:

    1. Measure out your rice and set it aside.
    2. Measure the same amount of water and add it to the inner pot of your Instant Pot.
    3. Wash the rice off, then add it to the inner pot.
    4. Place the inner pot back into the base and turn on the Instant Pot.
    5. Close the lid and set the cooker to ‘Seal.’
    6. Select the cooking time.
    7. Natural-release the pressure in the cooker.
    8. Once done, fluff up your rice and enjoy!

    Final Words

    Overall, while rice can be tricky to cook at times, you must keep trying until you find the method that works the best for you .

    The method outlined in this article has been done repeatedly and is seen as a great way to make rice. The Instant Pot can cook rice by a considerable margin once you learn how it works exactly.

    Remember, if you want more watery rice, add a bit of extra water. On the other hand, if you want stickier rice, reduce the amount of water by a little bit.

    If you want perfect rice, use the method above and see what you think.

    As you continue to cook day in and day out, you will realize how to balance the rice just right, which will make the whole cooking process much easier for you.

    Place a nori sheet on a flat, dry surface and gently spread cooked sushi rice on the sheet. Use your fingers to evenly spread the rice. To prevent rice sticking to your hands, first wet your hands with cold water or better yet, a mixture of one part water and one part rice vinegar.

    Which side of the nori does the rice go on?

    The nori should lay with the rough side facing upwards. Get your hands wet just a little, and pick up about a handful of rice to a ball of rice. It’s important to keep your hands wet while working with sushi rice because it is sticky. When you work with the nori though, you should keep them as dry as you can.

    How much rice do you put on a nori sheet?

    Cut the nori seaweed into halves, and then place half of the nori on the sushi mat shiny side down. As a golden rule, the shiny side of the nori seaweed should always be on the outside of the sushi. Place roughly 110g of sushi rice on the nori seaweed and spread across evenly.

    How do you seal sushi nori?

    Grab a small handful of sushi rice. Cover bottom three-quarters of nori sheet with thin layer of rice, leaving the top quarter of the nori sheet empty. (It is this empty section that will seal the roll together.)

    How do you keep sushi rice from sticking to the pan?

    To prevent the rice from sticking to the bottom of your pot, stir the rice several times while it boils. (This is important! Otherwise a thick layer of rice will stick at the bottom of your pot.) After 2-3 minutes turn the heat down to lowest level.

    Do you have to use nori for sushi?

    There is no specific name for sushi without seaweed. However, sashimi and nigiri are two types of sushi (not rolls) that are made without nori. Sashimi refers to fish or shellfish that’s served alone without any rice or Nori, and it’s usually raw.

    Why is my nori tough?

    Nori can get chewy and gummy when it absorbs too much moisture. If your rice is too wet or you are waiting for too long before eating, these could be factors. Another consideration is prepping the nori. Nori needs to be toasted before being used for sushi.

    Are nori sheets healthy?

    Nori is packed full of vitamins too. It offers vitamins A, B, C, D, E and K, as well as niacin, folic acid and taurine. And thanks to the level of vitamin C it contains, the bioavailability of its abundant iron content is increased.

    Why is my sushi falling apart?

    The most common reason most rolls fall apart is that they’re overstuffed. Usually, the culprit is too much rice. Use a smaller amount of rice when creating your rolls. Lay a ¼-inch-thick layer of rice on the nori.

    How much rice do I need for 2 sushi rolls?

    Generally speaking, you should always use between 80 and 90 grams of cooked sticky rice for each sushi roll. If you’re making larger rolls or making a sushi hand roll, then you’ll want to use around 100 grams.

    How do you get nori to stick together?

    If you slightly wet the bare edge of the nori with a little water on your finger it should help it stick together.

    How do you keep sushi from falling apart?

    In order to prevent your sushi rice from breaking apart in the first place – make sure to use the right nori size for the right amount of sushi rice and fillings. For example, when making a maki roll, try to use little rice and only filling if you plan to use half a nori.

    What type of nori is best for sushi?

    The best seaweed for sushi is called nori seaweed, as it comes in ready-to-use sheets. The best nori is pure, dark green or black, shiny, and not brittle or easily broken.

    Richard Cornish
    • facebook SHARE
    • pinterest PIN
    • twitter
    • linkedin
    • email
    • Chunky chowder: Saffron-tinted seafood and potato soup with chorizo jam (recipe here). Photo: Katrina Meynink
    • Roasted leek, potato and bacon soup with crispy caramelised prosciutto (recipe here). Photo: Katrina Meynink
    • Scandi-style salmon and fennel soup (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Neil Perry’s Mexican-style pork and chickpea soup (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Adam Liaw’s thick minestrone with parmesan croutons (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Or top your chunky minestrone with a giant mozzarella-stuffed meatball (recipe here). Photo: Katrina Meynink
    • Dan Lepard’s vegan-friendly garlic, sweet potato and chickpea soup (with optional red onion and feta scones) (recipes here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Kylie Kwong’s Chinese chicken noodle soup with a chilli kick (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Put an egg on it! Jill Dupleix’s spicy chicken miso soup with poached egg (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Karen Martini’s hearty lentil and ham hock soup with parsley and poached eggs (recipe here). Photo: Bonnie Savage
    • Roasty-toasty: Sweet potato and carrot soup topped with toasted seeds and roasted carrots (recipe here). Photo: Katrina Meynink
    • Three Blue Ducks’ bright green pea and bacon soup with crispy bacon and garlic flatbreads (recipe here). Photo: Christopher Pearce
    • Frank Camorra’s Spanish-style chickpea and chorizo soup (recipe here). Photo: Marcel Aucar
    • Brown mushroom and spinach soup with potato crouton cubes (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • Adam Liaw’s Hokkaido soup curry (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem
    • And his salmon and potato chowder (recipe here). Photo: William Meppem

    I’m doing pea and ham soups and curries in my big Le Creuset pot on a gas stove and I’m having problems with the food catching on the bottom. What causes catching? Are there ways to prevent it or stop it when it starts? P. Fyfe

    “Bugger!” It’s the catch cry of every home cook when they discover their food has caught on the bottom of the pan. What is happening is that starch and protein from the dish you are cooking begin to bond with the base of the pan through which the heat is transferred. This heat transfer point is much hotter than the rest of the liquid, which will only reach 100C – the boiling point of the water in it.

    At first the starch and protein form new compounds in what is known as the Maillard effect. Then, if not swept away by the deft stroke of a wooden spoon, the compounds will begin to carbonise. On this rough surface, more starch and protein will accumulate and soon you will have a blackened crust.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a potTo avoid soup sticking to the pot, stir often and and make sure there is enough liquid. Photo: William Meppem

    How to avoid it? Keep an eye on your cooking and make sure there is enough liquid in the pot. Stir regularly and frequently to stop the build-up on the bottom of the pan. Use a heavy-based pan that evenly distributes the heat. Consider investing in a heat diffuser as almost all pans have hotter and cooler spots. Turn the heat under the pan to low.

    This winter I was making pea and ham soup and discovered I’d run out of split peas. I removed the slow-cooked ham hock and bay leaves from the pot and poured a bag of frozen peas into the stock. I removed the flesh from the hock, returned it to the pan, cooked the peas and hock together for just 10 minutes, checked for seasoning and blitzed the lot in the blender. It was superb, smooth and creamy, and because the peas had cooked so quickly, there was no time for them to catch.

    Cabbage smells when I cook. A. Oliver

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a potDon’t like the smell of cooked cabbage? Try Asian coleslaw with sesame and peanut butter dressing. Photo: Shutterstock

    Then don’t. Eat it raw. And eat lots of it. It is so good for you. When you cook it, particularly for a long time, this creates the perfect conditions for the breakdown of the beneficial sulphur compounds, the ones associated with a reduction in certain cancers in people who eat a lot of cabbage, into stinky hydrogen sulphide. Rotten egg gas.

    Table of Contents

    • 1 Stop Your Saucepans Sticking With A Heat Diffuser
    • 2 The Norpro 144 Heat Diffuser
    • 3 Nordic Ware – Made in the US
    • 4 The Cooktop Diffuser For Ceramic Hobs

    Stop Your Saucepans Sticking With A Heat Diffuser

    [Updated 1 June 2020]It’s never so much having to clean the burned bits off pans, is it? Oh no, it’s the wrecked meal which if you’re careful you can still serve from the top half of the pan – which is why I’m so starstruck with my new cooktop diffuser!

    How to stop saucepans burning and sticking to slow cooked or starchy food – or sausages which burn as you look at them – is a pretty common problem with an easy and inexpensive solution.

    Even with top quality pans which have a very thick base, when you cook rice or maybe a thick stew there is a tendency for food to stick on the bottom then burn.

    A really good cooker helps, but even then there are times you can’t get the heat quite low enough, without it going right off. Short of constant stirring and attention, once the process has started, it won’t stop – jam is the worst even in a Maslin pan.

    This usually means the food has reached a point where there isn’t enough liquid left to prevent it sticking then burning – but sometimes that’s exactly what you want, without it burning!

    The best way I’ve found is very old fashioned though with a modern twist. Simmer sheets or a cooktop diffuser will spread the hot spots and protect the bottom of the pan, effectively giving you a lower heat setting on the stove top. You’ll find a good many to choose from and all come in between $10-$20 – you don’t need to spend more.

    Other than making sure you get one compatible with your stove top, the problem of your lovingly prepared and cooked meal burning in the final stages, is pretty much gone – except for jam! The best sellers are detailed below, giving you which you can use on gas, electric and halogen ceramic hobs – do watch the cheaper tin ones, they rust easily if you don’t dry after washing.

    The Norpro 144 Heat Diffuser

    The Norpro 144 can be used on electric or gas stove tops and is as cheap as chips at $6!

    One point to make with the Norpro heat diffuser and others of this type is that they are made of tin – the instructions are not to put them in the dishwasher.

    Do you know those brown rust spots? That’s the problem with them, so hand wash in soapy water and it will last you for years.

    If it begins to get brown, soak in very hot water with washing liquid, then give it a scrub and dry carefully to stop it rusting, but to be honest I don’t bother – who sees them anyway?

    The Norpro is certainly cheap enough, but not, in my opinion, the best buy for lasting and looking good.

    Nordic Ware – Made in the US

    Neat and easy clean, the Nordic Ware version may look flat, but it isn’t. There’s a rim underneath so it fits over gas or electric rings safely. This is a really good option and the one my mom uses.

    However – not suitable for ceramic hobs – this is not flat underneath. If you want one suited to a halogen or other induction hob, checkout the saucepan heat diffuser below – its the one I use on my halogen hob and can recommend for them.

    The Cooktop Diffuser For Ceramic Hobs

    Made from carbon steel, dishwasher safe and suitable for use on all types of stovetop, this is the best of the lot in my opinion and will look as good in a year as it did the day it arrived.

    Most of the other cooktop diffusers can’t be used on an induction hob, so this is the boy for you. Even if you don’t have ceramic to contend with, the fact that this babe can go in the dishwasher along with the pot it protects is a winner in my book, sorry but I just hate anything not easy to clean!

    Though these are a very old fashioned and simple solution, they work. Mom tells me my grandmother used a piece of cut and hammered copper gramps made for her – clever people our ancestors.

    Want to check prices on these and other models? The link below will take you to a selection of the best selling and most popular heat diffusers available at Amazon, including those featured above.

    Often it’s the simplest ideas which make the most difference, my other favorite time saver is a Spill Stopper which stops pans boiling over – absolutely invaluable when you’re cooking pasta or simmering vegetables because you can walk away without coming back to a flood. I think granny used a spoon across the top – these are easier!

    There’s more about Spill Stoppers and a bunch of other really useful and fun kitchen gadgets here.

    Gadgetsforthekitchen

    Gadgetsforthekitchen.com was started with the goal of being your go-to kitchen gadget resource. In addition to sharing up-to-date buying guides, product reviews, and how-to articles, we look to share healthy food recipes as well as tips for cleaning and maintenance, gift ideas, and many other useful ideas to decorate your kitchen with minimum effort and price.

    Our articles and tips have helped more than 200,000 readers to date.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Rice sticking together isn’t necessarily a bad thing. You want rice to stick together when you’re making rice pudding, or risotto or even sushi. However, if you’re using rice as a bed for stir-fries, thick stews or braises, you want to keep rice from sticking together.

    Video of the Day

    Sometimes it’s not enough to follow the conventional method of cooking rice, which is to boil water, add the rice, place a tight lid on and simmer the rice until it’s done. That might leave you with sticky rice that you really don’t want. For a truly fluffy and separate rice, you might want to try something a little different.

    Choose the Right Rice

    Half of the battle to keep rice from sticking is having the right kind of rice. Generally, you want long-grain rice over medium and short-grain rice.

    According to The Spruce Eats’s article on how to cook different varieties of rice, there are many different varieties of rice out there. They vary in nutritional makeup, but the specific nutrient that determines whether they’re going to be sticky or not is the type of starch they contain.

    According to an October 2017 research article published in the ​International Journal of Research in Medicinal Sciences​, rice contains two types of starch: amylose and amylopectin. Amylose is a long starch molecule without any branches. It won’t gelatinize during the cooking process, which means that rice with amylose separates well and ends up nice and fluffy. Non-sticky rice types have plenty of amylose.

    Amylopectin, on the other hand, is a highly branched starch molecule that causes rice to stick together during the cooking process. Long grain rice varieties, which are mostly non-sticky rice types, tend to have more amylose than amylopectin, while short-grain rice varieties have more amylopectin than amylose. The result is that long-grain rice tends to end up fluffy and separate while short-grain rice ends up sticky and clumped. Here is a short breakdown of the different rice types:

    • ​Long Grain White Rice:​ This rice ends up fluffy and separated.
    • ​Medium Grain Rice:​ This rice has more amylopectin and a relatively soft outer layer, which makes it creamy after cooking.
    • ​Short Grain Rice:​ This rice has more amylopectin and ends up sticky and creamy after cooking.
    • ​Brown Rice:​ Brown rice takes longer to cook than white rice because of a harder outer layer. It cooks up fluffy due to the lower amylopectin and the hard outer layer.
    • ​Basmati Rice:​ Basmati rice has long grains and is aromatic. It cooks up separate and fluffy.
    • ​Jasmine Rice:​ Jasmine rice also has long grains and is aromatic. However, it has more amylopectin than the other long-grain rice varieties, causing it to be slightly creamier.
    • ​Wild Rice:​ Wild rice isn’t actually rice. It is the seed of a native grass that grows in North America. It takes longer than normal rice to cook, and is chewier, with a nutty flavor. It mostly cooks up separate and fluffy, unless you cook it until it pops, in which case it will be stickier and softer.
    • ​Converted Rice:​ This is pre-cooked rice. It cooks faster and gives more consistent results than other non-sticky rice types. It cooks up fluffy and separate.

    Keep Rice From Sticking

    Get a fine mesh strainer (or a colander with small holes so the rice doesn’t fall through) and put the rice in it. Rinse the rice under cool running water for a few minutes. Be as thorough as you can, in order to remove all of the extra starch from the individual grains of rice. You should try to be as thorough as you can during this step, since it can, if performed well, take out most of the starch on the individual grains, and ensure you have fluffier rice in the end.

    Once you’re done rinsing the rice, put it in a large bowl and cover it with cold water. Fine Cooking says you should allow the rice to soak in the water for 30 minutes, or as long as you can, depending on how much time you have. Once it has soaked enough, drain away as much water as you can.

    Boil the Water in a Saucepan

    Get a large saucepan and fill it with water. The larger the saucepan the better, since it will help the rice to cook more evenly. The amount of water to pour into the saucepan depends on the type of rice you’re cooking. Long grain white rice requires about 2 parts water for 1 part rice. Brown rice requires 2 and a half parts water for 1 part rice. Wild rice requires 4 parts water for 1 part rice. Measure how many cups of rice you need to cook, and then get the appropriate number of cups of water, depending on the type of rice that you’re cooking.

    Add a teaspoon of salt and bring the water to a boil. The salt helps to remove even more starch, keeping the rice from sticking, and also helps remove any talcum the rice might contain. Some foreign mills add talcum to rice to make it stick less. The salt also helps with seasoning.

    Cook the Rice

    Once the water in the saucepan is boiling, add the rice. Stir it just once, so that the water can go back to boiling steadily. You don’t want to stir it too many times, as that will actually make the rice stick together. Bring it down to a simmer, and leave it for a bit so that the rice can absorb all of the water.

    Allow the rice to cook until it reaches the level of tenderness you want for your recipe. Don’t do any additional stirring. You can use a timer as you cook the rice, so you know when it will be done. White rice should be done in about 20 minutes, brown rice should be done in about 30 minutes and wild rice should be done in about 45 minutes. You can taste-test a few grains with a spoon, after the appropriate time, to ensure that the rice is tender enough.

    Drain and Serve the Rice

    When the rice is ready, drain it in the fine mesh strainer to get rid of any remaining water. Rinse it with hot water and drain it again.

    According to a Martha Stewart article on making fluffy rice, you should let it sit untouched for about 5 minutes to allow any remaining water to either evaporate or be absorbed by the rice.

    After letting it stand, fluff it with a fork. Finally, serve the rice, or use it as you wish.

    There is nothing that can hurt your culinary ego quicker than the heartbreak that is having your dinner cling to the pan. Is it me? Is it my pans? Should I find a new hobby and never cook again? We’ve all been there — and frankly, it’s not only disheartening, but it’s a dang headache to scrub the crusted-on food bits off of your precious cookware. If you’re ready to live a life where you’re not constantly scraping away the remnants of a sear gone wrong, read on to learn how to ensure that your food isn’t going to stick to your pans.

    When food does stick to your pan, the natural suspicion is that something is wrong with the equipment. Before you write off your pans as garbage and start browsing for a new set, let me suggest to you that your pans are probably fine. Sure, some nonstick pans can lose their coating after time and heavy usage, but even then, you should still be able to cook on them without having your food sticking.

    So, if it’s not the equipment, what is it?

    Not Enough Heat & Time

    Well, let’s back up for a second. The most common reason that food does stick onto pans (or grill grates) is because the food items have not yet caramelized and naturally pulled away from the pan. Meaning that when you go to move the food around with your spatula, tongs, or other cooking utensil, the food will likely rip or tear away from the pan, causing torn, soon-to-be-burnt bits to accumulate in your skillet. To call it a “huge bummer” would be an understatement.

    What this means is that the way to avoid having food stick to your pan is to ensure that it has caramelized and formed a crusty, golden brown exterior before attempting to move or flip the item. The only way that you’re going to create caramelization is with ample heat and time (and a little bit of cooking fat, but we’ll discuss that later). It’s not your pans that are causing your food to stick, it’s the lack of heat and time (i.e. patience) that you’re giving the food. So, if you’re constantly experiencing food stickage issues, try turning your heat up a little and letting the food do its thing before you attempt to move it around. It may take some self control; after all, time seems to pass by exceptionally slowly when you’re standing over a skillet, watching it’s contents sizzle away.

    *Note: This advice is intended to be applied towards food items prone to sticking, such as cuts of meat, fish, certain moist vegetables, etc. This tip obviously does not apply to things like sauces, which do generally need frequent stirring and do not generally require high-heat cooking.

    For example, cooking a skin-on salmon fillet may seem like a true nightmare for some. (If you’ve never tried to grill a piece of skin-on fish only to have shards of burnt skin encrust all of your grill grates, then you are one lucky duck. or you’re a vegetarian). I’ve learned through lots of practice that pan-searing or grilling skin-on fillets doesn’t have to end in misery. The key to avoiding a hellish situation is to let your fillet cook skin-side-down until the skin becomes crispy and naturally releases from the pan or grates.

    You can gently check by running your spatula under the skin to see if it’s ready yet, but if you have any resistance as you try to lift the piece of fish, that likely means that the fish needs more time. In that case, keep on cooking; make sure you have at least a medium to medium-high flame, and let the fillet do its thing. With enough patience, you’ll see that the skin eventually pulls away from the pan/grates when it’s crispy and golden brown. Magic!

    Not Enough Fat

    Okay, let’s return to that discussion of fat. Cooking with fat not only provides a ton of flavor, but it also acts as a lubricant and helps your food release from the pan instead of simply burning onto it. If your food sticks, there is a chance that you simply didn’t use enough oil. That said, you don’t need to get carried away with oiling your foods and cooking vessels — a thin layer of fat, combined with heat and time, should do the trick beautifully. Nonstick pans require less oil because of their coating, but as long as you’re cooking on a seasoned cast iron or oiled grill grates, then you should still be just fine with a moderate amount of oil (in the pan or applied directly to the food for grilling). Honestly, heat and time are much more crucial than a heavy glug of oil when it comes to preventing sticking.

    This sentiment of using high heat and all the patience that you have in order to avoid sticky situations holds true for any food that is giving you issues when you cook it, not just fish fillets. Fried eggs, grilled veggies, seared scallops, chicken thighs, grilled steak — any food that has ever been problematic for you in the stickage department simply needed more heat and more time to do its thing. Your pans are fine and it’s possible you even used enough oil. Just turn up your heat, be patient, and your culinary confidence will be back in no time.

    Scraping hardened rice off the bottom of a pot or rice cooker can be extremely frustrating. Luckily there are a few tips and tricks to avoid this issue.

    The best ways to keep rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot or rice are to lubricate the cooker properly, use a bit more water, remove extra starch before cooking, and allow extra time for steam to be absorbed fully by the rice.

    Let’s go through each solution in detail:

    1. “Grease” the Rice Cooker or Pot

    Properly greasing your rice cooker ensures that rice does not accumulate at the bottom. Lightly coat the sides and the bottom of your cooker or pot with butter, oil, or spray (Like Pam) to help keep rice from sticking to the bottom of your rice cooker.

    Pro Tip: Add some additional olive oil or butter to the water can help keep the grains from sticking together or to the pot.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    2. Add Extra Water

    If the water in your rice evaporates too quickly, you will be left with rice clumping together at the bottom of the pan. You want to make sure you are using enough water to keep your rice fluffy and not hard.

    How much extra water? As a good rule of thumb, add about 10% more water to the pot than what the directions call for. You may want to add a few extra minutes to the steam phase of cooking in order to allow for the additional water to soak in.

    3. Remove Extra Starch

    It would be best if you always rinsed long rice before placing it in your pot or cooker.

    Rice develops a thin starch coating when shipped and stored. Less starch means your rice will be fluffier and less likely to stick together. Fluffier rice is also not as likely to stick to the pot.

    4. Allow Steam to Absorb Into the Rice

    When done cooking, leave your rice in your cooker until it cools down (10-20 minutes). During this time, any steam trapped in the rice will disperse through all the rice grains. As a result, rice present at the bottom of the cooker will be hydrated and less likely to stick.

    Also, allowing your rice to rest for a short period of time gives it a chance to return to its regular shape. This will result in lighter and fluffier rice when stirred. Not only is it less likely to stick, but it’s also less likely to be crunchy and will be more appealing to consume.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Why Does My Rice Stick to the Bottom of the Pan?

    The main culprits for rice sticking to the bottom of a pot or rice cooker are usually scratched or worn off non-stick coating and/or not using enough water. Adding proper lubrication and about 10% more water than the directions call for will usually solve the problem.

    Problem #1: Scratched or Worn Pot Insides

    If the non-stick coating of your rice cooker has been scratched, your rice is more likely to adhere to the walls and bottom of the cooker. This is why it is essential that you grease your cooker generously before use. Also, replacing your cookware every few years can save you a lot of headaches.

    Problem #2: Not Enough Water

    If too much water evaporates when rice is boiling, there will not be enough moisture to plump up the rice grains. This will result in harder rice that will be more likely to stick to the bottom of the rice cooker.

    Is Your Machine Designed to Brown?

    Some cultures desire a browned crisped rice layer (tahdig) at the bottom of their pan. Some rice cookers are set to meet this demand. Those cookers will always have browning at the bottom of the cooker.

    If you do not want to have this browned layer, choose a cooker with a different design function. Look for a cooker that features circuitry that controls the finished result of the rice and prevents the occurrence of browning rice.

    Checking out rice cooker reviews before purchasing will help you find a cooker that meets your specific rice needs.

    Does the Type of Pan Matter in Keeping Rice From Sticking?

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Most rice cookers have an inner pan coated with Teflon. Non-stick coatings make removing food from pans easier, but you have to be gentle with them because scratching the coating will lead to the surface being damaged more and more over time. It tends to sneak up on you as scratches stop the non-stick coating from working properly.

    Also, if the inside of an aluminum pan coated with Teflon burns or becomes scratched, your rice can be contaminated with chemicals. When ingested, these chemicals increase your risk of developing specific health problems; including, liver diseases and thyroid disorders. This is why more rice cookers are being made with a stainless steel or ceramic inner pot.

    In case you were wondering, Teflon rice cookers are safe up to 500°F, and rice cooks at 212°F.

    An even better option is ceramic pots, which can handle temperatures of up to 2,700°F. They are easily cleaned, chemical-free, and non-stick. Many people prefer these pots because of their even heat distribution.

    If you decide to use a stainless steel pot, keep in mind that rice will stick to the bottom if it is not adequately greased, and the pot will be discolored.

    How Do You Get Rice off the Bottom of a Pan?

    There are three things you can do to get rice off the bottom of a pan:

    Option #1: Soak the rice stained pan in water for an hour. This should loosen the debris enough to get it off the pan.

    Option #2: Cover the rice in a mixture of 1:1 water and vinegar. Boil the mixture, then dump the pan. The rice should come off the bottom effortlessly.

    Option #3: Mix water and chopped lemons together. Bring the water to a boil and then dump out the pan. Rice should be easy to remove.

    Final Thoughts

    Cooking rice properly is actually more of an art than people give it credit for. Each type of rice has different water and cooking requirements, and getting one little ratio wrong will lead to a sub-par result. My advice is to keep your own personal notebook and write down exactly what you did whenever your cooking result comes out perfectly. Then, you can more easily re-create that perfect dish in the future.

    I hope this article was helpful. Thanks for stoppin’ by!

    Related Questions

    What Does Tahdig Mean?

    Tahdig literally means “bottom of the pot” and refers to the crust that is found at the bottom of a rice pot after cooking. This panfried caramelized layer is popular in Iranian cuisine. Other variations, including scorched vegetables, are also served.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Hi, I’m Anne but my grandchildren call me Jelly Grandma. I have over 50 years of experience as a Southern cook and am a retired librarian. I love sharing what I have learned. You can find me on YouTube as well! Just click the link at the bottom of your page.

    I hope your visit here has been a sweet one.

    Published August 16, 2016

    Share this post

    If you’re like a lot of our family and friends, you use nonstick pots and pans almost exclusively.

    We get it: They’re easy to clean, and the performance of a cheaper nonstick pan is still pretty good compared with what a cheaper stainless steel pan can do.

    Reasons to go beyond nonstick

    Even the best nonstick pans have disadvantages:

    • You can’t use them over especially high heat, or the coating deteriorates.
    • Metal utensils can damage the nonstick coating (which disqualifies our favorite spatula).
    • They shouldn’t go into ovens set higher than 400 degrees.
    • Generally you need to throw them out every few years as the coating gets damaged.

    And there are so many advantages to cooking on bare metal pans such as our recommendation for the best skillet, a stainless steel tri-ply pan:

    • First and foremost, food has more potential to taste better. You can use higher heat without ruining the pan, so meat takes on crisp edges, onions brown more deeply, and you get more fond, the flavorful brown bits that caramelize on the bottom of the pan.
    • You can also move a lot of pans (including our pick) straight from the stove to a hot oven, a technique that works well for seared chicken thighs, which can’t cook through on the stove, or thick pieces of fish.
    • Metal pans are fine to clean in the dishwasher, whereas nonstick pans aren’t.
    • Because the surfaces of most metal pans are lighter than dark nonstick coatings, you can see your food better and know when it’s burning, or when it’s not yet brown enough.
    • You don’t have to break the bank to get a buy-it-for-life pan—our budget skillet pick costs about $60 currently but will last at least three times as long (probably more) as our nonstick skillet pick.

    Here’s how to solve some of the most common complaints we’ve heard about stainless steel and tri-ply pans.

    My food sticks to stainless steel pans.

    Preheat your pan: This is probably the number one thing you can do to prevent sticking. Serious Eats explains, “Even on a perfectly smooth, polished surface with no cracks/imperfections whatsoever, meat will still stick as proteins form molecular bonds with the metal.” Later, the article says that “the goal is to get the meat to cook before it even comes into contact with the metal by heating oil hot enough that it can cook the meat in the time it takes for it to pass from the air, through the film of oil, and into the pan.”

    Pat your meat or fish dry: Same idea here—you want the meat to cook as it hits the pan, rather than the moisture on the surface of the meat.

    Add your oil after the pan is hot: This keeps the oil from causing the smoke alarm to go off by the time you’re ready to cook. In The New York Times, Harold McGee says, “Broken-down oil gets viscous and gummy, and even a slight degree of this can contribute to sticking and residues on the food.”

    For dairy, a thin layer of water prevents scalding: If you’re heating milk in a saucepan for cocoa or custards, try this trick from Melissa Clark’s homemade yogurt recipe—rub the pot with an ice cube or rinse it with water before adding the milk. This step forms a layer of water that makes it harder for dairy proteins to form bonds with the metal of the pan. (We thought this was malarkey until we tried it—the trick really works.)

    My food always burns on stainless steel pans.

    In this case you’re probably using too-thin stainless steel. Try switching to tri-ply, aluminum sandwiched between layers of stainless steel. Thin, plain stainless steel gets hot spots and doesn’t heat as evenly as a pan that has an aluminum layer, but plain aluminum reacts with acidic foods and can make your tomato sauce taste metallic. Our picks for the best saucepan and the best skillet are made with tri-ply, so they combine the nonreactive quality of stainless steel with the even heating of aluminum. (Don’t be fooled by pans that have only an aluminum or copper core on the bottom. You want that triple layer up the sides, too, because food can still scorch there; look for fully clad tri-ply.)

    Also, you want the pan to be hot hot hot to start, but you should turn the heat down once your meat goes in so that it doesn’t burn and smoke up the place.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Cooking is not an easy task; you can master the skill only with practice and experimentation. From burning and overcooking to putting excess salt or undercooking, even the slightest mistake can spoil the taste of your dish. One such problem is, food sticking to the bottom of the pan. When scratched from the bottom, it not only fills the food with a burnt smell but also damages the coating of your pot. In order to prevent such a scenario, follow the given tips and tricks.

    Grease Your Pan Liberally

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Greasing your pan well doesn’t mean you need to add a large quantity of oil. Pour in your regular quantity of oil or ghee and make sure it covers the whole pan. You can use a silicone based brush to spread the oil evenly to all sides. Usually a poorly greased vessel leads to food sticking at the bottom, which is why proper greasing is required before you begin cooking.

    Tomato Puree

    In your everyday cooking, you might have noticed that after adding tomato puree to your pan, the ingredients seldom stick to the bottom. This is because of the water content in tomatoes which keeps the vegetables away from the surface. Instead of using chopped tomatoes in your food, you can switch to tomato puree to prevent your food from sticking to the pan.

    Change Your Cooking Pot

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    At times old cooking pots can also cause this problem. Since these pots are used in excess, their non-stick coating erodes. It might not be clearly visible to the eyes but can make the food toxic. Buy a good quality non-stick pan, which will easily go on for 5-6 years. Take proper care of your cooking utensils and use silicone or wooden spatula instead of a metallic one. Avoid using old aluminium vessels, as they can harm the food at high temperatures.

    Water Based Dishes

    This trick will help if you are making lentils or dishes which require water at a later stage. Boil the water beforehand and keep it aside. Now prepare your ‘chaunk’ with onions and other spices you usually use. Just stir for a minute or two and add your lentils or vegetables. Now quickly add water and stir everything together. The main motive behind this is to not let the oil in the pan dry up by adding water.

    Keep Stiring

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Another layman hack to avoid your dish from sticking to the bottom is by stirring it continuously. Avoid using a metallic spatula and stick to a wooden one, especially while using non-stick cookware. Stir your food in equal intervals. Stir for a few seconds and then stir again in a minute or two. This will prevent the food from forming a bond with the base and will naturally avoid sticking.

    Recommended Video

    Cook With The Lid On

    Apart from Chinese food and dishes which require high flame cooking, prepare all your food items on a low flame. Your flame could range anywhere between low to medium. Usually high flame cooking can make the pot hot enough to make the ingredients stick to the metal. For quicker cooking, keep the lid on. This will help in heat retention, which will facilitate the cooking process.

    Related Stories

    • How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Want To Save Big On LPG Bill? Try These Pressure Cooker Tips!

    We’ve all been there.

    You’re cooking dinner on a hectic weeknight, trying to keep an eye on your pork chops in the skillet while also boiling broccoli and baking rolls. Amidst the chaos, your pot of rice boils off a little too much water and – in under 5 minutes – gives your favorite pan a thick, stuck-on coating.

    Although a burned side dish can put a damper on your meal, it’s even tougher to return to the kitchen later to scrub off your mistake. Burnt rice creates a thick layer of stuck-on food that poses a threat to your favorite saucepan, not to mention your fingernails. If you let the dish soak over the course of your meal, great – it may help remove a few grains of blackened rice to simplify the cleaning process. But, you’ll still be stuck for 20 minutes with a steel wool pad trying to save the pot.

    There are several ways of simplifying the cleaning process, and most of them involve ingredients you’ve already got in the pantry.

    1. Use Vinegar

    One of the most common ways to remove burnt food from the bottom of a pot is to add in a 50/50 mixture of water and vinegar. You should have enough solution that your cooked-on rice is completely covered. Set the pot on the stove at medium heat, and let the mixture come to a boil. Continue to boil until you see the soot begin to loosen. Finish off the cleaning with a steel wool pad (a Brillo works well!), and then use your regular dish soap and a sponge to remove any remaining black bits.

    2. Use Lemons

    If you don’t have vinegar in the cupboard, turn to your crisper drawer. This helpful YouTube video from HomeTalk shows a technique for removing burnt residue using one of our favorite (and versatile!) citrus fruits. Chop up a few lemons, cover them with water, bring the mixture to a boil, and watch the acidity work its magic. Use soap and a dish brush to remove any remaining grains, and rinse thoroughly.

    3. Use Baking Soda

    If the burnt rice is still persisting, try adding baking soda to the mix. You can add baking soda to your vinegar and water solution, as we did; the acidity of the combination helps to dissolve tricky substances. Once you’ve dumped out your blackened water, a paste of baking soda and water can also be used on the remaining food bits to clean up residual marks.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Rice, a seed of monocot plants, is consumed worldwide and used as a side to many different dishes. Rice takes a long time to cook and matching the time it takes to cook the rice with the main dish you are serving can be difficult. The best course of action is to make sure the rice has been thoroughly cooked and try to keep it warm prior to serving. A slow cooker, such as a Crock-Pot, can be a great tool for this task because it provides a low, stable temperature that won’t overcook the rice.

    Video of the Day

    Step 1

    Pour one full cup of water into the bottom of the slow cooker.

    Step 2

    Plug the cooker into an electrical outlet and turn it to its low setting.

    Step 3

    Place the cooked rice into the pot.

    Step 4

    Stir the rice around with spoon to coat each piece of rice with additional water.

    Step 5

    Place the lid on top of slow cooker.

    Step 6

    Remove the lid and check water levels every 10 minutes to ensure the rice does not dry out. The bottom of the cooker should have a small layer of water at all times. Add 1/2 to 1 cup of water if it does not.

    Step 7

    Stir rice making sure to circulate rice from the bottom of the rice pile to the top of the rice pile. This will ensure rice does not get stuck to the bottom.

    Step 8

    Replace the lid and continue checking the water levels until the rice is ready to be served.

    Things You’ll Need

    It is also important to match the liquid flavor with the flavor of the rice you are keeping warm. If you cooked your rice with chicken broth, you should use chicken broth instead of water in keeping proper liquid levels.

    Warning

    When opening the lid to check the rice, make sure your face is not directly over the pot. This will prevent hot stream from hitting and potentially burning your face.

    Learn how to cook rice on the stove. This easy method makes perfect fluffy and tender white rice, every time!

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Cooking rice on the stove is so simple, yet it’s all too easy to end up with mushy or gummy rice or a mess from a bubbled over pot. With this easy recipe, your rice will turn out perfectly cooked and fluffy, every time.

    You’ll love this recipe because there’s no guesswork, fancy steps or special equipment needed. While I love cooking rice in the Instant Pot, I’ll admit that I prefer the texture of stove top rice just a bit better. And compared to cooking it in the microwave or oven, rice cooked in a pot on the stove cooks more evenly and has the best texture.

    When you need a simple side dish to go with your meal, rice is easy, affordable and versatile. Now let’s cook some rice!

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    How to Cook Rice on the Stove

    In just a few simple steps and less than 5 minutes of active prep time, you’ll have a pot of fluffy white rice ready to serve and enjoy.

    1. Rinse the rice. Rinsing the rice removes any possible dirt or grit, as well as excess starch that could cause your rice to turn out too sticky. Put the rice in a fine mesh strainer and rinse it well under cold running water, then let it drain.
    2. Bring the water to a boil. Measure out your water and add it to a medium saucepan, along with a teaspoon of butter or olive oil. The butter adds flavor and also helps to keep the rice from sticking to the bottom of the pot. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat.
    3. Stir in the rice, cover and simmer. As soon as the water starts to boil, stir in the rice. Then immediately cover the pot and reduce the heat to the lowest setting. You want the rice to cook at a very low simmer. Simmer the rice for 15 minutes, leaving the lid in place the whole time. No stirring or peeking! How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot
    4. Let it rest for 10 minutes. As soon as your 15 minute cooking timer goes off, remove the pot from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes, without lifting the lid. The rice will continue to steam cook during the rest time until it’s nice and fluffy. Then fluff and serve! How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    This cooking method works for almost every type of white rice, including long grain white rice, such as basmati or jasmine, medium grain white rice and short grain white rice. To cook brown rice, see How to Cook Brown Rice.

    Rice to Water Ratio

    The rice to water ratio for perfect fluffy white rice is 1 cup uncooked rice to 1 1/2 cups water. I know you may have heard that you should use 2 cups of water for every cup of uncooked rice, but that is too much water and will give you gummy, mushy rice. Using less water and cooking at a very low simmer, followed by steaming with the lid on the pot creates soft and fluffy rice.

    One cup of uncooked rice will yield about 3 cups of cooked rice.

    White Rice Recipe Tips

    • Don’t use too much water or your rice will turn out mushy and gummy. You need 1 1/2 cups water for every 1 cup of uncooked rice. Measure carefully.
    • Cook at a very low simmer. Turn the heat on your stove to the very lowest setting while cooking the rice. The pot should hardly look like it’s boiling – you should just see a few bubbles now and then. Keeping the heat very low gently cooks the rice until it’s perfectly fluffy without evaporating too much of the liquid. It also prevents the pot from bubbling over and creating a mess.
    • Keep the lid on. Resist the urge to lift the lid to peek or stir. You want all of the steam to stay trapped in the pot throughout the cook and rest time.
    • Add a bit of butter or olive oil. This is both for flavor and to keep the rice from sticking to the bottom of the pot
    • Should you add salt? This is a matter of personal preference. I don’t find that rice needs salt added, but feel free to add some salt to the cooking water if desired.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    To Store, Freeze & Reheat

    It’s important to refrigerate or freeze rice promptly after cooking. Rice left out too long at room temperature can pose a food safety risk.

    • Refrigerator: Store cooked rice in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. Some sources say you can store it longer in the fridge, but I err on the side of caution.
    • To Freeze Cooked Rice: Let the rice cool completely (you can speed up the process by spreading the rice out in an even layer on a baking sheet). Then freeze in an airtight container for up to 3 months. I like to freeze rice in portion sizes that are just enough for one meal.
    • To Reheat: Leftover rice should be reheated to steaming hot before consuming. This can be done in the microwave, on the stove top, or even in a dish in the oven, covered to trap in the heat and steam. If your rice has dried out you can add a bit of water when reheating.

    Serving Suggestions

    When it comes to what to serve with rice, the possibilities really are limitless. Serve it with a Chicken Stir Fry or Asian dishes like Sesame Chicken. It’s a kid-friendly side dish for proteins like Baked Salmon, Pork Tenderloin or Air Fryer Chicken Breast. In the summer, we love grilling up Kabobs or Cilantro Lime Chicken and serving over white rice.

    Or try one of these ideas:

    • Layer rice, chicken, black beans and other toppings to make a burrito bowl.
    • Make fried rice with leftover rice.
    • Stir in lime juice, lime zest and fresh cilantro to make cilantro lime rice.
    • Serve it with recipes that have a lot of sauce or gravy, like Slow Cooker Honey Garlic Chicken or Smothered Pork Chops. Rice is perfect for soaking up extra sauce.
    • Make a grain bowl with rice and roasted vegetables.

    Biryani Rice Recipe: Biryani is as much about the rice as it is about the meat and spices. So, make sure you get that right! How, you ask? We have some handy tips and tricks that will make your home-made biryani the talking point of your spread!

    Highlights

    Think indulgence, and at some point, you are bound to picture a handy full of biryani. This one-pot dish has been associated with festive spirit and celebrations since time immemorial. Despite our fascination with the global cuisine, and easy accessibility to all kinds of food, Biryani’s popularity remains undisputed. This one-pot dish — made with rice, meat and an array of spices — is prepared in myriad ways across the country. Hyderabadi biryani is remarkably different from the Kolkata biryani, but if there’s one common factor about most of these biryanis is the texture of rice. Super fragrant and non-sticky, a biryani is as much about the rice as it is about the meat and spices. So, make sure you get that right! How, you ask? We have some handy tips and tricks that will make your home-made biryani the talking point of your spread!

    1. To make sure your biryani rice is not mushy, you have to pick the right kind of rice. Long grain basmati rice is apparently the best pick according to many chefs. The shorter the size of the grain, the greater are the chances of it clamping together, since they are starchier than long grain.
    2. It is also a good idea to wash the rice well, and soak the rice grains in water for at least 30 minutes before cooking them. Doing so may help soften the rice and allow them to absorb water while cooking.
    3. Do not overcook the rice, when you are boiling rice, make sure you parboil them. After about five minutes of boiling, use a spoon to scoop out some rice, press and check the consistency.
    4. Some people also use lemon juice while cooking the rice as a handy hack to prevent it from sticking to each other. You could also try lacing your ‘handi’ or vessel with bay leaves at the bottom, make sure you do not use too many and the flavour of bay leaf may overpower in the final preparation.
    5. The quantity of yogurt used in the marination shouldn’t be too much, it could make the biryani mushy.
    6. Even the cooking utensil you choose should be big enough so that it gives enough room to rice for cooking.

    Here Are Our Favourite Biryani Recipes From NDTV Food That You Can Try Making At Home:

    Click here for recipe of Mutton Biryani

    Click here for recipe of Chicken Biryani

    Click here for recipe of Kathal Biryani

    Click here for recipe of Paneer Makhani Biryani

    Try making biryani at home today, and let us know how you liked our tips!

    About Sushmita Sengupta Sharing a strong penchant for food, Sushmita loves all things good, cheesy and greasy. Her other favourite pastime activities other than discussing food includes, reading, watching movies and binge-watching TV shows.

    Ever wondered how to cook jasmine rice? Here is the guide on how to cook the perfect rice on the stovetop, in a slow cooker or Instant Pot.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot
    Jasmine rice was a big staple of my diet growing up. Mama Lin always cooked jasmine rice for dinner. In her house, dinner without rice simply doesn’t exist. Even on rare occasions when we ordered pizza for dinner, Mama Lin still cooked rice to eat on the side.

    Because jasmine rice was such a big part of my upbringing, I cook it often. Usually, I use my Instant Pot because it is the most convenient method. All I need to do is add rice and water to the Instant Pot, press the “Rice” button, and I have perfect rice in about 25 to 30 minutes.

    However, if I’m cooking a small batch of rice (about 1 cup or so), I prefer the stovetop method. Plus, not everyone owns an Instant Pot, which is why I wanted to show you how to cook jasmine rice on the stovetop or in a rice cooker.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    COOKING NOTES ON HOW TO COOK JASMINE RICE

    To me, perfectly cooked rice should be soft, chewy, and slightly sticky. You should be able to make out the individual grains of rice once it’s cooked. Cooking the rice with too much water breaks down the rice’s structure, leaving you with rice that has a mushy texture.

    In the stovetop and slow cooker methods listed below, you’ll notice that I don’t use as much water as other recipes. Honestly, I think those recipes recommend using too much water. As a result, the rice on the bottom of the pot is usually mushy. Getting the perfect rice-to-water ratio is an art! Follow the recipes below to get perfectly cooked jasmine rice every time.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Typical instructions for cooking rice on the stove include covering the rice after it boils. This steams the rice in addition to simmering. However, covering the pan and trapping the steam can also lead to bubbles forming in the starchy water, and these can multiply to the point that they push the pot lid up and boil over, even if the heat is set on low. If you’ve been unable to prevent this bubbling and boiling over from happening, you’ve likely resorted to cooking the rice without a lid. This makes the rice, especially the top layer, dry out rather quickly. Keep an eye on the rice to avoid burning it onto the pot’s surface.

    Video of the Day

    Step 1

    Rinse the rice if necessary — the manufacturer’s instructions will confirm this — and add water and rice to a pot per those instructions. Different rice varieties require slightly different amounts of water, and adding too little or too much will leave you with rice that isn’t fully cooked or that is a mushy mass.

    Step 2

    Boil the water and rice without a lid as usual. Once the water boils and you reduce it to low to simmer the rice, leave it for about 5 minutes.

    Step 3

    Check the water level. Some white rice absorbs water very quickly. Stir to even out areas that are becoming higher and approaching the surface of the water.

    Step 4

    Stir the rice occasionally and fold the top layer below the rest of the rice as the water level lowers. This helps keep the top layer from drying out.

    Step 5

    Dig into the rice and check the bottom layer to see how much water remains once you no longer see water above the top of the rice. Stop cooking when you see a little bit of water left at the bottom; the bottom of the pot will look like it has a creamy or starchy layer on it. Do not let all of the moisture evaporate while the heat is on because the rice will absorb the remaining moisture as it cools.

    Things You’ll Need

    The variety of the rice affects how it reacts to cooking on the stove with or without a lid; you might find you have more success with a particular type of grain length or brand. Success also depends on your personal tastes. Figuring these out is a matter of experimentation; take note of the brand, type, water amount and timing so you know if you should repeat what you did to make a good uncovered pot of rice.

    Note that the texture of the cooked rice will be different than what you’re used to with covered cooked rice because it is no longer steamed.

    Warning

    Don’t leave the rice unattended, especially if it’s white rice. This tends to cook faster than you think it will.

    Don’t automatically add more water than the manufacturer’s instructions call for; this usually makes the rice more watery instead of compensating for the increased evaporation rate.

    Instant Pot rice is a hands off way to cook fluffy white rice! This easy pressure cooker rice recipe helps to make dinner prep easy.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    With this simple Instant Pot recipe, you can make the best rice with the least effort!

    You’re going to love cooking rice in your Instant Pot. It’s fluffy, foolproof, and the perfect side dish for baked salmon, pork tenderloin and stir fry. Truly, this is one of the best Instant Pot recipes!

    Cooking rice in the Instant Pot is completely hands off! Once you start the rice cooking, you don’t have to think about it again until you’re ready to serve your rice.

    You can use this Instant Pot white rice recipe to cook any long grain white rice. I most often make Instant Pot jasmine rice or basmati rice. If you prefer brown rice, see how to cook brown rice in an Instant Pot.

    This Instant Pot Rice

    • is a hands off way to cook rice.
    • takes just a few minutes of prep time.
    • turns out perfectly cooked and fluffy, every time.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    Rice to Water Ratio

    The rice to water ratio for Instant Pot rice is 1 to 1. This means that for every cup of rice you need 1 cup of water. Measure carefully, and use the same measuring cup for both the water and the rice so that your measurement is precise. This way, your rice will turn out perfect every time.

    Why do you need less liquid when pressure cooking rice, compared to cooking rice on the stove? This is because you lose less liquid to evaporation with pressure cooking.

    For more flavorful rice you can cook the rice in chicken broth, vegetable broth or bone broth instead of water. I recommend using a low sodium broth to limit the amount of salt.

    How to Cook Rice in Instant Pot

    Before getting started, if you are new to using an Instant Pot, read my guide on how to use an Instant Pot.

    For this recipe, use your favorite long grain white rice. Both basmati and jasmine rice work well.

    How to prevent rice from sticking to the bottom of a pot

    First, rinse your rice under cool water to remove excess starch. I use a fine mesh strainer to rinse and drain the rice. Place the rice in your Instant Pot.

    Add the water (or broth) and stir to combine. If desired, you can also stir in a little bit of salt to flavor the rice. If you cook your rice in broth you don’t need to add any extra salt.

    Make sure that all of the rice is in the water and not stuck to the sides of the pot. Then close the Instant Pot lid. Be sure to turn the steam release valve to the sealing position. If you forget to do this, your rice won’t cook properly.

    White rice needs 4 minutes of cook time at high pressure. Depending on your Instant Pot model, you will use either the Pressure Cook or Manual button.

    After the cook time ends, allow the pressure to release naturally for at least 15 minutes by just leaving the Instant Pot alone. You need to do a natural release when cooking rice because this makes the rice fluffy and perfectly cooked. A natural release also helps to keep the rice from sticking to the bottom of your Instant Pot.

    Instant Pot Rice Setting

    I always cook rice using the manual pressure cook setting, not the rice setting. The Instant Pot rice program supposedly senses how much rice and moisture are in the pot and sets the cook time accordingly. The rice setting can only be used for white rice. I like to be able to control the cook time myself, so I avoid the preset programs on my Instant Pot.

    How much rice can you cook in an Instant Pot

    The recipe below is for cooking 2 cups of rice, which will yield about 6 cups of cooked rice. The water to rice ratio and cook time stay the same regardless of the amount of rice you are cooking.

    You can cook more rice as long as you don’t exceed the maximum fill lines on your pot. Rice will expand as it cooks, so you have to account for this:

    • You can double this recipe to cook 4 cups of rice in a 6 quart Instant Pot, which will make about 12 cups of cooked rice.
    • If you have an 8 quart Instant Pot (and need a lot of rice), you can triple this recipe to cook 6 cups rice. This will make about 18 cups of cooked rice.

    How to store rice

    If you have extra rice, you can refrigerate or freeze the leftovers for later, but you need to take certain precautions for food safety. Uncooked rice can be contaminated with spores of a bacteria that can survive the cooking process. If cooked rice is left to sit at room temperature, the bacteria may multiply.

    It’s best to eat cooked rice right away after cooking. If you have leftover rice, cool it quickly by laying it out in a thin layer. Refrigerate or freeze rice as soon as possible after cooking (within an hour). Use refrigerated cooked rice within 2 days or frozen rice within a month. Reheat rice until steaming hot before serving.

    How to freecycle

    How to freecycle

    How to freecycle

    The Freecycle Network is a website where you can get all kinds of free stuff in your area or give away items that you don’t need or want anymore. It’s really a great way to get freebies, but also an ideal method of reusing something that might have ended up in a landfill otherwise.

    Types of Free Stuff You Can Find on Freecycle

    You can find just about anything for free on Freecycle! Whether you’re looking for free furniture, baby stuff, collectibles, craft supplies, kids’ clothes, or even free books, you’ll find them plus a whole lot more.

    Someone’s trash is indeed someone else’s treasure.

    How To Join Your Local Freecycle Group

    From Freecycle’s Find a Town page, enter your city and state in the box. Select the town’s Freecycle group you’d like to join. You can join up to five, so if you live close to other towns, you may want to join those groups as well. Keep in mind that the more groups you belong to, the more free stuff you’ll have access to.

    If it’s your first time using this site, it’s a good idea to read the notices at the top of the group forum to get more details on how to use your city’s Freecycle board and the rules and etiquette for the group.

    There are two categories of posts for each city: people offering items and people requesting items. It’s easy to find whatever post type you’re looking for. Use the tabs at the top of the page to filter by OFFER and WANTED items.

    Browsing is fine for guests, but to reply to a post, you’ll need to create a free account.

    How To Get Free Stuff From Freecycle

    After you’ve become a member of a town, you can immediately begin exploring the items that are being offered or requested of the other members.

    Be sure to read the member rules to read how and where to post to get the free stuff. Each group operates a little differently on how they want you to do things. For instance, some groups may want you to give away something for free before you request free stuff from other members. So make sure you read the rules and browse the posts before requesting any free stuff to make sure that you’re following the rules of your group.

    If you can’t quite figure out how to navigate around the site, check out the Freecycle knowledge base for help. Don’t be afraid to ask questions to your local town moderators as well.

    How To Give Away Your Stuff for Free at Freecycle

    If you’d like to give away your stuff for free on Freecycle, you’re encouraged to do so. After you’ve been accepted to your local group, you’ll want to read the rules on how to give away your stuff. Again, each group operates a little differently, so be sure to follow the rules.

    Freecycle Alternative

    If you’re not finding what you want on Freecycle, you can find out how to get free stuff on Craigslist. There’s a dedicated section within each city’s page just for free stuff people are offering up.

    Hello! We’ve noticed that you are using Internet Explorer to access our site. This browser is no longer supported. Please switch to another browser and try again.

    Welcome to The Freecycle Network™! We are a grassroots & entirely nonprofit movement of people who are giving and getting stuff for free in their own Towns. It’s all about reuse and keeping good stuff out of landfills. Membership is free. And now you can also set up your own, smaller personal Friends Circle for gifting and lending of items with just your friends! Sign up now.

    RECENT ITEMS

    NEARBY TOWNS.

    changing the world one gift at a time™

    Our mission is to build a worldwide sharing movement that reduces waste, saves precious resources & eases the burden on our landfills while enabling our members to benefit from the strength of a larger community.

    9,937,514

    Membership is always free

    Operation is grassroots and 100% nonprofit

    Local Towns are moderated by volunteers

    Zero tolerance of Scams, Spam and Adult Content

    Become a member

    As featured in:

    • About Us
    • Press Room
    • News
    • Find A Town
    • Privacy
    • Terms of Service
    • Guidelines
    • Donate
    • Sponsor
    • Volunteer
    • Help
    • Knowledge Base
    • Contact

    Don’t Throw It Away, Give It Away

    Any good working item with a plug would be better off in use than in a landfill. From coffee grinders to refrigerators, there are times when people decide they simply have no more use for an item. Understandable, but dumping an item when there others struggling to afford that same item is fundamentally wrong. A computer is a sought after freecycle item. While you might have the need for the latest and greatest, a child will flourish fine with word processing and internet capability to do his or her homework.

    Furniture is a popular freecycle item. As our life changes so does the need for beds, dressers or tables. But just as your need is waining, rest assure that someone out there is considering buying that same item. Child-size furniture is probably the most evident in this cycle. Adding to furnitures’ freecycle popularity is the potential for a cheap makeover. A light sanding and a $5.00 coat of varnish or paint and the piece fits into your decor so well that it looks like you shopped for months to find it. But please, let your guests know that it’s freecycled to help spread the word.

    Structures such as homes, mobile homes, greenhouses or sheds are also good freecycle items. The amount of debris going into landfills from these items when discarded is great. Likewise, the difference a free living space or a greenhouse can make in someone’s life is great. The logistics of freecycling a structure can be more time consuming but the end result is also more satisfying.

    Children’s play equipment such as swing sets and trampolines to baby rattles are also popular. The need for these items often change before the life of the product ends. But please check all aspects of safety on the product before allowing your child contact. Obviously the safety of a child is more important than decreasing landfill space so make sure the item is in good condition. Also check with the product manufacturer and government agencies such as the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission to see if any problems have been discovered with the product.

    Clothing is also a good freecycle product. Whether you’ve been fortunate enough drop a few pant sizes or your child has hit a growth spurt, often clothing can be put to good use even when you are done. A good tip for child-size clothing is pairing up with someone in your group who has a child at the right age and size to take advantage of your child’s hand-me-downs. Take note of the rules in your group before posting anything about such an arrangement. The best bet might be asking someone who answers your offer of clothing if they would be interested.

    Constant collectibles are items frequently used and discarded in a household that people have found another use for. For example, a gardener might use egg cartons to plant seedlings or egg shells as a soil supplement. If you are someone who has a constant collectible need be on the look out for a group member who also has one. This is another pair-up opportunity. Again, take note of your group’s rules before posting anything. You could save up another group members constant collectible item then ask the member if they would be interested in saving up your constant collectible for a regular swap.

    What is freecycling and how does it work?

    The idea of freecycling is to promote the three R’s (Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle) by making it easy for people to give away their unwanted but reusable items to people who can use them.

    You can post Offers for items you want to give away or Requests for items you need. You can give and get almost anything on trash nothing including food, clothes, furniture, electronics, books, plants, toys and much more. Just make sure you follow the rules and guidelines when posting and replying.

    Even things you might not consider reusable like cloth scraps, scratched CDs and broken appliances sometimes find homes with artists looking for materials or tinkerers looking for an interesting project or spare parts. Items you offer aren’t expected to be in perfect condition as long as you accurately describe their condition when you offer them.

    For example, here is how offering an item works:

    1. You have a bike you don’t need and you want to give it away.
    2. You post an Offer that describes your bike.
    3. People in your local area who are interested in your bike will reply to your post to contact you privately.
    4. You choose which person you would like to give the bike to.
    5. Between the two of you, you arrange a time and place for them to come and pick up the bike.
    6. Your bike is picked up and you mark your Offer post as gifted so other people know that it is no longer available.
    7. You’ve given away your bike with little effort to someone who can use it, met someone new from your community and kept something out of the landfill. Great for you and the planet!

    Similarly, when you need something, you can post a Request and if someone has what you need, they will contact you to offer it.

    So next time you’re cleaning out the garage, moving to a new place or about to throw something away, don’t forget that someone on your local freecycling group might be able to use your unwanted stuff.

    Hello! We’ve noticed that you are using Internet Explorer to access our site. This browser is no longer supported. Please switch to another browser and try again.

    Welcome to The Freecycle Network™! We are a grassroots & entirely nonprofit movement of people who are giving and getting stuff for free in their own Towns. It’s all about reuse and keeping good stuff out of landfills. Membership is free. And now you can also set up your own, smaller personal Friends Circle for gifting and lending of items with just your friends! Sign up now.

    RECENT ITEMS

    NEARBY TOWNS.

    changing the world one gift at a time™

    Our mission is to build a worldwide sharing movement that reduces waste, saves precious resources & eases the burden on our landfills while enabling our members to benefit from the strength of a larger community.

    9,937,514

    Membership is always free

    Operation is grassroots and 100% nonprofit

    Local Towns are moderated by volunteers

    Zero tolerance of Scams, Spam and Adult Content

    Become a member

    As featured in:

    • About Us
    • Press Room
    • News
    • Find A Town
    • Privacy
    • Terms of Service
    • Guidelines
    • Donate
    • Sponsor
    • Volunteer
    • Help
    • Knowledge Base
    • Contact
    Over 8 million people around the world are giving and getting free things in their local communities.

    What people say

    How it works

    Simply take a photo and briefly describe the item you’re giving away.

    You can include any preferences you have about the pickup time or location.

    Choose a recipient

    People in your area will message you if they are interested in your item.

    You choose who to gift your item to.

    Schedule a time and place for the other person to come pick up your item.

    Most pickups are left on a porch or at the curb or by meeting in a public place.

    Save money and keep usable items out of the trash by reusing them.

    If you just want to give something away, like your old laptop, you have any number of outlets. Your local newspaper probably has a free section in the classifieds; you can post it on Craig’s List; you can drop it off at a thrift store or donate it to a charity that will refurbish and resell it. But if you want to give away your old laptop and be part of a potential revolution in the process, you might turn to Freecycle.org. The Freecycle Network hopes to encourage a “worldwide gift economy” — one old laptop, bottle of nail polish, gas stove or People magazine at a time.

    In this article, we’ll find out how the Freecycle Network got started, how the process works and how you can start giving your unwanted stuff away to people who’ll use it.

    The Freecycle Network has a lofty goal: to establish a “worldwide gift economy” that cuts down on waste, decreases consumerism and connects people through giving. Freecycle members post e-mail offers for stuff they don’t want anymore to a listserv for their local group. If another member is interested in the stuff, he replies to the poster. The poster then lets the interested party know when and where he can pick up the stuff. If more than one member is interested, the giver has to pick someone from all of the interested members. Many local charities join Freecycle groups, and most groups ask that you give a nonprofit first dibs. That way, your local thrift store doesn’t lose out through the success of Freecycle.

    If you’re thinking, “Sweet, presents!”, think again — according to the official Web site, your local Freecycle group is not a place to just grab up “free stuff for nothing.” A gift economy is a two-way street. Don’t take it if you don’t need it, and remember that it’s a gift, not a freebie. If you’re looking to get something for nothing, you should probably just check out the “Free” section of your local Craig’s list or newspaper.

    Freecycle is an idealistic endeavor, to be sure, but it’s working. The network was born in 2003 in Arizona, the brainchild of Deron Beal. Beal worked for an environmentalist group in Tucson, trying to keep usable goods out of landfills through education. The nonprofit he worked for had a bunch of office supplies it didn’t need, and Beal spent hours locating other nonprofit groups that needed what his group was trying to give away. He realized he could easily set up a listserv where people could see what was available and what was needed and save everyone a lot of time in the process. Thus began Freecycle.

    In December 2005, there are more than 1.8 million members in 3,200 Freecycle communities in 50 countries around the world. The Freecycle Network reports that its members are keeping 55 tons of goods out of landfills each day. Let’s find out how it works.

    According to the EPA, people in the United States keep 64 million tons of garbage out of landfills every year through recycling.

    The Freecycle Process

    Joining a Freecycle group takes about two minutes. You visit Freecycle.org and click on the link for your region.

    The next page lists all of the Freecycle groups in that region. In the U.S. Central region, for example, there are 833 groups as of December 2005. So you look for a group in your area. If there’s no group near you, you can actually start one up (see “Starting Your Own Freecycle Group” below). If there is already a group in your city or town, you can click on its “GoTo” link to visit the Web page for that group or just click on “Join” to register. Some groups require membership approval. If your local group does, you just fill out a few profile details and write a short message explaining why you want to join. The volunteer moderator for that group approves your membership and sends you a series of e-mails explaining how the process works.

    Freecycle groups accept a huge range of free stuff, but there are some rules about what you can offer. It has to be legal, meaning no moonshine or drug paraphernalia, and it must be “family friendly” — if you’re looking to give away your old girlie mags, a bottle of vodka or a gun you bought on a whim, look elsewhere. You’re usually allowed to offer a pet to a loving home, but you cannot offer an animal for breeding or other purposes.

    Let’s say we have an old printer just collecting dust in the closet. Our local Freecycle group might want it, so we’ll offer it to our fellow group members. The system is pretty simple:

    1. To post an offer, we’ll send an e-mail to the group’s e-mail address or visit the group Web site and click on “Messages.” The subject line of our message should be short an simple: “OFFER: Item, general location” is the framework. So our e-mail subject will read “OFFER: Working HP inkjet printer, 15th and Main.”
    2. Once we receive a response, meaning one of our group members wants it, we set up a way to deliver the gift. We can set up any delivery method that works for us. We might give the receiver our address and leave the gift on the porch; we could meet at the mall parking lot and hand over the printer in front of Macy’s; we could bring the gift to our workplace and ask the receiver to meet us there. The one thing to keep in mind besides convenience is safety: If it’s raining and you can’t leave the printer on your front porch, it’s probably not a good idea to leave it in your garage and give a perfect stranger your garage door entry code. Just wait until it stops raining.
    3. Once the interested party picks up the printer, we send out another e-mail with the subject line “TAKEN: Working HP inkjet printer, 15th and Main.” One good thing about the Freecycle listserv is that while offers go out to every member in the group, responses come only to the member who made the offer. This saves a lot of inbox space, but it also means we need to let everybody know the printer is no longer available so we don’t get any more responses for it.

    Although giving is the main idea, you can ask for things you need, too. It’s important not to abuse this privilege or ask for luxury items, because you’ll quickly get a reputation for being greedy (and therefore not worthy of receiving gifts). But if you need something, and it’s the kind of thing someone might stick in the basement and forget about, like an old space heater, it’s okay to let people know you want it. You simply send out a message with the subject line “WANTED: Space heater.” If you get any responses, you arrange a pick up, followed by another message with the subject line “Received: Space heater” so everyone knows your need has been met and they don’t have to keep combing through their attic for that space heater they swore they stuck up there 10 years ago.

    And that’s it! A few e-mails, a short exchange with a fellow member and you get to feel all warm and fuzzy inside. Everybody wins — so it might seem strange that many people are angry with the Freecycle Network for what they perceive as the corruption of a good thing.

    Hello! We’ve noticed that you are using Internet Explorer to access our site. This browser is no longer supported. Please switch to another browser and try again.

    Welcome to The Freecycle Network™! We are a grassroots & entirely nonprofit movement of people who are giving and getting stuff for free in their own Towns. It’s all about reuse and keeping good stuff out of landfills. Membership is free. And now you can also set up your own, smaller personal Friends Circle for gifting and lending of items with just your friends! Sign up now.

    RECENT ITEMS

    NEARBY TOWNS.

    changing the world one gift at a time™

    Our mission is to build a worldwide sharing movement that reduces waste, saves precious resources & eases the burden on our landfills while enabling our members to benefit from the strength of a larger community.

    9,937,514

    Membership is always free

    Operation is grassroots and 100% nonprofit

    Local Towns are moderated by volunteers

    Zero tolerance of Scams, Spam and Adult Content

    Become a member

    As featured in:

    • About Us
    • Press Room
    • News
    • Find A Town
    • Privacy
    • Terms of Service
    • Guidelines
    • Donate
    • Sponsor
    • Volunteer
    • Help
    • Knowledge Base
    • Contact

    Hello! We’ve noticed that you are using Internet Explorer to access our site. This browser is no longer supported. Please switch to another browser and try again.

    Donate to Freecycle

    In just a few short years, Freecycle™ has generated a spectacular worldwide outpouring of generosity. Those with used items happily share; those who need, gracefully receive; all without judgement – or any funds – passed.

    Freecycle™ performs many wonderful functions: building bonds and community, keeping material items from the landfills, and redeeming the clutter that consumes us by moving it forward to a new, productive life.

    Owing to the incredible efforts of thousands of local volunteers, Freecycle™ is able to keep its administrative expenses quite low. However, as the largest recycling and reuse website in the world, we have rather substantial server, bandwidth and coding expenses. Your help to keep this incredible grassroots effort going is deeply appreciated.

    We depend upon donations to help meet these expenses and to continue to refine and spread our extraordinarily successful Freecycle™ infrastructure.Your generous donations are tax deductible as we are a registered charitable nonprofit.

    Thank you for your support in “changing the world one gift at a time.”

    If you prefer mailing a cheque/check:

    The Freecycle Network, P.O. Box 294, Tucson, Arizona 85702 USA

    Freecycle UK, 22 Ashton Road Norton Stockton on Tees TS20 1QN UK

    How to freecycle

    Many or all of the products featured here are from our partners who compensate us. This may influence which products we write about and where and how the product appears on a page. However, this does not influence our evaluations. Our opinions are our own. Here is a list of our partners and here’s how we make money.

    Hotel rooms. Groceries. Movie tickets. When it comes to saving money on the things you want and need, you can’t beat getting them for free. What you may not realize is that there are ways to score almost anything without paying.

    Here are 11 things you can do to get free stuff.

    1. Check online community marketplaces

    Craigslist, Nextdoor and Facebook groups are great resources for free goods and services. You can find advertisements for a wide variety of things people want to give away, such as furniture, appliances, moving boxes and plants.

    2. Sample products

    Look for free samples at stores. You can graze on food at Costco and other wholesale clubs or ask for beauty and fragrance samples at department stores like Nordstrom and Macy’s.

    Can’t find samples in person? Request them online. You can get samples by mail from manufacturers like Procter & Gamble and Unilever, sometimes in exchange for testing or reviewing products. Amazon Prime members can buy sample boxes in a variety of categories — including nutrition, skin care and pet supplies — and get reimbursed in Amazon credit that they can redeem for select items.

    3. Enroll in loyalty programs

    Sign up for rewards programs at your favorite businesses. Many restaurants and retailers give members special perks for their birthdays or based on how much they spend. You could get free food , shipping, gift cards, merchandise, movie tickets and other freebies.

    4. Use your library card

    Libraries provide plenty of free educational and entertainment resources besides books. With a valid library card, you could get access to movies, music, games, audiobooks, classes, museums and more. Check with your library for details.

    5. Take online surveys

    You can earn gift cards, money and sweepstakes entries by answering questions on sites like Swagbucks and Global Test Market . Taking surveys is usually easy work, but time-consuming — and the payout can be low. See our survey site reviews to learn more.

    6. Cash in on credit card rewards

    Have a rewards credit card ? You can redeem points, miles or cash back for things like hotel stays, flights and gift cards. Some cards come with additional perks such as free checked bags, travel insurance and access to airport lounges. Explore what types of rewards you can get with your card.

    7. Download an app for freebies

    Cash-back and rewards apps can hook you up with free stuff. With Shopkick, you earn points for visiting certain stores, viewing products online or making purchases. You can redeem points for gift cards to places like Target and Starbucks. A gas app like GetUpside is another way to earn perks on a necessary purchase.

    8. Use coupons

    Coupons aren’t just for discounts; They can also help you score freebies. Many stores and brands issue free items, buy one, get one free or free gift with purchase offers. You can get coupons from places like online databases and the Sunday newspaper. Make sure to read the terms, conditions and store policies.

    9. Indulge in national food holidays

    If you use social media, you’ve probably noticed that there’s a “holiday” to honor almost every food item. Find local restaurants or chains that participate and you could get free food or drink. For example, Cinnabon treated customers to a free cup of coffee on National Coffee Day in September.

    10. Sign up for a free trial

    Subscription boxes and services are all the rage, but they can be expensive. However, you can get free TV , music streaming, audiobooks, snacks, meals, coffee and more by signing up for trial periods. For example, Crunch Fitness offers a free one-day gym pass, and Netflix is free for one month. Mark your calendar for the dates free trials end so you can cancel and avoid surprise charges.

    11. Enter sweepstakes

    Contests give you opportunities to win all sorts of cool prizes. Radio stations reward lucky callers with concert tickets. HGTV does a dream home giveaway. Vacations, merchandise and gift cards may also be at stake. Even if the odds of winning are low, it’s usually easy to enter.

    Sometimes, you’ll get entries for leaving a product review on a website or tagging a brand in an Instagram post. Keep your eyes peeled for sweepstakes from your favorite companies. Read the rules carefully, and never enter a contest that asks for sensitive information like your credit card or Social Security numbers.

    Interested in finding more ways to get a great deal on the stuff you want? Check out NerdWallet’s online shopping guide .

    How to freecycle

    About the author: Lauren Schwahn is a personal finance writer at NerdWallet. Her work has been featured by USA Today and The Associated Press. Read more

    7 of the Best Money-Making Apps of 2022

    15 Free or Cheap Things to Do

    19 Ways to Find Fast Cash

    Disclaimer: NerdWallet strives to keep its information accurate and up to date. This information may be different than what you see when you visit a financial institution, service provider or specific product’s site. All financial products, shopping products and services are presented without warranty. When evaluating offers, please review the financial institution’s Terms and Conditions. Pre-qualified offers are not binding. If you find discrepancies with your credit score or information from your credit report, please contact TransUnion® directly.

    Property and Casualty insurance services offered through NerdWallet Insurance Services, Inc.: Licenses

    NerdWallet Compare, Inc. NMLS ID# 1617539

    California: California Finance Lender loans arranged pursuant to Department of Financial Protection and Innovation Finance Lenders License #60DBO-74812

    Here we list all the very best free stuff, i.e. anything that’s given away for free with no credit card needed, that is currently available. This directory is updated daily.

    Browse through the list below and simply click on the freebies you are interested in for info on how to get them. We explain for each one exactly how to get it, step by step, so you know what to expect.

    Companies offer these freebies on a first come first serve basis. Just because you request one doesn’t guarantee that you will receive one but the more you request, the more you’ll receive. That’s a great way to try out new products or services without spending your money. Here you will find free gift cards, t-shirts, pet food, & all kinds of other free stuff. If you’re interested in FREE samples, visit our FREE Food Samples, FREE Beauty Samples, FREE samples for kids or FREE Health samples categories.

    How to freecycle

    FREE Target Insider Box

    Receive a free Target Insider Box in the mail. This is offered in partnership with Sampler. While supplies last. Sign-up

    How to freecycle

    FREE CeraVe AM Facial Moisturizing Lotion SPF 30 Sample

    First 300,000. Receive a free CeraVe AM Facial Moisturizing Lotion SPF 30 Sample in the mail. A hydrating face lotion

    How to freecycle

    FREE La Roche Posay Mineral SFP Moisturizer Sample

    Receive a free sample of La Roche Posay Mineral SFP Moisturizer in the mail. Mineral SPF moisturizer with hyaluronic acid

    FREE Gift cards from FetchRewards

    Get a FREE Amazon or Target gift card INSTANTLY from Fetchrewards! All you have to do is download the app,

    How to freecycle

    FREE Sample Box from Sampler

    The Sampler Exchange Network allows select members to create and receive a custom Sampler Pack of free product samples that

    How to freecycle

    FREE Skinceuticals Vitamin C Serum Deluxe Sample

    Receive a free Skinceuticals Vitamin C Antioxidant Serum Deluxe Sample in the mail. Vitamin C serum is an essential step

    How to freecycle

    FREE Samples and more from P&G

    5/20/22: Receive a free full-size sample of Pepto Herbal Blends Peppermint and Caraway Product in the mail. Sample is Full-Size

    How to freecycle

    FREE Dr. Dennis Gross Alpha Beta Peels

    Receive a free Dr. Dennis Gross 3-Day Peel pack in the mail! A fast-acting, two-step daily treatment for clinical results

    How to freecycle

    FREE Samples from PinchMe

    Want a FREE sample box from PinchMe? It’s very simple. I receive a free sample box from them almost every

    How to freecycle

    FREE 15-Day Riversol Skincare Sample Kit

    Receive a free 15-day Riversol skincare sample kit in the mail with free shipping! You must be on a computer

    How to freecycle

    FREE Salonpas Pain Relief Patch Sample

    Receive a free Salonpas Pain Relief Patch Sample in the mail for temporary relief of mild to moderate pain. This

    How to freecycle

    Join Enfamil Family Beginnings® & Get Up to $400 in FREE Gifts!

    Join Enfamil Family Beginnings® and get up to $400 in FREE gifts including coupons, formula samples, Belly Badges™, and more!

    How to freecycle

    FREE Sample Box from Daily Goodie Box

    Daily Goodie Box sends boxes FULL of large size FREE samples. Sign-up here. NOTE: To get a box, make sure

    How to freecycle

    Ultimate List of Free Baby Stuff for New Moms | 2022

    Huge list of Baby Freebies that include Onesies, Wipes, Diapers, Blankets, Bottles, Formula & more!

    We review each freebie carefully before we list them in the directory. Some are small free samples, some are deluxe-size samples and some are full-size products! A lot of free products that we list are sent in the mail for free, some other ones are to be picked up in stores with a coupon. Companies often give away samples when they launch a new product or when they want some feedback on their products or when they want to raise awareness about their products. Some companies offer free stuff to everyone while some other companies might ask a few questions to see if you qualify. Restaurants and other food & coffee places often offer rewards when you download their app and for your birthday. Another opportunity for free offers are all the National Days like National Ice Cream Day, National Pretzel Day, National Pizza Day, National Burger Day etc.

    Most of the free stuff that we list here is offered nationwide. For free stuff from your local favorite stores, make sure you follow them on social media or subscribe to their newsletter and watch for free offers.

    It’s so fun to go to your mailbox every day and find out what you received!

    Freecycling is a popular way to get rid of things you don’t want, while helping out those in your community with tight budgets.

    If you’re cleaning out your garage this summer, or looking over what didn’t sell in your yard sale, you could post it on Craigslist, drop it off at a thrift store, or donate it to charity. However, if you want to become closer to your community by helping those interested in helping others, a freecycling group might be the answer.

    Freecycling is a popular way to get rid of things you don’t want, while helping out those in your community with tight budgets, and keeping more stuff out of dumps and landfills.

    Here’s how it works:

    If you have an item in relatively good condition that you no longer want, there’s a strong chance someone else could benefit from it. You post a message to a Freecycle group, and if another member is interested, they will reply. Once the item has been claimed, you’ve not only helped to declutter your home, but you’ve also helped out somebody within the community, and saved space in a landfill.

    Although giving is the primary focus within these groups, Freecycling works both ways. If there’s something that you want, before you go to a store and buy it, check your local freecycle group to see if somebody has one listed for free. I used Freecycle a few summers ago. It was incredibly hot, and I wanted to buy a fan. Before going to the store, I browsed a Freecycle group online, and found someone in my neighbourhood giving one away. I quickly e-mailed her, and picked up the fan a few hours later.

    There are Freecycling groups located around the world. Through RecyclingGroupFinder.com, there are almost 1,400 members in my neighbourhood in Vancouver. Stuttgart, Germany where I am now has a membership of almost 500 people.

    Other Freecycling websites include Freecycle.org and Freecycling Group Finder.

    Freecycling tips:

    • Some Freecycle groups have specific rules, so before you join, make sure you read up on exactly how the group functions.

    • When somebody contacts you, do not request compensation or try to make a trade. Likewise if you’re asking for an item – do not offer compensation beyond a thank you.

    • Non-profit organizations often join Freecycle groups in order to stretch their budgets with donated equipment. These non-profit groups usually get priority over other members.

    • Be aware of consumer product recalls, and items that must meet regulatory requirements. Check out the Health Canada website for information and precautions.

    • If you are offering heavy or bulky items, make sure to mention that the recipient will need a truck or van for transport. Make it clear if you are able to help the recipient load the item into their vehicle.

    • Items move fast, so if there’s something you want, e-mail the owner as soon as possible. Clothing is always popular among freecycling groups, as well as kitchenware, household furniture, and appliances.

    • Don’t let somebody into your home to pick up an item if you’re concerned for your safety. Have a friend come to your home when you plan to meet the recipient, place the item out on your front step for them to take away, or offer to meet them in a public place.

    Coupons for discounts or two-for-one are great, who doesn’t love a good deal? But coupons for free products are even better. Companies make their products available to spread word-of-mouth and to encourage you to tell your friends about them. Often this is done to debut a new product, or as a relaunch when a product has a new design or packaging. At other times, it’s done to promote seasonal products, such as grilling sauces in the summer or holiday items. Here’s how to snag your share of freebies.

    Like Companies on Facebook

    Everyone is on Facebook, including your favorite brands. They have fan pages for their company and individual products. Like their fan page, and you could be rewarded with free product coupons, either when you sign up or in the future. Be aware that you won’t see every posting that a brand makes to their fan page, so it is smart to stop by their page frequently to look for free offers.

    Companies That Like to Show the Facebook-Freebie Love

    • Bath and Body Works
    • Redbox
    • Suave
    • Yankee Candle

    Tip: Set up a Google Alert for the phrase “Facebook freebie,” and you’ll be among the first to know when a new deal goes live. You’ll receive an email that will have links to announcements about freebies. You can set how often to receive them – as they are found or daily.

    Rebates

    Get serious about redeeming rebates. It’s a great way to earn both rebate checks and free product coupons. You may want to explore using an app to find and organize your rebates. You will be amazed how a little technology opens up many more opportunities to get money back, plus freebies.

    Contact Manufacturers

    Make a list of the products that you regularly use (food, cleaners, toiletries, etc.). Then, email the manufacturer of each one to let them know what you think of their product, either good or bad. A bit of feedback could (and likely will) net you a mailbox full of coupons for freebies.

    Sign Up for Product Tests

    If you agree to test products for companies, they’ll hook you up with plenty of loot. What you receive to test may not be the final product that ends up on the shelves, and you’ll be part of the development process. Free product coupons are often a benefit that is included.

    A Couple Test Sites

    • Kraft
    • Vocalpoint (P&G)
    • 6 More Consumer Test Panels to Sign Up For

    Spread the Word About New Products

    Businesses know word-of-mouth advertising (WOM) is powerful stuff. This is even more true with social media. You aren’t just talking to neighbors over the back fence or co-workers around the water cooler anymore. If you have a lot of social media friends and followers, you will be especially desirable to get hooked up with freebies. Sign up to spread the word about new products, and they’ll send you coupons so that you can try them first.

    Buying free stuff online ain’t that the dream of today’s generation. I know that cause I am that person who buys everything online, every single thing in my apartment is bought on e-commerce website, trust me everything. We are in a generation where e-commerce has boomed so rapidly that there is no stopping it. Alibaba has set a new record with more than $30.8 billion in sales in just 24 hours, just give that a moment to settle in.

    How to freecycle

    Yet the mechanism behind all these transactions taking place is just bits of information flowing all over giant interconnected web of devices, we call as internet. Anyone who understands the science behind how these transactions take place can figure out a way to shop online forever and that too free of cost.

    Most of the security personnels reading the article might be thinking it is just a clickbait but I just want you to keep your mind open and follow through as I explain to you the three level of difficulties in which you can hack a payment gateway for a e-commerce brand.

    How to freecycle

    1. The easy way
    2. The tricky way
    3. The next to impossible way

    These three points they are the stepping stones to hack and being able to manipulate any payment gateway.

    1. The easy way

    Now this is the easiest way you can manipulate the amount of the product that you are buying. So this is when the cost / amount of the product is present in the hidden element of the form in the HTML page. So, while we are choosing a item that we are planning to buy the price of the item gets added to the total amount of the product and that price is taken from the hidden field that gets filled into the form and then presented as the grand total.

    How to bypass it –

    To change the price of the product all you have to do is to change it in the hidden form field where the price is mentioned before adding the product to the cart. In this way the actual price is never added to the cart and you can buy the product literally for free.

    2. The tricky way

    This is the second way of how to manipulate the amount of the product that you are buying online and change the price to your liking. So, in this process we use a intercept tool like Burp Suite. The price isn’t in the hidden field in the form, so we can’t change it like the way before and we add the product to the cart.

    How to freecycle

    How to bypass it –

    So, once we are at the payment gateway we turn on the intercept and manipulate the cost manually in the packet we just intercepted. After editing the price in the intercepter we then forward the packet and just like that we have ourselves our another free product.

    How to freecycle

    3. The next to impossible way

    The people who have been working with payment gateways and online transaction, the steps leading till here might be well known to them and they must have had security in place which might have taken care of the vulnerabilities I just mentioned above. The most well known way to protect from these vulnerabilities is to use a hash.

    Hashes are used as a method to check the integrity of the message that has been sent over from the e-commerce website to the payment gateway. The hash and the other values including the price of the product is then send over for verification and if the hashes before and after the payment gateway matches only then transaction is allowed.

    How to freecycle

    How to bypass it –

    This is the method that most of the security vendors consider to be secure, the problem arise when you start to dig a little deeper and begin to focus on one e-commerce website at a time.

    The first that you learn as a hacker, is never to give up and find a solution no matter how crazy it is. So, I started digging regarding the hash and how they formulate it. To make things easier for the developers to integrate their e-commerce website with the payment gateway these companies publish articles in the public domain regarding how they formulate the hash and other details.

    A little bit of reconnaissance and you can find these documentaion i.e. the parameters that are involved and the hashing technique they use in creating the hash. Now once you have the required parameters most of them are present in the packet you have intercepted, mostly one of the parameters is the password that is also utilised, which is known only to the e-commerce admin.

    So the next step is to put together the parameters and either brute force or use a dictionary attack to find that password and once you do then you can create your own hash according to the modified price of the product that you change it to and buy unlimited free products from that vendor as long as they don’t change the password.

    This step is really difficult, but some of the developers just copy the code with the same password as it is in the documentation and thus leading to this security vulnerability and allowing to buy free online products.

    Every security vulnerability that I just exposed and showed above are caused due to the lack of awareness in the developers where they are unaware of the security risks of their code and how it can cost the company thousands or even million of dollars worth of damage.

    If the developers focus more on the security perspective of things and keeping secure coding in mind more than 90% of the errors can be solved straight away and no security risk will arise.

    If you enjoyed it please do clap & let’s collaborate. Get, Set, Hack!

    It’s as easy as a few clicks

    • Share
    • PINTEREST
    • Email

    How to freecycle

    The Spruce / Letícia Almeida

    How to freecycle

    Craigslist is a great place to buy and sell things, but did you know that you can also find a ton of free stuff there? It’s true that not everything free is of high quality, but nothing quite beats a zero-cost pickup, especially if you’re on a tight budget.

    Expect to find pretty much anything: TVs, couches, pianos, clothes, music CDs, firewood, grills, mattresses, toilets. you name it! More often than not, people just want to get rid of things that are taking up unnecessary space in their house. You can use this to your advantage, and the best part is that it’s extremely easy to start by browsing through the dozens of listings from the comfort of your home.

    Choose Your Craigslist Location

    How to freecycle

    Visit Craigslist and select the city that’s closest to where you live. Countries and continents are located at the very top of the page, and then more specific areas further down.

    If your location isn’t listed, see Step 3 below; there might still be a way to find what you need.

    Find the Free Stuff Section

    How to freecycle

    On the classified ads for your chosen city, select free under the for sale section.

    Narrow Down the Listings

    How to freecycle

    To help find something specific, you’re given a few search options on the left of the page.

    You can filter by items that have an image to be sure you know what you’re getting, or make sure the listing was posted today only, search for items a specific distance from another location, filter by condition (new, salvage, excellent, etc.), locate only items that are deliverable, etc. The search bar is how you narrow down the results by keyword.

    The search tools are, of course, optional. You can also just browse through the listings manually.

    Select Your Free Stuff

    How to freecycle

    Browse through the listings of free stuff until you see one that sounds like it might be something you like. Select the item’s title or image to view more information about it.

    Be sure to read over the description. If you’d like to get the Craigslist item for free, you might need to contact the person ahead of time, before you arrive. They may want you to call or email, or a porch or curbside pickup might be preferred, so follow whatever directions they have.

    If the description doesn’t state how to contact the person, choose reply and then the show email button near the top of the page to message them.

    How to freecycle

    Erda Estremera on Unsplash

    Voiced Market partners with brands to bring you great deals. This post contains links to our affiliate partners that earn us a commission. We devote a percentage of our profit to feeding and educating those in need. Save money and feel good about your choice.

    Everybody loves getting free stuff — especially when it’s delivered right to your door. Believe it or not, there are tons of great resources out there to get free stuff by mail, without much effort on your part!

    Free samples and loyalty programs are actually a crucial way for brands to market their products. It allows consumers like you to try new products and be rewarded for purchasing them again. But you don’t always have to go through the companies themselves to take advantage of these free offers.

    The 10 Best Sites To Get Free Stuff By Mail (or Email)

    There are some great websites that can send you free stuff from a variety of companies, from household products to fashion to food, and everything in between. All you have to do is sign up, and sometimes review or rate the free products you get.

    1. Voiced Market: Right here on Voiced Market you can get your hands on freebies all year round. Not only does the site feature a freebies section on a wide variety of products and services (some of which might be sent to you by mail), but it’ll also alert you to new available exclusives, deals, and freebies if you sign up for the free newsletter.

    2. Aspiration: This FDIC insured online bank account will send you a debit card in the mail that will give you up to 10% cash back on your purchases. Free ATM withdrawals at over 55,000 locations. You’ll even qualify for a $100 bonus if you sign up and spend $1,000 with your Aspiration debit card. It takes two minutes to sign up online now.

    3. Truebill: 80% of people save money by using Truebill to find and cancel unwanted subscriptions! Download this app for free now and it will automatically negotiate your current mobile and cable bills with your provider to get it lowered as well. That could free up a lot of extra cash.

    4. Credible: Get up to a $300 e-gift card bonus when you refinance your student loans with Credible. Refinancing could save you thousands. Refinancing means replacing your current student loans with a lower cost loan that might also have better terms. Credible will show you up to 10 top lender student loan refinance options in just 2 minutes and give you $200 if you find a better rate elsewhere (terms apply).

    5. Cash Back Credit Card: If you’re going to spend money, get rewarded and keep more money. Like this top credit card choice that offers a $150 bonus, 1.5% cash back, and no annual fee. Make sure to pay your credit card on time so that you don’t get hit with any interest fees, while still enjoying the perks.

    6. Swagbucks ($5 bonus) and MyPoints ($10 bonus): These rewards sites have a few different ways to earn. Such as watching videos, taking surveys, and shopping.

    7. Ibotta: Get real cash back in-store or online on everyday purchases at places like Walmart, Target, Instacart, Domino’s Pizza, Walgreens, and much more. Get a $20 welcome bonus just for using the app.

    8. InboxDollars: Brands pay this company for consumer input. They, in turn, pay its members in cash to do online activities like take surveys, watch videos and tv, plus more. They even give you a $5 bonus just for signing up.

    9. Pinch Me: All you have to do is sign up, and this site will send you free samples. You just provide feedback by telling them what you think of the products. No credit card required.

    10. Daily Goodie Box: This company will send you a box of goodies by mail with no credit card required. Shipping is free. All you have to do is let them know what you thought of the goodies.

    How To Avoid “Free” Stuff Scams

    Sadly, not every “free stuff” site out there is as great as it seems. There are some scams you need to look out for. Before you sign up for an online free sample service, keep these tips in mind:

    1. A free trial isn’t the same as a free sample. If you ever have to put your card number down to get a sample of a product, they are probably going to charge you for continuing the service later on. Never sign up for “free” services that require your credit card information.

    2. Do your research! If a website is really as good as it claims, there will be positive reviews of it online. Check out a few reviews from other people who have tried the service before you sign up.

    3. Time is money, too. A lot of “free stuff” services out there require you to fill out surveys or questionnaires in exchange for the products — that’s fine, but the amount of time you have to put into surveys might not always be worth it for the stuff you’re getting. Again, make sure you read the reviews of any freebie site before you sign up.

    4. Follow or “like” your favorite brands on social media. They’ll probably post their legit freebie deals and giveaways, so you can check if something sounds too good to be true.

    5. Never give out more information than necessary. A free sample service will require your email, name, and address — and that’s it. If you’re asked to put down your social security number or a credit card, it’s probably a scam.

    Why Wait — It’s Free!

    Ready to start getting free stuff by mail? Take a look through all the sites mentioned on this list and pick the ones that sound right for you! It’s super easy, and it puts totally free stuff right into your hands.

    Since all the sites listed here are free, why not sign up for as many as you can now? The more services you sign up for, the more freebies you’ll get on a regular basis.

    20th Aug 2019 – by Katie

    How to freecycle

    Coupons are excellent for reducing the grand total at checkout – but what if they could do more than that? What if you could use coupons to get free stuff?

    Most coupons require that you pay some dollar amount for a product, even if it’s severely marked down from the original price. While this can’t be entirely avoided, by using a few clever tactics, you can get additional items in your cart for the great price of “free.”

    Keep reading to learn how!

    Tips for Using Coupons to Get Free Stuff

    If you want to use coupons to get free stuff, keep these strategies in mind when you hit the store.

    Buy the Smallest Size Possible

    Smaller sizes are nearly always cheaper than larger sizes. Double-check to make sure that your coupons don’t have any size restrictions in the fine print.

    If they don’t, use the coupons on the smallest size available – which is usually a travel-size product. The savings will likely be greater than the original price of the product, helping you to avoid spending any money!

    Check the Clearance Section

    If an item isn’t selling very well or has been overstocked, it may end up in the clearance section at a lower price. Many of these items can still be bought with coupons. With the lowered price, your coupon will likely help you get the item for free!

    Purchase Mail-In Rebate Items

    If you submit a mail-in rebate form after buying a product, you can often get money back – sometimes all of your money back, especially if you used a coupon in the store. For example, if the item is $2.00 and you use a $0.50 coupon in the store, you will pay $1.50 to the cashier. Then, when you get home you submit a mail-in rebate for $1.50. Your total cost ends up being zero!

    Just be sure that there aren’t rules in the fine print of the rebate form, restricting the use of coupons!

    Use Coupons on Sale Items

    It never hurts to hold onto your coupon and wait for the perfect sale. With a little patience, you can save even more money by using the coupon on products that are on sale!

    Stuff That You Can ALWAYS Get Free with Coupons

    Now that you know how to use coupons to get free stuff, let’s determine which products are the best to target.

    Toothpaste

    Here’s good news for your dental hygiene: drugstores absolutely love to give away coupons for toothpaste! With very little coupon hunting, you will never need to pay for toothpaste again.

    Floss

    Like toothpaste, floss can almost always be found for free with the right coupon! Walgreens, Rite Aid, and CVS offer these deals.

    Deodorant

    Deodorant is usually priced at two dollars or less, and two-dollar coupons for deodorant are very common – especially if you buy the travel sizes! Old Spice and Secret are brands that often offer coupons resulting in free products.

    Toothbrush

    You don’t have to visit the dentist to gain a free toothbrush! Rite Aid, CVS, and Walgreens all offer coupons for free toothbrushes (especially the Oral-B brand).

    Feminine Pads/Liners/Tampons

    Don’t want to pay for feminine hygiene products again?Match a product rebate with a coupon, and you’ll get it free! Stayfree is the brand that most often offers mail-in rebates and coupons for their products.

    Candles

    If you’re shopping around Christmas time, coupons that bring your favorite candles down to the price of ‘free’ are very popular.

    Air Fresheners

    Air fresheners usually cost around a dollar when they’re on sale, and one-dollar coupons for Glade air fresheners are easy to come by.

    Pain Relievers

    While prices vary depending on the type of pain relief and the brands involved, Tylenol and Aspirin are two kinds that consistently offer free deals through coupons.

    Canned Soup

    As a well-loved brand, Campbell’s canned soup is often on sale, especially during the colder months. Match this sale price to a money-off coupon, and you can stock up for free!

    What Can You Occasionally Get for Free with Coupons?

    With good timing and the right coupons, you can (sometimes) get items for free.

    Body Wash

    Want free body wash products from a variety of brands?You can find coupon deals at drugstores like Rite Aid, Walgreens, and CVS, as well as stores like Walmart and Target.

    Bananas

    You can often get single bananas for free thanks to rebate apps! Find them at Target or Walmart.

    Mustard

    Deals on mustard are most commonly found at grocery stores, such as Safeway, Kroger, Publix, and Walmart.

    Mascara

    Drugstores such as CVS are great places for earning free mascara, especially with buy-one-get-one deals.

    Disposable Razors

    Disposable razors for both men and women can often be found for free at Walgreens or Target.

    Facial Cleanser

    Acne washes and other kinds of facial cleansers often have coupons that make them free, especially at Target.

    Shave Gel

    If you are a coupon user who frequents Target, then you’ve likely noticed how often they offer freebie deals on shaving cream.

    Shampoo

    Many shampoo brands offer free shampoo coupons, though the most common brands are Suave, TRESemme, and Pantene. Occasionally, Garnier coupons can be used at Target, so keep an eye out.

    Greeting Cards

    If you’re trying to stock up on greeting cards, so no occasion or family member goes uncelebrated, check out CVS for their freebie deals.

    String Cheese Singles

    Walmart commonly offers deals for free string cheese.

    Mouthwash

    You can find mouthwash freebee deals at drugstores like Rite Aid and Target.

    Candy

    Walmart and drugstores love to offer freebie candy coupons, especially after the holidays!

    Gum/Mints

    Check out the “impulse buy” section right before the register at Target, Kroger, or Walgreens for gum and mints. These are often free with coupons.

    Contact Solution

    Yes, even contact solution can be free with coupons! Check out CVS for the best deals.

    Vitamins

    Rite Aid, Walgreens, and other drugstores often provide freebie vitamin deals, especially during autumn and winter.

    Why Sunday Coupon Inserts?

    Interested in using coupons to get free stuff? Want to get started right away? Then you should check out Sunday Coupon Inserts!

    With their Weekly Subscriptions program, this coupon packaging service delivers coupon packets to your front door every week. You can take advantage of freebie deals without having to hunt down coupons! Best of all, you can start or stop your subscription at any time, giving you complete control.

    How to freecycle

    The Spruce / K. Dave

    Need rocks to edge your flower beds, lay a patio or build a wall? Here’s how to get all the free materials you need to landscape your garden with rocks.

    Visit Construction Sites

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / K. Dave

    Find a construction site where there’s excavation work going on, and they’ll probably be more than happy to give you the rocks they’ve unearthed. To you, they’re the start of a rock garden; to them, they’re just a nuisance that has to be hauled off at the end of the job.

    Help a Farmer

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / K. Dave

    A rocky field isn’t desirable if you’re a farmer. So, find a farmer, and offer to help remove rocks from his fields. If you’re lucky, he may already have a pile of rocks at the edge of the field just waiting to be hauled away.

    Talk to Road Construction Crews

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / K. Dave

    Know of a big road construction project that involves lots of blasting? Put in a call to the job foreman, and you may have your source for free rocks. Just don’t bother them at the job site, where your presence could be both a distraction and a safety hazard.

    Go Rockhounding

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / K. Dave

    Rockhounding is the hobby of searching for and collecting rocks, and while it’s not allowed in National Parks, it is allowed in most National Forests and on most properties managed by the Bureau of Land Management. You can collect up to 250 pounds of rock a day in Utah without a permit. Now, that’s a lot of free rock

    Curb Shop for It

    How to freecycle

    When homeowners’ dive into their yard work and garden design in the spring, lots of good stuff gets hauled to the curb – including rocks. Take a Sunday drive, and you may just find some beautiful rocks to add to your garden.

    Tip: Broken up concrete is a good stand in for rock if you’re working on edging your garden.

    Shop Craigslist and Freecycle

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    People Images / Getty Images

    Craigslist and Freecycle can be a good source for free rocks, but you’ll have to check both sites regularly and be quick on the draw when an offer comes up.

    Hello! We’ve noticed that you are using Internet Explorer to access our site. This browser is no longer supported. Please switch to another browser and try again.

    Welcome to The Freecycle Network™! We are a grassroots & entirely nonprofit movement of people who are giving and getting stuff for free in their own Towns. It’s all about reuse and keeping good stuff out of landfills. Membership is free. And now you can also set up your own, smaller personal Friends Circle for gifting and lending of items with just your friends! Sign up now.

    RECENT ITEMS

    NEARBY TOWNS.

    changing the world one gift at a time™

    Our mission is to build a worldwide sharing movement that reduces waste, saves precious resources & eases the burden on our landfills while enabling our members to benefit from the strength of a larger community.

    9,937,514

    Membership is always free

    Operation is grassroots and 100% nonprofit

    Local Towns are moderated by volunteers

    Zero tolerance of Scams, Spam and Adult Content

    Become a member

    As featured in:

    • About Us
    • Press Room
    • News
    • Find A Town
    • Privacy
    • Terms of Service
    • Guidelines
    • Donate
    • Sponsor
    • Volunteer
    • Help
    • Knowledge Base
    • Contact

    For those of us who’ve been arguing for the creative reuse of empty space as part of a response to the recession, there was exciting news last week. The Department for Communities and Local Government announced £3m in small grants to help people reuse empty shops for creative and socially beneficial projects. Here’s what they say:

    People are increasingly worried about boarded-up shops and vacant land in their towns and cities. It is vital that we do all we can to enable vacant properties to be used for temporary purposes until demand for retail premises starts to improve. Not only will this help to ensure that our towns and high streets are attractive places where people want to go, it can also stimulate a wide range of other uses such as community hubs, arts and cultural venues, and informal learning centres, which can unlock people’s talent and creativity.

    This kind of temporary use of empty premises has great potential for those “real world spaces which reflect the collaborative values of social media” that I’ve been writing about. (Thanks to Noel for first drawing my attention to the “slack space” movement in the comments on the original Social Media vs the Recession post.) And the turnout for the second London Alternative Third Spaces meetup at the Hub a couple of weeks ago was a sign of the amount of energy gathering around these projects.

    Last week’s announcement wasn’t just about funding, although that was what made the headlines. Plans for encouraging temporary use also include:

    • a simpler process for local authorities to waive “change of use” planning permission requirements
    • providing specimen documents for landlords making temporary use agreements
    • a pilot project in five town centres, in which local authorities act as intermediary – agreeing a temporary lease with a landlord on behalf of a local community group
    • and, of course, funding for grants “to help with cleaning and decorating vacant premises, basic refit for temporary uses, publicity posters, and other activities that can help town centres attract and retain visitors”

    It sounds like the details of how these grants will work are still being worked out, but all in all this an extremely promising set of proposals.

    One further thought, prompted by a conversation with Dan Littler. Last week’s announcement accompanied the launch of a guide for town centre managers on ‘Looking after our town centres’. To make sure the widest range of people have access to information about the grants and other measures, though – and to contribute to the success of the projects they create – it would be great to see a practical handbook for “How to Freecycle Woolworths!” (At least, that’s what we’d have called it in the days of Pick Me Up. )

    Once you start looking, there are a lot of existing examples of the creative and constructive reuse of empty space, around the UK and beyond – and a lot of knowledge of what to do (and what not to do) has been accumulated by those involved. It feels like time that knowledge was tapped.

    Need to save money? You’re not alone. Millions of people have used Low Income Relief to save money and get free stuff!

    Trending Topics

    How to freecycle

    Get FREE Pizza & Snacks!

    Get free pizza and snacks through this exclusive Game Day offer! Valid until February 13, 2022

    Get FREE Clothes!

    Need clothing? We’ve found tons of resources that can help you get free clothing for work, school, and everyday life.

    Get a FREE Computer, Laptop or Tablet!

    Need a new device? We’ve found organizations that provide free computers, laptops and tablets to low income people. Are you eligible?

    Are you ready to SAVE MONEY
    and GET FREE STUFF?

    We’ll show you how to get $5/month internet, free cell phone service, free laptops and even free cars!

    Guides

    Get FREE Samples by Mail

    Everybody loves getting free stuff in the mail! We found a service that sends freebies every month!

    Get FREE Cell Phones & Service

    How would your life change if you never had to pay another cell phone bill? We’ve found dozens of providers that offer free smartphones and free monthly data!

    Get FREE Baby Stuff!

    Are you expecting a little one? You may be able to get FREE baby stuff from these providers!

    How can we help you?

    Low Income Relief has helped countless people connect with housing resources!

    Low Income Relief has helped my family and I, in more ways than one. I have learned so much from Low Income Relief about all the benefits of having a EBT card, such as free or reduced state park and museum passes, reduced transportation fees, free government phone with minutes, and many more benefits.

    Coral B.

    Hi, I read through your site everyday and have used a lot of articles to help us out. I’m a single mother of 3 and there is so much amazing information! From advice on debt relief, to free museums, and suggestions on where to go for help with things! Your site and Facebook page has helped me a lot with free stuff for the kids to do.

    Jennifer T.

    I’ve used Low Income Relief to find lots of great resources near Turlock, California, where I live. I learned that I could use my library card to access a lot of museums for free, and there are also several low cost vehicle repair shops that I found, thanks to Low Income Relief.

    Chris T.

    Latest Posts

    What is Love INC?

    What is Love INC, and how can it help you through your tough times?

    5 Ways to Make Easy Money from Paid Surveys

    If you’ve looked into paid surveys, you’ve probably noticed that there are many scam sites out there that take your time and don’t give you anything in return. It can be hard to find trustworthy survey sites, but we’ve found 10 websites that you can trust! Top 5 Best Paid Survey Sites There are countless…

    Get FREE Pizza and Snacks with this Game Day offer!

    Are you ready for Game Day? You can score FREE pizza and more with Ibotta’s “Stock Up for the Big Game” promotion in 2022! This incredible offer provides 100% cash back on pizza, chips, cookies, drinks and more! This offer is available for new and existing Ibotta users! In order to unlock these offers, though,…

    How does St. Vincent de Paul help the poor?

    How does St. Vincent de Paul help the poor? Do you qualify for housing, food, job assistance, and more? We’ll share six lesser-known services they can help you with!

    How to Get Free Clothing Near You

    Prices just keep climbing, so it’s more important than ever to know how to get free clothing near you.

    Seniors Get Free Food from the USDA Commodity Food List!

    Are you qualified for the free USDA Commodity Supplemental Food Program? Learn how to apply for monthly food packages!

    Related Topics

    How can we help you today?

    Check out these helpful guides!

    • Benefits Guide
    • EBT Benefits Guide
    • Get Housing Help
    • Get Cash Now
    • Get Free Stuff!
    • Save Money!

    Where do you need help?

    Check out our recent posts!

    Search by Keyword

    Low Income Relief

    Low Income Relief is an informational website that provides tips, advice, and information to help you make ends meet. We strive to provide up-to-date information but make no warranties regarding the accuracy of our information. Ultimately, you are responsible for your financial and other decisions. Low Income Relief is not a bank or financial institution and we do not provide cash or financial products.

    How to freecycle

    The most dreaded task for any organization is to solicit donations. Most people dislike asking others for things, especially when they want them for free.

    If you can overcome this discomfort, you can yield great benefits for your organization. That’s why I’m going to share some tips to help make this task easier—that way you can be the superhero of your organization.

    How to freecycle

    Before you start pounding the pavement to solicit donations, you need to make sure you are heading out on your mission well prepared.

    Mental Preparation

    If you really want your efforts to be well rewarded, you need to be in the right frame of mind from the start. Make sure you really understand and believe in the purpose for your mission. You’ll be far more successful in persuading others if you are passionate about your cause.

    Our high school hosts an after-prom party to keep the students in a safe environment and away from drinking, drugs, and general mischief. Since I have two teenagers, I am a big fan and supporter of this event.

    Mental preparation also involves being prepared for rejection. This might seem obvious, but many a do-gooder has been undone after the 20 th straight rejection. It’s hard to stay motivated when it seems like all you are hearing is “no.”

    Most companies have guidelines regarding who they will donate to and when. Though your cause might be a worthy one, it might not be the right one for them. It isn’t your fault and it doesn’t mean there is anything wrong with the cause you are supporting. It doesn’t hurt to have a backup request, something smaller the company can donate or do that will help your organization without creating a large burden for them.

    For after-prom, we were seeking large donations to raffle off at the event in the hopes that the opportunity to win valuable prizes would lure more students. When a business told us that they couldn’t help us with a large donation, we offered them the option of providing coupons for our “swag bags” instead. Most businesses liked this option because it helped us by providing an item we could give out to attendees and them since it would bring those individuals to their business when they redeemed the coupons.

    Supplies

    Nothing is worse than being turned down when soliciting donations except for losing the sponsorship of a willing party. While some businesses will need time to put something together, many will be ready to provide you with a donation on the spot. They can typically only do this if you have certain items and information with you at the time you make the request.

    • Request Letter – almost all businesses will require an official letter to keep for their records. Be sure your letter includes:
      • Date and time of the event
      • Deadline for submitting donations
      • Details of the event and purpose of the donation
      • Tax-deductibility of the donation (if applicable)
      • Contact information
      • Employer Identification Number (EIN) – some businesses will want this information so they can confirm your organization’s nonprofit status. Some companies have policies prohibiting them from donating to organizations that don’t also have 501(c)(3) status as well so know your organization’s status before you start soliciting.
    • Examples – Have a list of items you are seeking or what will be purchased with cash donations.
    • Clipboard, Pen, and Paper – A potential sponsor might ask you to jot down an additional contact number, or provide you with their corporate contact information. Don’t lose the opportunity because you’re searching for something to write with or a surface to write on.

    Click the button below to get the free checklist to track your donations and to find out what you need to do AFTER you make your request and after you receive donations.

    Not too long ago I came across this article written by Tom Locke. In that article he talks about an experiment he tried. He wrote to 100 different companies just to simply ask them for free stuff, and the outcome was amazing. So i said to myself “why not try this myself” and i did.

    You may not know this, but you can get free stuff from companies by just simply asking them!, it might seem a little weird and annoying to ask a company for free stuff but trust me it is worth it, and i can assure you that they will be glad you asked.

    Companies don’t use big percentage of their products and they end up getting donated or even thrown away.

    And even tho it seems to good to be true, let me tell you that from a personal experience, it is true and it can be done in only 3 easy steps.

    Step #1

    My first step was to find the companies i wanted to reach out to. After about 30 minutes of looking around my house for things i use on a daily basis, I found 10 different stores i wanted to write to, then after that, I proceeded to find some way to contact them via email, I also did some research and asked around to see if other people had gotten free stuff from them before just to make sure that I at least had a small chance of getting something.

    Step #2

    The next step was to write the email, here i did use some help from some online websites and i did some research on how to approach a company.

    I started off by telling the company who I was and how much I loved their products, I also included for how long I had been using their product and how loyal of a costumer I was, then towards the end I proceeded to ask them for sample products. Writing each email took me about 15–30 minutes.

    At first I didn’t think this was going to work, since you are asking for stuff that other people have to pay for, and like I said before, I thought it was too good to be true but I did it anyways because i didn’t have anything to lose so why not give it a shot.

    Step #3

    The final step was to wait, Either wait for a response or for a package.

    The outcome was surprising, I ended up getting a response from 6 out of the 10 companies i wrote to, which was really awesome.

    I ended up receiving multiple packages on different days, mostly stickers which some stores do give away for free, but i was really surprised to get cologne samples, I love wearing cologne so this was a big win for me, plus the cologne samples I got will most likely last me 2–3 weeks which is awesome.

    So as you can see, this is a game of luck, some stores might answer you back or some might not even see your email since they probably get thousands of emails on a daily basis. but there is a big chance of you getting a response so why not give it a shot, especially during this time when you cant really go out shopping and you have lots of time at home.

    Honest Reviews Will Get You Free Stuff at Smiley360

    • Share
    • PINTEREST
    • Email

    How to freecycle

    How to freecycle

    Smiley360 is a website that sends you free stuff in exchange for your honest opinion about the product that you try. You’ll share your feedback through your social media accounts and reviews on various websites.

    Smiley360 is similar to other product test websites like BzzAgent and Influenster. There are also other programs that give out boxes of free samples and programs where you get to product test and keep those products for free.

    Companies are genuinely interested in what you have to say about their products. They ask Smiley360 to get people to test these products so they can figure out what people like and dislike about the products. They also want people to share positive experiences with those products through online reviews that are shared through social media.

    Signing up for Smiley360

    You’ll need to sign up for a free Smiley360 account as a first step to getting free stuff from them. You can use your email address to sign up or pick to log in with your Facebook or Twitter account.

    After you’ve created an account, you’ll need to complete any surveys on your Dashboard (up at the top of the page) so Smiley360 can get to know you better and what types of products they want to get your opinion on. You’ll see available, in progress, and complete missions (product tests), offers, and surveys. It’s important that you fill out all surveys that are offered, this is how you qualify for a new mission.

    Smiley360 Introduction Mission

    When you first join Smiley360, you’ll be automatically signed up for an introduction mission so you can practice using the website and the sharing tools. You’ll need to earn 20 points to complete the mission.

    It’s important that you complete most of the activities in this introduction mission to show Smiley360 that you’re willing to participate and leave your feedback.

    How to Get Free Stuff from Smiley360

    To get free stuff to try, you’ll need to qualify for a Smiley360 Mission. Missions are what they call it when you get a free product to try, and you have various activities to complete surrounding that product.

    To get your box of free stuff from Smiley360, you’ll want to:

    • Complete surveys
    • Keep your profile up-to-date
    • Participate in community discussions

    The more you do these activities, the greater chance you have of being accepted for a Smiley360 Mission.

    Racking Up Smiley360 Points

    Smiley360 points are earned every time you participate in a survey, discussion, or Mission activity. They can’t be redeemed for anything but they show how active you are on Smiley360.

    Qualifying for a Smiley360 Mission

    You’ll get an email if you qualify for a Smiley360 Mission. This will include a link to your Mission page and information about the product you’ll be receiving.

    The Smiley360 boxes take around 2-4 weeks to arrive to you by mail. This will include a sample or full-sized product, a sharing guide, and a bookmark. Sometimes you’ll also get coupons or additional samples to share with friends.

    Participating in a Smiley360 Mission

    After you’re received and used the product you’re testing, you’ll be able to share your feedback directly with Smiley360 as well as with social media.

    The Missions last at least 10 weeks so that gives you plenty of time to try out the new product and give your honest opinion about it.

    To complete each mission you’ll need to use each required sharing tool specified by the mission and earn the points required.

    Tips to Getting More Free Stuff from Smiley360

    Here are a few tips that will help you get boxes of free stuff time and time again from Smiley360:

    • Be as detailed as possible. You’ll get more points for the detailed information you provide.
    • Participate, participate, participate. The more your participate in the missions the more you’re likely to get picked for another one.
    • Complete all your surveys. Taking the surveys is the key to Smiley360 knowing if you’ll be a good candidate for the next mission.

    Smiley360 Restrictions

    Smiley360 is only open to those in the United States. You must be older than 13 to sign up.

    Each member of the household can join Smiley360, but only one household member can be taking part in a specific Mission.

    Many of the products you buy each day come from companies that will send you tons of free stuff — you just have to ask. Keep reading for more details!

    How to freecycle

    Saving money is difficult when you still have a family to feed and bills to pay, sometimes it seems impossible to cut corners as often as you may want. Companies like General Mills, Nestle, and Kraft take a huge chunk of your money every single month. So don’t you think it’s time that they gave back?

    Fortunately for us, many of them do! Believe it or not, many of the products you buy every day come from companies that offer anything from free products, free swag to coupons. If you play your cards right, you can score hundreds of dollars of free products!

    And if you love getting free stuff, make sure you after to check our list of current freebies available

    Here’s how to get started:

    Think of a few companies you’d love freebies from and head to their websites. There is where you’ll typically find a contact form, where you can provide thoughts and feedback on the company’s products. Be sure to let the company know just how much you love their products, and don’t be too shy to get specific! Next, let them know that you’re a loyal customer, one who’s always bought the company’s latest products and continues to do so.

    Now, ask the company if, being the loyal customer that you are, they would be interested in sending you any free products or swag that you can try out. In the end, you should always include your address if the form doesn’t already ask for it.

    Here’s a simple example of what your email should look like:

    Hi, My name is _____ and I absolutely love the products your company makes, especially _____. I’ve always been such a loyal customer and love telling all my friends/family about your best products. As someone who always shops with your top brands, I was wondering if there might be any freebies you would be willing to send me to test out? I always enjoy all your latest products, so anything you send for me to try would be fantastic! Thank you so much for your time. Best, _____

    While you can contact literally any company to ask for freebies (it never hurts to ask!), here’s a huge list of companies that may be willing to send you free stuff if you contact them:

    Corona Receive bottle openers, branded beer sleeves & more

    Neutrogena Receive shower & bath gel and body oil products in the mail

    Johnson’s Baby Receive baby wash, baby oil, baby lotion samples

    Chobani Receive coupons for free products + $0.50 off coupons

    Friendly’s. Ask and Friendly’s will send you a $10 gift card.

    Traditional Medicinal’s Tea. Score two coupons for a free box of tea each!

    Chuck E. Cheese. You can get a gift card for free tokens and pizza.

    Bird’s Eye. Get one coupon for a free viola meal.

    Jose Ole. One coupon will get you a free box of taquitos.

    Mrs. T. Perrogies. Score cents of coupons.

    Celestial Seasonings. Contact this company for two coupons for a free box of tea.

    One A Day Vitamins. Get $1 off coupons.

    Cabot Cheese. Just one coupon will get you a free package of cheese.

    Yogi Tea. Get one coupon for a free box of tea.

    Bausch and Lom. Score one coupon for a free bottle of solution.

    Aubrey Organics Inc. One coupon gets you one free product.

    Perdue Chicken. $1 off coupons.

    Science Diet Dog Food. One coupon for a free bag of dog food.

    Tom’s of Maine Toiletries. You can get free samples of toothpaste and small bar of soap.

    Cape Cod Potato Chips. One coupon for a free bag of chips.

    Red Robin. One gift certificate is good for two free burgers.

    American Dairy Brands. $1 off coupons.

    Herr’s Potato Chips. One coupon for a free bag of chips.

    Scott Paper Towels. $1 off coupons.

    Eden Foods. Get a full box of free samples.

    Caldrea Laundry Products. Get free samples of hand soap.

    Ellio’s Pizza. One coupon for a free box of pizza.

    Alpine Lace Cheese. One coupon for some free cheese.

    Small Planet Foods. $1 off coupons.

    On-Cor Frozen Foods. Two coupons for one free frozen meal each.

    La Yogurt. 4 coupons for 1 free yogurt each.

    New England Coffee. $1 off coupons

    Pure Protein Bars. Get 2 free bars sent to your home.

    Simply Potatoes. Score 2 coupons for any simply potato product.

    Blue Diamond Almonds. You can get 2 free packages of almonds sent to your home for free.

    Jimmy Dean Breakfast. Get one coupon for a free box of breakfast sandwiches.

    Sephora. Sign up for emails to get more information on free products.

    Tree Top Inc. 3 coupons for a free bottle of apple juice each.

    Wholesome Sweetener’s. You can actually get 5 coupons for a free package of sweetener each.

    Firestone Tires. Get an awesome discount for oil change coupons.

    Colonial Candle. 2 free small candle holders.

    Neil George Hair Care. 2 full size bottles of shampoo/conditioner sent to your home.

    Earth Therapeutics. You can have 1 free sample sent to your home.

    President Cheese. Act now to get one coupon for a free package of brie cheese.

    Are you looking for a way to view Patreon content for free? The good news is that there aree Patreon unlockers and tools to bypass the Patreon Paywall.

    How to freecycle

    In this post we are going to show you the best tools to use for bypassing the Patreon Paywall.

    Table of Contents

    What is Patreon?

    Patreon is a website that allows artists to collect donations without requiring them to pay for their own hosting. The site offers a diverse range of patrons, from a few dollars to many thousands of dollars in donations.

    How to freecycle

    The service offers the ability for patrons to earn rewards for contributing money toward the production of art and other creative endeavors.

    How much does it cost to use Patreon?

    Patreon is priced in terms of percentage of donations. The platform fee is between 5% for Lite, 8% for pro and 12% for premium memberships. There are also processing fees of 2.9% +$0.30 on payments over $3 and 5% +$0.10. That is alot of cuts from a donation if you are an artist looking to make money from your talents.

    There is an upper limit to the amount of money you can donate to a Patreon account, and once that limit is reached, new donations are not allowed. This may seem odd at first, but there is actually a quite simple way to circumvent the system: be transparent about your finances.

    When you start a new Patreon account (or renew an existing one), you should state whether or not you have reached your Patreon goal. People who want to support you can know how much they are going to pay for your content.

    How to Bypass The Patreon Paywall?

    There is no known method to bypassing the Patreon paywall directly throught the Patreon Website. Those who have managed to do so, including System Era founder Thomas Heath, have had their accounts permanently banned.

    The only way to get around this is to either subscribe to an unlimited amount of projects (which may or may not be DCU) or pay to have your name out there publicly on other sites that allow patrons to interact with you directly. The latter option is probably best for anyone looking to make a living through Patreon like a designer or independent video creator.

    There are alternative solutions on how to bypass the Patreon lock by using websites such as PatViewer or PatStreamer.

    What is PatViewer?

    PatViewer is a website that streams Patreon videos, all you have to do is enter the username of the person whose videos you want to watch view.
    There is no restrictions in watching premium videos through the PatViewer website.

    What is PatStreamer?

    PatStreamer is a website that has become popular by those looking to bypass the Patreon lock. On thie website you can view most Patreon posts.

    Is there a Patreon Unlocker?

    There are talks of Patreon unlockers online including browser extensions that you would download. There are various options, however these extensions run the risk of carrying malware that can affect your device or steal your personal information. It is best to avoid such options in order to access premium Patreon content.

    If you are looking for a way to bypass the Patreon paywall and get access to premium content for free, try the solutions above. If you have found other ways to bypass the Patreon Paywall, add your comment below.

    Cycling Fun , Outdoor Fun

    This post may contain affiliate links. If you buy thru these links, we may earn a commission at no additional cost to you.

    I am really, really interested in buying a new (used) bike and getting into biking. I think it would be a great activity for me and my daughter to do together, as well as much needed, non-weight bearing exercise for me. All of that said, can you recommend some good places to seek out a decent used bike? I’m a single mom who doesn’t have a large budget.

    Following is the information I shared with Ginger (…who, by the way, found a cheap bike really quickly and has been biking regularly ever since).

    Hopefully, this will help others who are considering getting back into cycling as well.

    Cheap bikes are relatively easy to find — if you know where to look!

    How To Find A Free Or Cheap Bike

    To find a budget-friendly bike, I would try these first:

    #1 – Craigslist

    To keep tabs on all free and low-cost things that appear on Craigslist for my area, I subscribe to the RSS feeds for “free stuff in nashville” and “general for sale in nashville”.

    If you’re not in a hurry, you might just keep your eyes on those feeds for free or cheap bikes that are posted occasionally.

    #2 – Freecycle

    I also signed up for the Freecycle email list for my area (several years ago), and I’ve given and receive a lot of items for free!

    I’d say that bikes aren’t nearly as popular as say, computers and kitchen items — but you’ll see a listing for a bike every once in awhile.

    The best part about Freecycle is that everything is being given away for FREE. (And no… things usually are not in crappy condition. I’ve been quite impressed with the many treasures I’ve found through Freecycle!)

    Another good thing about Freecycle is you can post “WANTED: A Bike” — mention some of the features you’re looking for (or don’t limit it at all) and you’re likely to get emails from a handful of people who have been contemplating cleaning out their garages and passing on their bikes — for FREE.

    #3 – Used Sporting Goods Stores

    Used sporting goods stores (or consignment stores that only sell sports items & outdoor equipment) would be a great place to check for a gently used bike.

    My favorite is Play It Again Sports — they have stores all across the U.S.

    #4 – Local Bike Shops

    All bike shops have a bulletin board somewhere in the store where people post bikes for sale, bikes wanted, etc. I would check there. Be sure to take a thumbtack with you, so you can easily post your own note describing that you’re looking for a basic women’s (or men’s or children’s) bike.

    Be honest and to-the-point in your description, such as “nothing fancy (or expensive)” — because some of the bike postings found in bike shops will be for the more expensive bikes used by serious cyclists.

    #5 – eBay & Amazon

    Both eBay and Amazon have an amazing section of new and used bicycles online!

    Personally, I would start with used bikes on Amazon under $100, then check out the used bikes on eBay next. From there, it’s easy to compare the price for those same bikes in brand new condition. And, who knows, you might find that it’s worth it to you to spend a few more dollars to buy the brand new version.

    On both Amazon and eBay, you can get as specific as you want with the search filters. For example, you can even set an exact price range — as well as the brand, wheel size, mens/womens/unisex, and type (cruiser, road bike, mountain bike).

    #6 – Garage Sales

    You really need to be patient if yard sales and garage sales are your chosen method of obtaining a cheap bike. Unfortunately, bikes are few and far between at garage sales.

    So, unless you make a habit of visiting yard sales quite regularly… this option could take awhile. It’s a fun process though — and you’ll eventually find bikes dirt cheap this way!

    So, if you’re searching for a new “gently used” cheap bike, I hope the above information helps a bit. Hopefully, you will be able to find a bike and start riding soon.

    Bicycling is tons of fun. And you don’t have to be serious about cycling and going fast in order to truly enjoy it. (That’s my favorite part.)

    The photo above is me when I started cycling regularly back in 1995. My passion for cycling hasn’t stopped since!

    I represent the non-competitive cyclists, runners, and swimmers of the group. I mostly write about all the ways that biking, jogging, and swimming are fun when you’re not a serious athlete.

    If you are looking for FREE photo prints, you are at the right place! Nowadays, we store all of our digital pictures on our devices or in the Cloud, which is super convenient. But a printed picture is something special. They make a great gift for events like Mother’s day, great decor for your home and great keepsakes of memorable and cherished moments. We’ve put together a list of the best ways to get pictures printed for free. We’ve compiled all the ways you can get free photo prints for you here to save you time and the hassle. As new free photo print offers happen, we’ll make sure to update this article!

    FREE PHOTO PRINTS FROM WALGREENS

    How to freecycle

    Walgreens regularly offers FREE photo prints to new and existing customers, about twice a month on average. The code is valid for a few days and the promotion often happens on weekends. It’s often a FREE 8×10 photo print offer but Walgreens also offers coupon codes for other free photo print products such as photo collages, photo cards or 5×7 & 4×6 prints. To get them compeltely free, you need to choose “in-store pick” at checkout.

    How to freecycle

    Snapfish is another company that regularly offers FREE photo prints, typically 10 free 4×6 photo prints and they ship them to you for free. And this offer is valid for both new and existing customers!

    How to freecycle

    CVS also offers FREE photo prints from time to time to its existing and new customers. In the past they’ve offered free 5×7, 4×6 and 8×10 photo prints. Just like Walgreens, to get them compeltely free, you need to choose “in-store pick” at checkout.

    If you have a Sam’s Club account, you can get 50 FREE 4×6 photo prints when you sign-up for a Sam’s Club Photo account.

    To celebrate various Holidays throughout the year, such as Mother’s Day, Halloween, Easter or Christmas, Bass Pro offers FREE photo prints in their stores. No purchase is necessary. Just show up dressed for the occasion. You might have to pick up a ticket at the front of store.

    How to freecycle

    Just download the Shutterfly’s mobile app and you will get unlimited free 4×6 and 4×4 prints; You’ll just pay the shipping. Economy shipping will vary based on the number of prints that you order. They also offer other photo deals and promotions. Another perk: Shutterfly provides completely free and unlimited picture storage. They will never delete your pictures; You can store as many photos as you want for free!

    How to freecycle

    FreePrints is an app that offers up to 1,000 free 4×6 photo prints. But they do charge a shipping fee (starting at $1.99 and max. $9.99). Just open the FreePrints app and select the photos that you want to print from your phone, Facebook or Instagram. Your free photo prints will be delivered to your doorstep in just days!

    How to freecycle

    YorkPhoto offers a great promotion: Get 100 FREE photo prints when you enter code Y100FREE at checkout. They do charge a shipping fee of $6.24.

    Want freebies every day? Get daily email alerts with the latest free stuff and saving tips!

    A few things to know: Remember to be patient, samples may take 2 to 8 weeks to arrive in the mail and they are shipped directly from the manufacturer, not Freeflys. Freeflys is a directory, we cover freebies like a news outlet covers the news.

    The best way to get the most freebies is to sign-up for text alerts so you know right away when a freebie goes live and you can be amongst the first to claim one. If you need some help getting freebies, visit this page.

    Notifications of Free Stuff

    RoMa LLC

    Designed for iPad

      • #171 in Shopping
      • 4.7 • 57.3K Ratings
      • Free
      • Offers In-App Purchases

    Screenshots

    Description

    Receive a notification each time your neighbor post free stuff on Nextdoor, Letgo, OfferUp, TrashNothing and More!
    Be the first to claim that freebie for you!

    Freebie Alerts will send you an alert notification each time your neighbor give away something, click the notification and if it’s something that you need, you just contact that person and pick the freebie up! Make it yours first!.

    • Tired of seeing “23 interested” people on a free thing that you would love to have?
    • Tired of enter every single minute to check if theres is something new in the Free stuff section?
    • Tired of “First come, First serve” and when you appeared to that location the free stuff you wanted is gone, because someone took it first? Lucky b. rd!
    • Tired of the red “Sold” on something that you were asking but someone claim it first? Yeah, that is sad.

    Try our app for FREE, you will be receiving notifications in your phone in real time at the instance that your neighbor just post some free stuff.

    NO LOGIN REQUIRED:
    1. Install the app.
    2. You are ready to receive FREE ITEMS!
    That’s all, Simple. Smart. Easy.

    YOU WILL GET FREE STUFF FROM:
    • Nextdoor
    • Letgo
    • OfferUp
    • TrashNothing
    • Freebie Alerts
    • And More!

    —-
    Remove Ads with In-App Purchases:

    Freebie Alerts is a free download. If you purchase the service, you will be charged a monthly or yearly price according to your country and which item you purchase. The price will always be shown in the app before you complete a purchase. Payment will be charged to your iTunes Account at confirmation of purchase. Your Freebie Alerts subscription automatically renews at the end of every billing period (as determined by your purchase of monthly or yearly service) and your iTunes account will automatically be charged within 24 hours PRIOR to the end of the current period. You can turn off auto-renew at any time from your iTunes Account Settings after purchase. Any unused portion of a free trial period, if offered, will be forfeited when the user purchases a subscription to that publication, where applicable.

    Tips & tricks on getting a VoxBox from Influenster

    • Share
    • PINTEREST
    • Email

    How to freecycle

    How to freecycle

    Influenster is a program that sends out thousands of boxes a month full of free stuff in hopes that you’ll use your social media influence to tell everyone you know what you think of these products.

    If you like Influenster, you’ll want to also check out BzzAgent, PINCHme, and L’Oreal Consumer Testing Program as well as other programs that give out boxes of free samples.

    All about the Influenster VoxBox

    An Influenster VoxBox is a box full of full-sized free products that you get to review and keep. These boxes are often based on a theme but are sometimes a single product or group of products from the same company.

    These are truly awesome boxes that can contain hundreds of dollars worth of free stuff. In the past, I’ve seen VoxBoxes that contain a Keurig coffee brewer, a skincare line, make-up, clothes, and all kinds of other products.

    How to Join Influenster

    You can visit Influenster and register by email or sign up with Facebook. You’ll then receive a link in your email that you can visit to fill out your profile.

    Influenster is a completely free program to join and you don’t need an invite.

    Connecting Your Social Media Accounts

    The first thing you want to do after your join Influenster is to connect your social media accounts by visiting your social impact page. The more of an influencer you are on social media, the more likely you are to get a box full of freebies sent to you.

    At the top of the page, you’ll see your impact score. The higher your score, the more likely you are to get sent a VoxBox full of free products. Your impact score is the best way to get a VoxBox, so be sure to put some effort into increasing it.

    Go through and connect all of your social media accounts on this page. These include Influenster, Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, YouTube, Tumblr, Foursquare, Google+, Pinterest, Blogger, and WordPress. It may take a few hours for your impact score to be calculated.

    If you still have a low impact score after your social media accounts are connected, here are some things you can do to increase it:

    • Increase your social media followers
    • Invite friends to join Influenster, the more social the friend the better
    • If you have a blog, add the Influenster widget to it

    Improving Your Chances of Getting a VoxBox by Answering Snaps

    On your profile, you’ll see a section called Snaps. Snaps are quick questions that determine if you qualify for a VoxBox.

    You’ll want to make sure that you check your Influenster dashboard frequently and answer any Snaps that you have available.

    Pay Attention to the Influenster Emails

    Influenster will sometimes send out emails with surveys that may qualify you to receive a VoxBox. Make sure you take these surveys as soon as you can so you can possibly snag up a box full of free products.

    When Influenster is going to send you a VoxBox, they’ll send you an email letting you know that it’s coming.

    Receiving a VoxBox

    If you’ve qualified for a campaign, you’ll receive your VoxBox in the mail. Be sure to visit the Campaigns section on your dashboard at this time to see what tasks you can do with your VoxBox.

    Your VoxBox Campaign is your Ticket to Receiving Another VoxBox

    When you’ve received your VoxBox you’ll have certain social media tasks you can do to get a campaign badge. This may include filming an unboxing video, blogging about the VoxBox, tweeting photos of the products, and posting reviews on Facebook.

    Make sure you complete as many of these activities as you can, the more active you are, the greater the chance that you’ll receive another VoxBox.

    Close to, or when your Influenster VoxBox campaign starts, you’ll receive a survey in your email. Be sure to fill this survey out because it greatly increases your chances of getting another box full of free stuff.

    You can rack up points and prizes with the Microsoft Rewards program. Here’s how to get free stuff by using programs like Edge and Bing.

    How to freecycle

    Interested in getting some cool stuff for free? The Microsoft Rewards program allows you to build up points by performing certain tasks, such as taking online quizzes, browsing with Microsoft Edge, and searching for items using Microsoft Bing.

    In return, you can score gift cards for popular retail stores, get discounts on certain products, win apparel, get entered into sweepstakes for more lucrative items, and donate to charitable causes. Let’s see how this works.

    Microsoft Account

    Get Started

    Microsoft welcomes you to its Rewards program with different quizzes, polls, and other tasks that you can accomplish to start racking up points. Each task lists the points you can gain as a reward. Find one that interests you and click the link that states how many points you can earn.

    Complete Tasks

    Discover Goals

    Set Goals

    Complete Goals

    You’re returned to the main Rewards page. Scroll down the screen to the Your Goal window to see how many points are required to redeem the goal you chose. If you have enough points, click the Redeem Now link to redeem them for this goal.

    At the goal’s page, click the button to Donate if you chose a charitable cause or program, the button to Enter Sweepstakes if you selected a sweepstakes, or the button to Redeem Reward if you chose another type of reward. Then confirm the reward.

    Remove Goals

    Redeem Points

    Choose Rewards

    How to Earn Points

    If you sign in with your Microsoft Account, there are other ways to earn points (Opens in a new window) without having to take quizzes or fill out polls. As previously stated, you can earn points by using Microsoft’s Edge browser or searching with Bing. Use them together to earn even more.

    Other search activities eligible for rewards include: using the search box on the taskbar of your Windows 10 device and searching with Bing through Cortana, and buying items from the online Microsoft Store (Opens in a new window) using your mobile device, an Xbox One, the Microsoft Store app in Windows 10 or 8.1, or the web. If you play select games or complete certain quests on the Xbox One, you also get points.

    Earn with Microsoft Family

    Rewards Status

    Next, click the Status heading at the top of the page. Here, you’ll find the full details on your rewards status, including points earned, your level (each higher level brings with it more benefits), points redeemed, badges earned, your progress, and your recent rewards.

    Wondering what the extra benefits are for leveling up? Click See my level benefits to view what you get at Level 1, Level 2, and Level 2 with Xbox Live Gold.

    View Badges

    View Progress

    Recent Rewards

    View Previous Winners

    Like What You’re Reading?

    Sign up for Tips & Tricks newsletter for expert advice to get the most out of your technology.

    This newsletter may contain advertising, deals, or affiliate links. Subscribing to a newsletter indicates your consent to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe from the newsletters at any time.

    Your subscription has been confirmed. Keep an eye on your inbox!

    How to turn off an iphone

    Emergency SOS, one of the awesome features embedded into the iPhone, can enable users to call help if running into trouble. When it is activated, the iPhone will automatically send emergent calls to the local number. Occasionally, you may enter the Emergency SOS mode accidentally. But later, the iPhone ends up being stuck in the Emergency SOS screen. Worse, despite great efforts and trials, the iPhone cannot get out of the SOS mode. Well, this does not mean that there is no way out. Here, this tutorial will give a full account about how to solve the iPhone stuck on Emergency SOS screen error.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Way 1: Force Restart Your iPhone

    Slightly differing from a reboot, a force restart refers to a hard reset. Through a force restart, your iPhone can be refreshed to solve some minor issues such as iPhone stuck on emergency mode. The steps to force restart an iPhone are based on its model. So first, confirm what model of iPhone you are having and then follow the steps below.

    For iPhone 6 series: Press and keep holding down the Home and Power (also Sleep/Wake) buttons together. If you see the Apple logo on the screen, release the buttons.

    For iPhone 7 series: Simultaneously press and hold the Power and Volume down buttons until the Apple logo occurs.

    For iPhone 8 and later: Quickly press and release the Volume up button > then Volume down button. Then, keep holding the Power button before the Apple logo appears.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Way 2: Use iOS Repair Tool [No Data Loss]

    Tested by most users, applying a force restart may not be effective. In this case, a more powerful tool is needed. Here, try using iOS system recovery software. The software can be applied to some more serious situations when conventional ways do not work as a fix.

    TunesKit iOS System Recovery, as a professional desktop program for iOS repair, is widely recognized by its users. It excels at fixing over 50 iPhone/iPad/iPod/Apple TV issues without removing any data. For example, it can resolve the iPhone black screen, green screen, stuck in the Apple logo, etc. And it suits for the iPhone stuck on Emergency SOS screen issue well. In addition, it offers more, including entering and exiting recovery mode, and downgrading iOS.

    Shut down your phone to save battery life and disable alerts

    How to turn off an iphone

    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    What To Know

    • iPhone X and later: Press and hold the Side and Volume Down buttons until the power off slider appears. Move the slider to turn off iPhone.
    • iPhone 8 and older: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the power off slider appears. Move the slider to turn off iPhone.

    It’s a good idea to turn off your iPhone if the battery is critically low or if it’s performing strangely, as rebooting can often fix problems, just as it does with computers. In this guide, we show you how to turn off any iPhone, as well as how to perform a hard reset.

    How to Turn off iPhone 8 and Older

    No matter your reason for doing it, below are the steps for shutting off an iPhone. This technique applies to most iPhone models, from the original to the latest version.

    Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds. Release the button when you see a message appear on the screen. This button is located on the right of the phone (it’s either on the top or on the side, depending on the iPhone model).

    A power button appears on the screen that reads slide to power off. Move the slider all the way to the right to shut off the phone.

    A progress wheel appears in the center of the screen. The iPhone turns off a few seconds later.

    If you wait too long to slide the button, the phone cancels the shutdown automatically. If you want to cancel it yourself, tap Cancel.

    How to Turn Off iPhone X and Later​

    Turning off the iPhone X is a little trickier. That’s because the Side button (formerly known as the Sleep/Wake button) was re-assigned to activate Siri, Apple Pay, and the Emergency SOS feature. Here are the steps to turn off an iPhone X.

    Press and hold the Side and Volume Down buttons at the same time.

    Wait for the power-off slider to appear.

    Move the slider from left-to-right to shut down the phone.

    How to Hard Reset an iPhone 8 and Older

    When your iPhone is locked up because of some glitch or error, the normal shutdown process may not work. In that case, try a technique called a hard reset. This should only be used when other attempts have failed, but sometimes it’s just what you need.

    Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button for 10 seconds or more. The screen goes black, and the Apple logo appears. On the iPhone 7 series and 8 series, use the Volume Down button instead of Home.

    When you see the logo, release both buttons and let the phone start normally.

    The hard reset feature is not the same thing as restoring a phone to its factory default settings. The word restore is sometimes called reset but has nothing to do with restarting a phone.

    How to Hard Reset an iPhone X and Later

    Without a Home button, the hard-reset process on the iPhone X is different:

    Press Volume Up​.​

    Press Volume Down​​.

    Hold the Side button until the screen goes dark, and then let go of the button to reboot the phone.

    What about an iPhone that won’t turn off at all? Find out what causes that and how to fix an iPhone that won’t turn off.

    Benj Edwards is an Associate Editor for How-To Geek. For over 15 years, he has written about technology and tech history for sites such as The Atlantic, Fast Company, PCMag, PCWorld, Macworld, Ars Technica, and Wired. In 2005, he created Vintage Computing and Gaming, a blog devoted to tech history. He also created The Culture of Tech podcast and regularly contributes to the Retronauts retrogaming podcast. Read more.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Sometimes you need to completely shut down your iPhone, perhaps to help with troubleshooting or to save your battery life during a long period of inactivity. Luckily, it’s easy to do by using two different methods. Here’s how.

    How to Turn off iPhone

    • The Difference between Sleep Mode and Shutting Down
    • How to Shut Down an iPhone Using a Hardware Button
    • How to Shut Down an iPhone Using the Settings App
    • How to Turn Your iPhone Back on Again

    The Difference between Sleep Mode and Shutting Down

    Normally, when you briefly press the top or side button on your iPhone, the screen on your device turns off, but the iPhone stays running. This is called sleep mode or lock mode. While it turns off the screen, it doesn’t completely power off the device.

    In contrast, shutting down your iPhone starts a special software shutdown process where your iPhone begins to tidy up and prepare for power-off. Then, your iPhone turns off completely. We’re going to show you how to completely turn off an iPhone in the steps ahead.

    How to Shut Down an iPhone Using a Hardware Button

    If you need to turn off your iPhone quickly at any time, the easiest way to do so is by using a hardware button on your device. Exactly how to do this varies slightly by model, since certain iPhones include different types of buttons:

    • On iPhones without a Home Button: Simultaneously hold the side button and the volume up or down button for about four seconds until the power-off slider appears on the screen.
    • On iPhones with a Home Button and a Side Button: Hold the side button for a few seconds until the power-off slider appears.
    • On iPhones with a Home Button and a Top Button: Press and hold the top button until the power-off slider appears.

    When the “Slide to Power Off” slider appears on the screen, place your finger on the white circle with the power icon and swipe your finger to the right.

    How to turn off an iphone

    After a moment, your iPhone will shut down and power off completely.

    How to Shut Down an iPhone Using the Settings App

    You can also turn off your iPhone using a little-known feature in the Settings app. To do so, first, open Settings on your iPhone.

    How to turn off an iphone

    In the Settings app, tap “General.”

    How to turn off an iphone

    On the “General” page, scroll down to the very bottom of the page and tap “Shut Down.”

    How to turn off an iphoneGeneral, tap “Shut Down.”” width=”650″ height=”486″ src=”https://www.howtogeek.com/pagespeed_static/1.JiBnMqyl6S.gif” onload=”pagespeed.lazyLoadImages.loadIfVisibleAndMaybeBeacon(this);” onerror=”this.onerror=null;pagespeed.lazyLoadImages.loadIfVisibleAndMaybeBeacon(this);”/>

    The “Slide to Power Off” slider will appear on the screen. Swipe it to the right, and your device will turn off completely.

    How to turn off an iphone

    With the power off, you’re finally free!

    How to Turn Your iPhone Back on Again

    Now that your iPhone has been turned off, what next? If you’re troubleshooting, you can wait a few moments, and then turn it back on again. Waiting 10 seconds is a good rule of thumb when power-cycling gadgets in general.

    If you wanted to save power, then you’re already set: Your iPhone won’t use any battery power while it’s powered off. (But batteries naturally and slowly drain over time, so if you put your iPhone in a drawer and come back to it in a year, its battery level will be a bit lower than you left it.)

    To turn your iPhone back on, just press and hold the top or side button on your iPhone until the Apple logo appears. After a few moments, you’ll see the lock screen, and you’re back in action. Good luck!

    There are many reasons you might need to restart or even power down your iPhone, but the process differs depending on which one you own. Here’s how to turn off every kind of iPhone.

    Chances are you prefer to keep your phone on all day, but sometimes it needs a full restart. There are many reasons your phone could be acting up—maybe it’s running slowly or is frozen—but knowing how to restart your phone can help solve a number of problems.

    Powering down a phone may sound easy and self-explanatory, but there are different ways to go about it, depending on the model iPhone you own and the version of iOS it’s running. Here’s how to power off any iPhone.

    Turn Off Any iPhone Model

    For years, a physical button was the only means to turn off your iPhone. With the upgrade to iOS 11, you can navigate to Settings > General > Shut Down and turn off the device through the operating system.

    This may seem like an unnecessary option at first, but it is helpful if the physical button on the phone is not working or if you have mobility issues that prevent you from gripping or pressing hard on iPhone buttons.

    Turn Off an iPhone X, 11, 12, or 13

    With the introduction of the iPhone X, the side button that was reserved for controlling the device’s power now brings up Siri, so you need to do a little extra work to turn off your phone. Hold down the side button and either one of the volume buttons for a few seconds. This brings up the screen with a slider bar that will let you complete the process. Move the slider to the off position, and your device will turn off.

    Turn Off Older iPhone Models

    If you need to power down an older iPhone model (or an iPhone SE) with a Home button, the easiest option is to hold down the power button for a few seconds until a message appears on the screen. The location of the button you need to press varies depending on your model iPhone. The power button is on the top for the iPhone 5 and older, and is on the side starting with the iPhone 6. Finish the process by sliding the onscreen switch to the off position.

    Force Restart an iPhone 8 or Later

    Sometimes your phone stops working properly, and the only way to fix it is to reset things. However, if the screen is frozen, you won’t be able to do anything without initiating a force reset. How you perform this action depends on your iPhone model. With an iPhone 8 or later, quickly press and release the volume up button, quickly press and release the volume down button, then hold down the power button until you see the Apple logo.

    Force Restart an iPhone 6, 7, or SE

    If you have an iPhone 7 or iPhone 7 Plus, hold down both the side button and the volume down button at the same time until you see the Apple logo. For an iPhone 6, 6s or SE, press and hold the home button and power button.

    Like What You’re Reading?

    Sign up for Fully Mobilized newsletter to get our top mobile tech stories delivered right to your inbox.

    This newsletter may contain advertising, deals, or affiliate links. Subscribing to a newsletter indicates your consent to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe from the newsletters at any time.

    Your subscription has been confirmed. Keep an eye on your inbox!

    Benj Edwards is an Associate Editor for How-To Geek. For over 15 years, he has written about technology and tech history for sites such as The Atlantic, Fast Company, PCMag, PCWorld, Macworld, Ars Technica, and Wired. In 2005, he created Vintage Computing and Gaming, a blog devoted to tech history. He also created The Culture of Tech podcast and regularly contributes to the Retronauts retrogaming podcast. Read more.

    How to turn off an iphone

    To help troubleshoot or save battery life, sometimes you need to completely restart or shut down your iPhone 13. We’ll show you how to do it—with instructions that also apply to the iPhone 13 Mini, iPhone 13 Pro, and iPhone 13 Pro Max.

    Turn Off an iPhone 13 with Hardware Buttons

    You can easily shut down an iPhone 13 completely by using two buttons on either side of the device. To do so, press and hold the Volume Up button (on the left side of the phone) and the Side button (on the right side).

    How to turn off an iphoneApple

    Hold the two buttons until you see a “slide to power off” slider appear on the screen. Next, use the slider by placing your finger on the circle in the slider and swiping it to the right.

    How to turn off an iphone

    After that, your iPhone 13 will power off, shutting down completely. To turn it back on later, hold the Side button until you see the Apple logo on the screen.

    Turn off an iPhone 13 in Settings

    It’s also easy to shut down an iPhone 13 using the Settings app—no buttons required. To do so, first open Settings by tapping the grey gear icon.

    How to turn off an iphone

    In Settings, tap “General.”

    How to turn off an iphone

    In “General,” scroll down to the bottom of the list and select “Shut Down.”

    How to turn off an iphoneGeneral, tap “Shut Down.”” width=”650″ height=”486″ src=”https://www.howtogeek.com/pagespeed_static/1.JiBnMqyl6S.gif” onload=”pagespeed.lazyLoadImages.loadIfVisibleAndMaybeBeacon(this);” onerror=”this.onerror=null;pagespeed.lazyLoadImages.loadIfVisibleAndMaybeBeacon(this);”/>

    After tapping “Shut Down,” you’ll see a “Slide to Power Off” slider appear on the screen. Swipe it to the right, and your iPhone 13 will turn off.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Now that it’s off, your iPhone 13 will no longer use battery power, so you can store it for a relatively long period of time without losing a charge.

    If you’re attempting to troubleshoot a problem with your iPhone by shutting it down and restarting it, wait 30 seconds, then turn your iPhone back on by holding the Side button (on the right side of the iPhone) until you see an Apple logo. Then you’re good to go. Good luck!

    If you’re wondering how to turn off the iPhone X, iPhone 11, iPhone 12, or iPhone 13 – you’re not alone! It slips up a lot of people. Follow the simple steps below to power down your iPhone X, iPhone 11, iPhone 12, or iPhone 13 properly.

    Ever since Apple released the iPhone X and killed off the home button, iPhones aren’t quite as easy to use as they once were – especially if you’re coming from an older model like the iPhone 6 or iPhone 8 (which still use Apple’s home button and, therefore, TouchID).

    And one of the #1 questions we get asked by new iPhone X, iPhone 11, and iPhone 12 users is this: How in the hell do I turn the iPhone X/11/12 off!? But don’t worry, you’re not alone – plenty of people have been tripped up by this. And the reason is simple: turning off the iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 works differently from how it used to on older models.

    Thanks to the introduction of FACE ID, the iPhone X and later no longer has a dedicated power button like the iPhone 8, for instance, and this is what trips most people up.

    But don’t worry, it’s super simple to turn off the iPhone 11 once you know how it’s done. Just follow the steps below (and, remember, this method works on ALL modern iPhone models, including the iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 12, and iPhone 13.

    How To Turn Off iPhone 11

    • Press and Hold The SIDE BUTTON and either the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button at the same time.
    • Wait a second then this should show up: “SLIDE TO POWER OFF”
    • Now all you have to do is slide the slider and your iPhone 11 will shut down.

    How To Turn Off iPhone 12

    • Press and Hold The SIDE BUTTON and either the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button at the same time.
    • Wait a second then this should show up: “SLIDE TO POWER OFF”
    • Now all you have to do is slide the slider and your iPhone 12 will shut down.

    How To Turn Off iPhone 13

    • Press and Hold The SIDE BUTTON and either the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button at the same time.
    • Wait a second then this should show up: “SLIDE TO POWER OFF”
    • Now all you have to do is slide the slider and your iPhone 13 will shut down.

    Simple, right? But you can see why it throws some people – it’s the fact that you have to hold both the side button and the volume up/down key at the same time. It adds in another step that wasn’t present on older, pre-iPhone X models. Also: the above method will also work on Apple’s iPhone 12 phones.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Why did Apple add this additional step into the mix? Simple: to stop you from powering off your iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 by mistake when it’s in your pocket or bag. No one wants that to happen, as you’ll miss calls and updates from your friends and family.

    By adding in the second step, Apple effectively stops this from ever happening. And while it might be a little frustrating at first, it does make logical sense in the long run – no one wants to be constantly turning their phone back on, after all!

    And if all this sounds like too much work, or you don’t like Apple’s new gesture-based UX, you can always pick yourself up an iPhone SE (2020) – it retails for $399.99 and it features a home button and Touch ID.

    How To Turn off iPhone X, iPhone 11, and iPhone 12 Without Using Any Buttons

    If you don’t want to use the above methods, there is another way to turn off an iPhone 11 without using any buttons.

    This method is also fairly simple too, but it is slightly more convoluted than using the Lock/Unlock + Volume rocker technique.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How To Power Down iPhone via Settings App:

    1. Open Settings > General
    2. Scroll Down, You Should See Option For SHUT DOWN
    3. Select SHUT DOWN
    4. The Slide to Power Off Slider Will Appear
    5. Slide It To Shut The iPhone 11 Down

    This method, while not exactly user intuitive, is handy to have around if you’re experiencing issues with your iPhone 11’s buttons – say, for instance, if one gets jammed or becomes unresponsive.

    If you do have a problem that affects your iPhone 11’s physical buttons, it’s handy to be able to switch off the iPhone 11 without having to use any buttons. And with this method, you can do just that!

    How To Turn iPhone X, iPhone 11, and iPhone 12 On?

    Once you’ve shut down your iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12, you might be wondering, well, how do I turn the iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 back on? Again, doing this is slightly different than the method for powering the iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 down – but don’t worry, it’s even easier.

    How to turn off an iphone

    To turn on the iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 all you have to do is press the side button down and hold it for a second a two. There’s no need to press the volume up/down key when turning the phone back on – you only use the volume up/down key when switching your iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 off.

    To Recap…

    • Powering off iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12: Press and hold SIDE BUTTON and VOLUME UP/DOWN Button > Wait for “Slide To Power Off” message to appear on Screen >Slide The Slider to power down iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12
    • Powering on iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12: Press and hold the SIDE BUTTON for a second or two; the iPhone X, iPhone 11, or iPhone 12 will power-up more or less instantly, providing you have battery life, of course!

    Do You Need To Turn Your iPhone Off?

    If you’re new to smartphones – or iPhones – you might be wondering about whether or not you need to regularly turn off your iPhone. With older PCs and laptops, it was always advisable to turn them off when you’re not using them. But with modern technology, this isn’t the case.

    Apple’s iPhone is designed to run 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You DO NOT need to switch it off to give it a break or to cool it down. Apple’s iOS – the software that runs on iPhone – has sleep and rest modes built into its architecture, so, when your iPhone is inactive, it will lower its power consumption and “cool down” all by itself.

    The only thing you need to do is ensure that your iPhone has enough battery life. If the battery runs out, your iPhone will switch off. For this reason, it is important to charge it once a day. I charge mine overnight and it usually lasts all day until I return to bed the following night. If your iPhone’s battery life isn’t great or you’re running an older model, a top-up mid-way through the day is advisable.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Here are the steps to restart iPhone 13, iPhone 13 mini, iPhone 13 Pro, and iPhone 13 Pro Max. Let’s get started with the steps.

    Here’s how to restart iPhone 13. Did you purchase an iPhone 13 series smartphone to replace a much older model? You might not be familiar then with Apple’s new methods for turning off iPhones, starting with the iPhone X and progressing to the more recent iPhone 13 models released this year, 2021.

    If you’re unsure how to turn off or restart your iPhone 13, iPhone 13 Mini, iPhone 13, Pro, or iPhone 13 Pro Max, here’s what you’ll need to do.

    How to Turn Off Your iPhone 13 Using the Buttons

    There are two ways you can turn off your iPhone 13 series using the buttons.

    One method is to press and hold either the Volume Up button or the Volume Down button and the Side button simultaneously until you see the Slide to Power Off slider.

    Alternatively, you can quickly press the Volume Up button followed by the Volume Down button and then press and hold the Side button to access the Slide to Power Off slider. If you use this method, the SOS slider doesn’t display. If you’re nervous about accidentally triggering a 911 call, you can use this method.

    How to turn off an iphone

    After using either of the button sequences, drag the Slide to Power Off slider to the right. If you cancel either method using the Cancel button at the bottom, you’ll have to enter your passcode to access your phone.

    How to Turn Off Your iPhone 13 in Settings

    If you’re not comfortable using the buttons to turn off your iPhone, you can do so in Settings. Here’s how:

    1. Tap Settings on the Home screen.
    2. Choose General.
    3. Scroll down and select Shut Down.
    4. Drag the Power Off slider to the right.
    5. Tap Cancel to cancel.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to Start Your iPhone 13 Again Using the Buttons

    If you need to restart your iPhone (rather than turn it off), you have a few more options.

    Restarting your iPhone using the buttons is similar to the second method of turning it off discussed above. Here’s what you’ll need to do:

    1. First, quickly press the Volume Up button once.
    2. Then, quickly press the Volume Down button once.
    3. Press and hold the Side button and keep holding it down even when you see the Slide to Power Off slider.
    4. Keep holding the Side button down until you see the Apple logo.
    5. Drag the Slide to power off slider to the right.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Be careful using this method. For example, suppose you don’t first press the Volume Up button, then the Volume Down button before pressing and holding the Side button. You could activate the SOS feature and automatically dial emergency services, which isn’t recommended.

    To turn on your iPhone 13 when it’s switched off, press and hold the Side button until you see the Apple logo.

    How to Force Restart iPhone 13

    You might also run into a situation where you must force restart your iPhone 13. In this case, your phone locks up and you need to do a hard reboot.

    1. First, quickly press the Volume Up button once.
    2. Then, quickly press the Volume Down button once.
    3. Press and hold the Side button UNTIL you see the Apple logo.
    4. Release the button.

    How to Restart Your iPhone 13 Using AssistiveTouch

    There are other options for restarting your iPhone if you’re uncomfortable with the button method outlined above.

    For example, AssistiveTouch is a helpful iPhone Accessibility feature that allows you to perform tasks without using the buttons on the phone, including restarting your phone.

    AssistiveTouch isn’t enabled by default, so you’ll need to switch it on. To enable AssistiveTouch:

    1. Open the Settings app on your Home screen.
    2. Tap Accessibility.
    3. Then, tap Touch.
    4. Select AssistiveTouch.
    5. Toggle the AssistiveTouch slider.
      How to turn off an iphone
    6. Tap the AssistiveTouch on the iPhone screen (bottom right).
    7. Choose Customize Top Level Menu.
    8. Select one of the current buttons.
    9. Choose Restart.
    10. Tap Done.
      How to turn off an iphone
    11. Choose the AssistiveTouch button on the Home screen at the bottom right.
    12. Select Restart.
    13. Confirm by tapping Restart.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to Restart Using Voice Control

    You can also restart your iPhone hands-free using Voice Control, another Accessibility feature. If you’ve never used Voice Control, you’ll need to set it up and enable it first.

    To restart your iPhone 13 using Voice Control:

    1. Open the Settings app on your Home screen.
    2. Tap Accessibility.
    3. Select Voice Control.
    4. Toggle the Voice Control slider.
      How to turn off an iphone
    5. You should see the blue and white microphone icon in the screen’s upper-left corner. Say Reboot Device.
    6. Tap Restart in the pop-up menu to confirm.

    How to turn off an iphone

    That’s it! You now know how to turn your iPhone 13 series smartphone on/off.

    You can follow similar steps to restart iPhones on earlier models, including the last-generation iPhone 12. If you’re having trouble with any built-in features, you may need to reset your iPhone and restore it from a backup to resolve the issue.

    Last year, the 2020 iPhone generation slightly changed the way we turn ON/OFF our iPhones. That new system is also found in this year’s generation, so we’ll help you transition if you’ve upgraded your several-year-old phone. With that said, let’s talk about how to turn ON/OFF an iPhone 13, 13 Mini, 13 Pro, and 13 Pro Max.

    Since the button layout on all four of the freshly introduced iPhone 13 lineup models is the same, so is the way you turn them ON or OFF. No matter which iPhone model you have, the following instructions will apply.

    How to Turn ON Your iPhone 13 (All Models)

    Turning ON your iPhone has never been easier, as explained just below.

    1. Press and hold the ‘Side’ button for a few seconds.

    2. You’ll see the Apple logo on your iPhone screen.

    3. After some time, the lock screen show will appear. Unlock your iPhone.

    4. If asked about your SIM card’s PIN, input it.

    5. That’s it! You’re now free to use your iPhone 13!

    How to Turn OFF Your iPhone 13 (All Models)

    There are two ways to turn OFF your iPhone 13. We’ll show you both of those ways, as you can use them interchangeably (if you encounter issues with your iPhone, for example).

    Method #1: Use Hardware Buttons to Turn OFF Your iPhone

    First, here’s the “traditional” way to powering OFF your iPhone, using the buttons you’ll find on its sides. Go through the following steps.

    1. On the right side of your iPhone, you’ll find the ‘Side’ button.

    2. On the left side, you’ll find the ‘Volume Up’ button.

    3. Now, press and hold the ‘Side’ and ‘Volume Up’ buttons for a couple of seconds.

    4. Keep holding the buttons until you see the ‘Slide to Power Off’ slider.

    5. As instructed, place your finger on the white circle and drag it to the right.

    6. After a few moments, your iPhone 13 will power OFF completely.

    Method #2: Use the Settings App to Turn OFF Your iPhone

    There is also another way to power OFF your iPhone 13, and that would be via the ‘Settings’ app. Here’s how exactly that can be done.

    1. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ app on your iPhone 13, Mini, Pro, or Pro Max.

    2. Now, go to ‘General.’ Scroll all the way to the bottom.

    3. Select ‘Shut Down,’ which should be colored in blue.

    4. The power slider will now appear. Swipe towards the right.

    5. Wait a couple of moments until your iPhone powers OFF completely.

    Want to learn more tips and tricks? Make sure to check our latest articles on the iPhone 13, where you’ll find the freshest news, explanations of new features, and tutorials.

    That would be all on how to turn ON/OFF your iPhone 13. If you have any questions, let us know via the comments section below. And lastly, thanks for reading!

    The “Find My iPhone” feature is a great way to help you locate your device if it’s lost or stolen. However, there may be instances where turning this off could be beneficial, like when sending in for repair and deactivating the activation lock so that someone else cannot use their account without permission from the previews owner! Unfortunately, if you forget to turn off Find My iPhone remotely before sending it in for repairs, then there is a chance that this device owner’s security can be restored. If you’re the one who needs to turn off Find My iPhone remotely, then this guide will be very helpful for you. In this article, we’ll show you how to deactivate Find My iPhone from another device in 2 ways.

    Part 1 Can You Turn off Find My iPhone Remotely?

    Find My iPhone is a great way to keep track of your Apple device, but what happens if you lose it? Can you turn off Find My iPhone remotely? The short answer is yes. If you have iCloud enabled on your device, you can sign in to icloud.com and disable Find My iPhone from there. You can also erase all the data on your device, if necessary. This is especially important if you’re concerned about someone stealing your information or if you simply want to make sure that your data is safe.

    However, there are a few things to keep in mind before you take this step. First, make sure that you have a backup of your device so that you don’t lose any important data. Second, erasing your device will also disable Activation Lock, so anyone who finds it will be able to use it. For these reasons, it’s always best to try to locate your device first before taking this step. But if you’re sure that your device is gone for good, you can choose to turn off find my iphone remotely to protect your data.

    Part 2 How to Turn off Find My iPhone Remotely through iCloud?

    If you want to sell your iPhone, iPod Touch, or any device with the feature of “Find My Phone” enabled, make sure this account is disabled first. You can do so by following these steps:

      Go to icloud.com and sign in with your Apple ID. Click on “Find My iPhone” and go to the “All Devices”. Select the device that you want to disable Find My iPhone for.

    Click on “Erase This Device” and confirm that you want to erase the device.

    When you successfully erase your device, click the green link, “Remove from Account” . Enter your Apple ID password to confirm that you want to remove this device from your account.

    Part 3 How to Remotely Turn off Find My iPhone via UltFone Activation Unlocker?

    UltFone Activation Unlocker is a tool you can use if your iPhone is locked with Find My iPhone restrictions. It will help bypass all these security protocols and give access again so long as the phone was bought second-hand from an Apple Store or another trusted source! It’s also a powerful tool that can remotely turn off Find My iPhone. It is easy to use and offers a wide range of features that makes it an ideal choice for those who want to protect their data.

    • Turn off Find My iPhone/iPad/iPod touch without password
    • Remove activation lock without previous owner
    • Unlock iCloud locked iPhone/iPad/iPod touch without Apple ID and password
    • Unlock Apple ID without password on all iOS (No jailbreak)

    Free Download For PC Secure DownloadFree Download For Mac Secure Download

    Step 1 Launch UltFone Activation Unlocker on your computer, then select Turn Off Find My iPhone from the main interface.

    Step 2 Connect your iDevice to the computer with a USB cable. Trust the computer on your iDevice.

    Step 3 Click Next to proceed. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure your iDevice. Now the program will start removing Find My from your device.

    Step 4 Check Find My status on your device. Wait for a while to remove Apple ID. Now you’ve successfully turned off Find My and removed Apple ID.

    Part 4 Are There Any Impacts if You Remotely Turn off Find My iPhone?

    If you turn off Find My iPhone, you will not be able to track the location of your iPhone anymore. It means that you can’t even use the Play Sound feature once you leave your iPhone at home and don’t know exactly where it is. And things can get worse if you iPhone got lost or stolen. If the Find My iPhone option is turned off, the Activation Lock will be disabled and anyone will be able to activate your iPhone. In view of all these scenarios, you’d better keep the Find My feature on at all times.

    Conclusion

    Now that you know how to turn off Find My iPhone remotely, you can use this feature to protect your data. This is an ideal choice for those who want to keep their data safe. UltFone Activation Unlocker is a powerful tool that can help you bypass all the security protocols and give access again. It is easy to use and offers a wide range of features that makes it an ideal choice for those who want to protect their data. So, what are you waiting for? Go ahead and download the UltFone Activation Unlocker tool to turn off Find My iPhone remotely.

    While some push notifications are vitally important, most of them are just annoying. If you’re constantly being distracted by a flood of notifications from apps you don’t even use anymore, there are several ways to stop them. Here’s how to turn off all notifications on your iPhone, clear them from your lock screen, and hide all your old notifications.

    How to Turn Off Notifications on Your iPhone

    To stop receiving notifications from an app on your iPhone, go to Settings > Notifications. Then select an app and turn off the slider next to Allow Notifications. You will have to repeat this process for each app you want to turn off.

    1. Open the Settings app on your iPhone. This is the app with the gear-shaped icon that came with your iPhone. You can find it by swiping down from the middle of your home screen and typing Settings in the search bar at the top of your screen.
    2. Then tap Notifications.
    3. Next, select the app you want to turn off. You will see a list of all your apps under Notification Style. How to turn off an iphone
    4. Finally, turn off Allow Notifications. This will turn off every kind of notification from that app. However, you will have to repeat the steps for every app you want to turn off.

    How to turn off an iphone

    If you don’t want to completely turn off notifications for certain apps, you can also change their settings from here.

    • Under Alerts, you can stop notifications from appearing on your Lock Screen and Notification Center, where other people could see your notifications when your iPhone is turned off. You can also stop notifications from appearing as Banners at the top of your screen when your iPhone is turned on.
    • Then you can change the Banner Style from Temporary, which means it will disappear after a short period of time, to Persistent, which means it will remain at the top of your screen until you swipe it away.
    • Finally, you can turn off notification sounds and red badge icons that appear in the top-right corner of the apps on your home screen.

    If you don’t want to turn off notifications for every app on your iPhone individually, you can also pause them all at once using Do Not Disturb mode.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to Pause All Notifications on Your iPhone

    To pause all notifications on your iPhone at once, go to Settings > Do Not Disturb and turn on the slider next to Do Not Disturb. If you want to silence all calls and notifications, also make sure to tap Always under Silence.

    1. Open the Settings app on your iPhone.
    2. Then tap Do Not Disturb.
    3. Next, toggle the slider next to Do Not Disturb. You will know it is on if it is green. How to turn off an iphone

    Note: From here, you can tap Schedule to set when and how long you want to turn Do Not Disturb mode on.

  • Finally, tap Always under Silence. All notifications and phone calls will be turned off while Do Not Disturb mode is on.
  • Note: If you still want to receive calls while Do Not Disturb mode is on, tap Allow Calls From and select Everyone.

    How to turn off an iphone

    You can also turn on Do Not Disturb mode in the Control Center by swiping down from the top-right corner of your screen on an iPhone X or a newer model. If you have an older iPhone, swipe up from the bottom of your screen. Then tap the moon-shaped icon to turn on Do Not Disturb mode.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Then you can tap and hold the moon-shaped icon to bring up the Do Not Disturb menu. From here, you can choose how long you want to keep Do Not Disturb mode turned on or tap Schedule to change more settings.

    If you don’t want to turn on Do Not Disturb mode, you can easily hide all the information in your notifications instead. Here’s how:

    How to Hide Notification Previews

    To hide all notification previews on your iPhone, go to Settings > Notifications > Show Previews and select Never. This will hide the details in your notifications, so you will only see the name and icon of the app.

    How to turn off an iphone

    While this will hide the information in your notifications, it is important to note that someone could easily reveal that information by tapping and holding the notification. So, this might not be the best option if you are trying to keep certain notifications a secret.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Once you have turned off notifications, you can clear any that remain in the Notification Center, which other people might be able to see from your lock screen. Here’s how:

    How to Clear All Your Notifications in the Notification Center

    To clear all your notifications in the Notification Center on your iPhone, swipe down from the top of your screen. Then tap and hold the “X” in the top-right corner of your screen. Finally, tap Clear All Notifications.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Now that you know how to turn off notifications on your iPhone, check out our step-by-step guide on how to block a call on your iPhone.

    How to turn off an iphone

    HelloTech editors choose the products and services we write about. When you buy through our links, we may earn a commission.

    Have you ever noticed your iPhone running more slowly than usual? Are page loads taking longer than you’d like? The reason could be that you have software running in the background like a VPN.

    While VPNs are really useful, for many different reasons, they can affect your iPhone’s performance when not in use. Unfortunately, not many VPN users remember to deactivate the VPN connection when it isn’t needed.

    If you’re a VPN novice and want to learn how to turn off your VPN on your iPhone, and why this is necessary, continue reading. Below is everything you need to know about switching off iPhone VPNs.

    How to Turn Off Your VPN on Your iPhone in The App

    In order to turn off your iPhone VPN, all you have to do is follow these easy steps:

    Firstly, open your VPN app. You will know whether or not the VPN is activated if you can see a server connection and session time on the app interface. All VPNs are different but there are a couple of ways you can disconnect the VPN:

    • Either click a button that says ‘disconnect’ or ‘end session’.
    • In some cases, you can also tap on the server again to deactivate the VPN.

    Simply going off the app will not end the session, since the VPN software is designed to run in the background, like other apps such as Spotify. This is to prevent the VPN from being turned off on an iPhone, without the user’s consent.

    Therefore, you need to manually disconnect if you want to turn off the VPN.

    How to Turn Off Your VPN in the iPhone Settings

    If you have a manual VPN connection set up on your iPhone, then you can turn off your VPN via the iPhone’s settings.

    Navigate from the home screen to “Settings” > “VPN”. If you’re using an older version of iOS this might be called something different. Go into the specific VPN settings and select ‘Turn Off’. Alternatively, if it isn’t a setting on your phone anymore try going through – Settings > General > Reset > Reset Network Settings.

    If you have an iPhone X or later, swipe up from the bottom of your screen to open Control Center and tap on the ‘VPN’ icon. This will bring up a list of your VPNs and you can simply select the one that’s currently running to turn it off.

    Use Airplane Mode

    Another quick and easy way to turn off the VPN is to use airplane mode. By switching to this mode on your phone, your internet connection, and therefore, VPN connection, will switch off.

    However, when you disable airplane mode, the VPN may still continue to run in the background, if you haven’t manually switched it off in the app or settings.

    Why Should I Switch Off My iPhone VPN?

    The main reason you should switch off your VPN is to save battery. If the VPN isn’t being used, it might as well be turned off since this will affect any background processes that are draining your iPhone’s power supply.

    You might also be using a VPN with a data allowance limit. If this is the case, then by leaving your VPN activated in the background, you will be using up a lot of bandwidth and potentially going over your data allowance for the day or month.

    Finally, one more good reason for turning off a VPN is to increase speed. When data passes through an encrypted tunnel between servers across the world, internet speeds tend to slow down quite a bit, which can result in slow page loads on your phone, and buffering when watching YouTube videos or content on other streaming sites.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Hi, I’m Madeleine. I’m a British writer with a global background, currently based in the UK. I have always been interested in the online world and how it connects people worldwide. My keen interest in the internet led me to .
    Read more about the author

    How to turn off an iphone

    In this quick guide, we’ll first show you how to turn off the passcode on your iPhone. Next, we’ll show you alternatives that protect your security while minimizing the hassle of constantly entering your passcode without having to turn your iPhone passcode off, such as enabling Face ID or changing your Auto-Lock settings.

    How to Remove the Passcode from an iPhone or iPad

    Just remember that if you remove your passcode from your iPhone or iPad, your photos, email accounts, texts, and other private contents of your device will not be protected if it’s lost or stolen. Another downside to turning off your iPhone password is that your Apple Pay cards will be removed from your iPhone.

    1. Open the Settings app.
    2. Tap Face ID & Passcode or Touch ID & Passcode.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off an iphone

  • Enter your iPhone passcode.
  • Next, tap Turn Passcode Off.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off an iphone

    Read the disclaimer and, if you still want to remove the passcode from your iPhone, tap Turn Off.

    How to turn off an iphone

  • If you decide that you don’t want to turn off the passcode after all, keep reading for ways to avoid having to enter your passcode without having to sacrifice your privacy and security.
  • Alternatives to Removing the iPhone Passcode

    Use Face ID or Touch ID Instead of Turning Off the iPhone Passcode

    Forget entering passwords; Face ID and Touch ID can be used in place of a passcode for most functions, including unlocking your iPhone, approving App Store purchases, and unlocking certain apps. However, other functions, such as turning on or restarting your device, will still require your passcode. If you have an iPhone with Touch ID or Face ID capabilities and you haven’t set them up yet, now is the time!

    How to Set Up Touch ID

    You can register up to five fingerprints, which can include the prints of people who you want to grant access to your iPhone without having to give them the iPhone passcode.

    1. Open the Settings app.
    2. Tap Touch ID & Passcode.
    3. Enter your passcode for authorization.
    4. Tap Add a Fingerprint.

    How to turn off an iphone

  • Rest the finger you want to register on the Home button and follow the on-screen prompts.
  • Tap Continue.

    How to turn off an iphone

  • Rest the edges of the finger you want to register on the Home button and follow the on-screen prompts to complete registering your fingerprint.
  • How to Set Up Face ID

    Face ID functions the same as Touch ID, but your register your face rather than your fingerprint. Face ID is available on the iPhone X and later and the third and fourth generation iPad Pro. Face ID can be used with glasses and contacts, but not a face mask.

    1. Open Settings.
    2. Tap Face ID & Passcode. Enter your passcode for authorization.
    3. Tap Set Up Face ID.

    How to turn off an iphone

  • Make sure you’re holding your device in portrait orientation, then tap Get Started.
  • Position your face inside the frame and move your head in a circle, following the on-screen prompts.

    How to turn off an iphone

  • Tap Continue, then repeat the circle formation.
  • Tap Done.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off an iphone

    Change Your Auto-Lock Settings Instead of Turning Off the iPhone Passcode

    The Auto-Lock feature on your iPhone or iPad allows you to set the amount of time that elapses before the screen turns off and the device automatically locks. This is a good option if you want to keep your iPad or iPhone passcode enabled but also reduce the number of times you must enter your passcode to use the device. You can also turn Auto-Lock off by selecting Never in the Auto-Lock preferences.

    1. Open Settings.
    2. Scroll down and tap Display & Brightness.
    3. Scroll down again and tap Auto-Lock.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off an iphone

    Select your Auto-Lock time preference.

    Your iPhone has the ability to show others when you read their text messages. This feature, known as read receipts, provides visual confirmation in the Messages app that you’ve read someone’s text message. The image below gives you a sense of what read receipts look like from the other person’s perspective.

    How to turn off an iphone

    If you don’t want people to know when you’ve read a message, you can turn off the read receipts feature on your iPhone. Disabling the feature will keep other people in the dark about whether or not you’ve read their messages.

    Here’s how to turn off read receipts for all contacts on your iPhone:

    From the home screen, tap Settings.

    Tap Messages, as shown below.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Move the Send Read Receipts switch to the off position, as shown below.

    How to turn off an iphone

    That’s it — you’ve turned off read receipts for all contacts on your iPhone! From now on, your contacts won’t be able to see whether or not you’ve read their messages.

    Turn Off Read Receipts for One Person

    You might not want to disable read receipts for everybody. If that’s the case, you can turn off read receipts for one person. Here’s how to turn off read receipts for one person on your iPhone:

    From the home screen, tap Messages.

    Open the conversation with the person who you’d like to turn off read receipts.

    Tap the contact’s name at the top of the screen, and then tap Info, as shown below.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Move the Send Read Receipts switch to the off position, as shown below.

    How to turn off an iphone

    You’ve turned off read receipts for a single contact on your iPhone! From now on, your contact won’t be able to see whether or not you’ve read their messages.

    Related Articles

    • How to Turn Off Read Receipts on your iPad
    • How to Turn Off Read Receipts on your Mac
    • How to Automatically Delete Old Messages on Your iPhone
    • How to Sync iMessages Across Your Apple Devices
    • How to Disable iMessage on Your iPhone

    Subscribe to our email newsletter

    Sign up and get Macinstruct’s tutorials delivered to your inbox. No spam, promise!

    Smartphones both, Android and iPhone offer a physical button to turn off or restart your device. But, Do you know that there are other ways by the help of which you can turn on/off your device? In this article, you will learn all the various possible ways to Turn Off, Restart Any iPhone or Any Android Phone.

    Ways To Turn Off, Restart Any iPhone or Android Phone

    Table of Contents

    For Android

    Turn Off/Restart Using Physical Buttons

    The easiest way to turn off/Restart an Android Phone is with the help of physical buttons.

    • To Power Off the phone, Long press the power button till a popup displays on the screen.
    • Press the power off the option to turn off the phone.
    • To restart the phone, long-press the power button again to wake it from sleep.

    Schedule Turn Off/Restart from Settings

    Android provides you the feature to schedule the time to turn off or restart your phone automatically. To use this, follow these simple steps

    • Open the Settings app and Search for Power
    • Tap on Schedule power on/off.
    • Schedule the time for shutdown and restart respectively and save changes.

    Turn off Using 3rd Party Apps

    You can also turn off an android phone with the help of a 3rd party app. There are lots of trusted Power apps that are available on Google Playstore to download. For this, I am using the Shutdown (no root) app.

    • After downloading this app, provide required accessibility permissions.
    • Tap on the Power Off/Reboot button to shut down or restart the phone.

    Turn off Using Command Line Interface

    You can turn off an Android phone with the help of ADB commands. To learn to do this, follow this simple 2 min read on how to turn off an Android Phone using ADB commands.

    For iPhone

    Turn Off/Restart using Physical Buttons

    For iPhone 8 or Earlier
    • To turn Off an iPhone 8 or earlier model, long-press the power button for 3-4 seconds.
    • Swipe the power-off bar to shut down the phone.
    • To restart the phone again, long-press the power button for 3-4 seconds till the phone screen turns on.
    For iPhone X or Later
    • To turn off an iPhone X or later model, hold down the power button along with either of the volume button.
    • A screen with a slider bar for turning off will appear.
    • Swipe the phone’s screen to turn it off.

    Force Restart an iPhone

    For iPhone 8 or Later

    This force restart will rest the iPhone to fix anything that has gone wrong. To do this,

    • Press and release the volume up button quickly.
    • Next, Quickly press and release the volume down button.
    • Hold the power button until you see the Apple Logo.
    For iPhone 7/7 Plus
    • Hold down the side button and volume down button simultaneously.
    • Keep holding them until you see the Apple logo.
    For iPhone 6s or Earlier
    • Press and hold the Power Button and the Home button simultaneously to restart the iPhone

    Schedule Turn Off/Restart from Settings

    Unlike Android, no such specific option is available for users to do that. However, there is a small workaround to achieve the same. You can put your iPhone to sleep and wake up using the clock app. Follow these simple steps to do the same

    • Open the Clock app and click on Timer.
    • Enter a time value and set ‘When timer ends‘ to ‘Sleep iPhone‘.
    • Tap the start button. When the timer ends, your iPhone will go to sleep.
    • Similarly, to wake up, set an alarm in your clock app for a specific time.
    • When the alarm goes off, iPhone will automatically turn on even if it is in sleep mode.

    Turn off an iPhone using native Apps (iOS 11 or Later)

    iOS natively provides the feature to turn off your iPhone without using the physical power button. To achieve this, follow these simple steps

    • Open Settings.
    • Tap on General.
    • Swipe down and tap on Shut Down.

    Now you can swipe the power off slider to the right to turn off your iPhone.

    To restart an iPhone, Turn on Assistive Touch and tap on Device. Tap on More and then tap on the Restart button to restart the iPhone.

    Turn off your iPhone using Command Line Interface

    To turn off/ restart an iPhone using the command line, you will either require a Linux or a MacBook. Open Terminal on your system and install a third-party program called idevicediagnostics.

    • To install idevicediagnostics, type ‘ brew install libimobiledevice‘ and hit enter. This command will install all the associated libraries with this app on your system.
    • After this is installed, type the ‘ idevicediagnostics shutdown‘ command to turn off your iPhone.
    • Similarly, Type ‘ idevicediagnostics restart‘ to restart your iPhone.

    Wrapping Up

    In this article, you have learned about 4 easy ways that you can use to turn off/restart your Android or iPhone. If you find this article helpful and informative, then Hit the Like button and don’t forget to share this trick with your friends. As always, Stay Tuned for more how-tos like this one.

    You can also follow us for instant tech news at Google News or for tips and tricks, smartphones & gadgets reviews, join GadgetsToUse Telegram Group or for the latest review videos subscribe GadgetsToUse Youtube Channel.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off an iphone

    If you a new iPhone and you want to know how to turn off iPhone 13 or turn on iPhone 13, then you have come to the right place. In this guide we will also share with you how to force restart iPhone 13 or iPhone 13 Pro.

    Needless to say these guides are also suitable for iPhone 13 Pro Max and iPhone 13 mini as these devices work the same way as well.

    How to turn off iPhone 13 or iPhone 13 Pro

    It is very easy to turn off iPhone 13 or iPhone 13 Pro, you only need to follow a few simply instructions.

    Step 1. Press and hold Side button and Volume Up button at the same time.

    Step 2. When the power off slider appears release the buttons.

    Step 3. Slide on the Slide to power off slider in order to turn off iPhone 13.

    How to turn on iPhone 13 or iPhone 13 Pro

    Turning on iPhone 13 is as easy as it can be. You can quickly turn on iPhone 13 Pro by pressing the Side/Power button until the Apple logo appears on the screen.

    How to force restart iPhone 13 or iPhone 13 Pro when it is stuck

    If you’re experiencing a problem with your iPhone 13, such as it is stuck on Apple logo or has become unresponsive, then you can quickly force restart it by following the steps given below.

    A force restart on iPhone 13 or iPhone 13 Pro can help you in getting out of situations where iPhone 13 is stuck, unresponsive or frozen.

    Step 1. Press and release the Volume Up button.

    Step 2. Press and release the Volume Down button.

    Step 3. Press and hold the Side/Power button until the screen turns off and you see the Apple logo.

    As soon as the Apple logo appears your iPhone will boot up and you will get access to your device.

    So this is how you can turn off iPhone 13 and turn it back on. We also showed you how you can force restart iPhone 13 and iPhone 13 Pro in case it becomes unresponsive.

    If you found this article to be helpful, then don’t forget to share it with your friends who might also want to know how to do this on their iPhone 13.

    Is your iPhone 13 stuck on the loading screen or not responding to touch?

    Similar to iPhone 11 and iPhone 12, Apple’s iPhone 13 lineup features Face ID and comes without the Home button. The power button has also been replaced with the new Side button on newer iPhones. The Side button on the right side of the iPhone activates Siri when you press and hold it. As a result, the method to power off or restart an iPhone X or later using physical buttons is entirely different. Whereas on iPhone 8 or earlier, one can simply press and hold the power key to switch off the device.

    Perhaps, if you’re coming from iPhone 8 or older then you might find it difficult to turn off iPhone 13. Worry not! In this quick guide, we will cover different ways that you can use to switch off or power off your iPhone 13. Besides, there is a trick to shut down and restart iPhone 13 without the power button in case it is broken or not working.

    How to power off your iPhone 13, 13 mini, 13 Pro, or 13 Pro Max

    Using hardware buttons

    This is the standard way to switch off an iPhone without using the screen. It comes in handy when you need to turn off your iPhone when the screen is broken or not working.

    1. Press and hold the Side button and Volume Up or Down button until you see the power off slider. How to turn off an iphone
    2. Drag the slider that says “slide to power off” to the right. How to turn off an iphone
    3. Your iPhone will now turn off.

    TIP: You can access Emergency SOS and Medical ID from the power off screen and temporarily turn off the Find My network so that your iPhone doesn’t remain traceable after it is powered off.

    To turn on the iPhone 13, just press and hold the Side button for a few seconds. The device will switch back on and the Apple logo will appear on the screen.

    Without power button

    There is a hidden setting in iOS to shut down an iPhone or iPad without the physical buttons. This way you can easily shut down your iPhone without using the combo of Side and Volume buttons. It is helpful when the Side button isn’t working or when you are using the device with one hand. Surprisingly, not many iPhone users are aware of the virtual Shut Down option.

    To turn off your iPhone 13 without the power button,

    1. Go to Settings > General.
    2. Under General, scroll down to the bottom and tap “Shut Down“. How to turn off an iphone
    3. Slide to power off the device.

    How to force restart iPhone 13 or 13 Pro

    There might be instances when you need to force restart an iPhone. Such as when your iPhone 13 screen is frozen or when the iPhone is stuck on the Apple logo or loading screen. In such a case when your iPhone becomes unresponsive, a normal restart won’t help.

    To force reboot iPhone 13, press and quickly release the volume up button. Then press the volume down button and quickly release it. Now press and hold the Side button until the Apple logo appears on the screen. Wait for the device to boot up.

    How to restart iPhone 13

    Unlike Android devices, the iPhone and iPad do not include a restart or reboot option. Therefore, users only have the option to power off their device and then turn it on manually. Well, there is a hidden restart button on the iPhone and iPad which is available in iOS 12 and later.

    To reboot your iPhone 13 without the Volume button or Side button,

    1. Go to Settings > Accessibility >Touch.
    2. Tap on “AssistiveTouch” at the top and turn on the toggle for AssistiveTouch. How to turn off an iphone
    3. The AssistiveTouch virtual button will now appear on your screen.
    4. Tap the button and go to Device >More (3-dots).

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off an iphone

    That’s it. Your iPhone will now restart automatically.

    Optionally, you can customize the AssistiveTouch menu. Doing so will let you move the Restart option to the main menu of the AssistiveTouch button for quicker access.

    by Jenefey Aaron Updated on 2019-07-25 / Update for iPhone Tips

    Undoubtedly, everyone prefers iPhone over other smartphones because of its intuitive camera features, and quality. However, many users face various types of issues with their iPhone. The most common problems that users encountered with their device such as iPhone is stuck and cannot turn off, freezing, and many more. Their iPhone become unresponsive and make users frustrated. These problems require users to shut down their iPhone forcibly so that they can start their iPhone from scratch. That’s why we come up with methods to tell users who are not aware of how to force shutdown iPhone.

    Part 1: Force Shut Down iPhone Using Buttons

    Whenever your iPhone is not responded, you can turn off your iPhone manually to make it responsive back. It is because if your iPhone got freeze due to software issue then force restart can probably fix this problem. No matter which iPhone model you are using whether it is latest one or older, here we have covered force turn off iPhone for every iPhone model.

    Force Shut Down On iPhone 8 or Later:

    • Press and release the volume up button quickly. Again, press and release the volume down button quickly.
    • After that, press and hold down the side button or power button until the Apple logo does not appear on your iPhone screen.

    Force Shut Down On iPhone 7 or 7 Plus:

    • Press and hold down the power or side button and volume down button at same time.
    • Keep holding both buttons until the Apple logo does not appear on your iPhone screen.

    Force Shut Down On iPhone 6 Plus or Earlier:

    • Press and hold down the side/power and home button together.
    • Hold both buttons until you don’t see Apple logo on your iPhone screen.

    Part 2: How to Force Shut Down iPhone When Frozen

    Suppose your iPhone X (or other iPhone) is freezing and won’t turn off or turn on, you can try these tips to force restart it.

    Tip 1: Drain Off Battery

    If you can’t turn off your iPhone when it gets stuck or freeze then another way to shut down iPhone is to drain off its battery completely. This will automatically turn off your iPhone when its battery reaches zero. Now wondering how you can drain off your iPhone battery? Then, it is so simple. Use your iPhone continuously until its battery is not drained off. You can play music or run apps which consume a large percentage of battery life such as watching something on YouTube. You can also check your iPhone setting for the battery which app consumes more battery power.

    Thus, draining off iPhone battery is another smart way to force turn off iPhone. You can try this method if you can’t turn off your iPhone manually.

    Tip 2: Force Restart/Shut Off iPhone Using Free ReiBoot

    ReiBoot, as its name shows, is the best way to reboot an iPhone/iPad/iPod touch. It is a small utility with neat interface. All you need is two clicks to hard reset an iPhone X/XR/XS/8/7/6s/6/5 or iPad/iPod easily.

    Run this program after installation and connect your frozen iPhone to computer. Click “Enter Recovery Mode” and put iPhone into recovery mode.

    And then the “Exit Recovery Mode” is highlighted, click it to force restart your iPhone.

    This is by now the easiest free method to force shut down iPhone without Power or Home button. If enter and exit recovery mode does not help you hard restart your device. You can upgrade to use the “Repair Operating System” feature to recover iOS system. It has the capability of fixing various issues without any data loss such as iPhone/iPad freezing, iPhone keeps dropping calls, iPhone spinning wheel, etc.

      Select “Repair Operating System” feature and you’ll enter the repair interface. Click “Start Repair”.

    Prior to repair, you need to download firmware according to your iPhone operating system and thus, download the firmware.

    Once the firmware is downloaded, the software will start repairing the operating system of your iPhone and wait for a few minutes to complete the process.

    Tip 3: Restore iPhone from iTunes

    By restoring iPhone from iTunes can also fix minor iOS issues that you are facing now. However, the downside of the restoring iPhone from iTunes is it will erase your iPhone data and is passcode. So, backup your iPhone data before proceeding with this method.

    • To commence the process, run the latest iTunes version on your computer and after that, connect your iPhone to the computer using a digital cable.
    • Once the computer detects your iPhone, click on the device icon and then, click on the “Summary” tab.
    • After that, tap on the “Restore iPhone” and when the dialog box appears, again click on the “Restore” option.

  • Now, it will erase your iPhone data and install the latest software on your iPhone. Once restore process completes, your device will restart and you can activate your iPhone as new.
  • Summary

    Hence, now you have learned various methods to force shutdown an iPhone, in case you encounter with iOS issues on your device. Among all the methods that we have mentioned, Tenorshare ReiBoot is most powerful methods to come out of various iOS issues. It will give ultimate results to you and thus, try the software yourself and must provide feedback to us via below comment section.

    Updated on 2019-07-25 / Update for iPhone Tips

    Find My iPhoneВ is an Apple security feature that is mainly used for tracking the location of lost iPhone, keeping tabs on close friends and family members, and quickly finding luggage with an AirTag. While for some reasons, you need to turn off Find My iPhoneВ and disconnect your iPhoneВ from Apple ID, especially before selling.

    After you turn off Find My iPhone, the iOS device will be removed from your Devices list and Activation Lock will be turned off. This post will show you how to turn off Find My iPhoneВ from computer, with or without password.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Part 1. Disable Find My iPhone from Computer

    If you like to turn off Find My iPhone from a computer, you can go to iCloud site and disable it. This part will show you how to do it in detail.

    Step 1 Open your web browser and open the official iCloud site. When you get there, enter your Apple ID and related password to sign in. When you enter your iCloud account, select the Find iPhoneВ option.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 2 Click All DevicesВ to display all associated Apple devices with this account. Select the specific iPhone that you want to turn off its Find My iPhone feature.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 3 Click Remove from AccountВ to start turning off Find My iPhone from computer. There will be a pop-up window appears on the screen prompting that if you want to remove iPhone. Click the RemoveВ button to confirm your operation. By doing so, you can disable the Find My iPhone feature remotely.

    Part 2. Turn Off Find My iPhone from Computer Without Password

    With the first method, you are required the Apple ID and related password to confirm the removing operation. What if you don’t know the password?

    This part introduces you with the powerful iOS UnlockerВ to directly turn off Find My iPhone from computer without password.

    FoneLab Helps you unlock iPhone screen, Removes Apple ID or its password, Remove screen time or restriction passcode in seconds.

    • Helps you unlock iPhone screen.
    • Removes Apple ID or its password.
    • Remove screen time or restriction passcode in seconds.

    Step 1 Free download, install and run this iOS Unlocker on your computer. Choose the Remove Apple ID feature to turn off Find My iPhone from computer.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 2 Connect your iPhone to computer with a USB cable. Click StartВ button and follow the on-screen instructions to remove Apple IDВ and iCloud account. During this process, Find My iPhone feature will also be disabled.

    How to turn off an iphone

    FoneLab Helps you unlock iPhone screen, Removes Apple ID or its password, Remove screen time or restriction passcode in seconds.

    • Helps you unlock iPhone screen.
    • Removes Apple ID or its password.
    • Remove screen time or restriction passcode in seconds.

    Part 3. FAQs of How to Turn Off Find My iPhone

    Question 1. How to turn off Find My iPhone directly on iPhone?

    When you want to disable the Find My iPhone feature on your iOS device, you can go to the Settings app, tap on your Apple account on the top, and then choose the Find My iPhone section. Now you can turn off Find My iPhone with ease. A pop-up window will appear on your iPhone screen, you need to enter Apple ID password to confirm the operation. In some old iOS versions, you need to tap iCloud, and then Find My iPhone to disable it.

    Question 2. How do you turn off Find My iPhone from another phone?

    If you don’t have a computer around, you can use another iPhone or iPad to sign in your Apple account and turn off Find My iPhone. You need to go to iCloud site on a web browser and then log into your account. Tap All Devices and choose your iPhone. Then you can follow the same steps as above to remove iPhone from this account and disable Find My iPhone feature.

    Question 3. What does removing a device from Apple ID do?

    After removing a device from your Apple ID, this iOS device won’t be connected to this Apple account. It won’t have access to iCloud and other Apple services. Also, the Find My feature will be disabled. If you have set up two-factor authentication, it will no longer display verification codes.

    By the way, you are able to remove Restrictions Passcode with FoneLab iOS Unlocker without losing data with ease.

    Conclusion

    When Find My iPhone is activated, you can go to iCloud site or Find My app to check the current location of all your devices. But in many cases, you want to disable this function. Here in this post, you can learn 2 simple ways to turn off Find My iPhone from computer. Whether you know the Apple ID password or not, you can disable Find My iPhone feature.

    FoneLab Helps you unlock iPhone screen, Removes Apple ID or its password, Remove screen time or restriction passcode in seconds.

    Long-pressing the side button on current iPhones only triggers Siri, instead of giving you the option to turn off the phone. We’ll show you which buttons to press instead.

    Contributing Writer, ZDNet

    Jason Cipriani is based out of beautiful Colorado and has been covering mobile technology news and reviewing the latest gadgets for the last six years. His work can also be found on sister site CNET in the How To section, as well as across several more online publications.

    The iPhone’s design hasn’t changed much over the years, but each time it does, Apple changes the role each button plays. For example, holding in the side button on the iPhone 11 and iPhone 12 doesn’t prompt you to turn off your iPhone. Instead, it triggers Siri , which awaits your question or command a split-second later. I’ve received countless emails and DMs on Twitter asking for instructions detailing how to turn off the latest batch of iPhones.

    You have to use a combination of buttons to turn off your phone now. And if you really can’t remember which buttons to press and when, there’s a software button buried in the settings app that turns off your phone.

    Below I’ll walk you through the mysterious button combination to turn your iPhone off, another button combo that will restart a problematic iPhone and, finally, where you can find the software button to turn it off.

    Turn off your iPhone 11 or iPhone 12

    So here’s what you need to do to get the power menu to show up: On your iPhone 11 or iPhone 12 , you’ll need to press and hold the volume down button and the side button at the same time. It won’t take long — just a second or two. You’ll feel a haptic vibration and then see the power slider on the top of your screen, as well as a Medical ID and an Emergency SOS slider near the bottom.

    Slide the power switch from left to right and your phone will power off. To turn it back on, press and hold the side button until you see the Apple logo on the screen.

    See that button? It doesn’t do what you’d think it does.

    Force a struggling iPhone 11 or iPhone 12 to restart

    If your phone is running slow or is frozen and you can’t get the power menu to show up, you can initiate a hard restart by using a button sequence Apple introduced with the iPhone X.

    Start by pressing and releasing the volume up button, then press and release the volume down button. Finally, press and hold the side button. A new power menu will show up, forgoing all of the medical and emergency info. But instead of sliding the switch, keep holding the side button until you see the Apple logo appear on your phone.

    Don’t worry, a hard restart to your phone doesn’t erase any data or information. But it does, more often than not, fix whatever issue you’re experiencing.

    You don’t have to memorize the button combo. You can turn off your phone in the Settings app.

    Screenshots by Jason Cipriani/CNET

    Power down your phone using the Settings app

    If you just can’t commit the button combination to memory, maybe this will be easier. Open the Settings app and go to General and scroll all the way to the bottom of the screen. There, you’ll find a button labeled Shut Down. Tap it and slide the power off toggle to turn your phone off.

    That wasn’t too bad, was it? To be honest, I rarely turn my phone off. Instead, I mostly use a hard restart to power my phone off and back on automatically. Since it’s my main troubleshooting method and no data is lost, it can’t hurt.

    If you’re looking for more iPhone tips and tricks, we have plenty. Check out the top features we’ve found in iOS 14.6 , as well as some hidden features you just can’t pass up . If you’re looking for a way to make your iPhone more personal, here’s how to create your own app icons , and of course we have a look at some of the new features coming to iOS 15 this fall.

    • 7:29 ET, Jan 20 2022
    • Updated : 9:00 ET, Jan 20 2022

    IT’S one of the world’s biggest messaging apps, boasting 1.3 billion active users across the globe.

    But while Apple’s iMessage is beloved by iPhone users everywhere, there’s a reason you might want to turn it off.

    How to turn off an iphone

    If you’re switching from iOS to Android, for instance, switching off the instant messaging service can save your important texts.

    That’s because a common side effect of jumping from one to the other is that your new device is unable to receive texts.

    Here’s how to switch off iMessage, which is loaded into Apple’s Messages app.

    How to turn off iMessage on your iPhone

    You can switch off iMessage with just a few taps. Before you begin, make sure your iPhone has your SIM card in it.

    Go to the Settings app, scroll down and tap on Messages.

    Under iMessage, tap on the slider so it goes from green to grey. You have now turned off iMessage.

    You can still receive SMS messages from Android devices, but you will not receive iMessages sent by iPhone users.

    Most read in Tech

    How to turn off an iphone

    ‘Potentially hazardous’ asteroid to make ‘close approach’ to Earth TODAY

    How to turn off an iphone

    Solar flare expected to deliver ‘glancing blow’ to Earth in DAYS sparking storm

    How to turn off an iphone

    Elon Musk breaks silence on Jack Dorsey leaving Twitter amid backstabbing claims

    How to turn off an iphone

    Elon Musk issues warning on assault rifle laws after Texas shooting horror

    How to turn off iMessage online

    If you no longer have your iPhone, you can deregister iMessage at Apple.com.

    This is good to do if you switched to a non-Apple phone and aren’t getting SMS/MMS messages.

    You’ll need to enter your phone number. Apple will then send you a confirmation code that you’ll need to enter into the site.

    “After you complete deregistration, your phone number is removed from iMessage services,” Apple says on its website.

    “You should be able to receive text messages straight away but it might take a few hours for some Apple devices to recognise that you’re not using iMessage when they send you a message.”

    When should you turn it off?

    Turning off iMessage isn’t recommended unless something has gone wrong.

    If your iPhone isn’t receiving messages, for instance, you may want to switch iMessage off and on again in order to fix the issue.

    If you’re switching from an iPhone to an Android device, you may find that texts aren’t coming through to your new mobile.

    This could be because your mates’ iPhones are still trying to send you texts as iMessages, instead of SMS messages.

    Deactivating iMessage – be that using your iPhone or PC – is one way to ensure that all messages are sent to your Android device in SMS format.

    In other news, personalised smart guns, which can be fired only by verified users, may finally become available to U.S. consumers this year.

    Scientists are embarking on a mission to unravel the mystery behind dozens of grisly child mummies buried in an underground tomb in Sicily.

    Police have caught an Italian mafia henchman who’d be on the run for 20 years after spotting the fugitive on Google Maps.

    And, one of the best-preserved fossils ever found has confirmed that young dinosaurs burst from their shells just like baby birds.

    by Anna Sherry Updated on 2022-01-21 / Update for iPhone Tips

    Assistive Touch is a handy iPhone feature that lets you control the common functionality of your phone with handy shortcuts. However, many novice iPhone users find it hard to turn off Assistive Touch after they’ve initially set it up.

    So, without any further ado, let’s look at how to turn off Assistive Touch on iPhones.

    Part 1: How to Turn Off Assistive Touch on iPhone

    In this part, we talk about how to turn off Assistive Touch on iPhone 11, iPhone 12/13, and any other model of iPhones. Be noted that the following methods don’t require you to have a PC or Mac.

    1. Turn Off Assistive Touch in Settings

    If you’re looking for the fastest and simplest method on how to get rid of Assistive Touch, this section is for you. You see, Assistive Touch can be turned off by heading into your device’s internal Settings.

    Here’s how to turn off Assistive Touch on iPhone 12, iPhone 13, and other iPhone models using the Settings app.

    • Go to your iPhone’s Settings > Accessibility > Touch > AssistiveTouch.
    • Turn off the toggle at the top that says “AssistiveTouch”.

    2. Use Shortcuts to Turn Off Assistive Touch

    If you’re looking for a faster, one-click solution on how to turn Assistive Touch off, you might want to create a shortcut for the purpose.

    To do that, follow the steps mentioned below.

    Go to your iPhone’s Settings > Accessibility > Accessibility Shortcut.

  • Tap the AssistiveTouch label and you will see a new “tick” icon next to it.
  • To turn Assistive Touch on or off quickly, triple-tap the side button on your iPhone at any time.
  • 3. Ask Siri to Turn Off Assistive Touch

    If you’re wondering how to turn off Assistive Touch on iPhone with your voice, this section has got you covered. To turn off Assistive Touch with a voice command, you can ask your iPhone’s digital assistant called Siri.

    Here’s how to disable Assistive Touch on an iPhone with your voice.

    • Keep your iPhone close to your face and say “Hey Siri”.
    • If your “Hey Siri” command isn’t active, press and hold the side button for a few seconds to invoke Siri.
    • With Siri active, ask her to disable Assistive Touch. Say something like, “Hey Siri, can you disable Assistive Touch for me?”

    Part 2: How to Turn Off Assistive Touch on PC

    If for any reason, you can’t turn off Assistive Touch on your iPhone using the above-mentioned methods, you should try to do it from your PC.

    Luckily, there are a few really efficient methods to do that task. Here’s how to take off Assistive Touch on iPhone from your PC.

    1. Use Tenorshare iCareFone

    If you’re looking for a fast, reliable, and simple tool to quickly turn off Assistive Touch on PC, there’s nothing better than Tenorshare iCareFone. It’s a super simple app you can use to manage your iPhone’s data, take backups, and in this case, turn various Accessibility settings on or off.

    Here’s how to turn off Assistive Touch using Tenorshare iCareFone.

    Download and install Tenorshare iCareFone on your PC. Open iCareFone by searching for it in the search bar. Connect your iPhone to the PC and select “Trust This Computer” if prompted on the iPhone. On the main screen of iCareFone, select “More Tools” from the top bar.

    Select “Device Accessibility Control”.

    On the page that appears, select to turn Assistive Touch off by toggling the switch off.

    2. Turn Off Assistive Touch in iTunes

    Last but not least, you can also turn off Assistive Touch with the iTunes app on your PC. The iTunes app has a nifty feature that lets you control device accessibility settings from within the tool.

    Here’s how to turn off Assistive Touch using iTunes on your PC.

    • Download and install iTunes on your PC from the official download page. Connect your iPhone to the computer. If you’re connecting that iPhone to the PC for the first time, tap “Trust This Computer” when prompted on the iPhone screen.
    • Open iTunes and make sure your device is being displayed on it.
    • On the top-left corner, click the small icon showcasing an iPhone.

    On the next screen, click Summary and then click Configure Accessibility. Select to turn off Assistive Touch and other Accessibility features you’d like to turn off.

    Conclusion

    Assistive touch is a nice way to keep system-wide handy shortcuts at hand. However, many users can’t find out how to turn it off after they have turned it on previously.

    In this article, we discovered some of the best ways you can go about disabling Assistive Touch on your iPhone. If you’re looking for a fast, reliable, and easy-to-use tool on how to turn off assistive touch on iPhone, Tenorshare iCareFone has got you covered.

    Updated on 2022-01-21 / Update for iPhone Tips

    Here’s a quick and easy way to turn off your iPhone 12.

    What’s the most common reason for turning off your iPhone 12? The battery is about to die and you don’t have time to plug it in. But sometimes, you might need to turn your iPhone 12 off for other reasons – like if you’re expecting an important phone call or want to save the remaining battery life on your device. Whatever the case, it can be tough to find the right turning-off button on your iPhone 12.

    How to turn off an iphone

    How to turn off your iPhone 12 ( Method 1)

    Step1. Press the Upper volume button in the left side and power button which are in the right side together at the same time .

    Step 2. You will see a screen where they ask you to slide to power off and below that Emergency SOS option available .

    step 3. Slide to power off and your iPhone will be shut down.

    How to turn off your iPhone 12 ( Method 2)

    Step 1 . Go to the setting page and under that you will find a option General .

    Step 2. Click on the General and will open a complete list of your iPhone Settings .

    Step 3. Scroll down to the bottom and there you will see shut down option .

    Step 4. Clink on the shut down option and a new pop up screen will open in front of your iPhone .

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 5. Slide to power off and your iPhone will be shut down .

    How to turn On your iPhone 12

    Step 1 . Press and hold the power button and volume up button together until the Apple logo display on the screen .

    Step2. Congratulation your iPhone is now power on .

    How to turn On your iPhone 13

    The process to turn on your iPhone 13 will be similar where you just need to hold he power button and volume up button together until the Apple logo display on the screen .

    Read More:- how to win free iPhone 13

    Why you should turn your phone off

    When you use your iPhone 12, the battery will decrease. This is normal and you can always charge it up again at some point. But if you don’t want to drain your battery, turning off your iPhone 12 can be a good idea. If you’re expecting an important phone call or need to save the remaining battery life on your device, then this might be a good time to turn it off.

    1. How do i manually shut down my iPhone ?

    The first thing you should do is hold the side button volume up and power button on your iPhone 12. You’ll know you’re holding in the right spot if the power off slider becomes visible. Next, drag this slider to the right so that it turns green. Congratulations! You have successfully completed the turning-off process on your iPhone 12 and can now use your device normally.

    2. how to i turn off my iPhone without the power button ?

    You can just simple go to the setting>General>shutdown and pop up screen will open asking to slide to power off .

    3. how to turn your iPhone when Frozen ?

    If your phone is running slow or frozen, you can fix the issue by initiating a hard restart. To do this, press and release the volume up button twice in quick succession followed by pressing and releasing volume down twice. Continue to hold both buttons until you see an Apple logo on your screen; this will initialize a new power menu that gives access to all medical information as well as emergency contacts without having to type anything out. Restarting doesn’t erase any data or memorized information but it does solve most issues with your device – more often than not!

    Conclusion

    There are plenty of reasons to turn off your iPhone 12. Just think about how you feel when you’re scrolling through your Instagram feed and you see all the other people who are just living their lives. You don’t need to be reminded of that all the time.

    You also don’t want to be experiencing FOMO (fear of missing out) when you see friends or family posting about an event you weren’t invited to. And, if you care about your mental health, you probably won’t want to stay up all night scrolling through the latest updates on your Facebook feed.

    Put your phone down and enjoy the world around you.

    Stop waking Siri.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Posted on Feb 3, 2018 Updated on May 22, 2021, 2:13 am CDT

    If you recently threw down $1,000 for the iPhone X, then you’ve come to the realization that it’s unlike any Apple smartphone before it. Gone is the beloved home button and with it, all the gestures you’ve grown accustomed to over the years. You might night even know how to turn the iPhone X off.

    So what should you do when you don’t need to use your device and want to save battery? Pressing the side button, like before, will idle the screen, but your iPhone X’s battery will continue to drain as it runs applications in the background. The only way is to turn the device off completely.

    Unlike iPhones before it, turning off the iPhone X requires a bit of know-how. Here’s a guide on how to turn off the iPhone X so you can stop accidentally waking Siri.

    How to turn off iPhone X

    1. Press and hold the side button and either volume button (up or down). Don’t be deterred if it doesn’t turn off immediately. You’ll need to hold down both buttons for about 1.5 seconds. Also, avoid a short press, which could trigger a screengrab.

    How to turn off an iphonePhillip Tracy

    2. Swipe the “slide to power off” slider to the right. Note: To turn the iPhone X back on, you only need to hold the side button, not the volume rocker.

    READ MORE:

    That’s it! Super simple once you’ve got it remember. Now you can turn off your iPhone X when you don’t need it and extend the life of its battery so Apple doesn’t slow it down with a software update.

    Phillip Tracy

    Phillip Tracy is a former technology staff writer at the Daily Dot. He’s an expert on smartphones, social media trends, and gadgets. He previously reported on IoT and telecom for RCR Wireless News and contributed to NewBay Media magazine. He now writes for Laptop magazine.

    How to turn off an iphone

      How to turn off an iphone

    Texas official stirs outrage after saying Uvalde investigation has kept him from his hugging his kids at night

    How to turn off an iphone

    ‘They believe nearly anything’: Satirical news site keeps duping Kyle Rittenhouse fans with updates about his ‘lawsuit’ against ‘The View’

    How to turn off an iphone

    Herschel Walker’s nonsense solution to mass shootings is having the government look ‘at men looking at women looking at social media’

    Wondering how you can turn off and turn on the iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Mini, iPhone 12 Pro, and iPhone 12 Pro Max models? Whether you’re new to the iPhone platform from Android, or just new to the iPhone 12 series, you might find it useful to know how to power on and power off the devices.

    Powering off your mobile devices has gone from a simple button press to holding multiple buttons over the span of a few years. Despite having a dedicated power button, powering off a modern-day smartphone isn’t really straightforward. If you tried pressing the power button on your new iPhone 12, you’d be quick to realize that it activates Siri. This is an issue with some Android devices like the Galaxy S20 as well, which activates Bixby upon long-pressing the power button. If you’re confused by this and you still haven’t figured it out, don’t fret and read on.

    By the way, aside from obvious power management purposes, turning the device off and back on is also considered a ‘soft restart’, which is a common troubleshooting technique that is not as harsh as a forced restart of the device. So, let’s see how this works.

    How to Turn iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Mini, iPhone 12 Pro Off & On

    The following procedure can be used to soft restart your new iPhone 12, regardless of what iOS version it’s running. Let’s take a look at the two basic steps you need to keep in mind.

      Press and hold the side (power) button and either the volume up or volume down button simultaneously until you see the “slide to power off” screen.

    Now, simply slide the power icon to the right and your iPhone 12 will start shutting down.

    In order to turn your iPhone 12 back on, just press and hold the side/power button. If it worked, you’ll see the Apple logo on the screen.

    There you go. Now you’ve learned how to effectively soft restart your new iPhone 12 by powering it off and turning it back on.

    This method might seem off to users who’re upgrading from an iPhone with Touch ID. On those devices, you could simply hold the power button to bring up the “Slide to Power Off” screen. Due to the lack of a dedicated home button, Apple had to use the power button for activating Siri instead.

    It’s worth noting that this soft restart method applies to all iPhone models with Face ID support. Therefore, if you or one of your family members use an iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, or iPhone 11 Pro Max, you can follow these steps to turn off your device. Or, if you use one of the new iPad Pro models with Face ID, you can use the same procedure to restart it.

    On the other hand, if you still also use an iPhone with a physical home button, like the new iPhone SE 2020 model, feel free to read more on how to power off and power on a device with Touch ID.

    Apart from soft restarts, there’s a force restart technique that you may be interested in. Most advanced users force restart their iPhones as a troubleshooting measure sometimes. It can often resolve software-related issues, unresponsiveness, and other buggy behavior. So, check this out to see how you can force restart your new iPhone 12, iPhone12 Mini, or iPhone 12 Pro.

    We hope you were able to familiarize yourself with the way newer Apple devices like the iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Mini, and iPhone 12 Pro handle powering off, powering on, and soft restarts. Do you have any particular thoughts or opinions about the iPhone 12 line-up? Share your personal experiences in the comments section down below.

    “Can I turn off Find My iPhone from my computer? I don’t want others to know my whereabouts, but can’t find any feasible solution to turn this feature off!”

    If you are a regular iPhone user, then you might already be familiar with the Find My iPhone service. It is a native feature, developed by Apple to make it easier for us to locate our linked iOS device. While the feature is certainly useful, it can tamper with your privacy at times or would not allow you to troubleshoot your device. To resolve these cases, a lot of users ask us how to turn off Find My iPhone from computer or the device itself. Head on as I’m going to provide a seamless solution to turn off Find My iPhone from Computer and iDevice in this post.

    How to turn off an iphone

    • Part 1: Why People Wish to Turn off Find My iPhone?
    • Part 2: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from iDevice
    • Part 3: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from Computer

    Part 1: Why People Wish to Turn off Find My iPhone?

    Before we learn how to turn off Find My iPhone from a computer or a device, it is important to know the reason for taking this drastic action. Ideally, you could be undergoing either of the following situations.

    • Privacy is one of the major concerns for every smart user these days and Find My iPhone directly tampers with that. Since it keeps a track of our whereabouts on a real-time basis, you might wish to turn it off. Otherwise, anyone with your iCloud account details can access your present or past locations.
    • Chances are that you might be reselling your phone to someone else. In this case, it is highly recommended to disable the Find My iPhone feature and further resetting the phone.
    • If your iOS device is malfunctioning and you wish to fix its firmware, then the Find My iPhone feature can act as a barrier. That is why it is always recommended to disable this option before fixing your iOS device’s firmware using any third-party tool.

    Part 2: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from iDevice

    Ideally, Find My Device is a location-based service that you can use on your iPhone, iPad, or Apple Watch. Once the service is linked to your device, you can go to your iCloud account and remotely view your device’s location. Needless to say, it is majorly used to locate a lost or stolen device and even ring it if you can’t find it. The good thing is that you can disable it whenever you want by visiting your device’s settings. All you got to do is follow these easy steps to turn off the Find My iPhone service from your device.

    Step 1. To start with, just unlock your iOS device and go to its Settings (by tapping on the gear icon). From here, just tap on your name to visit the Apple ID and iCloud settings.

    Step 2. Now, browse to its iCloud Settings and scroll a little to see the “Find My iPhone” feature.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 3. Simply tap on the Find My iPhone feature here to get more options. As you would open its screen, you can toggle off the Find My iPhone option from here.

    Step 4. Your device will display a pop-up, asking you to log-in to the linked iCloud account for authentication. Simply enter the correct iCloud account credentials and tap on the “Turn Off” button to disable Find My iPhone.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 5. Besides that, if you want to turn the feature off from your connected Apple Watch, then go to Apple Watch settings on your iPhone. From here, you can tap on the Unpair option and again log-in to the linked iCloud account to confirm your choice.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Part 3: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from Computer

    Apart from directly switching off the feature from your device, you can also learn how to turn off Find My iPhone from a computer as well. This is because the feature is linked to your iCloud account that you can access from any computer. Therefore, if you know the credentials for the linked iCloud account, then you can just disable Find My iPhone from any system. To learn how to turn off Find My iPhone with a computer (that can be running on any OS), the following steps can be taken.

    Step 1. Firstly, launch any reliable web browser like Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox on your computer and go to the official website of iCloud. Now, log-in to the same iCloud account that is already linked to your iDevice.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 2. After successfully logging-in to your account, you can view various features of iCloud like Photos, Calendar, and more. From here, just click on the “Find My iPhone” option.

    Step 3. This will open a map-like interface on the screen. Just click on the “All Devices” dropdown menu from the top to get a list of all the connected iDevices.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 4. Now, just select the iDevice that you wish to delete from your account here. It will automatically load the present location of the device with its snapshot on the right.

    Step 5. From all the provided options at the bottom of the device, click on the “Erase iPhone” button and confirm your choice.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Step 6. Furthermore, you can also select the “Remove from Account” option from here to make sure the device will no longer be linked to your Find My iPhone feature.

    How to turn off an iphone

    Bonus: Things to Remember + An Alternative

    Now when you know how to turn off Find My iPhone from a computer, you can easily meet your requirements. Though, you should know in advance that it can have its own risk. For instance, if your device gets lost or stolen, then you won’t be able to find it remotely. Also, it gives us an option to ring the device remotely (even if the phone is in the silent mode) that would no longer be accessible.

    Ideally, if you are concerned about your privacy, then you can temporarily disable the location services on your phone instead. For this, just go to your iPhone’s Settings > Privacy and turn off the Location Services. In this way, various apps can’t follow your location in the background and you can protect your privacy.

    How to turn off an iphone

    That’s a wrap, everyone! I’m sure that after following this step by step guide, you would be able to turn off Find My iPhone from computer. Besides that, I have also listed a clear tutorial on turning off the feature directly from your device as well. Needless to say, to turn off Find My iPhone, you need to know the credentials of the iCloud account beforehand. Go ahead and try these solutions and share this guide with others to teach them how to turn off Find My iPhone from computer or iDevice.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ghee is butterfat that has been separated from the other elements in whole butter. While some aspects of butter’s richness and flavor do remain, its character is significantly changed. It is widely used in Certain Indian dishes and is a versatile cooking fat with a range of applications that go beyond foods from the subcontinent. Below are some dos and don’ts that can help you to get the best results from cooking with ghee.

    Table of contents

    • Do use ghee for cooking at high temperatures.
    • Do store ghee correctly.
    • Do make ghee yourself.
    • Do use ghee in North Indian dishes.
    • Do use ghee in Hollandaise sauce and similar sauces.
    • Don’t avoid ghee if you are lactose intolerant.
    • Related posts

    Do use ghee for cooking at high temperatures.

    Ghee has a high smoke point. The smoke point is the temperature at which heated oil puts out smoke, and it’s different for each cooking fat. Ghee’s smoke point is high enough that it can be heated to well over 450 degrees Fahrenheit (232.22 °C) without smoking, which indicates that it is burning and generating toxic compounds. The high smoke point is why ghee is ideal for fast, hot stir-fries and rapid-cooking Indian breads like parathas.

    Do store ghee correctly.

    Because the milk solids and water have been removed from ghee, you can store it at room temperature. Unlike regular butter, ghee does not need refrigeration; however, you will have to store it correctly to benefit from this shelf stability.

    Moisture is one of the factors that will keep ghee from lasting as long as possible, so you will want to keep it in an airtight container so that humid conditions do not affect it.

    Do make ghee yourself.

    Ghee is available in some standard Western grocery stores and is a staple ingredient in stores that cater to Indian communities outside of India; however, commercial ghee can be quite expensive. The high cost is especially noticeable when you compare it to the cost of the raw material: butter.

    To cut costs, you can make ghee at home. The process of making ghee involves heating whole butter over low heat until the water evaporates and the milk solids precipitate out of it. At that point, you can remove the milk solids and store the pure ghee properly.

    Do use ghee in North Indian dishes.

    Ghee is a staple in North Indian dishes but is not as commonly used in South India, which prefers coconut oil. You will need it if you are planning to make parathas, paneer or any of the numerous other dishes popular in the northern part of the subcontinent. It is essential if you want to get the authentic flavor profile of this region’s cuisine.

    Do use ghee in Hollandaise sauce and similar sauces.

    Ghee is a key ingredient in Indian recipes but it is so much more versatile than that. You can use it in Western classics as well. It is great for making Hollandaise sauce and other traditional French sauces. Hollandaise sauce is less likely to curdle if you replace the whole butter in the traditional recipe with ghee. If you are following the Paleo or Whole30 diets, this will ensure that the sauces remain compliant.

    Don’t avoid ghee if you are lactose intolerant.

    While you might be tempted to stay away from it because ghee is often described as a type of clarified butter, remember that the milk solids have been removed from it. The solids are where the lactose is contained so properly-made ghee should be safe for people with lactose intolerance to consume.

    Related posts

    • Ghee: India’s Clarified Butter
    • Ghee Vs. Olive Oil: SPICEography Showdown
    • Butter Vs. Ghee: SPICEography Showdown
    • What’s A Good Ghee Substitute?
    • What’s A Good Butter Substitute?

    Spicy food fan?

    Visit our sister site PepperScale. Discover 750+ spicy recipes and hundreds of pepper profiles, comparisons, cooking tips + more.

    Huge demand has led to compromises on quality. Here’s why we need to go back to making ghee the way it was first made! #Lifestyle #EatHealthy

    N othing takes an Indian meal to the next level like a spoonful of ghee. Our diverse cuisines have always had that one fragrant dollop in common. It’s healthy, tasty and can be used to enhance the taste of everything. Thus, it makes it important for us to check how this clarified butter is made.

    What is ghee made of?

    The traditional method of making ghee (bilona) is quite elaborate. Cow’s milk is boiled and cooled. Then a spoonful of curd is added to this milk and kept at room temperature overnight. The curd is then churned to extract butter from it. This butter is then boiled so that the water evaporates leaving behind pure ghee.

    As you can see, the process is quite slow and traditionally, all of this was made at homes without any use of machines. When ghee-making became a major revenue churner for the dairy industry, things changed. Very few brands, like The Nature’s Way (TNW), based in Gujarat, retain the age-old practices of hand-churning ghee.

    The commercial production of ghee:

    Ghee is a half a billion-dollar industry in India which witnessed a growth of 11.1 per cent between 2011-18. Clearly, the demand for our favourite dairy product is going to diminish anytime soon. But this growth also means that millions of people now depend on commercial manufacturers of ghee. Ghee is not made at home any more, especially in urban areas; it is an addition to the monthly grocery list.

    The traditional methods of setting curd in earthen pots, churning butter in wooden vessels to make ghee are lost. To fulfil these ever-expanding demand, mega-companies use automated machines that churn out hundreds of kilograms of ghee in a few minutes. The production processes run throughout the day, filling thousands of plastic bottles with the mass-produced ghee.

    Some popular brands are also guilty of making it from malai or cream obtained from milk instead of curd. This type is faster to make and gives better milk to ghee ratio as compared to the bilona variety. But at the same time, it cannot be digested easily.

    Where do we get bilona ghee?

    As consumers, we must know what we are eating- especially when it comes to frequently-used products like ghee. Even in these technologically advanced times, TNW relies on a small staff that hand makes ghee and uses wooden and stainless steel vessels.

    Pintu Suvagiya, an employee at the organisation explains to The Better India, “We use cow milk, which is rich in the A2 protein. We have set the process in such a way that the demand does not lead to any form of contamination. For instance, ghee is made from butter only between 4-6 AM because the cool climate and pre-dawn time are perfect for this process. If the demand is for, say, 1 kg of ghee, we start with 20-25 litres of milk. If the demand is half of that, we take only 10-15 litres of milk. Our vessels are earthen and our team small so we give you the ghee that feels home-made.”

    If health, raw materials and intricate details in processes are factors of concern to you, TNW checks all the boxes.

    In order to compete and sustain in the market, manufacturers compromise on the quality of ingredients and even the procedures, to reduce costs. Don’t let the price tags fool you. Buy what is truly authentic.

    In this Article

    • Nutrition Information
    • Potential Health Benefits of Ghee
    • Potential Risks of Ghee
    • Healthier Alternatives

    Ghee is a variation of clarified butter that is popular in the culinary traditions of the Middle East and India. It is made from cow milk butter, which is treated with low heat until the water evaporates, leaving behind milk solids. The solids are skimmed off or strained if needed. What remains is only clarified liquid fat known as ghee. Because ghee is treated with low heat, usually under 100 degrees, it retains more nutrients than standard clarified butter.В

    Ghee is used in tandem with herbal medication as a part of Ayurveda, a centuries-old form of alternative medicine practiced in India. Beyond its believed spiritual and medicinal properties, ghee has recently gained traction as a healthier alternative to standard butter. However, while there is an increase in scientific studies confirming its health benefits, more research is needed.

    Nutrition Information

    One teaspoon of ghee contains:В

    • Calories: 42
    • Protein: 0 grams
    • Fat: 5 grams
    • Carbohydrates: 0 grams
    • Fiber: 0 grams
    • Sugar: 0 grams

    Ghee is a good source of:В

    Ghee is also an excellent source of Vitamin E. Studies have shown that Vitamin E has significant antioxidant properties. Antioxidants like Vitamin E have been linked to lowering the risk of cancer, arthritis, and cataracts. Vitamin E can also help reduce the risk of heart disease.В

    Potential Health Benefits of Ghee

    Ghee is a rich source of vitamins, antioxidants, and healthy fats. While fat should be consumed in moderation, studies show that eating fatty foods such as ghee can help the body absorb some essential vitamins and minerals. Cooking healthy foods and vegetables with ghee may help you absorb more nutrients.

    Research has found several potential health benefits to consuming ghee:В

    In alternative Ayurvedic medicine, ghee has been used topically to treat burns and swelling. While this is not scientifically proven, ghee does contain butyrate, a fatty acid that has known anti-inflammatory properties. Studies show that the butyrate present in ghee can soothe inflammation within the body.

    Combat Obesity

    Ghee is a significant source of conjugated linoleic acid, or CLA. Studies show that CLA may help combat obesity. Research indicates that the CLA found in ghee may help reduce excessive weight gain. It may also help reduce the mass of body fat in some people.В

    Support Heart Health

    Though ghee is rich in fat, it contains high concentrations of monounsaturated Omega-3s. These healthful fatty acids support a healthy heart and cardiovascular system. Studies show that using ghee as a part of a balanced diet can help reduce unhealthy cholesterol levels.

    Healthy Alternative for Lactose Products

    Ghee is created by removing milk solids. Because of this, it contains only trace amounts of lactose and casein, which are milk sugars and proteins. Ghee is a good source of fat for people who are lactose intolerant or have dairy allergies.В

    Potential Risks of Ghee

    Because ghee is so rich in fat, you should consume it in moderation as a part of a balanced diet. Consult with your doctor when considering the best dietary choices for you. Keep the following in mind before adding ghee to your diet:

    Heart Disease

    While ghee can help lower the risk of heart disease in moderation, too much saturated fat can elevate the risk of heart disease. People with other risk factors for heart disease should exercise caution when introducing ghee into their diet.В

    Weight Gain

    Though the CLA in ghee has been shown to reduce weight gain in some people, it is also a calorie-dense and fat-rich food. Despite its health benefits, consuming too much ghee can lead to increased weight gain and elevate the risk of obesity.В

    Healthier Alternatives

    AYU: An International Quarterly Journal of Research in Ayurved: “The effect of ghee (clarified butter) on serum lipid levels and microsomal lipid peroxidation.”

    ESHA Research, Inc., Salem, Oregon: “Ghee.”

    The FASEB Journal:“Anti-inflammatory effects of sodium butyrate on human monocytes: potent inhibition of IL-12 and up-regulation of IL-10 production.”

    International Journal of Obesity:“The role of conjugated linoleic acid in reducing body fat and preventing holiday weight gain.”

    Journal of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics: “Dietary fat increases vitamin D-3 absorption.”

    Journal of Complementary and Integrative Medicine:“Beneficial effect of ghee consumption over mustard oil on lipid profile: A study in North Indian adult population.”

    Journal of the Indian Medical Association: “Association of dietary ghee intake with coronary heart disease and risk factor prevalence in rural makes.”

    Journal of Nutrition & Intermediary Metabolism: “Considerations for development of lactose-free food.”

    Journal of Pakistan Medical Association: “Pragmatic selection of cooking oils.”

    Lipids in Health and Disease: “High conjugated linoleic acid enriched ghee (clarified butter) increases the antioxidant and antiatherogenic potency in female Wistar rats.”

    National Institutes of Health: “Omega-3 Fatty Acids.”

    Nutrition Journal: “A healthy approach to dietary fats: understanding the science and taking action to reduce consumer confusion.”

    Open Medicine Journal: “Standardization of Dhatryadi Ghrita: A Herbal Ghee Based Ayurvedic Medicinal Preparation.”

    Sultan Qaboos University Medical Journal: “The Role of Vitamin E in Human Health and Some Diseases.”

    World Health Journal: “View Point: Saturated Fatty Acid and Sugar: How Much Is Too Much for Health? A Scientific Statement of the International College of Nutrition.”

    Buying, Using, and Recipes

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How to use ghee in cooking

    The Spruce / Lindsay Kreighbaum

    Ghee (pronounced GEE with a hard G), the Hindi word for “fat,” can be used as a synonym for clarified butter, with one difference. Unlike in the French technique, ghee traditionally simmers for a while, browning the milk solids and adding a slightly nutty flavor to the finished product. It’s widely used in Indian cuisine and ayurvedic traditions, but it deserves a place in any modern American kitchen.

    What Is Ghee?

    Like clarified butter, ghee results from separating the milk solids and the butterfat in processed butter while cooking out the water. In the classic French style, the pure butterfat gets strained immediately and used in its pale golden state; the Indian method takes the process a step further, essentially caramelizing the milk solids before straining the butterfat to give the resulting ghee a nutty flavor and a deeper color.

    How to Use Ghee

    Ghee performs better than butter in high-heat cooking since it has a smoke point of 450 F, compared to 350 F for ordinary butter. The fat most commonly used in Indian cooking, ghee can work as the butter or oil in most recipes, no matter the origin. Ghee can be swapped for vegetable oil or coconut oil in baked goods or used for sautéing and deep-frying. Or simply melt it and spread it on bread for a snack, pour it over popcorn, or drizzle it on vegetables before serving.

    What Does It Taste Like?

    Ghee tastes like butter but with a slightly roasted, nutty background note. Like butter, commercial brands of ghee differ in flavor depending on the quality of the milk used to produce it. Because the milk solids have been removed, ghee does not have the creamy mouthfeel of butter. Ghee remains soft at room temperature but turns firm and granular in the refrigerator.

    Ghee Recipes

    You can purchase packaged ghee, but it’s also quite easy to make at home. As butter melts, it separates into three distinct layers. At medium heat, this should take just a few minutes, so keep a careful watch. The top layer foams and the milk solids drop to the bottom. The clarified butter (ghee) remains in the middle. For best results, start with high-quality unsalted butter produced from the milk of grass-fed cows.

    • Ghee: Clarified Butter
    • Moist Banana Bread With Ghee
    • Homemade Hollandaise Sauce

    Where to Buy Ghee

    If you prefer to purchase ghee, you can find it at most natural-foods stores and health-food co-ops, plus nearly any mainstream grocery store. Look for it with the cooking oils and shortening or in a dedicated Indian foods section; shelf-stable ghee does not need to be refrigerated.

    Storage

    With a longer shelf life than ordinary butter, ghee, when stored in an airtight container, can also be kept at room temperature for extended periods. Keep it in a cool, dark, and dry cabinet. Heat and liquid, at the wrong time, can cause ghee to oxidize or spoil. Oxidation turns it an off shade of brown; spoiled ghee has a sour smell. In either case, the ghee is no longer safe to use and should be discarded.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Varieties

    Basic ghee should contain no ingredients other than unsalted sweet cream butter. However, you may find cultured ghee, which is made from fermented cream and tastes a bit more tangy, like yogurt, or spiced ghee, which includes additional flavor from garlic or chilies or herb blends.

    Both internally and externally, ghee boasts a list of many health benefits. From deeply hydrated, glowing skin to reducing inflammation, ghee promotes better gut health, supports digestion by reducing gas, bloating, and indigestion and aids in the absorption of vitamins and nutrients… The list could go on and on but let’s talk about how to use ghee to access these benefits.

    How to use ghee

    How to use ghee in the kitchen

    Ghee has a high heat flash point of up to 485 degrees which makes it a smart choice for baking, sauteing, frying or cooking anything at a high temp. Ghee is one of the few oils that you can use on the grill without easily burning. However, a little goes a long way when it comes to how to use ghee. Even though it is a healthy fat you still want to manage your fat intake depending on your body type and individual needs. В As ghee melts, it spreads efficiently, which allows you to use less than you think you need. В For baking, remember that ghee is an oil, it is no longer butter, so use half the amount of ghee if replacing butter in a recipe. For example, if a recipe calls for 4 tbsp of butter, use 2tbsp of ghee.

    Farmtrue ghee is shelf stable (doesn’t need to be refrigerated) and is also certified lactose and casein free, making it a great choice for those that are lactose intolerant. Ghee can be used anywhere you might traditionally use olive oil or butter. Cook your eggs with ghee, saute veggies, spread on toast to help break down that hard to digest gluten, add a teaspoon to your coffee or tea to balance acidity and to protect your gut lining.  You can even put ghee on your skin to deeply hydrate or relieve sunburn!  New to Ghee? Farmtrue has three flavors to experiment with: traditional (good all around), garlic scape (great for seafood and veggies) and vanilla maple chai (great for baking, sweet potatoes, squash, oatmeal, coffee and tea). You can’t go wrong with any choice!

    Choosing the right ghee

    Not all ghee is created equal! It’s important to be mindful of the source of your butter. Farmtrue uses USDA certified organic grass-fed butter from humanely raised cows here in the US to make all of their ghee based products. You can feel great about supporting US dairy farms as well as knowing that no animals are mistreated and know that you are buying a mindfully sourced product. And don’t forget one of the most important parts: It tastes delicious! Ghee made from free ranging, pasture raised cows enjoying a diet of greens tastes much sweeter!

    Now that you’re a ghee expert, let us know your favorite ways to use ghee. We love to see your recipes!

    At Farmtrue we’re inspired to eat, live, and act with more care.

    What is ghee, and what are the uses for it?

    By: Amy Jackson, Editor, RecipeLion.com

    How to use ghee in cooking

    By: Amy Jackson, Editor, RecipeLion.com

    If you’re like most Americans, you may have never even heard the word “ghee” before, let alone know anything about the uses for ghee. You may know it as the odd, chunky-looking yellow material you can find in jars in the Indian aisle of your local supermarket, or maybe you’ve heard mentions of using ghee in your coffee or using ghee instead of butter. So what else is there to know about ghee?

    As it turns out, there are a number of advantages of ghee over butter, and even if you’re not a fan of Indian cuisine, you can apply these to your own cooking and see a huge difference. You can even make ghee at home!

    This is our comprehensive cooking guide on all things ghee. Read on to learn how to use ghee instead of butter, how to make ghee, and to find out about ghee vs. butter. It may just turn out that ghee is the right choice for you and your family.

    What Is Ghee?

    Ghee is an Indian-style clarified butter. So that may raise the question, what is clarified butter?

    When unsalted butter is gently boiled, the result is twofold: first, there is the golden liquid we know as melted butter, but second, there are milk solids which drift to the bottom of the pan. The foam on the surface of the liquid and the milk solids are removed, leaving only the golden liquid, which can be refrigerated or frozen. This is clarified butter.

    Usually the cooking process stops after the milk solids have separated from the melted butter, but ghee is boiled until all the moisture has evaporated and the mixture has browned. The resulting ghee butter can be refrigerated for 6 months or frozen for up to a year.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ghee vs. Butter

    What is the difference between ghee and butter? First of all, the extra boiling that ghee goes through alters the taste slightly. While regular butter has a far bolder flavor, ghee boasts a browned, nutty aroma and flavor.

    However, the biggest ghee advantage when compared to butter is that ghee has a higher smoke point. One of the reasons why olive oil is used for oven roasting instead of normal butter is that normal butter burns much more quickly, because it has a smoke point of 350 degrees Fahrenheit. However, ghee has a smoke point of 375 degrees Fahrenheit. This makes it a much sturdier butter, ideal for sauteeing and frying.

    Additionally, another ghee advantage is that ghee is much easier to digest for lactose-sensitive individuals. Because so much of the milk solids have been skimmed out or boiled away, it is much kinder to the stomachs of people with lactose intolerances.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Enjoy this copycat Texas Roadhouse recipe on any type of bread you’d like. there’s no wrong way to eat this delicious buttery concoction! Homemade Texas Roadhouse Butter

    How to Use Ghee

    This is the important question! So you’ve picked up a big, yummy jar of ghee from the store — now what do you do with it? There are many incredible uses for ghee, but a couple of them include:

    1. Using it as your primary fat for sauteeing
    2. Spreading it on toast, bagels, and muffins
    3. Melting it over steamed vegetables
    4. Substituting it for cooking oil in any recipe
    5. Substituting it for coconut oil or palm oil in baking
    6. Drizzling it over vegetables before roasting or grilling
    7. Putting a teaspoon in your coffee for a creamy, smooth finish

    How to use ghee in cooking

    This Seasoned Butter Spread recipe is great for all your summer grilling and roasting needs. Spread it on corn, steaks, bread and more!

    How to Make Ghee

    Lastly, it’s much easier to learn how to make ghee at home that you would have ever thought! All that you need to make this creamy, rich “liquid gold” is 30 minutes and 1 pound of unsalted butter.

    In a small and sturdy saucepan, melt your unsalted butter over medium-high heat. Once the butter has come to a robust boil, turn the heat down to medium-low and skim off the white foam whenever it arises (you may have to tip the pan.) Continue this process until only clear, golden liquid is left.

    Voila! Put the ghee in a jar and chill it. Now you have your own homemade ghee!

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Looking to expand your cooking fat horizons? Super versatile and uniquely flavored ghee is a great place to start.

    What is ghee?

    Ghee is a clarified butter that has been simmered and strained to remove all water and milk solids. Thanks to the slow and low cooking process, the milk solids have a chance to brown, imparting a nutty, slightly caramelized flavor to the ghee. Once the milk solids are strained, the ghee is shelf stable and has a much higher smoke point than typical butter.

    Where is ghee used?

    Ghee is most commonly used in dishes from the Indian subcontinent and the Middle East, and has been utilized in Ayurvedic practices for thousands of years. Thanks to the clarification process, it’s virtually lactose and casein-free, making it a popular choice in recent years among those following the paleo diet.

    How do I use ghee?

    Thanks to its high smoke point, ghee is incredibly versatile. (Think vegetable oil, but with way better flavor.) You can use it to sauté, roast, and even fry! Try swapping it in for olive oil while roasting vegetables, or use it to cook your morning omelet. Bloom your spices in it. And if you don’t feel like improvising, try it out in June’s aromatic Curry Rice.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How do I store ghee?

    Keep ghee sealed in an airtight container in a cool, dark part of your pantry. Once opened, it will keep at least 3 months, and even longer in a particularly cool spot. (You can also store your ghee in the fridge to maintain freshness.) Always use a clean utensil when scooping ghee from your container to avoid contamination. To store ghee for long periods of time, throw it in the freezer! It’ll keep more than a year there — just make sure to thaw it completely before using.

    Can I make ghee at home?

    You can! Making ghee at home is a fairly simple process: melt butter, skim the milk solids that float to the top, and continue to simmer until any remaining milk solids on the bottom of the pan darken and begin to smell nutty. After one more strain, you’ve got ghee!

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ghee. You may have heard people ostentatiously discussing its merits in your local Whole Foods store, or perhaps seen it scrawled across the pages of various alternative health or paleo-style blogs. Until now, you’ve brushed it aside as just another fad, but it just keeps coming back into your life again and again… perhaps it’s time to find out what the heck it actually is?

    Simply put, ghee is clarified butter. The origins of ghee can be traced back to Indian cuisine, where it is used to add a rich, unique flavor to curries and fry-ups. Ghee is made by slowly simmering then straining butter, a process which removes the milk proteins, sugars and water. The result is a cooking oil substitute which has an amazingly sweet, slightly smoky flavor and which lasts a whole lot longer than regular butter. While ghee may have been born in India, it’s quickly taking the Western world by storm.

    Now that you know what ghee is, you’re probably wondering what all the fuss is about (aside from it’s delicious flavor, of course). Keep reading to find out all the wonderful cooking and health benefits it provides, along with a number of ways to use it.

    Smoke point

    If you’ve read our comprehensive guide to cooking oils , you’re probably well-versed with the importance of knowing a cooking oil’s smoke point. The smoke point of an oil or fat is the temperature at which it begins to produce smoke when heat is applied. When this temperature is reached, the fat or oil begins to break down and form a nasty compound called acrolein. Acrolein is found in cigarette smoke and a range of other unsavory things, and can significantly increase your risk of developing cancer . For this reason, you really want to avoid pushing an oil past its smoke point.

    While butter has one of the lowest smoke points out of all the cooking oils/fats, ghee has the second highest smoke point, clocking in at an impressive 480 degrees Fahrenheit. This means you can use ghee for a wide range of cooking applications, including high-heat cooking such as frying and grilling, without having to worry too much about breathing in any carcinogenic compounds. This makes it one of the best cooking oils available.

    Ghee is also a saturated fat , which makes it really stable and unlikely to break down under heat. It is also relatively resistant to oxidation, the process by which an oil becomes rancid .

    Lactose and casein intolerance

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Because the process of clarifying the butter removes the sugars and milk proteins from the butter, ghee is a much safer dairy alternative for those who are intolerant to casein or lactose. Considering the symptoms of either of these allergies can result in anything from swelling, hives, congestion, bloating, nausea, vomiting, and cramps, this is definitely a big thumbs-up for ghee!

    Fat-soluble vitamins

    Butter is a personal favorite of mine for cooking, not only because it makes anything it touches taste amazing, but also because it’s one of the most nutrient-dense foods on the planet. While butter is usually safe for most people, it isn’t always, meaning those who have the above-mentioned intolerances would typically steer clear of it. This means they’re missing out on all those nutrients, however.

    The beauty of ghee is that it contains all of the nutrient power of butter, but without the risk of an adverse reaction to other dairy products. Like butter, ghee contains large amounts of fat-soluble vitamins, including vitamins A, D and E. Vitamin A plays an important role in maintaining good vision, healthy bones, supple skin and strong immunity. Vitamin D is essential for bone health and neurological function, and vitamin E helps to repair damaged skin, balance hormones and balance cholesterol.

    In addition to this vitamin trifecta of awesomeness is vitamin K2. Despite its importance, many people are lacking in this vitamin, setting them up for a greater risk of gastrointestinal bleeding, heavy menstrual bleeding, blood in the urine and easier bruising. Along with dark leafy greens, ghee is one of the best sources for this essential nutrient. Making ghee a regular part of your diet, therefore, is a positive move for your health.

    Conjugated linoleic acid (CLA)

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Better known as CLA, ghee which is sourced from grass-fed cows has an impressive concentration of this acid. CLA has a wide range of health benefits, including the reduction of tumors and cancers of the breast, colon, lung, skin and stomach, alleviation of asthma, reduction in blood pressure, lowering cholesterol and osteoporosis prevention. Studies also suggest that an increase in CLA is associated with lowered risk of cardiovascular disease.

    Grass-fed ghee contains more than three times the amount of CLA than grain-fed ghee, so it’s important to know your sources.

    Ghee contains significant amounts of butyrate, a short-chain fatty acid which acts as a detoxifier, improves insulin sensitivity , reduces the symptoms of IBS, supports a healthy colon and even fights against Crohn’s disease. Not only that, it is thought that the butyric acid in ghee can improve digestion by stimulating conversion of fiber and helping to break down fats and toxins.

    How to use ghee

    Ghee is an amazingly versatile cooking oil, and can be used for sautéing, roasting, stir-frying, grilling or any method which requires high-heat cooking. That doesn’t mean you should only use it for high-heat applications, however. I find it makes an excellent addition to soups and stews, makes an amazingly flavorful medium to fry my pastured eggs in at breakfast, and can even be used in certain baking recipes. Just keep in mind that it becomes solid below room temperature, so if you’re planning on using it all up within a few weeks, it’s easier to store it in a warmish spot outside of the refrigerator.

    Ghee butter is considered a delicacy in certain parts of the world. A leftover byproduct of making ghee is milk solids. Which can be used to flavor many other foods.

    I came up with 14 ideas on what to use the milk solids with. First here is a quick explanation of what these leftovers actually are.

    Ghee is a butter that has been clarified. Clarified butter is when the fats and milk solids (lactose) is separated. This is done by melting the butter and then separating the two.

    What’s leftover is pure liquefied butter fats and little lactose. Doing this creates a butter that is shelf stable and lasts a long time.

    The greatest benefit and reason to make ghee, is that ghee butter has a higher smoke point than regular butter. Meaning it doesn’t burn as quickly.

    These milk solids are also known as ghee residue or ghee leftover. They consist of lactose and whey proteins. Be prepared to use the residue fairly quickly, as it doesn’t keep for long.

    Milk solids can be placed in a jar for storage. Then keep the jar in a refrigerator to help it last longer.

    Most of the time it is best to use the milk solids right away.

    How To Use Milk Solids From Ghee

    A lot of different foods can be topped or cooked with the milk solids. Many of the recipes are authentic Indian recipes, as ghee is much more popular there.

    Ghee has been a staple food in India for hundreds of years. Due to its shelf life and stability.

    Ghee is very easy to make at home, since it only involves heating and melting butter. Then separating off the milk solids that remain. These solids usually are browned in the heating process.

    You do not want to over heat the butter and let the milk solids start to burn. As it will ruin the flavor of the butter.

    Here is the list of 14 things to do with milk solids from ghee:

    1. Make Laddu (Indian Sweet Balls)

    Laddu also spelled laddoo is a Indian dish that is like a dessert. This sweet treat is easy to make and a great way to use milk solids. All you need to add is sugar and rice flour along with milk solids.

    You can replace sugar with Jaggery powder. Jaggery is a natural sweetener used traditionally in India. In English jaggery is known as palm sugar.

    2. Spread On Toast/Breads

    Ghee residue is ready to be eaten with most breads. You can simply spread it onto any toast. Eat it on sourdoughs or naan flat breads.

    3. Make bread Dough

    Not only can you eat it on already baked breads. You can use ghee residue as apart of a dough mix. Any type of bread with work and it should give it a nutty flavor, also can soften the overall bread.

    Here is two popular types of Indian breads that can be made with ghee residue. Both are considered flat breads.

    • Roti
    • Paratha

    These breads if already made can be eaten with the milk solids. Traditionally the breads are coated with sugar and the ghee residue (milk solids) and eaten straight.

    4. Make Milk Cake

    You can use the milk residue to make a authentic Indian dessert. Named milk cake or also known as Kalakand.

    This is a very simple recipe for a cake like dessert. You end up with a cake like food that is usually cut into squares.

    The ingredients needed are milk, milk powder and cardamom powder (spice). Optional ingredients include chopped almonds, pistachios, cashews.

    The cardamom powder is also optional but can be used for additional flavor.

    Even though it is called milk cake, there is no baking involved. You simply refrigerate the ingredients. Here is the easiest way to make traditional milk cake.

    Milk Cake Instructions:

    1. Take the milk solids (leftover ghee residue)
    2. Combine in a mixing bowl with sugar, milk powder and any additional spices.
    3. Add mixture onto a greased cooking sheet (use the ghee to grease the pan).
    4. Flatten the mix in the cooking sheet with a spatula.
    5. Place in refrigerator for up to 30 minutes.
    6. Remove from fridge and cut into squares.
    7. Garnish with dried fruits (almonds, pistachios, cashews).

    5. Bake with Cookies

    You can add in the milk solids with your next batch of cookies. Simply mix in with the butter you are using for the cookies. Adds a nutty and sweet flavor.

    6. Sprinkle On Popcorn

    Ghee butter alone can be added onto popcorn like regular butter. You can also use the milk solids (ghee residue) for popcorn.

    Just sprinkle it on top of a bowl of popcorn for a added nutty flavor.

    7. Sprinkle On Ice Cream

    As well with popcorn the next time you have a bowl of ice cream. Sprinkle the milk solids on top. Will go along with other toppings, such as nuts or berries.

    8. Stir Into Coffee

    Ghee residue can be added into a cup a coffee. Best if you have one ready after you have made your ghee.

    Just stir in the solids with your next cup of coffee and add a nutty flavor.

    Ghee butter can be used a creamer in coffees as well.

    9. Eat With Sugar

    Simply add in some sugar and you can eat it with a spoon. Best if you have plenty of residue leftover. Powdered or granulated sugar will work.

    10. Use With Vegetables

    Steamed or grilled vegetables are prime for adding in some of those milk solids. Ghee residue should be dusted on top or added into a oil over top of vegetables.

    Also mashed potatoes can be used as well, just toss a bit of the milk solids on top of the potatoes after cooking.

    11. Use with Rice

    The milk solids are like a brown butter, so you can put them into rice as well. Add in some salt and make sure the solids have been browned properly.

    They should be done after making the ghee once the solids are light brown in color.

    12. Add To A Salad

    You can spread the solids on top of a salad for added flavor.

    13. Use With Sauce

    If you are making a homemade sauce or marinade. You can add these solids into the mix.

    14. Season Meats

    Grilled chicken or steak can be topped with the milk solids after cooking.

    Why Are These Milk Solids Saved?

    The reason these milk solids are delicious is because they are caramelized. The hard part is to tell how much milk solids you will get from making a batch of ghee.

    The amount of ghee residue leftover varies from butter to butter. Restaurants making lots of ghee will have a greater amount leftover. They find unique ways to use these on different foods.

    When making it at home you may not end up with very much. Still most of the recipes can be made with less than a cup of milk solid residue.

    Hope you enjoyed this list of things to do with ghee residue. If you have any other ideas feel free to leave them in the comments below.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    The world is talking about using ghee instead of butter because ghee is a healthier choice. But how do you incorporate ghee in your baking? The delicious fluffy cakes and those divine tasting casseroles need their share of fat to taste the way they do. Can you even imagine replacing the butter with ghee in these dishes? It is not as difficult as it sounds. Barring a few recipes, ghee is an excellent substitute for butter in baking. 100% pure organic grass fed desi cow ghee is a healthier choice and is suitable for most lactose intolerant people as well. What’s more? Desi ghee is compliant with Keto and Whole30 which makes it the perfect fat for your baking adventures.

    Can I substitute Ghee for Butter in baking?

    Yes, you can. In fact, ghee is a much better option than butter due to the healthy vitamins and fats it contains. For baking purposes like greasing the cake tin or mixing in the batter, ghee will be an excellent replacement. If you are looking at using ghee in baking lasagnas or any type of savory casseroles, ghee is a perfect and a healthier replacement to butter.

    Although, ghee has a much nuttier flavour than butter. This would mean that in some of the baking techniques, ghee might not really work. Especially, where the nutty strong taste and aroma is not required like in frosting. Also, if you need the fat to hold together, ghee might not be a good option like in making the dough for croissants. Ghee has a very low melting point as against its high smoking point. Hence, it can melt easily.

    Can we use ghee in place of butter for a cake?

    You can use the ghee in the cake batter instead of butter and also for greasing the baking tin. When you make the batter of the cake, simply replace the butter with ghee in the same quantity. Pure ghee has a low melting point which makes it very easy to blend in with the other ingredients in a cake like eggs, flour and sugar. (If you are looking at hard butter for a recipe, ghee is not advisable). You can even use the ghee exactly like butter to grease the baking tray or tin. Even if the quantity of ghee required to grease the pan is very less, it is always a better choice. You see, ghee is considered a better option due to the health benefits of consuming ghee.

    Can you use ghee in all baking recipes?

    In most recipes, yes. You can easily replace butter with ghee by simply substituting the later in equal proportions. Honestly, ghee is a much better option when it comes to frying or sauteing anything. Also, ghee is unsalted and hence is perfectly suitable for sweet dishes. The nutty flavour and aroma makes any savoury dish taste divine. It is recommended to replace butter with ghee in warm and hot dishes. Firstly, ghee adds that extra flavour if used as an add-on, and it is extremely beneficial if used for cooking due to its high melting point.

    How to substitute ghee for butter in baking?

    Just replace the butter with ghee in the same quantity in your dishes. If you are using the ghee for baking a cake, simply replace the butter with ghee in the batter and for greasing the tin. If you are using it to make a casserole or any savoury dish like pasta or a quiche, again just replace the butter with ghee in the cooking process.

    Where can I buy pure Ghee?

    To buy 100% pure Ghee made using the traditional Vedic process, click here

    What is pure Ghee Price?

    Pure Ghee starts at Rs. 549/- Click here to check the prices for all our products.

    What it is: Regular butter contains milk fat, milk solids, and water. Ghee is just the milk fat (clarified butter), with the water and milk solids removed. Clarified butter is made in the French tradition, too, but the crucial difference is that ghee is simmered for a while, to brown the milk solids before they are strained out, which leaves behind a wonderful toasty caramelized flavor. French clarified butter doesn’t get a prolonged simmer so it tastes more neutral.

    To make it: In her seminal book, Classic Indian Cooking, Julie Sahni makes ghee like this: First, melt about a pound of butter over low heat. Once the butter is melted, increase the heat to medium. The butter will foam as the moisture evaporates. You don’t need to stir at this point. The foam will subside after about 10 minutes, when all the water has evaporated. Soon after, a second foam will form on top of the ghee: Now it’s almost done and should be watched closely. You’ll see the milk solids have separated from the golden fat, and many of them have sunk to the bottom—watch the milk solids carefully, and stir to make sure they don’t burn. The ghee is done when the milk solids are a nice golden brown and smell toasted. Let the ghee cool slightly before straining it through cheesecloth to remove the milk solids. The resulting ghee can be kept in an airtight container for one month or in the fridge for four months.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Eating healthy should still be delicious.

    Where it comes from: Ghee is very important in Indian cuisine. It is used not only in cooking, but also in Hindu rituals and Ayurvedic medicine. In his book, On Food and Cooking, Harold McGee says that ghee was probably born of necessity: Butter spoils quickly in the heat, while ghee keeps for a long time and is shelf-stable.

    How to use it: Because ghee is pure fat, it has a much higher smoke point than butter (milk solids burn at a relatively low temperature). That means you can use it for high-heat sautéing or frying, much as you would canola or peanut oil. You can certainly use it in any Indian recipe, but its nutty flavor works well in many contexts. It makes simple sautéed vegetables incredibly delicious.

    Table of Contents

    Ghee Is Incredibly Versatile. Along with its buttery taste, ghee has a distinct roasted, nutty, fragrance. It’s an easy, tasty swap for butter or olive oil in the sauté pan; try ghee for frying eggs and bread, tart rye crepes, or zucchini fritters.

    Is ghee better than cooking oil?

    Objectively, yes, ghee is healthy. Since ghee is primarily made up of saturated fat, it’s more stable and less easily oxidized during cooking, making it a superior choice to almost all vegetable oils. (If you’re worried about saturated fat’s supposed link to heart disease, head here for more on the diet-heart myth.)Mar 31, 2021.

    Can I use ghee for cooking?

    Ghee also has a much higher smoke point than regular butter — 485 degrees Fahrenheit — which makes it ideal for high-heat cooking methods like sautéing, stir-frying, and deep-frying. Additionally, ghee is shelf-stable and can be safely stored at room temperature for a long period of time.

    What are the disadvantages of ghee?

    The main disadvantage of ghee is consuming unnecessary amount of ghee so it rapidly increase the weight of the body which creates several diseases. It increases the cholesterol due to the obesity. Ghee is also harmful for pregnant ladies due to increases in the weight.

    Is it healthier to cook with ghee?

    There’s not much hard evidence to suggest that ghee is healthier than other forms of butter. Coleman says that ghee, which does not include milk solids, may be easier to digest for adults who are lactose intolerant. Ghee also has a higher smoke point than plain butter, which may make it healthier for cooking, she says.

    Does ghee taste like butter?

    How does it taste? Ghee tends to be one of those hyperbole-inducing foods, like macarons and gelato, that people describe quite dramatically as being “heavenly” or the “best thing ever.” In actuality, ghee tastes like a cleaner, richer, more decadent version of butter itself – more buttery butter, if you will.

    Is ghee good for frying?

    Animal fats, such as lard, tallow, ghee, and fat drippings, can be excellent choices for deep frying. Benefits include: the flavor and crispness they add to food. their ability to resist damage when fried.

    When should you use ghee?

    Thanks to its high smoke point, ghee is incredibly versatile. (Think vegetable oil, but with way better flavor.) You can use it to sauté, roast, and even fry! Try swapping it in for olive oil while roasting vegetables, or use it to cook your morning omelet.

    Does ghee increase belly fat?

    When you have reached your desired weight and wish to maintain it, the ghee intake can increase up to 2 teaspoons, but not more than that, as an excess of it can cause weight gain. As ghee is loaded with omega 3 fats (DHA) and omega 6 (CLA), it can aid your body during weight loss.

    Can I eat ghee on toast?

    Ghee is one of our favorite toast toppings. Soft and spreadable at room temperature, there’s nothing easier than slathering a dollop of rich-tasting ghee on toast. Ghee is not only delicious, it’s good for you too. Lactose and casein are removed from ghee in the clarification process.

    Can I cook eggs with ghee?

    Use ghee in place of butter when frying your eggs. Once the whites have cooked through but the yolk is still raw and very yellow, add a splash of balsamic and place a lid over the pan momentarily (this will cause the white over the yolk to cook through). Remove from pan and serve over toast slathered with ghee.

    Is ghee better than olive oil?

    Olive oil, compared to ghee, contains a much lower amount of saturated fat. The latter, when consumed more than needed, will lead to an increase in cholesterol levels. Olive oil is higher in monounsaturated fats, which are healthy for you. Both olive oil and ghee are high in calories.

    Is it better to cook with ghee or butter?

    Ghee has a higher smoke point when compared to butter, so it doesn’t burn as quickly. This is perfect for sautéing or frying foods. Because ghee separates milk from fat, this butter substitute is lactose-free, making it better than butter if you have allergies or sensitivities to dairy products.

    Is ghee good for cooking vegetables?

    The flavor of ghee is very buttery and delicious, and is perfect for baking when you need to replace butter. Ghee also has a very high smoke point which makes it appropriate for high temperature cooking, like the roasted veggie recipe I’m sharing below. One of my favorite ways to use ghee is for roasting vegetables.

    Can you use ghee in coffee?

    Start with a cup of coffee made to your liking. Add one or two teaspoons of ghee, depending on the amount of coffee you want to drink and how buttery you want it. Add coconut oil if desired (MCT coconut oil is preferred by many), one teaspoon up to one tablespoon, depending on the taste you want.

    Can I use ghee instead of canola oil?

    Substitute one cup of ghee for one cup of vegetable oil. Ghee is clarified butter, which means the milk solids and water have been removed. It is also perfect for people who are lactose intolerant, and it is full of omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids and vitamins A, D, E, and K.

    How do you eat ghee?

    How to drink ghee in the morning? Take a spoonful of GHEE. Gently warm the spoon which has the GHEE, so the ghee becomes liquid. Drink the spoonful of ghee. After drinking ghee on an empty stomach, one should wait 30 minutes before eating or drinking anything.

    Ayurveda is inextricably linked to desi ghee, or clarified butter. Every household in India is well-versed in the miraculous benefits of ghee. Ghee is inextricably linked to Indian culture and heritage. It is considered sacred or holy and is used in numerous rituals. Desi ghee is prepared from cow’s milk and is seen to be a symbol of happiness. It is beneficial to our health because it not only fights diseases but also boosts our metabolism.

    You will be surprised to know that ghee can not only be used as a cooking ingredient but also has multiple other benefits as well. You can use ghee in a variety of other ways.

    Skin Smoothening

    How to use ghee in cooking

    The healthy compounds in ghee can help enhance skin suppleness when consumed or applied to the skin. You can use ghee by having it regularly in your diet or applying it to your skin. It helps strengthen and boost collagen and retain suppleness because it penetrates to the tissue level.

    To Treat Dry Lips

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Making a simple homemade lip balm with ghee is the best method to utilise it for cracked lips. Simply heat 5 teaspoons of ghee and add 1 teaspoon of honey. Stir well to blend the two ingredients well. After gently cleaning your lips with a sugar and honey mixture, pour this liquid into a container and apply it.

    A lot of people suffer from chapped and dry lips. It could be due to a shortage of water or weather conditions. Using desi ghee to moisturise your lips is an age-old Ayurvedic technique.

    For Dehydrated Skin

    Desi ghee is quite moist. It has magical powers that aid in the treatment of a variety of skin problems. Ghee is used to cure skin flaking, dullness, and dehydration. It not only gives you a youthful glow, but also protects your skin from bacteria. Ghee contains antimicrobial qualities that help prevent pimples on the face.

    For Moisturising Of Hair

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ghee applied topically to the hair and scalp may soften the hair. Ghee contains active antioxidant components because it is derived from butter. Toxins that make your hair feel thick and frizzy can be combated with these substances. Vitamins like vitamin E and vitamin A, which are believed to condition hair, are abundant in ghee.

    Don’t Miss:Read About Expert Approved Skincare Tips For Women Crossing Their 30s

    To Brighten Dull Eyes

    Dry and damaged skin is one of the most common causes of dark circles. Ghee’s moisturising and nourishing characteristics aid in the restoration and protection of the sensitive skin around your eyes. This is crucial if you want to lighten up your eye region and get rid of dark circles rapidly.

    Apply a very small amount of ghee to your eyelids and under eye area and leave it on overnight, according to BB expert advice. In just a few days, wash it with cold water and you’ll have better-looking skin.

    Don’t Miss:5 Underarm Mistakes You Need To Stop Making Right Now!

    Improves Hair Texture

    Ghee can be used straight to the hair and scalp to improve the texture, giving the hair a smoother, more lustrous appearance. Simply melt a teaspoon of ghee in the microwave. Dip your fingers in it and rub your scalp and hair lightly. Allow it to sit for a few hours before shampooing.

    This can also be used as a deep conditioning treatment for hair overnight. To avoid the oily mess, let the ghee in your hair overnight and cover it with a shower cap.

    If you wish to share any interesting skin care tips with us, then do let us know by commenting on our Facebook and Instagram page.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ghee is a type of clarified butter with a strong aromatic flavor capable of uplifting any dish ranging from sweet to savory. Read on to learn more about ghee, and why it’s reffered to as “liquid gold”.

    What is ghee?

    Ghee is a caramelized butter that offers a fat-rich flavor similar to French butter. It’s leveraged in a multitude of dishes in Indian cuisine for richness and creaminess.

    The origin of ghee dates back to 1500 BC when Indians first prepared it to save butter from spoiling due to hot weather conditions. Resultantly, ghee gained popularity in the Indian subcontinent owing to its longer shelf-life than butter. It was called “liquid gold” due to its vivid, caramelized yellowish-gold appearance.

    Ghee is preferred for cooking and frying due to its high stability at elevated temperatures. Ghee’s smoke point is 475°F, which is twice as much as butter. As previously mentioned, ghee is advantageous due to its long shelf life. Ghee lasts up to 11 months in the refrigerator. Part of this longevity is because ghee doesn’t contain any water or milk solids. For this same reason, ghee can be consumed in moderation by lactose-intolerant individuals.

    How ghee is made?

    Ghee is prepared from simmering fresh butter until its water content evaporates and the milk solids settled out. Once the milk solids turn brown, the flame is turned off and the butter liquid is separated into jars. The liquid can now be called “ghee” or “desi ghee” in the Indian native language.

    What does ghee taste like?

    The flavor of ghee can be best described as a slightly nutty, roasted, and richer than butter. Ghee is semi-solid and granular in texture compared to the fine creaminess of butter. The flavor of the finished ghee greatly depends on the type of milk used in the preparation of ghee. For instance, grass-fed cow milk produces a rich, and premium ghee in comparison to that of the buffalo’s.

    How to use Ghee

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ghee is traditionally used in Indian curries, rice dishes (biryani, pilafs), desserts, and confectionaries. In many parts of South Asia, ghee is used to top chapatis, lentil curries, and sweet desserts.

    However, ghee can be used as a richer alternative to butter in any recipe. Take your cakes, cookies, and muffins to the next level with a strong, buttery, and sweet aromatic punch of ghee.

    To give a more melt-in-the-mouth touch to the classic Béarnaise and Hollandaise sauce, use desi ghee instead of butter. If you’re still wondering about how to cook with ghee? Then go ahead and try out our chicken tikka masala recipe for a rich savory, and spicy kick.

    Feature Image: By Phadke09 – Own work (CC BY-SA 4.0)

    How to use ghee in cooking

    But that’s just skimming the surface of what this Ayurvedic staple can do. Raquel Tavares Gunsagar, the cofounder of the popular Fourth & Heart brand, has found plenty of inspiring, creative ways to unleash the healing power of ghee that go beyond cooking with it. Here are some of her favorites.

    Scroll down to learn how you can make the most of ghee outside of your kitchen.

    Have some with your morning vitamins

    Whether you use it in your breakfast cooking or just knock back a spoonful, ghee is a carrier for fundamental fat-soluble vitamins like A, D, E, and K. (The body can absorb these vitamins only in conjunction with superior-quality saturated fat.) Ghee has a high short-chain fatty acid profile, making it one of the more quickly digested fatty acids. The body absorbs it easily and converts it speedily to energy while metabolizing other nutrients you consume.

    Cure minor burns and scrapes

    Detailed research in India based on Ayuvedic practices found that a combination of honey and ghee, used with a gauze dressing, effectively addressed certain types of wounds (notably, those of ulcers and hysterectomies). Ghee is free of water and, in Ayurvedic medicine, noted to have healing properties; the pH of honey is lightly acidic and osmotic. Ghee helps the honey maintain its bacteriostatic, anti-microbial, healing, and pain-relieving benefits and acts as a carrier for them.

    Photo: Fourth & Heart

    Use it as a hair mask or body oil

    Ghee’s rich fatty-acid profile allows for quick absorption into the skin and hair follicles and it keeps your skin radiant for longer than your everyday body lotion. For a hair mask, add ghee to a leave-in conditioner, let it sit for an hour, and then shampoo and condition as usual. If you want to change the fragrance, simply add a drop of essential oil to a teaspoon of ghee and rub between your hands.

    It’s surprisingly easy to make your own ghee, an Indian version of clarified butter.Ghee is closely compared to clarified butter due to a nearly identical cooking process. However, there are two key factors that distinguish ghee from clarified butter. Ghee has a nutty, toasted flavor that is the result of milk solids that brown as the butter melts. A true ghee recipe that follows ancient traditions also has a fermentation process that adds starter cultures to pure cream before churning for tangy notes and gut-cleansing benefits.

    In recent years, ghee has become a more mainstream ingredient, particularly as a staple in the ketogenic and paleo diets. In grocery stores, ghee typically ranges from $6 to $12, which makes DIY ghee a more affordable option. Below, we break down exactly how to make ghee at home.

    How to Make Ghee from Butter

    Butter is composed of three main elements— butterfat, milk solids, and water. Both ghee and clarified butter are pure butterfat, which is made by slowly melting unsalted butter and removing the milk solids and water. Ghee is cooked slightly longer than clarified butter in order to brown the milk solids and add a nutty, caramel flavor.

    To make ghee at home, melt at least one stick of butter in a small saucepan over low heat (you can easily melt several sticks for a larger batch of ghee). Within five to ten minutes, the milk solids will begin to separate from the melted butterfat and the water will evaporate. Turn up the heat to medium and continue to brown the sunken milk solids while allowing the remaining water content to evaporate. As the butter simmers, a layer of milk solids will form a white foam on top— this should be skimmed off. Continue to cook for another five to ten minutes until the milk solids have completely browned and you can smell notes of toffee.

    Slowly strain the butter through a cheesecloth or sieve into the container of your choice, being careful not to get any milk solids mixed in. This product is pure butterfat, which is often referred to as “liquid gold” (aka ghee). Discard the last few tablespoons of butterfat and milk solids that remain in the pan.

    By removing the milk solids, you also increase the smoke point of ghee—regular butter has a smoke point of 250°F; ghee has a smoke point of at least 400°F, which makes it an ideal, flavorful replacement for vegetable oil. Try your homemade ghee as a substitute for butter in our Indian Spiced Chicken or as a replacement for vegetable oil in our Shrimp Curry with Coconut Milk.

    How Long Does Homemade Ghee Last?

    Ghee can last for three months at room temperature and up to one year refrigerated. If placed in the freezer in an air-tight container, it can last for years. Because the water and milk solids have been completely removed, there is little opportunity for bad bacteria to grow, which makes it safe to leave ghee at room temperature.

    How Can I Store Ghee at Home?

    Ghee is typically stored in an open container (we prefer mason jars and plastic quart containers) in the refrigerator. You can also store ghee in a closed, airtight container at room temperature in a dark, cool spot.

    Is Ghee Healthier Than Butter?

    Ayuverda, an Indian holistic healing system, believes ghee to be healthier than regular butter because of the fermentation process. The cultures in the butter, similar to probiotics, are said to help with internal cleansing, gut health, better bowel movements, reduce inflammation, and increased life expectancy. Because the milk solids are removed during the clarifying process, ghee is also lactose-free and therefore beneficial for individuals who are lactose-intolerant.

    However, ghee does have a higher saturated fat content than butter. If ghee is consumed on a regular basis, it can lead to diet-related chronic illness, according to nutritionist Maya Feller, MS, RD, CD of Maya Feller Nutrition. However, “if a person is consuming a plant-forward diet based in whole and minimally processed foods and having ghee in moderation on a regular basis, we may not expect to see similar risks,” says Feller.

    If you’ve read about the benefits of ghee and ghruta, you are likely ready to give this tasty, beneficial lipid a try. Ayurveda teaches that ghee gently stokes agni (digestive fire), balances all three doshas (especially Vata), nourishes ojas, supports the brain and nerves, and is easy to digest. In addition, ghee is versatile and has a high smoke point, making it excellent for cooking as well as spreading on toast and treats. If you are wondering how to use ghee, there are no shortage of great ideas! Let’s take a look at several ways to use ghee.

    Ghee: Cook with It!

    First of all, ghee has a high smoke point. PIOR Living’s Ghruta has a smoke point of 250 degrees Celsius (482 degrees Fahrenheit), which makes it ideal for high heat cooking. It is important not to heat oils past their smoke point because when cooking oils smoke, the fat molecules break down and release free radicals and other potentially harmful chemicals. Also, oil heated past its smoke point will compromise the taste of the food.

    A high smoke point means you can use ghee for roasting veggies, stir frying, frying, baking, and sauteing. Basically, anywhere you would typically use cooking oil or butter, you can use ghee. If you are still wondering how to use ghee, here are a few ideas to get you started.

    How to Use Ghee – Four Ideas

    Saute your veggies in ghee. Whether you are cooking up broccoli, kale, bell pepper, or cauliflower, ghee makes a wonderful saute and stir fry oil. This is true if you are using Indian seasonings, Italian herbs, or East Asian flavors. Ghee has a pleasant but not overpowering taste, so it works well in many different types of dishes.

    Use ghee in kitchari and porridge. One property of ghee is that it helps carry the benefits of herbs and spices deeper into the body. Also, ghee gently stimulates agni, the digestive fire. Most kitchari recipes call for ghee, and adding ghee to kitchari, oatmeal, and other porridges will improve flavor. In addition, ghee boosts the assimilation of beneficial herbs and spices, and nourishes ojas.

    Spread it like butter. Ghee, sometimes referred to as clarified butter, is similar to butter. However, it typically has a slightly sweeter taste, is better for cooking, and is usually well-tolerated even by those who are allergic to lactose and dairy. Therefore, ghee makes a wonderful alternate to butter. Wondering how to use ghee if you don’t have time to cook? Spread it on toast, dates (to build ojas), rice crackers, or anywhere you would typically use butter.

    Add ghee to hot beverages. You can add ghee to coffee, tea, hot cocoa, or other beverages. Adding fat to beverages nourishes the rasa (fluids of the body) and helps produce a feeling of satiety. In addition, ghee carries the beneficial constituents in various herbs and spices deeper into the body. Therefore, adding a spoonful of ghee to turmeric milk or adaptogenic hot cocoa can help those nourishing herbs and spices sink in deep. Plus, it’s a great way to stoke the fires from inside out on a cold day.

    Just the Beginning

    If you are curious about how to use ghee, there are truly a plethora of ways. Ghee is wonderful in more than Indian and Ayurvedic dishes. Try it out with your various cooking and baking endeavors, and let us know your favorite ways to use ghee and ghruta!

    Greta Kent-Stoll is a Certified Ayurvedic Practitioner (NAMA), as well as a writer, editor, and Certified Iyengar Yoga Teacher. Her Ayurveda practice is based in Asheville, North Carolina and she is the co-owner of Iyengar Yoga Asheville.

    Ghruta Ayurvedic cooking, ghee, ghee benefits, ghruta

    • Why Milkio
          • WHY MILKIO
            • 100% New Zealand
            • Grass-fed
            • Keto Paleo
            • Non Gmo
            • Sustainability
            • Food safety
            • Innovation
    • Products
          • VARIETIES
            • Grass fed ghee
            • Organic Ghee
            • A2 Ghee
            • Sheep Ghee
          • PACKAGING
            • Consumer Pack
            • Pet Jars
            • Glass Jars
            • Bulk Pack
            • Tins
            • Tubs
            • Drums
            • PODS
          • TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS
            • Sell Sheet
            • Trade Presentation
            • Brochure
            • Products Specifications
    • PARTNER WITH US
          • CONTRACT MANUFACTURING
    • CERTIFICATES
          • CERTIFICATION
    • SHOP
          • SHOP IN USA
            • Amazon
            • Walmart
            • Kroger.com
            • Giant Eagle
            • Ebay.com
            • Faire.com
            • City Shoppe
            • DesiClick
            • Desibasket
            • Etsy
            • Mable
            • Ratekitchen.com
          • SHOP IN AU
            • Amazon
          • SHOP IN NZ
            • Milkio New Zealand
            • Trademe
    • RESOURCES
          • BLOGS
            • Grass fed ghee
            • Organic Ghee
            • A2 Ghee
            • Sheep Ghee
            • Keto Related
          • RECIPES
            • Keto Recipes
            • Paleo Recipes
            • Non Veg Recipes
            • Veg Recipes
            • Deserts
            • Main Dishes
            • Free Recipe Ebook
          • ON DEMAND VIDEOS
            • Milkio Factory
            • Why New Zealand Ghee
            • Why Grass fed Ghee
    • CONTACT US
          • ABOUT MILKIO
          • SALES ENQUIRIES
            • Send a message
            • Channel
            • USA 1 (346) 666-6707
            • NZ 64 27 352 9125
          • GENERAL ENQUIRIES
            • Book A Meeting
            • Help Articles & How-tos
            • Company News
            • Gallery

    How to use ghee for health?

      July 7, 2021 Posted by: admin Category:

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How to use ghee for health is a tricky question because you have to maintain moderation and quality.

    How to use ghee for health is all about to enjoy the optimum ghee benefits. This dairy oil is extremely easy to use. You can use the dairy staple in cooking, you can use ghee as a natural medicine, as well as you can it as a healthy spread as the butter substitute.

    Now the question is how to use ghee for health? Ghee is one of the safest cooking oils for its higher smoke point. You can use it for baking, sautéing, slow cooking, deep-frying, etc. Ghee stays stable against high flame. The stability of ghee prevents the formation of free radicals in the body, which ensures health safety in comparison to other common cooking oils.

    This stable nature of ghee is a healthy feature that you can use in your health’s favor.However, you have learn first how to use ghee for health and wellbeing.

    Ghee is loaded with a lot of saturated fats and it comes with a unique aroma that works as a taste enhancer for cooking foods and dishes of salads.

    As a butter substitute, you can use ghee in your morning tea and coffee. You can use grass fed ghee on your morning toast instead of butter. It is keto friendly, which means you can use ghee in your keto and Paleo recipes or in all the butter recipes.

    How to use for health: Therapeutic Use

    Therapeutic use of ghee is a unique way to learn how to use ghee for health and wellbeing. For instance, you can include ghee in your bedtime routine. You may try ghee with lukewarm milk/water at night before bed. According to Ayurveda, ghee clarified butter with milk helps in enjoying sound sleep at night and also it eases the irritation of constipation in the morning.

    How to use ghee for health

    However, only pure quality cow ghee offers all these ghee benefits. It is important to use premium quality cow ghee in moderation along with an active lifestyle to attract the best ghee benefits in your favor. Besides you learn how to use ghee for health, you have to know the best quality of ghee you should buy.

    Why Grass fed ghee is a better choice?

    How to use ghee for health is a critical question where you need to understand the health benefits of the dairy oil. All ghee products are not the same in terms of nutrition.

    If we follow dairy reserach result, grass fed ghee is the best quality ghee we can use for our health benefits. The ghee contains more nutrients than grain fed cow milk-made ghee and that is why proves as a healthier option to add to the diet.

    Grass fed dairy cows are fed with grass and grass-made fodders. Because of grass diet, grass fed cows produce better quality milk and that makes grass fed quality dairy more nutritious than grain fed milk-made dairy. For instance, Grass fed dairy contains more Conjugated Linoleic Acid and fat soluble vitamins than grain-fed cow milk-made ghee.

    About Milkio Grass fed ghee

    Milkio grass fed ghee products are pure New Zealand made and these are verified non-GMO products made of grass fed NZ milk butter. These ghee products are keto and Paleo diet-friendly and they offer a higher smoking point than other cooking oils in the market.

    Milkio grass fed pure New Zealand ghee products are excellently shelf-stable. you can store the product in your kitchen without freezing support up to 18 months from the date of manufacturing. The grass fed ghee products are small-batrch made, hand crafted, and manually tasted for unwavering quality assurance.

    If you want to buy Milkio Grass fed ghee products, please place your order at Milkio E-Commerce.

    Learn about our people, get the latest news, and much more.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Can butter really be good for you? No, it’s not just a foodie’s wishful thinking. A purified form of butter called ghee has been a staple of both Indian cuisine and Ayurvedic medicine since ancient times. Today, professional chefs with a mind for health and savvy consumers have discovered its rich, nutty flavor along with its many health benefits.

    Ghee is sometimes referred to as clarified butter, but it actually goes a step beyond. Clarified butter is made by heating unsalted butter until the milk solids and water rise to the top, where they are skimmed off. Ghee results from cooking the butter for a longer period of time and straining out nearly all the milk solids and water, leaving pure butterfat behind.

    How to use ghee in cookingWhether it’s plain or flavored with herbs and spices, ghee can be used in nearly every application that calls for butter, as an oil for stir-frying and sautéing or drizzled over vegetables and popcorn. In addition to its tasty flavor and versatility, here are some of the surprising benefits you can enjoy from cooking with ghee.

    1. Ghee is all-natural.

    Ghee is free of potentially unhealthy additives, preservatives and trans fats. Thanks to its pure form and low moisture content, ghee is shelf-stable and can stay fresh for up to a year without refrigeration. While it’s not an application for the general public, some families in India have aged ghee that has lasted more than 100 years.

    2. Ghee reduces your exposure to cancer-causing agents.

    At high temperatures, most oils break down into unstable elements known as free radicals. Excessive amounts of free radicals in the body can result in cell damage, including the development of cancer. Ghee has a smoking point of nearly 500°F, so it retains its structural integrity under the high heat used for frying and other preparation methods.

    3. Ghee is a rich source of antioxidants.

    Antioxidants act as “scavengers” in the body, seeking out and neutralizing free radicals to prevent cell and tissue damage that can lead to disease. Ghee contains vitamin E, one of the most powerful antioxidants found in food.

    4. Ghee contains cancer-fighting CLA.

    When ghee is made from butter derived from grass-fed cows, it contains stores of conjugated linoleic acid. CLA has been found to combat cancer as well as cardiovascular disease. Some studies have also suggested a link between CLA and weight loss.

    5. Ghee helps moisturize dry skin and hair.

    Ghee isn’t used just for cooking. It has long been used by Indian women as a topical moisturizer to relieve dry complexions. Application on the scalp also fights dryness and encourages the growth of thick, lustrous hair.

    6. Ghee has anti-inflammatory properties.

    Ayurvedic medicine has regularly used ghee to treat burns and swelling. It contains large quantities of butyrate, a fatty acid that has been linked to an immune system response that soothes inflammation. The substance also has anti-viral properties and contributes to a healthy digestive system by helping heal and repair the stomach lining. This can be particularly valuable for individuals with intestinal disorders like Crohn’s disease.

    7. Ghee contains heart-healthy fats.

    While ghee has a high concentration of fat, it’s high in monounsaturated Omega-3s. These are the same fatty acids found in foods like salmon that have been discovered to promote a healthy heart and cardiovascular system. A study conducted on men in a rural area of India found that those who consumed larger quantities of ghee had a lower incidence of coronary heart disease and reduced levels of serum cholesterol.

    8. Ghee is a viable alternative for individuals with dairy allergies.

    Since ghee is formed by removing milk solids, it contains only trace amounts of milk sugars (lactose) and proteins (casein), making it suitable for most people with dairy allergies. Ghee also fits into the popular Paleo diet, which is based on the types of foods eaten by early humans and excludes dairy products.

    9. Ghee is a nutritional powerhouse.

    Ghee contains plentiful amounts of fat-soluble vitamins A, D, E and K. These nutrients are essential to a wide range of body functions from the brain to the immune system. In addition, ghee aids in the body’s absorption of fat-soluble vitamins and minerals from other foods.

    Congratulations to my granddaughter, Aalure Cooke for being accepted into ECPI CULINARY SCHOOL Today! Congrats to Chef Cook!

    Want to Use Your Culinary Powers for Good? Become a Culinary Nutritionist!

    Do you have a passion for healthy eating and a desire to help others gain the benefits of a nutritious diet? An Associate of Applied Science in Culinary Arts and Applied Nutrition degree from ECPI University’s Culinary Institute of Virginia could be the first step to a rewarding career as a personal chef, food service manager, or even restaurant owner. Contact us today to begin your journey. It could be the Best Decision You Ever Make!

    Well, in addition to the elegant taste, cooking with ghee has honored significance over butter. By eliminating those milk solids in advance, you dramatically enhance the smoke point. That’s the temperature at which something fits to cook.

    Even pricey, nutrient-packed extra virgin olive oils become useless when they are heated for frying at high flame. Generally, for cooking food we need the oils that possess the highest smoke point.

    Butter, for its part, but they have a low smoke point of just around 300 degrees, restricting its usage. But desi cow ghee has a smoke point of 485 degrees, making it the safest cooking support for making any recipe.

    Even though it’s been utilized for hundreds of years among the many constitutions of the world also, in India called desi ghee, it has incredible cooking benefits and properties.

    Do we use ghee for cooking at high temperatures?

    Ghee has a high smoke point as compared to other cooking mediums. The smoke point is the temperature at which heated oil produces smoke, and it varies for each cooking fat. The high smoke point makes ghee ideal for safe cooking.

    Ghee’s smoke point is high enough than any other refined oils that it can be sustained to well over 485 degrees Fahrenheit except smoking, which shows that it is burning and limiting toxic compounds.

    Why should you prefer desi ghee in cooking?

    1. Ghee has a magnificent nutty flavor

    Fat offers things flavor.” – Julia Child

    Ghee is good fat and it adds flavors to the recipes along with incredible taste. The addition of ghee in cooking recipes spreads a nice aroma in the entire atmosphere. So while cooking or adding organic, chemical-free flavor to food we prefer desi cow ghee as a nutritional choice.

    How to add ghee in cooking?

    • Make it your basic cooking oil for sautéing.
    • Replace it with butter for smearing on baked foods.
    • Add it as a topping on foods.
    • Prefer it in place of coconut oil or palm oil for frying various items.
    • For roasting vegetables, you can melt a tablespoon of desi cow ghee for the healthy keto diet.

    2. Ghee is Lactose-Free

    The digestion capacity for lactose – a sugar present in milk – varies based on the nutrition of the dairy product, your digestive health, and even your ethnicity. Ghee made by the traditional method knew how to stimulate the digestibility of dairy. Raw cow milk, for example, includes enzymes that break down lactose. Ghee made from cow milk is safe for dairy intolerant people. And the process of making ghee by the traditional method breaks down the lactose.

    3. Ghee is Casein Free

    Casein, the protein part of milk, is blamed for milk allergies technically, an allergic issue takes place for the protein in a food. When gut flora understands us the casein intake can actually produce an adverse impact on the brain health because it is not being correctly digested.

    In the process of making desi cow ghee, the milk solids include the lactose and casein float to the surface, where they have been taken out. Pure Suresh Foods provides lab-tested ghee, free of trace residuals of lactose and casein (here it is). Culturing – a fermentation reaction– has traces of these parts.

    4. Ghee is the safest fat for cooking

    Fatty acid molecules, the double bonds between the carbon chain, the more unstable nature. This means that the bonds are more prone to break when in contact with heat or pressure, and the fatty acid combines and enhances toxicity to our cells.

    Polyunsaturated oils (think plant oils, like sunflower oil and safflower oil) involve many double bonds and are weak instability for cooking. Ghee, however, is a basic saturated fat and is supremely heat-stable for both sautéing and baking.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    5. Ghee offers bioavailable vitamin A

    The dairy products of ruminants as cow grazing on grass offers an ample source of fat-soluble vitamins involving vitamin A. These vitamins are present basically in the fat part, so the range of vitamins in ghee is more than in milk.

    vitamin A plays a vital role in supporting hormone balance, liver health, fertility, and stamina. Contrary to popular trust, vitamin A cannot be obtained from plant sources. We should consume vitamin A foods to meet our needs.

    It is trivial and made further risky for health scenarios such as thyroid imbalance issues. Vitamin A in ghee is useful for the body, and also includes the fatty acid cofactors needed for absorption.

    6. Ghee provides a longer shelf life.

    Most dairy alternatives and fat sources go through the procedure of rancidity that hinders their shelf-life. But ghee can be available or stored at room temperature for a longer time, compared to others. Ghee is one fat source that can be healthy for frying on high heat. Also, you can store it for a long duration of one year.

    When oils are used in cooking at a very high flame they break down and form free radicals that are hazardous to the body. But ghee possesses a high smoke point, doesn’t shatter easily, which also makes ghee one of the safest and most healthy fats.

    7. Ghee is a digestive stimulant

    Unlike other fat sources, which are known to lead to indigestion, ghee is an essential component in managing digestion theories. The short-chain fatty acids present in ghee regulate the digestion tract and help in balancing gut health.

    Indian cuisine is a concoction of spices with insertion of desi cow ghee to the dishes, aids in better digestion and absorbs the metabolites present in these spices.

    Where can I get healthy desi ghee?

    Because ghee is free of lactose and casein and it’s long shelf-stable, indicating that there is no need for refrigeration. As ghee is usually stored in a glass jar for longer shelf life. You can find dozens of options online on online grocers.

    If you are failing to select, you can always buy grass-fed cow ghee. Just remember to go for quality-assured, grass-fed ghee bought from Suresh foods.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Conclusion:

    Ghee is nutritional for your daily routine, building and maintaining good health and stimulating the digestive system. A healthy system and strong immunity both perform a key role. To get the advantages of desi ghee for an everyday diet, consume it in moderation.

    Published: Oct 8, 2020 · Modified: Mar 11, 2022 by munatycooking · This post may contain affiliate links ·

    Ghee is clarified butter, but not every clarified butter you find in the market is Ghee; let me tell you why. Clarified butter is butter cooked on medium heat until the milk solids separate from the fat and take less time to cook, while to get Ghee, you have to cook the butter for a long time until the milk solids turn brown and sink at the bottom of the pan. When in a liquid form, it’s more transparent than regular clarified butter and has a golden color.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Good news to those who are lactose intolerant, it has a lesser amount of lactose than what is found in butter! The video in the recipe card shows you exactly how simple it is to make it at home, plus many tips in this post to avoid making mistakes.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    What is the difference between Ghee and butter?

    You can use it in the same dishes that have butter. Butter has a high amount of fat plus water and milk solids. Both taste amazing in cooking, but Ghee has a more intense flavor than butter; it also has a high smoking point of 250C – 482F; this means you can use it for deep fry and it will maintain it’s flavor while butter burns faster because of the presence of milk solids.

    As I have mentioned earlier, it has less lactose than butter. Still, there is another good side of it over butter, you can store unopened jar at room temperature for up to 9 months after opening the jar; it is good for up to 3 months, and for a longer time of storage, refrigerate it, and it will last for 1 year.

    The only downside I see in Ghee compared to butter is that it has higher calories. One tablespoon of butter has 100 calories, while one tablespoon of Ghee has 120 calories.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Ingredients you need

    Make it at home is much cheaper than buying it from the store. You will only need butter. It’s best to use unsalted butter since cooking the butter will eliminate the water and the milk solids will be discarded, hence, it will be salty when you use salted butter.

    How to make Ghee?

    Use unsalted butter, salted butter will result in salty Ghee, and it will interfere in seasoning the food you are cooking.

    In a pan, add the unsalted butter and let it melt on medium to medium low heat.

    Thick white bubbles will appear when the melted butter simmers. To ensure that the milk solids do not burn at the bottom of the pan, push the foams aside regularly.

    The foam’s color will get paler. When the milk solids sink to the bottom of the pan, and its color turns brown, then it’s ready.

    Strain it and pour it in a glass jar. When it cools, close the jar with an airtight lid. (Read the recipe card below for more detailed steps and notes).

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How to store it?

    Use a clean and dry glass jar with an airtight lid. When you pour the Ghee in the jar, make sure to close it only when it has cooled. If you close the lid while the Ghee is hot, the steam will spoil it quickly. To maintain the freshness of the Ghee, keep it away from water and moisture.

    Make sure to use a clean and dry spoon to spoon out the Ghee. The last thing you want is to contaminate it after all the hard work you have put in!

    On the kitchen shelf, an unopened jar of Ghee will last up to 9 months. Once open, it is good for 3 months.

    Place the Ghee in the fridge to store it for up to 12 months.

    To freeze, pour it in a plastic container that’s freezer friendly and place in the freezer.

    How do I know when it is gone bad?

    To know if the Ghee is still good to use, check its color. If the color is white or much lighter than its original color, get rid of it. If the smell changes or it tastes sour, it’s not good to consume.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    How to use Ghee?

    You can use Ghee the same way you use butter except in some cookie recipes. It is perfect when searing steaks; it won’t burn like butter and will maintain the same unique flavor. You can also add a tablespoon of Ghee at the end of your cooking to enhance your dish’s flavor.

    Because of its high smoking point, you can also use it in deep frying, but I wouldn’t suggest that. Ghee has more fat than butter, so it’s best to use oil in deep frying, it is cheaper.

    Shall I use high quality butter?

    You can, but you don’t have to! Ghee tastes a little different from butter, so it will taste different from the butter no matter what brand you use. I would recommend that you use high quality butter in making cookies and cakes.

    Butter is an inevitable ingredient in most of dessert recipes. By definition, ghee is just clarified butter, but to me, the taste is completely different. The taste of butter is more close to heavy cream, while that of ghee is more close to cooking oil (at least to my tongue).

    Is it good to use ghee instead of butter in dessert and pastry recipes`? Doesn’t it ruin the taste to be far from the original standard?

    11 Answers 11

    moved here from a comment:

    Ghee does have a different aroma and consistency, so, depending on the use of it in the recipe (wether it is used for frying or in the frosting for example), it will quite likely change the final result.

    So in some cases substituting butter with some neutral flavored oil or margarine might be better than ghee. Which, I know, might not help if ghee is all you’ve got.

    Also wanted to include what @rumtscho adds in the comment above:

    in recipes where the fat ratio is important, ghee (which is 100% fat) can ruin the ratio because butter is 83% fat.

    And as to standards, they can be quite relative (making something that tastes slightly different doesn’t necessarily ruin it) . if you are making the desert for an indian audience, using clarified butter might taste quite normal =)

    Ghee is basically clarified butter. If a dessert recipe calls for “butter” then it’s probably not going to work. If it calls for cold butter cut in pieces. it definitely will not work. If a recipe calls for melted butter. you’ll be ok.. use a touch less and add a splash of cream. Ghee is butter with the milk solids removed.

    I used ghee in an icing recipe because I ran out of butter, and the texture was all wrong. Added a little milk after reading this and boom – the texture immediately improved. Some of the fat content separated, but I just poured it off and the icing was fine. I can recommend the combination of ghee and milk as a good substitution, at least for icings.

    I am not a professional baker and am still learning but I bake almost every week. In my country ghee is a main ingredient in our houses, whether its made from clarifying butter at home or just buying it.

    I use ghee in all my bakes, even in making caramel sauce, brownies, cheesecakes or cookies.

    Just be careful what the recipe calls for. If it is cold cubes , then freeze it and then take it out after 15 min maybe and cut it just like butter. I the recipe asks for room temperature, then use it as it is.

    It works everytime for me. For the taste part, if the ghee is home made then you have nothing to worry about. If you bought it ready just make sure it has a good not overwhelming taste and smell.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    No, ghee cannot be used in place of butter, because ghee is clarified. This removes the water from the butter, which is a key component of butter when used in baking. The water evaporating and creating steam pockets gives a lot of foods their fluffy texture. The removal of the water would create a lot of issues in getting your desserts to come out right, even if the taste of ghee was similar to that of butter (which it is not)

    I can’t believe no one thinks Ghee tastes like butter. It tastes exactly like the fresh farm butter my grandmother used to use when I was growing up. Maybe slightly nuttier but not at all like any oil I have ever tasted. I can’t say but think if the recipe calls for softened butter you could use equally I am almost sure but the rest I am not sure of. I know an earlier poster or two said that you can bake with it and I am sure you can there may need to be tweaks if it doesn’t call for softened butter but according to the earlier post you can harden it in the fridge and use it has your cold butter in recipes calling for that.

    You can bake with ghee as you would with butter. Like butter, ghee gets very hard when you put it in the refrigerator. Like butter, ghee gets nice and soft when you take it out of the refrigerator. Ghee lasts long than butter because the milk product is gone. Ghee has MORE fat than butter so the person who suggested you use butter and walk more has the information all wrong. You can use ghee in a microwave (but why would you use a microwave for anything) and in the oven. I think the poster who asked if margarine was being used instead of ghee was on to something. Go with the ghee. People in India bake with it all the time and you can find a truckload of websites and blogs written by Indians who use ghee in every way of cooking.

    I have baked and cooked plenty of times with ghee, and I have made dozens of biscuits. Nothing wrong with it. Biscuits have the best flavor with ghee.

    I used ghee added to brown sugar to make toffee. IT DID NOT WORK. The brown sugar didn’t congeal with the ghee so I had clear butter and a glob of brown sugar boiling separately in the pan. Never saw anything like it.

    The point of using ghee for many people is to avoid dairy so adding milk is not solution for them. My daughter is dairy intolerant but because the milk solids are removed from ghee she does not react to it. Here in Australia the only other butter alternatives all contain hydrogenated vegetable oils like margarine so I do not want to use that. We used ghee in some gluten free shortbread we made the other day and they were delicious! Tasted just like shortbread should! Im searching to see if it would be ok for french macarons but as there seems to be much conjecture I might just have to try it and see. One site i read said it can tend to make things a little crispier. I didn’t notice that with our shortbread. The brand we buy is just like softened butter when cool and melted butter when warm.

    Ghee doesn’t work well with the oven nor microwave. I suggest you use real butter store-bought and walk some extra miles if you don’t want to gain weight.

    Shopping Cart

    Your cart is currently empty.

    Enable cookies to use the shopping cart

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Hello, fellow ghee lovers! As the cooler weather and holidays start to roll around, we find that we’re spending more and more time in the kitchen baking. We wanted to break down everything you need to know about baking with ghee, as well as provide a few delicious recipes that you can try out at home! Throw on a sweater, crank up that oven, grab a jar of 4th & Heart ghee, and let’s get baking! Enjoy, and happy cooking!

    How do I bake with ghee?

    This is the most glaring question, and the answer couldn’t be more simple: use it exactly like you would butter! Ghee is butter after all (just without the lactose and milk solids), so you should use it the same way you’d use butter in any given recipe.

    Are ghee and other oils interchangeable in baking?

    The short answer is yes, although it depends specifically on what you’re baking. If the recipe calls for oil instead of butter, you can certainly use melted ghee in a 1 to 1 ratio: for example, if a recipe calls for 1 cup of vegetable oil, you can substitute 1 cup of melted ghee or even 4th & Heart ghee oil. Do keep in mind, though, that our ghee does have a fairly assertive buttery flavor, so if the recipe calls for a neutral, flavorless oil, you may want to use 4th & Heart ghee oil instead.

    Can I use ghee spray in my baking?

    Absolutely! We highly recommend that you use 4th & Heart ghee spray for any and all baking needs. It works just like any other brand of cooking and baking spray, but it’s even better because of its high smoke point (485 degrees!) Alternatively, you can also grease any pots, pans, or baking dishes with room temperature ghee or melted ghee as well.

    Does ghee taste different than butter?

    Because ghee is made by cooking butter to the point of separating milk solids, it has a slightly more concentrated butter flavor, which is perfect for baked goods! For pie crusts, cookies, muffins, and just about everything else, part of their delicious charm is that hint of buttery goodness that lingers after every bite. If you’re sensitive to lactose, ghee is a perfect substitute for butter because you can achieve the same amazing flavor in any baked goods without the lactose!

    Ultimately, if you have any trepidation about using ghee in your baking, why not pick up a jar of 4th & Heart ghee and try it yourself? It couldn’t be easier (or more delicious), and we’re confident that you’ll become a ghee-baking convert! Here are a few of our favorite baking recipes that feature ghee:

    Classic Chocolate Chip Cookies by @ fourthandheart

    Arguably the greatest dessert of all time, 4th & Heart style! We use our grass-fed ghee instead of butter for a lactose-free, extra buttery chocolate chip cookie that will rock your world! If you’re feeling like you want to add even more flavor, why not try this recipe with our Vanilla Bean ghee, or even Chocti?

    Chocolate Babka by @ fourthandheart

    We love a dessert that also doubles as a breakfast (or really, for any time of day), and this recipe is just that! Swirls of chocolate and delicious brioche combine for a divine baked treat that will have you coming back for seconds and thirds. You may want to double this recipe, because it disappears fast!

    Healthy Banana Walnut Muffins by @ fourthandheart

    Portable breakfasts are roaring back now that people are starting to commute again, and this healthy (but no less delicious) and filling breakfast fits the bill perfectly! These yummy, buttery muffins are just what you need to kickstart your day with tons of flavor and nutrients—plus, they’re kid friendly, too!

    Chai Spiced Carrot Cake Loaf with Cream Cheese Frosting by @ fourthandheart

    This loaf absolutely screams autumn, and we know that we’ll be making it all season long! We didn’t think that carrot cake could get any better, but we stand corrected: the addition of chai takes this classic dessert to a whole new level. This is a perfect snacking loaf for absolutely any time of day (in the morning with coffee, as an afternoon pick me up, or in the evening after dinner), and we know that you’ll be making this recipe over and over again just like us!

    How to use ghee in cooking

    Printer Friendly Version

    Ghee can be used in place of butter and is an ideal cooking oil, as it does not burn unless heated excessively. It makes a wonderful body oil for massage and can serve as a base for herbal ointments (for burns, skin rashes, etc.) and can even be used for lamps, with wicks made from cotton balls.

    Ghee is a digestive. It helps to improve absorption and assimilation. It nourishes ojas, tejas and prana. It is good for improving memory and lubricates the connective tissue. Ghee makes the body flexible and, in small doses, is tridoshic. Ghee is a yogavahi—a catalytic agent that carries the medicinal properties of herbs into the seven dhatus or tissues of the body. Ghee pacifies pitta and vata and is acceptable, in moderation, for kapha. Persons who already have high cholesterol or suffer from obesity should be cautious in using ghee. Ghee is not to be used when there are high ama (toxic) conditions.

    Ingredients

    How to use ghee in cooking1 pound unsalted butter

    Preparation

    Put the butter in a heavy, medium-sized pan. Turn the heat on to medium until the butter melts.

    Turn down the heat until the butter just boils and continue to cook at this heat. Do not cover the pot. The butter will foam and sputter while it cooks. Whitish curds will begin to form on the bottom of the pot. The butter will begin to smell like popcorn after a while and turn a lovely golden color. Keep a close watch on the ghee, as it can easily burn. After a while it will become a clear, golden color. You will have to take a clean, dry spoon to move away some of the foam on top in order to see if the ghee is clear all the way through to the bottom. When it is clear and has stopped sputtering and making noise, then it needs to be taken off the heat. Let it cool until just warm. Pour it through a fine sieve or layers of cheesecloth into a clean, dry glass container with a tight lid. Discard the curds at the bottom of the saucepan. The ghee is burned if it has a nutty smell and is slightly brown.

    1 pound of butter takes about 15 minutes of cooking time. The more butter you are using, the more time it will take.

    Ghee can be kept on the kitchen shelf, covered. It does not need refrigeration. The medicinal properties are said to improve with age. Don’t ladle out the ghee with a wet spoon or allow any water to get into the container, as this will create conditions for bacteria to grow and spoil the ghee.

    Two pounds of butter will fill a quart jar with ghee.

    Table of Contents

    Ghee. Ghee is a type of clarified butter with an aromatic and nutty taste. In baked goods for which a strong, buttery flavor is desirable, it can replace butter at a 1:1 ratio. Substituting ghee for butter works best with items that are baked at high temperatures and served warm, such as breads and cookies.

    Should I use ghee instead of butter?

    Yes, you can. In fact, ghee is a much better option than butter due to the healthy vitamins and fats it contains. If you are looking at using ghee in baking lasagnas or any type of savory casseroles, ghee is a perfect and a healthier replacement to butter. Although, ghee has a much nuttier flavour than butter.

    How can I use ghee instead of butter?

    Along with its buttery taste, ghee has a distinct roasted, nutty, fragrance. It’s an easy, tasty swap for butter or olive oil in the sauté pan; try ghee for frying eggs and bread, tart rye crepes, or zucchini fritters.

    Is ghee better than butter in baking?

    Ghee is preferable to both cooking oil and butter for high heat cooking because of that 450 degree smoke point. Ghee has a very pure butter flavor—which is strong and delicious—but doesn’t have that creamy taste that whole butter does. Butter’s creamier texture and flavor is a really nice choice for baked goods.

    Can I substitute ghee for butter in cake?

    Ghee. Ghee is a type of clarified butter with an aromatic and nutty taste. In baked goods for which a strong, buttery flavor is desirable, it can replace butter at a 1:1 ratio. Substituting ghee for butter works best with items that are baked at high temperatures and served warm, such as breads and cookies.

    What is the disadvantage of ghee?

    The main disadvantage of ghee is consuming unnecessary amount of ghee so it rapidly increase the weight of the body which creates several diseases. It increases the cholesterol due to the obesity. Ghee is also harmful for pregnant ladies due to increases in the weight.

    Can I use ghee instead of butter in baking cookies?

    In most cases, yes. Ghee can substitute butter with equal proportions or slight alterations in most recipes. However, the soft consistency of ghee due to its low melting point might have its drawbacks. Some baking techniques might not work with ghee.

    Can you use ghee instead of butter in cookies?

    Yes—but expect your baked goods to be crispier. Ghee is made by using heat to remove milk solids and most of the water from butterfat. Because it contains more fat than butter, use 25 percent less ghee than butter, and if your batter seems dry, add a little water until you get the desired consistency.

    Does ghee taste LIke butter?

    How does it taste? Ghee tends to be one of those hyperbole-inducing foods, like macarons and gelato, that people describe quite dramatically as being “heavenly” or the “best thing ever.” In actuality, ghee tastes like a cleaner, richer, more decadent version of butter itself – more buttery butter, if you will.

    Can you substitute ghee for butter in banana bread?

    Ghee is a type of clarified butter that is heated and reduced. It can last for months, unrefrigerated, though you would want to try and use it up within 9 months… which shouldn’t be hard, since you can substitute it for butter or any cooking oil on a 1:1 ratio.

    Can we use ghee instead of oil in cake?

    Substitute one cup of ghee for one cup of vegetable oil. Ghee is clarified butter, which means the milk solids and water have been removed.

    Can I use ghee instead of butter in pie crust?

    The bottom line? Substituting ghee or clarified butter for shortening in pie crusts will deliver a tender, flaky crust with a richer, more buttery flavor; just be aware that it will be a bit greasier and in some cases the crust might puff up slightly.

    How much ghee do you get from a pound of butter?

    When making clarified butter always start with at least 25% more unsalted butter than the amount of clarified butter needed, as the volume is reduced during the melting and straining process. 1 pound of butter = about 1 1/2 cups clarified butter or ghee.

    Can you use ghee in brownies?

    Think regular brownies but packed with all the good fats, healthy nutrients and antioxidants that come in ghee! It not only makes for the fudgiest, most delicious brownies ever but these brownies are packed with all the healthy benefits that come with ghee!Feb 8, 2019.

    What is the healthiest alternative to butter?

    9 healthful substitutes for butter Olive oil. Ghee. Greek yogurt. Avocado. Pumpkin purée. Mashed bananas. Coconut oil. Applesauce.

    Is ghee an inflammatory food?

    Ghee has anti-inflammatory properties. It can be used to treat burns and swelling. Butyrate is a kind of fatty acid in ghee, which has been linked to an immune system response linked to inflammation. These nutrients can together be beneficial for strengthening your immunity and keeping you disease-free.

    Does ghee increase belly fat?

    Though the CLA in ghee has been shown to reduce weight gain in some people, it is also a calorie-dense and fat-rich food. Despite its health benefits, consuming too much ghee can lead to increased weight gain and elevate the risk of obesity.

    Is ghee healthier than olive oil?

    A tablespoon of ghee has the same number of calories (120) and fat grams (14) as olive oil. In order to answer our questions, we have to understand the different fatty acids that each contains, but rest assured that both olive and ghee are valuable and healthy, and can be included on a daily basis.

    Shopping Cart

    Your cart is currently empty.

    Enable cookies to use the shopping cart

    How to use ghee in cooking

    You Already Know How to Cook with Ghee

    Hello ghee lovers and new ghee users alike! Well, the title says it all. The great news about ghee is that if you’ve ever cooked with butter, olive oil, avocado oil, coconut oil, (or really, any cooking fat), then you already know how to cook with ghee!

    Ghee can be used in place of butter or oil with a 1:1 ratio, which means that however much of a cooking oil you’d use, use that exact amount of ghee instead. For example, if a recipe calls for 3 tablespoons of olive oil, you can sub in 3 tablespoons of 4th & Heart Ghee or Ghee Oil in its place!

    Using ghee is a perfect (and lactose-free!) way to incorporate extra flavor, vitamins + micronutrients, and healthy fats that your body craves! Plus, ghee’s high smoke point of 485ºF allows you to cook on higher heat without the worry of your oil or butter burning.

    To shed some light on ways you can begin cooking with ghee, here’s what we at 4th & Heart would use it for on any given day:

    • For breakfast: to fry or scramble eggs, top toast or baked goods, or blended into your favorite morning beverage
    • For lunch or mid-day: a pick-me-up ghee coffee or matcha, searing a chicken breast, or using our ghee oil as a vinaigrette base for a salad
    • For dinner: try making some of the many recipes on our blog, such as Shrimp Scampi with Garlicky Green Beans , or Keto Greek Salmon & Cauliflower Rice Bowl
    • For dessert: try subbing our Vanilla Bean Ghee for butter in our Classic Chocolate Chip Cookies (or any baking recipe, really), dipping fruit in warmed Chocti, or making a delicious cake or loaf, like our favorite Chai Spiced Carrot Cake Loaf !

    There are truly so many ways to incorporate any and all of our ghee products into your everyday cooking, and we promise that your cooking (and body!) will be all the better for it!

    How to use ghee in cooking

    when you have backyard chickens you discover the divine pleasure of a perfectly cooked, fried egg straight out of the nesting box. and by perfectly cooked, i mean crispy edges with tender whites ( not snotty! not overcooked! ) and runny yolks. it’s a tough trick to get the trifecta of crispy, tender and runny and i could never get it consistently until i read this cooks illustrated fried egg recipe ( great magazine, highly recommended ).

    it explains that yolks and whites set at different temperatures. yolks set at 158F and whites set at 180F, so the trick is getting the whites to cook before the yolks. you can get the whites to set first using the “hot and fast” method by using a fat with a high smoke point. drop the eggs in a sizzling hot, hot, hot pan and the whites set before the yolks know what hit ’em.

    How to use ghee in cooking

    the cooks illustrated recipe recommends using a vegetable oil, but what has a higher smoke point than almost any vegetable oil and has a delicious buttery taste that you want with a fried egg? ghee ( aka clarified butter )! throw in a few tablespoons of butter into the pan right as you add the eggs to add a boost of extra butteryness. awesome eggs every time.

    you can take this general philosophy to its logical conclusion and jump right on the crispy egg train.

    ingredients
    2T purity farms organic ghee
    2T organic valley cultured butter
    2 organic valley eggs ( or from the backyard if you’re that lucky )
    salt and pepper

    directions
    – preheat ghee in skillet on low heat for 5 minutes
    – crack 2 eggs in bowl and season with salt and pepper
    – turn up heat to medium-high until sizzling hot ( and! i! mean! sizzling! )
    – add butter and quickly swirl around pan ( this is a little tricy because you don’t want to burn the butter. act fast and don’t burn yourself ).
    – pour eggs from bowl into skillet ( they should just about explode when they hit the oil )
    – cover skillet and cook for 1 minute ( that’s right, just 1 minute )
    – remove from heat and let stand covered – about 30 seconds will get you runny yolks, 60 seconds will get you soft set yolks and a few minutes will yield medium set yolks.

    i typically let sit until the layer surrounding the yolk turns white which is a good indicator the whites are completely done and i avoid serving snotty eggs. at that point the yolks are right between runny and very soft-set.

    Leave a Reply Cancel reply

    i’m not sure how to square these findings with the fact that i’ve long said that in a parallel universe very close to our own i live alone in cabin in the middle of nowhere writing manifestos: “The effect of population density on life satisfaction was therefore more than twice as large for low-IQ individuals than for high-IQ individuals,” they found. And “more intelligent individuals were actually less satisfied with life if they socialized with their friends more frequently.”

    the heart warming fable of thanksgiving, unsurprisingly, ends up being a whole lot more complicated than some of us were taught and answers the nagging question of how squanto spoke perfect english when the pilgrims arrived and what was happening during the 100 year interim between columbus and the pilgrims ( spoiler: it involves human trafficking, enslavement and villages being wiped out ). and if you’re a stickler for tradition, you should put ditch the turkey and cranberry sauce for salted pork and olives since the spanyiards were the first to celebrate thanksgiving 50 years before the pilgrims.

    “…researchers from a Bosch startup called Deepfield Robotics presented a paper on “Vision-Based High-Speed Manipulation for Robotic Ultra-Precise Weed Control,” which has like four distinct exciting-sounding phrases in it.” IEEE Spectrum

    “We learned that, if we’re not the father of ISIS, the United States is at least some sort of uncle.” cracked

    after updating to iOS 9 and el capitan i’ve been having troubles synching photos from my iphone to my macbook air. the mac would recognize the iphone but no photos would show up in the photos application or image capture. it was driving me nuts. turns out, if you have non-apple services like dropbox running that sync your photos to non-icloud services you have to turn them off.

    having run a half a dozen marathons, i can’t imagine finishing in 3:05. even more unimaginable in full amish garb so kudos to leroy stolzfus. the whole article is great read but now i want to know more of the backstory on why he started to run: “A few years ago, Stolzfus got “involved with some stuff” he said he shouldn’t have. His brother-in-law suggested he start running instead when he was tempted. He took the suggestion to heart, and went out for a run.”

    i think i know what some of you will be getting for christmas! dumb cuneiform creates clay tablets of tweets. you’ll have big fun guessing if you got a trump tweet or a neal degrease tyson tweet. [ via Waxy links ]

    huh, who knew edward tufte has a farm with 234-acres of landscape sculpture fields that he opens to the public once a year. i’d love to make a trip. and i also love the article’s description of tufte, “[he] is also known as a genius of data visualization, professor emeritus of political science, statistics, and computer science at Yale, an author of books on information design, and a hater of PowerPoint.

    so very, very true. “To run five or ten or twenty-six miles is, as much as anything else, to engage in a sustained way with the deep strangeness that is the human mind.”

    “The Chagossian people have a word, in their Creole language, for heartbreak: sagren. It is a profound sorrow which refers to the loss of a home, and the impossibility of returning to it. As we build new worlds with our technologies, knitted from fiber-optic light and lines of code, it is incumbent on us to ensure it does not reproduce the erasures and abuses of the old, but properly accounts for the rights and liberties of every one of us.” citizen-ex

    snowdeal

    husband. dad. organic valley brand manager. been writing stories on the web since 2000.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Learn the A Major scale on guitar and get started with exercises to build your skills. Practice the scale positions with diagrams and tabs.

    By Ben Nemeroff

    Lesson: Playing the A Major Scale on Guitar

    Playing the A major scale is great exercise, whether you’re new to guitar or you’ve been playing for years. The A major scale turns up in many genres of music, so knowing these notes will often come in handy on your musical journey.

    Additionally, learning your major scales is an excellent way to train your ear and get more familiar with your instrument, even if you don’t know much about music theory yet.

    In this lesson, we’ll look at what notes make up the A major scale and learn how to play this scale in two positions. Finally, we’ll go over some scale exercises you can do to add this important scale to your guitar practice routine. Ready to get started?

    Notes in the A Major Scale

    There are seven notes in the A major scale:

    • A
    • B
    • C#
    • D
    • E
    • F#
    • G#

    The first note, A, is the root note of the scale. If you were building an A major chord, you would combine the root note A with the major third C# and the perfect fifth E.

    You can play the A major scale in many different places on the fretboard of your guitar. No matter where you start, the A major scale will always contain these same seven notes.

    Now, let’s take a look at the different positions and finger placements you’ll need to learn in order to play the A major scale on the guitar.

    A Major Scale Positions

    Guitar scale diagrams can be a helpful tool when you’re learning to play the A major scale. These diagrams represent the fretboard of your guitar. In the diagrams below, each dot shows you which note you’ll play on a specific fret and string. If you see a dot with a note above the string, play the string in an open position. The yellow dots indicate the root note of the scale. In this case, that root note is A.

    A Major Scale – Open Position

    To properly play the A major scale in open position, use your index finger to play notes on the first fret, your middle finger for notes on the second, your ring finger for notes on the third, and your pinky for notes on the fourth.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale – 4th Position

    Next, you’ll move your hand up so that your index finger is on the fourth fret to play the A major scale in 4th position. This scale starts with your middle finger on the fifth fret of the E string. Use your ring finger for notes on the sixth fret and your pinky finger for notes on the seventh fret.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale Tabs

    Next, we’re going to take a second look at the A major scale in open and fourth position. However, this time we’ll rely on a different method of notation. Unlike guitar scale diagrams, which lay out all the notes in a scale at once, guitar tabs show you which notes to play in what order.

    You might find that you prefer using tabs over diagrams, or vice versa, and that’s totally fine. Whichever form of notation you prefer, it’s still important to understand both. They are both used rather commonly, so learning to play with both is a good practice that will help ensure you’re not limited as you continue studying guitar.

    With that said, let’s take a look at guitar tabs for both of the scales we just studied.

    Open Position

    To play the A major scale in the open position, start by playing an open note on your A string, then place your middle finger on the second fret of that string. Keep following the tab to complete playing the scale.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    4th Position

    To play the A major scale in fourth position, start with your middle finger on the fifth fret of your low E string. Use your index finger for notes on the fourth fret, your ring finger for notes on the sixth fret, and your pinky finger for notes on the seventh fret. Follow the tab to play this scale in fourth position.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale Exercises

    If you want to memorize and master the A major scale, the best way to do it is to play the scale over and over. Don’t rush! Instead, make sure that each note is fretted cleanly and that you’re using the proper finger placement. As your fingers get stronger and the pattern of the scale becomes more familiar, you can start to play a little faster. Try using a metronome as you practice playing scales to help you keep time while you play.

    You might also like to play the two A major scale positions you’ve learned, switching back and forth between them. As you play, listen to the differences in pitch as you play the same notes on different spots on the fretboard.

    Additionally, once you’ve mastered the scales with your fretting hand, your scales are a great time to practice technique with your picking hand. Try using your scale practice to work on your alternate picking technique. If alternate picking isn’t challenging enough, try playing your scales with a syncopated rhythm. Practice your scales regularly, and you’re sure to see improvements in your finger strength and dexterity, and you’ll be training your ears too. Keep playing and keep practicing your scales with a free trial of Fender Play.

    Learn how to build the major scale on guitar with access to free scale lessons, and get an intro to learning scale patterns across the fretboard.

    By Ben Nemeroff

    Learn the Major Scale on Guitar

    A scale is a sequence of notes in ascending or descending order. A major scale (also known as the Ionian mode) is made up of seven notes — eight if you count a higher version of its first (or “root”) note to complete the octave.

    The major scale is at the heart of most popular music. Not only can you use the major scale to learn to play some of your favorite songs, but once you master it, you can use it to improvise guitar solos or write your own songs.

    All major scales use the same scale formula and intervals. Once you learn the major scale pattern, you can apply it to any major scale, regardless of its root note. Ready to learn more? Let’s get started!

    Major Scale Notes & Intervals on Guitar

    In order to learn how to build a major scale in any key, you need to learn about the intervals between each of the notes on the scale. Intervals are another name for the difference in pitch between two adjacent notes.

    Even though there are seven notes in any given scale, each note is not always a full step higher than the one before it. Some rules apply in terms of notes on the scale. Most notes have a full sonic step in between them. However, there are a few that have a half-step between them.

    In order to play a major scale, you start on the 1st (or root) note of a scale, then ascend by a:

    • Whole step
    • Whole step
    • Half step
    • Whole step
    • Whole step
    • Whole step
    • Half step

    Let’s use the C major scale as an example since it has no sharps or flats:

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    There is always a half-step between E and F, as well as B and C in the C major scale.

    Now that, like Rick Astley, you know the rules (and so do I), you can use this formula for intervals to help you learn the notes contained in any major scale.

    More Major Scales on Guitar

    Looking to learn all twelve major scales on the guitar? Start with these free lessons for commonly-used major scales. Each lesson will guide you, step-by-step, through learning the notes of each scale and show you how to play them in a few positions.

    If you have the hang of playing the scales above, you can get multiple patterns of all twelve major scales in the Fender Tune Player Pack. The Player Pack is an add-on to the Fender Tune app (on iPhone and Android) that gives you thousands of chord and scale diagrams at your fingertips.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    CAGED System: A Method for Learning Scale Patterns and Positions

    Once you’ve learned how to play some common major scales on the guitar, you may want to take things one step further. There are certain musical concepts that will help you to better grasp the guitar fretboard as a whole vs. learning one-off scale patterns.

    If you put in the work to understand these concepts, you’ll no longer be tied to playing the C major scale and others in one particular way. You’ll be able to play them fluently across the fretboard in various positions.

    One of those concepts is the CAGED system. The CAGED system is a chord shaped-based approach to further understand the guitar fretboard.

    In this clip from the “CAGED: 5 Easy Chords To Unlock Your Fretboard” Fender Play LIVE episode, Dr. Molly Miller and host Eugene Edwards explain the CAGED system and how it’s used by guitarists to learn the fretboard.

    We call the system “CAGED” because we base everything on five simple, open position chord shapes:

    1. C (Pattern 1)
    2. A (Pattern 2)
    3. G (Pattern 3)
    4. E (Pattern 4)
    5. D (Pattern 5)

    Once you have an understanding of these chord shapes, we can move them OUT of open position and into moveable barre chord shapes. From there, you can then play those shapes anywhere on the neck of the guitar.

    The CAGED system is a big concept—so we recommend taking it one step at a time. Check out the CAGED System: Major Scales collection in Fender Play for an in-depth course into the CAGED system.

    Shapes As Guide Posts

    On Fender Play LIVE, Dr. Molly Miller explains how shapes can be used as guide posts.

    I Fought the Law with CAGED Chords

    Dr. Molly Miller plays a unique version of “I Fought The Law” using CAGED chords.

    Master Major Scales With Fender Play

    It takes time and practice to learn to play the guitar. Learning to play major guitar scales is a fundamental building block in your guitar education — and gives you the tools you need to learn to play songs. Once you’ve gotten the hang of playing a few major scales, get started with a free trial of Fender Play. You can learn individual major scales as well as musical concepts like the CAGED system that will help you level up as a player. Then, the best part is that you can apply those learnings to your favorite songs. Play on!

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The A Major scale contains the following notes:

    • A – B – C# – D – E – F# – G #

    The A Major scale is one of the most popular guitar scales. In this lesson you will learn how to play the A Major scale in 5 different positions on the guitar, as well as the open position.

    If you have read the posts on understanding major scales, you should be familiar with how Major scales work. If you are interested in learning about modes and guitar scales, it should be pointed out that the A major scale is effectively the same scale as the A ionian scale. For the purpose of the series of lessons on guitar modes, we are going to treat A ionian and A Major as identical scales (which they are).

    The A Major scale is actually one of the most common scales that guitarists learn. The Major scale in general is a very important scale, because many other scales are derived from it. Perhaps because of the letter ‘A’, being the first in the alphabet, many people choose the A Major scale as the first Major scale to start with.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale In The Open Position

    Firstly, let’s look at the A Major scale in the open position. The open position simply means that there is at least one open string involved, when playing the scale. Here it is:

    How to play the a major guitar scale How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale CAGED Positions

    There are five more positions, based on the CAGED system. Remember these positions are movable, which means that you can move them along the fretboard if you want to change keys.

    Here are the 5 CAGED positions for the A Major scale on the guitar (notes and tabs).

    A Major Scale in the 1st Position (lowest fret is 1)

    How to play the a major guitar scale How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale in the 4th Position (lowest fret is 4)

    How to play the a major guitar scale How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale in the 5th Position (lowest fret is 5)

    How to play the a major guitar scale How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale in the 9th Position (lowest fret is 9)

    How to play the a major guitar scale How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Scale in the 10th Position (lowest fret is 10)

    How to play the a major guitar scale How to play the a major guitar scale

    How To Practise The A Major Scale

    The best way to practise the A Major scale is to memorise the positions along the fretboard and be able to play them in time, with a metronome.

    Which Chords Work With the A Major Scale?

    For the purpose of improvising, the A Major scale can be used over the A Major chord, the A Major 7 chord, as well as other chords within the key of A Major:

    Modes Of The A Major Scale

    There are 7 modes in the key of A. We can produce these modes by playing the notes of the A Major scale, while starting on different notes of the scale. For example, to play the B dorian mode, we start on the note B and then play the notes of the A Major scale. To play the C# phrygian mode, we start on the note C# and then play through the notes of the A Major scale.

    Here are the 7 modes in the key of A Major:

    • A Ionian (A Major)
    • B Dorian
    • C# Phrygian
    • D Lydian
    • E Mixolydian
    • F# Aeolian
    • G# Locrian

    Welcome to video three of the Lead Guitar Quick-Start Series. In this lesson we cover the major scale, which is the foundation for the other scales and chords you’ll learn as a guitarist. We’ll go over the mechanics and memorization of the major scale, and you’ll start to practice this scale shape with a jam track.

    Before we start learning the major scale, let’s look at how to read a scale diagram. Scale diagrams have six vertical lines, and the line on the very left represents the low E string and the line on the right represents the high E string. The horizontal lines of the diagram represent the frets.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    You’ll see that the scale diagram has many dots on it, and some dots are filled in while the rest are not. The dots that are filled in are the root notes for the scale you’re playing. Since the scale we are learning now is the G major scale, these root notes are all G notes. The circles that are not filled in are simply the rest of the notes in the scale.

    Inside the circle you’ll see a number, which represents which finger you should play the note with. That brings us back to the designated finger concept, which I mentioned in the first video. This technique means that you will have one finger designated to each fret. With the G major scale, your first finger will play any notes on the second fret, your second finger will play notes on the third fret, and so on.

    The major scale has seven notes, but looking at the scale diagram, you’re probably wondering why there are more than seven notes in this scale shape. Essentially, once you’ve played the first seven notes in the scale, you’re going to repeat those notes in a higher octave.

    Okay, let’s jump into this scale shape. The first note you’ll play is the lowest note of the scale, the G root note. Play this note with your second finger on the low E string on the third fret. The second note is on the fifth fret, and you’ll play this with your fourth finger.

    Now we’ll move to the second string, where your first finger will be on the second fret, then second finger on the third fret, and your fourth finger on the fifth fret. Those are the three notes on the A string. After trying out the first two strings of this scale, you’re already seeing how the designated finger concept kicks in.

    Take a moment here to practice the notes on these two strings to get really comfortable with them, and like I did in the video, practice going both up and down the scale.

    Now let’s add in the notes from the third string. We’ve got the first finger on the second fret, third finger on the fourth fret, and fourth finger on the fifth fret. Adding in these three notes on the D string completes the seven notes of the first octave, and brings us to the next G root note. First try working on these three notes, and then add them into the rest of the scale.

    Moving to the next octave, let’s look at the notes on the fourth string. The G string is easy because the pattern is the same as the D string you just learned. It’s the first finger on the second fret, third finger on the fourth fret, and fourth finger on the fifth fret again. Noticing similarities and patterns like this in scales will make memorizing the scales easier for you as you learn.

    Moving on to the fifth string, the B string only has two notes. Second finger on the third fret and fourth finger on the fifth fret. As usual, get comfortable with those two notes and then practice them with the rest of the scale.

    We’ll finish the scale with the last string. On the high E string there are three notes. First finger on the second fret, second finger on the third fret, and fourth finger on the fifth fret.

    Now that you’ve seen the entire major scale, work on memorizing the scale shape and getting comfortable with the notes. Don’t worry about learning it as quickly as this video because you can take your time to practice the scale as much as you need to.

    Something else I want you to realize is this scale is movable. If I take the G major scale shape and move it to another set of root notes, it becomes another scale. For example, if I move up two frets, it becomes an A major scale using the same shape as the G major. Going forward, it will be helpful for you to memorize where the root notes of scales are.

    I’ve made a jam track so you can work on this major scale with some real music behind you. Pull up the jam track I’ve given you and start using the track like metronome to get comfortable with your scale shape. Once you’re comfortable, you can start to emphasize the root notes of the scale by starting, ending, or even pausing on the root notes when playing. After you’ve got the scale shape and root notes down, you can start to improvise and make up your your own melodies and solos using the G major scale. Take a look at the video for an example.

    As you practice, don’t forget about the universal tips we’ve gone through in previous lessons, and remember to practice your scale along with real music using the jam track or other songs.

    In the next lesson of the Lead Guitar Quick-Start Series, we’re going to learn another important scale, the major pentatonic scale. If you have any questions in the meantime leave a comment below. See you in the next lesson.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Enter your email address below to get Ayla’s free 6 lesson plan and start playing songs on the acoustic guitar in no time!

    Among all the major chords, A major is one of the most used in popular music. It’s normally used in the genres of rock, blues, pop, and even jazz!

    The sound it produces is cheerful. However, when we combine it with other chords such as B minor, C# minor, and E major, we can create chord progressions that sound interesting. These chords, among others like D major, F# minor, and G# diminished belong to the scale of chords that you can play if you’re on the key of A major.

    A major is one of the first chords every guitarist should learn due to its massive use in popular music, and its simplicity. Today, we will show you the traditional way to play this fairly easy chord, and some of the variations you can try if you don’t feel like using the standard chord shape everyone uses. Let’s dive deep into how to play the different A major chord shapes!

    Standard A Major Chord Shape

    This shape is fairly easy to play, and even easier to learn! You’ll only need your first three fingers, and you’ll place them exactly on the same fret, but on different strings. You can use two different finger placements to play this chord, but we encourage you to learn the first one since it’s much more comfortable on the fingers and produces a better sound. Follow the next images to learn how to play the A major chord:

    How to play the a major guitar scaleHow to play the a major guitar scale

    Both versions sound the same, and sometimes it feels easier transitioning to the second version of this chord. The crucial aspect of the first version is that it produces better sound when played. Whether you’d like to learn how to play the first or the second version, you’re still going to be playing the same notes in the same order!

    A Major Triads

    There are many ways in which you can play the A major chord. There are different shapes and note positionings in which you can play the A major chord. All the chords we’ll show you here are the triad variations, and each of these has a different flavor. Use the following images to learn how to play the A major triads:

    How to play the a major guitar scaleHow to play the a major guitar scale

    How to play the a major guitar scaleHow to play the a major guitar scale

    How to play the a major guitar scaleHow to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major Barre Chord Shapes

    Barre Chords might be challenging for some beginner guitar players, but you can learn how to play them in no time! To barre the strings, you have to press with the side of your index finger the frets in which you’d like to play those notes. After that, you place the other fingers where they need to be to play the chord, and voila!

    Follow these images to play the two A major barre chord shapes:

    The A Major Pentatonic scale is probably a bit less well known than its Minor Pentatonic relative. But it is equally as useful, so it is well worth learning it and adding it to your guitar tool box.

    In this lesson we will learn how to play the 1st of 5 positions that we can use to play the scale all over the guitar.

    What is the Major Pentatonic scale used for?

    The major pentatonic scale has loads of uses. It can be used over major chord progressions and is used extensively in Blues, Rock and Country and Jazz music.

    Players such as Jimi Hendrix used it a lot in his playing. It has a nice, bright sound and Hendrix used it a lot to embellish his chords, mixing in notes of the scale with his chords to add that extra layer to his playing.

    What are the 5 notes in the Major Pentatonic scale?

    The Major Pentatonic scale comes directly from the major scale, but we remove 2 of the notes. So the scale is made up of 5 notes (Penta) compared to the 7 notes of the major scale.

    The easiest way to view the is to think of it as the major scale without the 4th & 7th notes. We can see the formula for the scale below.

    Major Scale Formula – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

    Major Pentatonic Formula – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

    If you aren’t familiar with the major scale, I’d suggest that you at least learn a basic understanding of it. I have a lesson on the major scale here.

    What are the notes of the A Major Pentatonic scale?

    So if we know that the A Major Pentatonic scale is the A Major scale without the 4th & 7th notes, we can work out that the notes of the scale are as below.

    A Major – A, B, C#,D, E, F#, G#

    A Major Pentatonic – A, B, C#, E, F#

    So now that we know the structure, let’s see how we put that onto the guitar.

    A Major Pentatonic position 1

    Show below is position 1 of the scale, which starts on the 5th fret of the 6th string. The blue dots indicate the root notes of the scale and the numbers represent which fingers are used to fret the notes.

    A Major Pentatonic Guitar Tab

    Below you will see the guitar tab for the first position of the scale in the diagram above. Play this scale up and down at least five times each time you practice it. You want to be able to play the scale without looking at the tab or scale diagram.

    Ok, so now you have all you need to get started playing the A major pentatonic scale. As mentioned earlier, we can use this scale to play over major chord progressions.

    Try playing it over the backing track below, or go and find or create your own backing tracks to jam along to.

    Moveable Pattern

    The pattern we learnt in this lesson is completely movable. So once you have learnt this pattern then you can use it to play over any key you want, you simply just move the shape so that the root notes line up with whatever key you want to play in. For example, if we wanted to use the shape in the key of G, we could move the shape to either the 3rd fret, or play it higher up the neck on the 15th fret.

    If you want to get really clever, you could try a call & response technique using both!

    The Major scale is one of the most essential scales you need to know on guitar. Every melodies, riff, or solo that you hear comes from a scale. There are a variety of scales to learn in music but the Major scale should be your foundation.

    Although the Major scale can be played in one position of the guitar, the same set of notes can be played on different areas of the fretboard. That being said, we are going to cover the 5 different shapes you need to learn to play the Major scale throughout the fretboard.

    This will help you to connect your understanding of the fretboard and give you the freedom and flexiblity to explore different ideas without limiting yourself to one position.

    Before learning the 5 shapes of a Major scale, let’s first go over some music theory to help you find the notes of any Major scale.

    Formula for the Major Scale

    The Major scale is made up of 7 notes. There is a whole and half step formula we can use to find the distance between the notes which make up a Major scale. The Major scale formula is whole, whole, half step and then whole, whole, whole, half step which you can see in the chart below. For example, the C Major scale would have the notes C, D, E, F, G, A, and B.

    Major scale examples

    Here are some different Major scales using the whole and half step formula below in music notation with guitar tabs and audio. We’ll go into more detail on using the right fingering for a scale later in this post.

    C Major scale

    Ab Major scale

    E Major scale

    Now that you know the theory behind what makes up a Major scale, let’s start learning the 5 shapes you can use for playing the scale on the fretboard.

    The 5 Major scale shapes

    We can break down the Major scale into five different sections of the guitar fretboard. You can play these shapes starting on any root note.

    How to read the scale charts

    For the charts below, the lowest horizontal line represents the thickest string (Low E). The top horizontal line represents the thinnest string (high E).

    The green circles represent the root note of the Major scale and the blue notes are every scale note in between. Also, the numbers inside the circles represent the suggested fingering to use on your fretting hand.

    If needed, check out how to read guitar notation symbols.

    Shape 1

    Shape 2

    Shape 3

    Shape 4

    Shape 5

    One thing to note about using these shapes is that whenever you have scales that use notes with open strings, you have to rearrange your fingers to play the shape. For example, if the shape uses the fingering 1, 3, and 4 on one string, you can play (open string), 1 and 3 instead.

    Although you will need to change some fingerings if you include open strings, once you move over to the next shape where you’re fretting all the notes, you will get back to the original shapes we covered.

    3 tips for memorizing the Major scale shapes

    Here are 3 quick tips to help you memorize the 5 Major scale shapes.

    1) Master one shape at a time

    The way I recommend learning and memorizing any scale is to start memorizing one particular shape that feels most comfortable for you. Try to really get the shape under your fingers to the point where you don’t have to look at the chart. The first shape you master will be your guide to learn the other shapes around it.

    2) Look for fingering patterns

    Try to think of patterns such as what strings repeat the same fingering within a shape.

    Quick tip: The notes on the first and sixth string will always be the same.

    For example, in shape 3 we see that the 1st, 2nd, and 6th string follow a 1, 2, and 4 finger pattern. The 4th and 5th string follow a 1, 3, and 4 finger pattern. The 3rd string has the unique finger pattern of fingers 1 and 3. This is one helpful way to approach learning specific scale shapes.

    3) Connect shapes around the ones you learned

    After getting one of the shapes down really well, either learn the shape that comes before or after it to see how the scale connects on the fretboard. Again, try to master one shape at a time and make sure you can play it without looking at the chart. This will make the process more approachable by breaking it down into smaller sections before moving on to the next shape.

    What to do after learning the Major scales shapes

    After getting comfortable with the minor scale shapes, try creating melodies or musical phrases with the notes in the scale. We don’t want to just play a scale mechanically but be able to make music with it as soon as possible.

    A way to do this is by first humming or singing a short melody line and then try figuring out what those notes are on your instrument. This is the first step to being able to improvise on your instrument. The goal is to try playing what you want to hear. To learn more about this you can also check out this post on how to develop ear training.

    You can also take a short melody or phrase and try shifting it to another key. You know you really learned the Major scale shapes if you can play them in any given key.

    You can also get more technical with these shapes and challenge yourself to play them in time with a metronome. Or you can play the scale in different sequences of 3 and 4 notes which I cover in this post about how to practice scales.

    Another fun challenge is to try playing a scale horizontally, meaning on one string. Even though you wouldn’t naturally play it this way, this is to check whether you know all the notes that are included in a scale you’re working on. Just go through one string at a time and start playing the notes consecutively.

    For example, if your learning the C Major scale, you would play these notes on the 6th string:

    What is a minor scale?

    Did you know that by learning the Major scale shapes you actually end up learning the minor scale as well? All you have to do is simply start on the 6th degree of the Major scale and play the same set of notes. When you start and end on the 6th degree, you will hear the same set of notes in a different perspective which we call a minor scale.

    The whole and half step formula gets shifted and it looks like this:

    Wrapping things up

    Learning the 5 Major scale shapes will help you to gain a better understanding of the guitar as you learn to play the same set of notes throughout the fretboard. It’s easy to stick to a comfort zone or one area of the guitar but learning these shapes will definitely help you approach the instrument in a fresh, new way.

    The goal is to use these shapes to make music and be able to play single note phrases or melodies in a variety of ways. The scale shapes can help you create new ideas and allow you to play more comfortably when changing your range of notes or when playing in different keys.

    After learning the Major scale, try learning other scales like the blues scale or minor pentatonic scale.

    I hope you found this week’s content helpful so you can start applying it to your playing!

    To get the latest lessons and updates, subscribe here.

    Welcome to video four of the Lead Guitar Quick-Start Series. In this lesson, we’ll be learning the major pentatonic scale, which is very versatile and used in many music genres. We’ll also go over a muting technique in this lesson, so you can play a clean sound with every note.

    You’ll remember in the G major scale shape, there are seven notes repeated in multiple octaves. In the major pentatonic scale, we simply take two of those notes out of each octave. Essentially we’ll play the G major scale, but leave out the fourth and seventh note out.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Penta stands for five, meaning the pentatonic scale is a five-note scale. This scale shape will feel more even as you play it because there are two notes on every string. As we jump into this new scale, remember the universal guitar playing tips I’ve given you in other lessons.

    On the low E string, you’ll start with the G root note, which is your second finger on the third fret. Next place your fourth finger down on the fifth fret. You should be pretty comfortable with this since it’s no different from the beginning of the last major scale you learned.

    Moving to the A string, put your first finger down on the second fret, and then skip to hitting the fifth fret with your fourth finger. Take some time here to get the first four notes of the scale down, and remember to play the scale both up and down.

    Next up is the D string, which is the same pattern you learned with the notes on the A string. First finger on the second fret, and then fourth finger on the fifth fret. Remember that watching out for repeating patterns in your scales will help you learn the scale shapes.

    With the G string, start with your first finger on the second fret, and now use your third finger on the fourth fret. Now add these two notes to the rest of the scale to get comfortable with all the notes so far. Remember that you don’t have to get this down during the video – you can take a few days or weeks to get comfortable.

    It’s easy to finish up the scale from here, because it ends with another repeating pattern. The B and the high E string are going to follow the same pattern. Play your second finger on the third fret, fourth finger on the fifth fret on the B string, and then repeat those notes on the high E.

    As you start to play this scale shape over again, you’ll notice that you need to use your pinky finger a lot. Chances are your pinky finger is not very strong yet, but you have to strengthen it at some point, so now is a great chance to work on it.

    What’s awesome about the pentatonic scale is it always sounds good when played over the corresponding major chord. You can hear this in the video when I play this G major pentatonic scale and the major G chord together, it sounds great.

    As you become a stronger lead guitar player, you’ll need to learn some muting techniques. Being able to avoid the ringing noise of other strings you didn’t mean to play will help separate you from the average lead guitar player. As I play an example in the video, you can hear the ringing from open strings and it doesn’t sound very clean. There are two ways of muting the strings you’re not playing, and the first we’ll look at today is using your fretting hand.

    In the first lesson we talked about good finger posture and coming down on the strings with the tips of your fingers, but this won’t always be the case as a lead guitar player. If the tip of my finger is straight down on the E string, then I will lightly brush up against the A string too. Now if I accidentally strum the A string with my picking hand, the A string will be muted and won’t sound out.

    You can use this muting technique with every finger as you play through the scale, and this will help prevent any strings you accidentally hit from ringing out. In the next lesson, we’ll take a look at the other muting technique using your picking hand.

    Now you can pull up the same jam track from the last lesson and practice your major pentatonic scale shape. Get comfortable with the scale shape, emphasize the root notes, and then try creating your own licks and solos from the pentatonic scale. You can also start to mix in the G major scale from the third lesson, and go back and forth between the two scales. Check out my example in the video to hear what it will sound like, and then have fun trying it out.

    In the next lesson we’ll learn the minor pentatonic scale, which is quite possibly the most popular scale among guitar players. If you have any questions on the major pentatonic scale before you move to lesson five, be sure to comment below.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Enter your email address below to get Ayla’s free 6 lesson plan and start playing songs on the acoustic guitar in no time!

    In this lesson I gave you a general approach you should use when learning guitar scales as well as some examples on the major and minor pentatonic scale.

    In today’s lesson, we’ll go over how to learn and use the major scale on the guitar in greater detail.

    Let’s start with the theory behind the major scale.

    A scale is a linear pattern of notes made from a series of intervals. (Click here if you don’t know what an interval is).

    The major scale is made of a series of intervals of either a half step (one fret) or a whole step (two frets).

    The pattern that gives us the major scale is this:

    W-W-H-W-W-W-H (W = whole step, H = half step)

    Thus, the scale of C major is made of the notes C, D, E, F, G, A, and B.

    If we had to play these notes on the same string, we would get this pattern of notes:

    (If you haven’t memorized the name of the notes on the guitar fretboard yet, these are given above each note).

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Learning the major scale on the guitar

    Learning the scale in a linear way is good for explanation purposes, as well as a good exercise to learn each scale into more depth.

    It’s not the way you should learn guitar scales though since it’s impractical to use in real-life musical situations (unless you want to restrict yourself to playing on just one string).

    Scales are usually learned as patterns in different positions of the fretboard.

    There are two main ways major scale patterns are learned:

    1. The CAGED system.
    2. 3 Note per string patterns.

    The CAGED system is a bit easier to learn because it doesn’t involve finger stretches at any point.

    3 note per string patterns are much more efficient to use since they have the same number of notes on each string. This makes picking the notes easier, and particularly useful if you want to play the guitar fast.

    Since being able to stretch your fingers is something you will need to develop anyway, the CAGED system doesn’t really offer any advantage over the 3 note per string system, which is what I use the latter all the time, and encourage you to do so too.

    The following is the 3 note per string pattern for the scale of A major.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Memorize this scale pattern before proceeding with the rest of this lesson.

    Applying sequences to the major scale

    Scales are not different patterns of notes that are only useful as an exercise.

    Rather, they are patterns of notes that the great composers have found to work to create great music.

    Each scale has a different sound and a different flavour.

    Different scales are used in different contexts to create a different atmosphere.

    That said, the quality of the music is not determined by the scale, but by the way the composer uses it.

    Thus, I never suggest one should learn a lot of scales at once.
    Instead, learn a scale, milk it, and only then go for the next.

    I’ll give you a few examples of how to do this, the first being scale sequences.

    Playing scale sequences will not only help you learn the major scale more thoroughly, but they will also give you a lot of ideas when creating riffs, licks, and solos.

    Scale sequences also help train your ear. It’s very useful in improvisation to know how a note is going to sound before you even play it.

    In this exercise, rather than playing the notes of the major scale one after the other, we’re going to create a sequence that goes 1,2,3 – 2,3,4 – 3,4,5 – 4,5,6, etc.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    You can create scale sequences of your own (ex: 1,2,3,4 – 2,3,4,5 – 3,4,5,6 etc) or go to this lesson and apply the given scale sequences to the major scale.

    The next thing we’re going to do is to use the same scale sequence but change the rhythm, this time using triplets.

    This exercise demonstrates more of the options available to you when it comes to creating music, this time rhythmic options.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Using the major guitar scale to make music

    Though learning guitar scales does help you learn to play pieces of music faster, their most important benefit is to use them as a guide when creating your own.

    I use the word guidance rather than rules because there is no hard and fast rule that tells you that if you’re playing in the major scale, using notes outside that scale will sound wrong.

    As applied music theory expert Tommaso Zillio states: “There are no wrong notes. Only wrong resolutions

    This means that you can play a note outside the scale that will sound good when resolved to an accented note of the scale.

    That said, if you’re a beginner in using guitar scales to make music, I suggest you stick to the scale notes. Simply be aware that notes outside the scale are not wrong if used correctly.

    In the first example of using the major scale to create music, I’ve created a guitar riff made from notes of this scale, using the scale pattern given above.

    Notice that this riff makes use of guitar techniques like palm muting, vibrato and hammer ons.

    Being able to use these techniques and incorporating them into your music, will improve the quality of your guitar riffs, licks, and solos much more than learning a lot of scales.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Next, we’re going to use the major scale in the context of a guitar lick.

    What makes a lick different than a riff is that while a guitar riff is meant to be repeated, and serve as the engine of the music, guitar licks are meant to embellish the music with short melodies.

    The following is a guitar lick using notes from the major scale. The techniques used in this lick are slides and string bending.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The final thing we’ll do with the major scale in this lesson is compose a short 8-bar solo using it.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Conclusion: Where to go from here

    The next thing to do to really master the major scale on the guitar is to come up with your own guitar riffs, licks, and solos using the scale in the position given above.

    The following step would be to learn the major scale in different positions on the guitar neck.

    This will give you the ability to create riffs, licks, and solos all over the fretboard, and not only in the position given above.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    You may consider giving a donation, by which you will be helping a songwriter achieve his dreams. Each contribution, no matter how small, will make a difference.

    I n this lesson I will teach you how to learn Major scales on guitar (and memorize / remember them) over the entire guitar fretboard. The information in this lesson is essential to acquiring a command over the guitar neck. Knowing how to play guitar scales will make you a better lead/solo player as well as give you the edge on chords.

    TL:DR Scroll down for animated GIF

    New! Be sure to check out the Virtual Piano

    Introducing the A Major scale for guitar

    For this lesson we will use the A Major scale. A Major just so happens to fit nicely on the fretboard that works well for our demonstration. Once you learn to play one Major scale, you can play all Major (and minor) scales in every key.

    The A Major scale pictured below:

    Learn the Major scale by breaking the it into 5 smaller patterns

    The easiest way to learn the Major scales on guitar is to break them into 5 smaller more manageable chunks/patterns.

    The 5 scale patterns guitar animation

    Watch this animation below that shows you the fingering for each of the 5 patterns as well as suggested picking.

    Tips for learning to play the 5 patterns

    * The animation is a Gif image so save it to your device or repost it somewhere on the web to make sure you will always have it handy. Just right click and save as!
    * Learn each pattern individually before moving to the next.
    * The picking in the animation uses economized alternate picking. Which means down/up or up/down picking but down/down or up/up where possible.
    * The animation only shows you how to play each pattern in ascending (up) order. But you should learn them in descending order (down) as well. Just reverse the direction (reverse pick direction too) but keep the same fingering for descending.
    * Although not contained in boxes in the animation, you should know that where pattern 5 ends, pattern 1 begins. Also at pattern 1 (at the 4th fret), pattern 5 occurs before it at the 2nd fret.

    Want the guitar TAB instead?

    For those of you that don’t feel like watching the animation, below is the guitar TABs for the 5 box patterns that also shows the suggested picking and finger numbers.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Moving the Major scale to new keys

    Once you have learned all five patterns you can move all 5 patterns as a whole to new keys. The notes change but the patterns are the same.

    Move it up five frets to be in C Major. Below is a picture of what C Major looks like with patterns outlined:

    Notice that the patterns for C Major are exactly the same as A Major. You can move the 5 patterns all over the fretboard to be in a any new key. The new key name will always be the note under your second finger of pattern 1 .

    The minor scales

    All Major scales have a matching minor scale that use the same notes. For this reason they are called the relative minor.

    The root note for the minor scale is always 3 frets behind the root note of the major scale.

    If you have watched the last few frames in the animation above you can see that the F# minor scale has exactly the notes as an A major scale. So this means that if you know all the Major scales then you also know all the minor scales. The relative minor scale can be thought of as a mode of the Major scale. Read more about modes in my lessons Modes of the Major scale .

    Learn how to play guitar scales

    Want to learn to play even more guitar scales?
    Try these:
    The Pentatonic scale – Pentatonic scales
    The Blues scale – Blues scales
    The Harmonic minor scale – Harmonic minor scales
    The Melodic minor scale – Melodic minor scales
    Major and minor scale generator with customizable tunings – Major and minor scales

    Summary

    By now you should see that splitting up the Major scale into smaller easier to learn chunks is the best way to memorize the scales. The best advice I can give you now is to practice the patterns until you have mastered them. In future lessons I will show you even more cool guitar tricks that will require you to know how to play these patterns. Until the next lesson. keep practicing and be sure to subscribe to get updates.

    Share a link to this guitar lesson with your friends (right click Permalink > copy or mobile long press > copy)

    In your guitar learning endeavors, you will eventually come across the pentatonic scale, one of the most often used scales by beginner to professional guitarists. The word pentatonic comes from the root Penta, meaning 5 or having 5 of something.

    As you may have already guessed, these pentatonic scales have 5 notes. If you already know the Major scale, learning the pentatonic scale will come much easier since they include many of the same notes.

    Knowing pentatonic scales will give you the ability to improvise over chord progressions and allow you to come up with tasty and melodic ideas.

    Let’s first look at the formula to play the two different pentatonic scales which are the Major pentatonic and minor pentatonic.

    Major pentatonic scale formula

    The Major pentatonic scale is made up of 5 notes from the Major scale which are the root, 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th degree. For example, a C Major pentatonic scale would have the notes: C, D, E, G, and A.

    Here are examples of other Major pentatonic scales in the table below.

    Minor pentatonic scale formula

    The minor pentatonic is made up of 5 notes from the minor scale which are the root, flat 3rd, 4th, 5th and flat 7th degree. For example, a A minor pentatonic scale would have the notes: A, C, D, E, and G.

    Did you notice the relationship between the notes of the Major and minor pentatonic scales? If you play the Major scale pentatonic starting from the 6 degree, you get all the same notes of the minor pentatonic scale.

    This is because the Major and minor scales are related and you are essentially playing the same notes depending on which note of a scale you start on.

    Here are examples of other minor pentatonic scales in the table below.

    You can also check out this other post on how to play minor pentatonic scales on guitar to learn it more in depth.

    Why use pentatonic scales?

    Pentatonic scales can be thought of as an abbreviated way to play a Major scale that can be used as melodies, riffs, and improvisation in general. As you play learn to play and hear the notes of a pentatonic scale, you will notice a very familiar sound that has been ingrained in much of modern, popular music.

    Pentatonic scales allow for creating interesting patterns and ideas that you can incorporate into your playing. Using a pentatonic scale may also help you facilitate your way around the fretboard since they are simplified versions of Major and minor scales.

    Now that you know why these scales can be very helpful, let’s dive in to learn the different shapes on the fretboard that belong to a pentatonic scale.

    5 Pentatonic scale shapes

    For the charts below, the lowest horizontal line represents the thickest string (Low E) while the top horizontal line represents the thinnest string (high E).

    The green circles represent the root note of the Major pentatonic scale, the purple notes represent the root note of the minor pentatonic scale and in blue are the other scale notes in between. (Remember that the Major and minor pentatonic scale share the same notes!)

    The numbers inside the circles represent the suggested fingering to use on your fretting hand.

    Shape 1

    Shape 2

    Shape 3

    Shape 4

    Shape 5

    One thing to note about using these shapes is that whenever you have scales where you can use open strings, you will have to rearrange your fingers to play the shape. For example, if a shape includes the fingering 1, 3, and 4 on one string, you can play (open string), 1 and 3 instead.

    Although you will need to change some shapes if you include open strings, once you move over to the next shape where you’re fretting all the notes, you will get back to the original shapes we covered here.

    Examples of connecting pentatonic shapes

    *Keep in mind that the following shapes can be shifted to any root note as long as it fits the fretboard depending on what scale you are playing. Adjust the notes for open strings whenever necessary.

    Connecting shape 1

    Connecting shape 2

    Pentatonic application examples

    Example 1

    This first example basically covers all of the notes in shape 5 over a chord progression written above the staff lines. This is to work on technique, memorization, and being able to hear the notes over a series of 7th chords. You can do this to review all of the scale shapes.

    Example 2

    In the second example, we are also using shape 5 but this time trying to make a musical idea or theme with the scale notes. This is how you can begin to make the pentatonic scale your own. Try making your own melodies with the pentatonic scale like in this example below.

    Example 3

    In example 3, we are playing the connected pentatonic shape 1 over a different series of chords. You can also try coming back down the scale.
    Pentatonic example 3

    Example 4

    In example 4, we are also taking the connected shape 1 but this time creating a short riff with the scale notes. We then repeat the same idea higher up on the fretboard.
    Pentatonic example 4

    3 tips for memorizing the pentatonic scale shapes

    1) Master one shape at a time

    The way I recommend learning and memorizing these scales is to start memorizing one shape that feels most comfortable for you. Try to really get the shape under your fingers to the point of not having to look at the chart. This will be your starting point so that you can eventually learn the other shapes around it.

    2) Look for fingering patterns

    Try to think of patterns to help you remember the shape such as what strings repeat the same fingering. Quick tip: The notes on the first and sixth string will always be the same.

    3) Connect shapes around the ones you learned

    After getting one of the shapes down really well, either learn the shape that comes before or after it to see how the scale connects on the fretboard. Again, try to master one shape at a time and make sure you can play it without looking at the chart. This will make the process more approachable by breaking it down into smaller sections before moving on to the next shape.

    Wrapping Up

    Learning pentatonic scales is a great way to improve your guitar playing because it allows you to think of scales more concisely and melodically.

    The great thing is that once you learn the Major pentatonic scale, you essentially learn the minor pentatonic scale as well. They are related because they include all the same notes and shapes but you are starting in different places.

    I recommend reviewing the charts from time to time so you can get a better grasp of all the shapes under your fingers. If needed, check out these 7 tips to learn all the notes on the guitar fretboard which will help you play pentatonic scales with more ease.

    You might also want to check out how to play the blues scale on guitar after learning the pentatonic scale.

    I hope you enjoyed the material and that you will continue to get more familiar using this fun and dynamic pentatonic scale!

    If you enjoyed this material and want to get the latest lessons and updates, subscribe here.

    The C major scale consists of seven notes ( C, D, E, F, G, A and B ) and has the following shape on guitar :

    However, if you don’t quite understand the above chart, I invite you to read this 5-minute post to really understand what the C major scale is, its tonal distribution and, of course, how to play it on guitar .

    What is the C major scale?

    The C major scale is a music scale composed of 7 notes (actually called musical degrees) that we all know:

    Note: On the right we can find the C major scale in bass clef while on the left we can see it in treble clef.

    As we can see above, we all know what notes are in the c major scale. And we can also notice that there are no music alterations in this scale (i.e. neither sharps nor flats):

    C D E F G A B

    Thus, if we were looking for the fourth note in the harmonic scale of C major, it would be F, its fifth note would be G, etc.

    What are the notes in the c major scale and why?

    The C major scale consists of the pitches C, D, E, F, G, A and B. That is cristal clear but do you know why?

    The response to this question is “becauase of the major scale pattern of steps”, which is:

    W W H W W W H

    W: Whole step or tone.

    H: Half step or semitone.

    Therefore, if we take the above structure and draw the C major scale with tones and semitones , we obtain the musical degrees mentioned above:

    c major scale notes

    C major scale on guitar

    Now that you understand the musical theory behind the C major scale diatonic, let’s go back to the guitar fretboard diagram:

    If you still don’t understand the above chart, just think that a half step (or semitone) corresponds to a fret on the guitar and a whole step (or tone) corresponds to 2 frets.

    Therefore, between C and D there are 2 frets (2 semitones or one tone) and between E and F there is only one fret (because the distance is only half a tone).

    In any case, to memorize and play the C major guitar scale we can break the above diagram into a series of patterns to help us.

    How to play C major scale on guitar

    At this point we are going to learn how to play the C major scale . To do this, I have written the below tab (tablature) so you can use it to practice the C major scale ascending and descending along the fingerboard.

    To practice the C major scale on acoustic or electric guitar just put your index finger on the 8th fret and start following the above tab (if you don’t know how to read guitar tabs you can take a look at this link).

    And if you are a beginner and are learning to play the guitar from scratch I advise you to practice it with a metronome at a speed of 80 BPM, which you can find in the video at the beginning.

    TIP : if you dont have a metronome you can download any free app.

    Are you new to guitar? Maybe you’ve just picked up your old guitar and want to get started on some theory. In this article, we’ll cover how to play a major scale on guitar, with some valuable tips and tricks to help you expand your knowledge of music theory.

    Let’s get started!

    Why Are Scales Useful?

    A scale is one of the building blocks of music.

    It’s a pattern of notes that creates a mood or a feeling. For example, the major scale on guitar has a happy sound and is often used in pop music.

    The minor scale, on the other hand, sounds unhappy.

    The scale that a piece of music uses dictates what notes and chords will sound good with it.

    Because of this, an understanding of scales allows you to compose music. But even if you’re not a composer, learning scales makes it easier to learn new guitar songs, jam with other musicians or improvise solos.

    What Is a Scale?

    Most scales cover a full octave. This means that the first and last notes are the same note but played at different pitches.

    For example, a C scale might begin with a low C and end in the next highest C.

    Between these two notes there are 11 other notes.

    When you play a scale you are essentially traveling across the octave using the notes in between as stepping stones.

    These stones are known as steps. A scale is a set pattern of these steps which can be applied to any note.

    Today, we’ll be discussing the major scale on guitar, the most common scale in western music.

    What Is the Major Scale?

    To understand the major scale on guitar, you need to understand semitones and whole tones.

    A semitone is a single step from one note to the next—on the guitar, it’s the equivalent of going up one fret at a time.

    If you fret your finger on the first fret of any of the strings and then move that finger up to the second fret of that same string, you’ve just moved one semitone.

    A whole tone is double a semitone. On a guitar, it’s the difference between, for example, the first fret and the third fret.

    Remember earlier in the article when we said that a scale is a pattern of steps? Here’s what the major scale’s pattern looks like for any note:

    1. Base note
    2. Whole tone
    3. Whole tone
    4. Semitone
    5. Whole tone
    6. Whole tone
    7. Whole tone
    8. Semitone (this note is one octave higher than the base note).

    How to Play the Major Scale on Guitar

    Although a scale can be played starting at any note, we will focus on the G major scale on guitar.

    That’s because it is one of the most popular rock, pop, and folk music scales. Starting with G major, you can expand to other scales.

    A G major scale on guitar consists of the following notes:

    1. G – Base note
    2. Move a whole tone to A
    3. Move a whole tone to B
    4. Move a semitone to C
    5. Move a whole tone to D
    6. Move a whole tone to E
    7. Move a whole tone to F#
    8. Move a semitone to G (one octave higher than the first G)

    Let’s learn how to play it on guitar!

    Each string has a number. When holding the guitar, the string furthest away (and the thinnest) is the first string. The next closest is the second. The closest (and thickest) is the sixth.

    The third string played open (unfretted) is a G – this is our base note. Here is the full G major scale played on the third (G) string:

    1. Open (G)
    2. 2nd fret (A)
    3. 4th fret (B)
    4. 5th fret (C) – note that this is a semitone, a jump of only one fret
    5. 7th fret (D)
    6. 9th fret (E)
    7. 11th fret (F#)
    8. 12th fret (G)

    The G major scale laid out this way shows something valuable: the twelfth fret is always an octave higher than the string played open on the guitar.

    Using Other Strings

    The notes on guitar strings are relative. This means that while the twelfth fret of the third string is a G, the eighth fret of the second string and the third fret of the first string are the exact same G.

    What does this mean for you? It means that you can play scales easily without traveling up the guitar’s neck.

    Let’s look at the G major scale on guitar, starting with the third fret of the sixth string. This is the lowest G on the guitar. Below, I’ve detailed the string and the fret:

    1. Sixth string, third fret (G)
    2. Sixth string, fifth fret (A)
    3. Fifth string, second fret (B)
    4. Fifth string, third fret (C)
    5. Fifth string, fifth fret (D)
    6. Fourth string, second fret (E)
    7. Fourth string, fourth fret (F#)
    8. Fourth string, fifth fret (G)

    As you can see, the guitar’s layout makes playing scales easy.

    There is a G note on every string, so you can begin the G major scale on guitar in many places.

    • Sixth string: third fret
    • Fifth string: tenth fret
    • Fourth string: fifth fret
    • Third string: open string (unfretted)
    • Second string: eighth fret
    • First string: third fret

    The Relationship Between Scales and Chords

    Chords are made up of notes from within a scale. The G Major chord, for example, is based on the G major scale. It uses the first (base note), third, fifth, and eighth (one octave higher) notes of the G major scale.

    A G Major chord consists of G, B, D, and G all played together.

    Conclusion

    Although it may seem daunting at first, learning the major scale on guitar is no big hurdle.

    Many amateur guitarists don’t move beyond learning chords. Because of this, they never truly understand the theory behind what they are playing. This can inhibit their development.

    By learning scales you begin to understand why chords are played the way they are and what notes will work well with them.

    With some practice and dedication, you can even start incorporating your scales into your musical routine (with solos, for example).

    If you enjoyed this blog then why not check out our article on how to read time signatures?

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    How would you describe yourself? Are you a musician, or a music lover?

    If you answered yes to both questions, then you should definitely consider learning how to play the guitar. The guitar has become a symbol of freedom, creativity, and self-expression.

    Guitar playing is a great way to express yourself through music.

    Whether you want to sing along to your favorite songs, jam with friends or even write your own tunes, learning how to play the instrument is a great way to start.

    You don’t need to spend thousands of dollars to get started. In fact, you can pick up a cheap acoustic guitar at Walmart for less than $100.

    Once you master the basics, you can move onto electric guitars.

    The first thing that you will need to learn about chords is what they are, and how they work.

    In this article, we will go over all the different types of chords, their uses, and how to read them on the fretboard.

    We will also talk about some basic chord progressions, and give you tips on how to practice these so that you can improve your skills as a guitarist.

    So, let’s get started!

    What Is A Chord?

    A chord is simply three or more notes played simultaneously. Each note in the chord represents one of the three primary parts of music: melody, harmony, and rhythm.

    The most common type of chord used in pop music is the major chord.

    It consists of three notes: the root (the lowest sounding note), the third (the next highest sounding note) and the fifth (the highest sounding note).

    This chord is often referred to as the “power chord.”

    Other popular chords include minor chords, which consist of two notes: the root and the seventh (or octave) note; augmented chords, which have an extra sharp added to the root note; diminished chords, which have a flat added to the root note, etc.

    Chords are very versatile because they allow musicians to create melodies, harmonies, and rhythms.

    For example, if you were writing a song, you could use any combination of chords to make it sound good.

    How To Read Guitar Chord Charts

    When reading guitar charts, you must be able to identify each chord by its name, its position on the neck, and the number of strings being played.

    Let’s take a look at an example.

    Let’s say that you wanted to play a G major chord.

    As you can see in the diagram above, the chord chart is showing a diagram of a fretboard.

    You can see the six strings, and the numbers on each ‘string’ represent which finger should be placed on each string.

    To play the G major chord, you will need to place your second finger on the second string, your third finger on the first string, and your fourth finger on the sixth string.

    You may notice that the chart is sideways, and this is for a good reason: when you are playing guitar, you will be looking at the chart from top to bottom.

    However, when you are reading the chart, you will be looking from left to right.

    When playing a guitar, you will be looking at the strings sideways as you turn your head to view them. This allows you to easily follow the pattern of the chord progression.

    Finger Numbers In Guitar Chord Charts

    So, as we mentioned, the numbers in the circles in chord charts represent the numbers of your fingers. This is very simple to remember!

    Your index finger is ‘1’, your middle finger is ‘2’, your ring finger is ‘3’, and your pinky finger is ‘4’. If the chord requires you to use your thumb, it would be labeled as ‘T’.

    An example of a chord that would require you to use your thumb would be D/F#, although you can play this chord without using your thumb.

    Some people use their thumb on the first string (E) to create a smoother sound while strumming.

    So, this is easy to remember: you have four fingers, and each of these are labelled in order. Then, your thumb is labelled ‘T’ for ‘thumb’, which is also easy to remember.

    Sometimes, the finger numbers will be written at the top or bottom of the chord chart: the numbers will tell you which finger should be placed on which string.

    In the above example, you can see that the circles on the strings are black, but the numbers are written beneath.

    The strings that are labelled ‘X’ and ‘0’ do not need to be held down, so you can ignore them.

    However, you will need to use your third finger (ring finger) to hold down the second string, your second finger (middle) to hold down the third string, and your first finger (index) to hold down the fifth.

    By doing this, and following the chord chart, you will be able to play the C major chord.

    The Strings Of A Guitar (Standard Tuning)

    As a beginner, you should learn to play guitar in standard tuning.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Standard tuning is commonly used for most songs, and is the best tuning to use when learning how to play a guitar.

    Standard tuning is as follows: E, A, D, G, B, e.

    To make it easier to remember, you may want to use an acronym. A commonly used acronym that musicians use to remember the string notes of standard tuning include:

    • Elephants And Dog Got Big Ears
    • Every Amateur Does Get Better Eventually
    • Eddie Ate Dynamite – Good Bye Eddie

    On a chord chart, the strings read sideways: so, E is the string furthest to the left, then A, then D, G, B, and finally, E again, on the very right of the chart.

    Once you become a little more advanced, you may decide to re-tune your guitar to use other tunings, such as open guitar tunings, and drop guitar tunings.

    However, as a beginner, you should get used to standard tuning before attempting anything more difficult.

    Practice: Using An Example

    Time to practice!

    Below, we have added a chord chart for the D major chord. Can you work out how to play this, following our previous instructions?

    As you can see, the numbers are placed above the chart. This means you will need to work out which fingers need to be placed on which string.

    To play D major, you need to place your:

    • index finger on the G-string
    • ring finger on the B string
    • middle finger on the lower E string

    This is one of the easiest chords to play, as all the fingers are close together. The further away the fingers are placed, the more difficult it will be to strum the chord.

    Some chords will require you to barre a string: in simple terms, this means you will need to use a whole finger to hold down all the strings at once, or more than one string.

    You can see an example of this on the B major chord chart below:

    To play B major, you will need to use your index finger to barre five of the strings, and then you’ll use your middle, ring, and little finger to hold down the third, fourth, and fifth strings.

    Final Thoughts

    Learning how to read guitar chords is a great way to start playing guitar.

    It’s important to understand what each note represents, and where they are located on the fretboard.

    Once you know these things, you can start playing simple chords, and eventually move onto more complex ones.

    We hope you enjoyed learning how to read guitar chords.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The G major scale on guitar is one of the most import scales you’ll learn as a guitar player.

    First, it is a major scale, which is use in so many songs and other musical pieces.

    Also, the G scale is one of the most popular for guitar players and musicians in general.

    In this article you will learn about this scale and how to use when playing the guitar.

    The G Major Scale

    The G major scale is defined by seven notes that has the tonic in G. The notes of the scale are:

    G, A, B, C, D, E, F#, and G

    Notice that all notes in this scale are natural, except for F#, which is raised.

    This is necessary because, being a major scale, you need to maintain the same intervals from the C major scale.

    Major Scale Intervals

    If you don’t remember this, it is important to observe: the major scale is defined by intervals set by the natural notes, starting in C.

    That is, the original major scale in C has the following notes:

    C, D, E, F, G, A, and B.

    These also correspond to the white notes in the piano.

    The important thing here is the sequence of intervals. The sequence is:

    • Whole step: from C to D.
    • Then a whole step: from D to E.
    • Half step: from E to F.
    • Whole step: from F to G.
    • Then a whole step: from G to A.
    • Whole step: from A to B, and
    • Half step: from B to C.

    This means that to get another major scale starting in another note, you need to replicate this interval. This is how it works for G major:

    • Whole step: from G to A.
    • Whole step: from A to B.
    • Half step: from B to C.
    • Whole step: from C to D.
    • Then a whole step: from D to E.
    • Whole step: from E to F#, and
    • Half step: from F# to G.

    As you see, the sequence of intervals is the same, only changing the notes. This is why we perceive the G major scale as a major scale.

    G major on the Guitar

    The next step is to learn how to play this G major scale on the guitar.

    This can be done using a shape that starts on the third fret, 6th string. Here are the notes:

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    This pattern will let you play the notes in the G major scale starting from G in the 6th string, until the A note of the 1st string.

    Other patterns are also possible. For example, here is another common pattern for this major scale, that can be used starting on the 5th fret, 4th string:

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Learn More About Guitar Scales

    If you want to learn more about guitar scales, you should get our free guitar course (in PDF format). Topics include:

    • Notes on the guitar
    • Scales
    • Tablature
    • How to hold the guitar properly
    • How to play songs
    • Popular songs
    • And much more.

    Click here to get your free course and learn about other guitar scales.

    A Major scale for guitar.
    The A Major is a seven-note scale. Notes are displayed in the fingerboard diagram with blue color with the root notes indicated by darker color. The root notes are always A tones. In the two-octave pattern, the first root note is on the 6th string, 5th fret.

    A Major 2 octaves

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major full fretboard

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    A Major note names

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The scale displayed with its numeric formula and scale degrees.

    Formula Notes Intervals Degrees
    1 A Unison Tonic
    2 B Major second Supertonic
    3 C# Major third Mediant
    4 D Perfect fourth Subdominant
    5 E Perfect fifth Dominant
    6 F# Sixth Submediant
    7 G# Major seventh Leading tone

    The interval formula (2 – 2 – 1 – 2 – 2 – 2 – 1) can be expound into specific notes of the scale.

    Notes (ascending) Interval
    A-B M2
    A-C# M3
    A-D P4
    A-E P5
    A-F# M6
    A-G# M7
    Notes (descending) Interval
    A-G# m2
    A-F# m3
    A-E P4
    A-D P5
    A-C# m6
    A-B m7

    Abbreviations are used: M / m stands for major / minor and P stands for perfect.

    The main three-note and four-note chords that are related to this scale are the following:

    A X02220 Amaj7 X02120
    Bm X24432 Bm7 X20202
    C#m X46654 C#m7 X46454
    D XX0232 Dmaj7 XX0222
    E 022100 E7 020100
    F#m 244222 F#m7 242222
    G#dim XX6797 G#m7b5 XX6777

    The tones in these chords correspond to the tones of the A Major scale in which A is the tonic triad and Amaj7 the tonic 7th chord.
    The second and fourth columns include short notations for the chords in the first and third columns respectively. These are based on common ways to play the chord, but there are other alternatives. See more about this notation system on the FAQ page.

    The A Major consists of seven notes. These can be described as intervals, as semi-notes or steps on the guitar fingerboard, written as 2 – 2 – 1 – 2 – 2 – 2 – 1 from the first note to the next octave.
    The scale can be played on the guitar from different starting positions in which A functions as the root tone.
    The A Major is relative to F# Minor, which means that both scales include the same notes but with different tonal center.
    The A Major is identical with the A Ionian mode.

    Start the audio and play along! Use notes from the scale in the diagram above.

    Three notes per string exercise based on A Major scale.

    The numbers above the tablature are suggested fingerings.

    The A scale presented in sheet music notation.

    The sheet music includes two octaves played ascending and descending. In musical notation, the key of A is indicated by its key signature with three sharps.

    GuitarScale.org present scales by pictures and supplementary information. You can choose between scales for guitar and bass guitar.

    The scales are presented on diagrams with graphical fingerboard representation and — if nothing else is mentioned — based on standard tuning.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Scales presented in an easy way

    This site has set a goal to present scales in a way all players including beginners can understand. To enhance the learning, scales are presented with various diagram styles:

    • Based on octaves (from the root note to the same note on a higher octave).
    • Based on shapes (which can be interconnected on the guitar neck).
    • Full fretboard diagram (i.e., 15 frets which is sufficient to cover the vital part of the fretboard).
    • Diagrams including note names.

    The goal is also to deliver additional information so that ambitious musicians can study scales and understand them on a deeper level. By clicking on the collapsible panels on the scales’ presentation pages, more information is available including scale degrees, related chords and theoretical explanation.

    What is a scale?

    A scale in music is constructed from a series of tones. Such series of tones will sound great played together and are often used as foundation for composing or improvisation. They can be played in any order, whereas playing them root to root is only when practicing.

    A distinction can be made between rhythm and lead guitar. In a rock band with two guitarists, one could play the rhythmic parts whereas the other guitarist plays the solo parts. A guitar solo is often based upon one or several scales.

    In blues and jazz, improvisation is a common element. Improvisations are often played “over” chords and based on scales that match the chords.

    Why should you learn them?

    So, why bother at all with these collections of tones that has a lot of strange names? There is actually a great idea to invest time with scales and here are some of the reasons:

    • You will develop yourtechnique and finger flexibility. Playing through scale patterns involves different fingerings and shifting of hand positions.
    • You will train your ear. Playing through major and minor scales, for example, will develop your ability to hear if a song is in major or minor, which is a powerful skill for a musician.
    • You can easier learn songs because you get an understanding for keys and by knowing which key a song is played in, you will be able to learn it faster. If you know the tones of a key, you will obviously know all the tones that can be used in a song and by that you are no longer starting from scratch when you memorize a new song, instead you can exclude all notes that you know don’t “fit in”.
    • You get important tools forcomposing music, since you know which notes that “fits together” in general.
    • You will establish devices for creating solos. Scales work as a framework, or as a palette, for notes that you can use when you improvise to the music from other instruments. Understanding the concepts of scales are crucial for learning how to play along with other musicians if you are a lead guitarist.

    These are some of the reasons that makes scales the most fundamental knowledge alongside chords for guitarists.

    How to play a scale?

    First of all when you learn a new scale, it is recommended to play it from start to end a couple of times, just to get it under your fingers. The animated diagram below shows how the scale in A major can be played ascending and descending over one octave. This is just one of many patterns for that specific scale, but it is a good starting point for training.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    When you practice on scales, it is important to use adequate fingerings. If three notes are included on one string, you should use three fingers and to avoid moving your hand to much you should also include the little finger when it makes the run over the fretboard more efficient.

    While the piano lines up linear, the guitar is parallel. That means that the order of tones continues from string to string. From the bass tones on first frets of the lowest string (equivalent of the left side of the piano keyboard) via the middle strings to the last fret on the highest string (equivalent of the right side of the piano keyboard).

    Learn and memorize scales

    The first step is to study diagrams, such presented on this site, and practice them (perhaps in conjunction with tabs or notes). Scales are often learned in parts of one or two octaves. The final goal, however, is to be able to play the scale over the whole fingerboard. The latter will be possible after the guitarist has been familiar with the scale and learnt it in different positions.

    The hard part is to memorize scales. Being able to visualize different scales all over the fretboard is not achieved in a short time. A tip is to take a shortcut by learning the intervals. Here are the intervals for the Dorian scale: 2 – 1 – 2 – 2 – 2 – 1 – 2. This means that whenever you start on a root note, you can go two steps up or down the fretboard on the same string. After that you can go another one step up or down. And after that, go can go two steps up or down three times in a row — still all on the same string. When, you can go one step in either direction and finally two steps in either direction to return to the root note. By this method you can move all over the fretboard with speed just minutes after you know the intervals of the scale! You should also notice that scales, in general, are movable. Meaning that the same shape of notes can be moved up and down on the fingerboard. The C major will become C# major and fret up and so on.

    Modes

    In relationship to scales, modes can be seen as modifications of a scale. Modes use the same notes, but the order is reorganized. Despite the fact that exactly the same notes are involved, the modes sound different. Why? This is because of the alternative order of the intervals. Although they partly overlap, the overall interval pattern changes and that results in a different character of sound. The most common modes in music are Ionian, Dorian, Phrygian, Lydian, Mixolydian, Aeolian and Locrian. These goes back to the Ancient Greece and are still used in music today (dependent of the music genre, some of them will be more relevant than others when it comes to lead guitar playing).

    In this lesson, we will work in the key of A with the A major scale. The A major guitar scale is one of my favorite scales. There are so many songs that you can apply this scale to that it is advantageous to know.

    The notes in the A major scale are A-B-C♯-D-E-F♯-G♯ following the major scale intervals of W-W-H-W-W-W-H

    • The interval between A and B is a whole-step
    • The interval between B and C♯ is a whole-step
    • The interval between C♯ and D is a half-step
    • The interval between D and E is a whole-step
    • The interval between E and F♯ is a whole-step
    • The interval between F♯ and G♯ is a whole-step
    • The interval between G♯ and A is a half-step

    A Major scale Patterns

    Pattern 1

    We start with the first pattern on the scale. The root note is on the fifth fret of the sixth string (E). The scale starts on the root note, which is A. Play through the pattern one major scale by starting with your second finger on the A, and then your fourth finger on the B (sixth string, seventh fret). Play up the scale and then back down.

    Take your time working through the scale, paying attention to the notes and the fingering. I usually have students say the notes out loud as the play through the scale.

    Pattern 2

    Move on to the second pattern of the scale. Take time to learn the first pattern, and then understand the connection between the first and second pattern.

    Pattern 2 is an easy pattern to learn. The key to pattern two is to remember that you are hitting all of the notes on the seventh fret and ninth fret and then adding the tenth fret on the first, second, and sixth strings and adding the fourth fret on the third and fourth strings.

    I have seen many guitars player play up and down the seventh and ninth frets and bending the strings to hit the D and A notes.

    The root note is on the fourth string, seventh fret, and the second string tenth fret.

    Again, take your time working through the scale, paying attention to the notes and the fingering. Work your way up and down the pattern, and then add the first pattern to your practice routine.

    Pattern 3

    Move on to the third pattern of the scale. Take time to learn the first pattern and second patterns before moving on to the third pattern. Look at the connection between the first, second, and third patterns and understand where the root note is within it.

    The root note will always be in the same position of pattern no matter what key you are playing in. The root note in the A Major scale, the third pattern is on the fifth string 12 th fret and the second string, 10 th fret.

    Pattern 4

    Let’s move on to the fourth pattern of the scale. Take time to learn the first pattern, second and third patterns before moving on to the fourth pattern. Look at the connection between the first, second, and third patterns and understand where the root note is within it.

    The fourth pattern connects to the third pattern on the 12 th fret. The root note is on the fifth string, 12th fret, and the third-string 14 th fret.

    Pattern 5

    This pattern may be hard to reach if you play this on an acoustic guitar without a cutaway. The pattern starts on the 11 th fret and extends to the 16 th fret. However, this pattern connects to the first pattern of the A major scale beginning on the first and second fret.

    The root notes are on the 14th fret of the third string, and both E strings on the 17 th fret. Notice the notes of the octave in this pattern.

    If you begin the scale on the first and second frets, the root notes are on the third string second fret, and the both E strings on the fifth fret. This pattern is much easier to work within the A scale.

    Getting Started

    Scales are a group of music notes played in a certain order based on how far apart the notes are from each other.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Guitar scale diagrams are a learning tool used to find the pattern of notes to play a certain scale, and where the notes would appear on the fretboard of the guitar.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    An introduction to playing scales on guitar for beginners. This lesson focuses on different types of basic scales.

    Major Scales

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The major scale is a 7 note scale that other guitar scales, modes, and guitar chords are based off of.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The Major Pentatonic Scale is a 5 note scale that uses the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th notes of the major scale.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The Major Blues Scale is an extension of the Major Pentatonic Scale that adds the 3♭ (flat third) note to the scale.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Other names for this scale are the Gypsy Major, Byzantine Scale, Mayamalavagowla, Bhairav Raga, or Arabic (Hijaz Kar).

    Minor Scales

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Natural minor scales can be played using the same notes as a major scale starting on the 6th note of the major scale.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Harmonic minor guitar scales are very similar to natural minor guitar scales with the exception of 7th note.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The minor pentatonic guitar scale is a five note scale popular in rock lead guitar riffs and soloing.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    The blues scale is an extension of the minor pentatonic scale, adding the 5♭ (flat fifth) of the scale referred to as the “blue note”.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Other names for this scale are Hungarian Gypsy Scale or Double Harmonic Minor Scale.

    How to Use Guitar Scales

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Learning to improvise with major scale melodic patterns.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    This lesson shows how to start making the guitar “talk” using different patterns of notes.

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    This lesson focuses on connecting surrounding patterns of the Minor Pentatonic scale across the fretboard.

    As you begin to delve into the world of scales, you might feel a little overwhelmed.

    There are a lot of different scales in music, many of which aren’t immediately applicable to the musical situations you’ll likely find yourself in, especially as a beginner. But you probably won’t know the difference between what matters now and what should come later, unless you’re being guided along by a mentor or a teacher.

    First of all, you should focus on learning these five scales. Once you begin to feel comfortable with those, you’re ready to start exploring the seven modes of the major scale.

    You should also know that you’re basically getting seven scales for the price of one – you aren’t really learning seven whole new scales! I’ll talk more about how that works, but let’s start with the first mode of the major scale.

    But first, if it’s your aim to do music professionally, you’ll want to check out our free ebook while it’s still available:

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Free eBook: Discover how real independent musicians like you are making $4,077 – $22,573+ monthly via Youtube, let me know where to send the details:

    Major Scale 1: The Ionian Mode

    It may have a very odd sounding name, but the Ionian mode is basically just the major scale with no alterations.

    In the key of C, for example, the notes in the Ionian mode would be: C, D, E, F, G, A, and B.

    There isn’t a whole lot more to be said about the Ionian mode, because its use in popular music is widespread and ubiquitous. It’s a happy sounding scale and is synonymous with most familiar melodies.

    2. The Dorian Mode

    The second mode of the major scale, the Dorian mode, is basically the major scale starting and ending on the second note of the major scale.

    So, if we were to use the C major scale as an example again, the notes in the D Dorian mode would be: D, E, F, G, A, B, and C.

    Simple enough, right? The other modes work exactly the same way. What changes is the note you’re starting and ending on.

    But comparing it to the C major scale isn’t really helpful in terms of developing context. It’s better to compare it to the D major scale, which is: D, E, F#, G, A, B, and C#.

    So we can see that the D Dorian mode differs from the D major scales in two ways: the F# and the C#. So we would say that the Dorian mode has a “flatted” third and a “flatted” seventh.

    Because of this, the Dorian mode has a slightly exotic “minor” sound to it. It is often used in jazz and blues improvisation.

    3. The Phyrigian Mode Is A Major Guitar Scale

    The notes in the Phyrigian mode are: E, F, G, A, B, C, and D.

    The E major scale, on the other hand, looks like this: E, F#, G#, A, B, C#, and D#.

    As you can see, there are quite a few altered notes here. The Phyrigian mode has a flatted second, third, sixth, and seventh.

    This mode is also a minor mode of sorts, and is often associated with Spanish or flamenco style guitar.

    Major Scale For Guitarists 4. The Lydian Mode

    If you’ve been following so far, you should have a pretty good idea of what notes are in the Lydian mode, but let’s go over them anyway. They are: F, G, A, B, C, D, and E.

    The F major scale has a flatted fourth (Bb), so in this case, the Lydian mode has a raised (#) fourth.

    How to play the a major guitar scaleIt goes nicely over a maj7 chord, and is among my favorite modes. It is often used in the beginning of movie soundtracks because it has that “hero embarking upon an adventure” type sound.

    Joe Satriani’s “Flying In A Blue Dream” is a pretty famous example of the Lydian mode in popular music.

    5. The Mixolydian Mode

    The Mixolydian mode has the following notes in it: G, A, B, C, D, E, and F.

    The G major scale has a raised seventh (F#), so the Mixolydian mode would have a flatted seventh in it.

    The Mixolydian mode doesn’t have a dark, sad or incomplete sound to it, so it’s definitely not a minor scale. But it isn’t exactly a major scale either.

    It’s closer to a dominant scale because it plays nicely over dominant chords (like G7). It can often be heard in jazz, blues, and funk music.

    6. The Aeolian Mode

    The sixth mode of the major scale or the Aeolian mode is essentially just the natural minor scale.

    In the key of A, for example, the notes would be: A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.

    The A major scale has a raised third, sixth, and seventh, so the Aeolian mode has a flatted third, sixth, and seventh.

    The major scale and minor scale are pretty interchangeable, especially if you understand how relative minors/relative majors work. The Aeolian mode is also all over pop music, and its sound isn’t likely to take you by surprise.

    7. The Locrian Mode

    The Locrian mode is the oddest mode of the major scale, and may not have many practical uses.

    The notes in it are: B, C, D, E, F, G, and A.

    It has a flatted second, third, fifth, sixth, and seventh, which links it to m7b5 or diminished chords.

    There are some classical compositions that were based on the Locrian mode, and there are some musicians like John Kirkpatrick or Björk that have used it in their music.

    You can also think of it as a “jazz scale” of sorts since m7b5 chords do not have a habit of appearing in most other forms of popular music, though they might occasionally turn up.

    Lesson Summary

    The seven modes of the major scale are each separate entities, though they are all essentially derived from one scale, namely the major scale.

    In order to understand these differences, you have to compare each mode to their major counterparts, as that will allow you to see which notes were altered to create the scale.

    The use of modes may require a little bit of planning. Most of the time, it doesn’t make any sense to bring a mode into a standard chord progression (like G, C, D). Rather, there are “modal” progressions that really accentuate and emphasize the nature of each scale, and this is how to really bring a mode to life.

    Learning scales on the guitar is important for a few different reasons. They build strength and independence in your fingers in a way that is not possible just playing songs. Playing guitar scales also helps to train your ears to recognize common note combinations. They can also be used as note choices in your guitar solos and for melodies in songwriting.

    Open Position Major Scales for Guitar

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Learn 5 basic open position major scales. Specifically the “guitar” keys of C, G, D, A and E. Great for bass runs and fills.

    Chromatic Scales for Guitar

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    Playing chromatic scales on the guitar not only helps build technique but also helps your understanding of the guitar fretboard.

    Intro to Scales on the Guitar

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    What are guitar scales and why are they important to learn? Decode guitar scale charts and play them on the guitar.

    Whole Guitar Neck Mapped Out

    Learn 7 major scale patterns mapped out on the neck of the guitar in the key of C.

    Cyberfret.com Legacy Guitar Scale Lessons

    All guitar lessons on Cyberfret.com are in the process of being updated. Below are some scale guitar lessons from the old website that have not made it to the new one yet.

    Basic Guitar Scales – In this lesson you will learn 5 basic guitar scale shapes that every guitar player should know.

    Open position major scales for guitar – These are the 5 most common keys for guitar C, G, D, A, E.

    Minor Pentatonic Scales for Guitar – It’s the king daddy of all guitar scales used for improvisation.

    The Minor Pentatonic Extended Guitar Scale – In this guitar lessons Chris Weyers shows your a very common guitar scale and how to incorporate it into your lead guitar solos.

    Blues scale forms – Learn all 5 positions of the blues scale for guitar, and the common extended forms. The basic theory behind a blues scale is also explained in this guitar lesson.

    Major Scale Shapes – This is a study of the CAGED guitar scale system. This system is one of the foundations to understanding the neck of the guitar.

    Major Scale Forms – 3 Notes Per String – Learn 7 essential 3 notes per string major guitar scale forms. These same scale forms can also be used for any major scale mode (dorian, phrygian, lydian, mixolydian, aeolian, locrian)

    Chromatic Scales for Guitar – A chromatic scale contains all 12 possible pitches before arriving back at the starting note name an octave higher. This lesson covers the basic ways to play chromatic scales on the guitar.

    Guitar Scale Reference – Here is a listing of some basic fingerings for many common guitar scales.

    Scale Practice Exercises 1 & 2 – Video Guitar Lesson – Guitarist Adam St. James from Logical Lead Guitar shows a couple of essential guitar scale practice exercises.

    Pentamodal Method – Pentatonic Scales & Modes – Paul Tauterouff shows you a simple method to begin using modes in your guitar solos.

    Diagonal Pentatonic Scale Patterns – Guitarist Paul Tauterouff shows you how to break out of the box when playing pentatonic scales on the neck of the guitar.

    Guitar Scale Numbering System – Guitarist Adam St. James helps you decode the numbers used for guitar scales in music theory.

    Reinventing Scales – Mixotonic – Guitarist Brian Huether teaches you how to create a very useful “Frankinscale”.

    Open Position A Major Pentatonic Scale – Guitarist Dario Patrono from “Guitar Tips For Kids” shows how to play an A major pentatonic scale in the open position.

    Guitar Courses

    Rhythm Guitar Mastery
    How to strum guitar like a pro, master rhythms, and build your vocabulary of essential chords

    60s Rock Strumming Songs
    Learn how to play 17 classic 60s rock tunes

    70s Rock Strumming Songs
    Learn how to play 20 classic 70s rock tunes

    80s Rock Strumming Songs
    Learn how to play 20 classic 80s rock tunes

    90s Rock Strumming Songs
    Learn how to play 20 classic 90s rock tunes

    Guitar Lick Factory
    A system for creating rock & blues guitar licks

    The Root of a Guitar Scale

    (Video Guitar Lesson 4 of 5)

    Every guitar scale has what is called a root. This is the main note that the scale is named after, and build from. It’s the main note that you hear all of the other notes of the scale in relationship to.

    If you have an A major scale, then the root is the note A. In a scale chart, the root is often indicated in some different way than all of the other notes of the scale form. In the scale chart below the root is indicated by a gray oval. It could be indicate by a different color, or different shape…just something to let you know where the root is.

    A Major Scale

    How to play the a major guitar scale

    You will notice that there are 3 gray ovals in the above guitar scale fingering. In a major scale there are only 7 different notes before it starts over an octave higher. Oct is the prefix for 8. So by the time you reach the 8th note in this A major scale form, you are back to an A note.

    So the scale you have been playing so far in this guitar lesson has been a 2 octave A major scale. From the root on the 6th string to the root on the 4th string is 1 octave. Then from the 4th string root to the 1st string root is another octave.

    Many scale forms that you play on the guitar are about 2 octaves. Because that is the range from the 6th string to the 1st string.

    You also see an extra note higher than the root on the 1st string in this particular scale form. Many guitar scale forms do not neatly go from root to root. And that extra note is one you will want to know when using this scale form to improvise your own guitar solos.

    The major scale form that you have been playing also does not have any open strings. So you can actually move it up or down the neck to get any major scale you need. All you need to do is line that first note on the 6th string up with whatever root note you want.

    The 6th string, 5th fret is an A note. So that’s why this was an A major scale. But if you put your 2nd finger on the 6th string 3rd fret and played the scale, you would be playing a G major scale. Start on the 6th string 7th fret, and you have a B major scale.

    Definitely knowing the names of the notes on the neck of the guitar…especially the 6th string is essential to being able to move this scale form to where you need it.

    Guitar Scales that Don’t Start on the Root

    The root of the scale is not always the lowest note in a scale form. Technically a scale is suppose to begin and end on the root note. But on the guitar that’s not always feasible.

    In a guitar scale fingering you are going to play all of the note possibilities within one position on the neck of the guitar. Most of the time this means that the lowest and or the highest note in the scale form will not be the root of the scale. The most basic scale forms will start on the root, but just keep in mind that guitar scale forms will not always be that way.

    Below is an E major scale form where the lowest root note is on the 5th string, and the highest root is on the 2nd string. Even though you may not start on the root note, it’s still very important to know where the roots are within the scale form.

    A very common key in music is the key of A Major. This makes knowing the A Major scale guitar notes across the entire fretboard very useful.

    Every Major key follows the same musical spacing starting from its Root Note:

    Tone – Tone – Semi-tone – Tone – Tone – Tone – Semi-tone

    Following this sequence, the key of G guitar notes are:

    A – B – C# – D# – E – F# – G# – D

    Below is a diagram you can use to learn all of the A Major scale guitar notes across the fretboard:

    Click to Expand A Major Scale Guitar Notes

    Stuck Trying to Memorize the Notes On Your Guitar?
    Get instant access to my innovative guitar eBook that will help you understand why you’re stuck & show you 6 ways to start memorizing the notes for good!

    Key Signature

    The key signature for the A Major scale guitar notes contains three (3) sharps.

    A Major Key Signature

    The accidentals for the A Major scale guitar notes are:

    F# – C# – G#

    Tablature

    Here is an example of the A Major scale guitar notes written in guitar tablature including the Treble Clef.

    How to Memorize the A Major Scale Guitar Notes

    Just looking at the messy diagram above, it comes as no surprise that memorizing all of the A Major scale guitar notes can be a real challenge.

    Believe it or not, it is actually more difficult to do on the guitar than on most other instruments!

    Over the years playing and teaching guitar, I have found that the secret to truly memorizing the A Major scale guitar notes is exposure.

    Exposure means that you have seen them and thought about them so many times that you just know them. This is similar to how you probably still remember your childhood telephone number or any other numbers that you need to use regularly.

    But, how do you maximize your exposure to the A Major scale guitar notes in order to get them down as quickly as possible?

    To help you learn and memorize them all across the fretboard, I have created the “Finally Learn the Notes of Your Guitar” training course.

    You can learn all about the course here.

    This course will teach you where all of the A Major scale guitar notes are, as well as all of the other notes on the fretboard, too. It will also train you to memorize them once and for all!

    If you have any questions or comments about the guitar notes, please post them below.

    How do you play the key of G major on the guitar?

    • Begin by placing your ring finger on the third fret of the first string of your guitar to create a G major chord. Then, using your index finger on the second fret of the fifth string and your middle finger on the third fret of the sixth string, play a simple melody. Once your fingers are in the proper position, strum all six strings at the same time to play the G major chord.

    What is the G major scale pattern?

    The intervals in G Major are whole, whole, half, whole, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, half, whole, whole, The relative minor for G Major is E minor. G Major is a major scale scale. Try playing this scale with the E note as the root over a chord sequence in the key of e minor to see how it sounds.

    What notes are in the G major scale guitar?

    G major employs the root of its scale, G, the major third, B, and the perfect fifth, D, in the same way as all major chords do. Find out how to play the G major chord in this tutorial.

    How do you remember the G major scale?

    Notes about the G Major Scale (in G Major) As you can see, the notes are exactly the same as those in the G Major key. The E minor scale begins on the letter ‘E’ (also known as the root note), whereas the G major scale begins on the letter ‘G,’ although both scales include the same seven notes. The most important note to remember when playing the G Major scale is F# (F sharp).

    What chords are in G major scale?

    C, D, Em, and F#mb5 are used to make up the scale degree chords for the G major scale in the G major key. The G major key is represented by the scale degree chords G, Am, Bm, D, Em, and F#mb5.

    What fret Does the G major scale start on?

    C, D, Em, and F#mb5 are used to make up the scale degree chords for the G major scale in the G major key. The G major key is represented by the scale degree chords G, Am, Bm, C, D, and Em.

    When you play the G major scale which finger would you use to play the note on the staff?

    The scale degree chords of the G major scale are used in the G Major key, which are G, Am, Bm, C, D, Em, and F#mb5.

    What is the I chord in the key of G major?

    Which notes make up this triad and four-note chords, and what do they sound like? A chord in G major is composed of the notes G, B, and D, but the chord in G major seventh is composed of the chords G, B, D, and F#. Chords ii and iii Those notes are A – C – E, and they make up a minor scale. In music, the notes A, C, E, and G make up the seventh chord, which is called a minor seventh.

    What is ad major scale?

    Which notes make up this triad and four-note chords, and what are their names? A chord in G major is composed of the notes G, B, and D, but the chord in G major seventh is composed of the chords G, B, D, F#, and C. The second chord is called the second chord of the second chord. The notes A – C – E make up the minor scale. In music, the notes A, C, E, and G form the minor seventh.

    Should I memorize the major scales?

    Scales should be memorized so that they are easily identified and seem natural to play or employ in music whether performed or recorded. “If you’re going to be performing music in a specific scale, you definitely must know what those notes are and where they are on the piano or whatever other instrument you’re studying,” says the author.

    Do I need to memorize scales?

    It all comes down to what you want to accomplish. No need to memorize anything if all you want to do is perform your parts in school band, and you may do it just by reading your parts from the scripts. But, if you want to be a good musician and an excellent improviser, you need learn all of the scales, which you should do.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    A jump shot starts way before the arms are even involved. It all begins with your lower body; your feet and legs need to be set and ready to start the upward motion of your shot.

    Ray Allen, one of the greatest shooters in the history of basketball, told NBA TV , “Shooting, for me, is not about my upper body. It’s really about my lower body. So when I’m shooting the ball like I need to, I jump and it’s one motion.”

    Basketball players are almost universally taught, at an early age, that stepping into your shot one foot at a time, or a “1-2 step,” is the proper way to use your lower body in setting up a catch-and-shoot jump shot.

    The 1-2 step is the traditional and still most widely used footwork for shooting, however, some players at higher levels will utilize “the hop” instead of the 1-2 step, at times, to get their feet set for their shot. Many great shooters in the NBA, from Kevin Durant to Bradley Beal to JJ Redick, will use the hop to get into their shot depending on the situation.

    Let’s break down both of these techniques to see which one might benefit you best, and illustrate how to perform the hop should you want to give it a chance.

    1-2 Step

    For right-handed shooters , when using the 1-2 step, you will step with your left foot first, and after that foot is planted you will simultaneously catch the ball and step with your right foot to align your feet (either square to the basket or angled to the left or right). Left handed shooters will use the right foot first and then follow with the left.

    Spot up

    If you are spotting up, or catching and shooting from a standstill, you can start with your first foot already planted. The shot will then only require one step into your alignment, catch and shoot, and will thus be quicker.

    Moving

    On the move, the 1-2 step will require you to set up your feet as you move to the desired spot so that the proper first foot is down on the catch, then turning your body to face the basket and into your shot as the ball is caught. To get into the 1-2 step on the move you may have to alter your stride as you run.

    After the catch

    Once the ball is caught after a 1-2 step, if you decide not to shoot, you can only jab step or begin a drive with the second foot that was used to step into the shot, once the ball was caught.

    Your decision to either shoot, drive or pass will be made as you are stepping into your shot and reading the defense.

    The Hop

    To use the hop, you will start by jumping just 2 to 3 inches off the ground once the pass is thrown and the ball is in the air. While you are briefly in the air you will catch the ball and align your hips and feet for your shot, so the hop, catch and alignment will take place all in one motion. You will land on the balls of your feet and quickly spring back up for your jump shot.

    Spot up

    If you are spotting up with the hop, you can start with your feet in whatever stance is comfortable for you—square, staggered or angled. You will hop off of both feet, catch, align, land and shoot.

    Moving

    On the move you can be ready to hop and shoot at any time because as you move you can get into your hop by jumping off of either foot and quickly turning in the air to align your body. When running, shuffling or backpedaling into a shot, as the ball comes toward you, you will start your hop with whichever foot is currently planted. Then jump off of one foot, catch, align with the basket and land on two feet before shooting.

    (It maybe be more comfortable to always start your hop with a certain foot when you are on the move, and in this case you will have to set up your steps similar to a 1-2 step.)

    After the catch

    Once the ball is caught after a hop, you can attack the defense with either foot because landing on two feet does not establish a pivot foot. So you can jab or begin a drive with either foot.

    Your decision to either shoot, drive or pass must be made quickly as you are in the air, catching the ball and reading the defense.

    Which is better?

    Changing your footwork from the 1-2 to the hop is not going to drastically change your shot accuracy by itself. If you have been taught to use the 1-2 step and are considering adding the hop to your game, there are three main aspects of your shot you will want to consider when examining if the hop helps you or not. So as you are trying out the hop you should be asking yourself about:

    • Speed: Does using the hop compared to the 1-2 get my shot off quicker? Is my shot released faster from the time the ball is caught?
    • Balance: Does quickly landing on the balls of my feet give me more or less balance when compared to stepping into my shot, one foot at a time? Do I feel like my weight is distributed equally and I am jumping straight?
    • Rhythm: Does the hop give me more rhythm? Does hopping into my shot give my entire shooting motion more flow from my feet to my release point?

    The video below makes the case for the hop but does a good job or comparing the two methods and providing visual examples of how both are done.

    These questions should help you determine if using the hop would be good for you. You can obviously use either the 1,2 step or the hop exclusively or a combination of both depending on the situation of the game. What is most important is what makes your shooting motion the most comfortable and how it affects your shot.

    How to Do a Basketball Hop Step in 2022

    One of the most basic and essential moves in basketball is the hop step. Though it may seem simple, nailing the hop step can make a big difference on the court. In this post, we’ll break down how to do a proper hop step so you can take your game to the next level. Read on to learn more!

    Part 1. Mastering Footwork and Stance

    The basketball hop step is an advanced move that can create space for a shot, get around defenders, or change direction on the court. To do a successful hop step, you need to master your footwork and stance.

    Footwork: To execute the hop step correctly, you need to have good footwork. You should be able to move quickly and smoothly on the court. To improve your footwork, practice shuffling, crossover steps, and quick direction changes.

    Stance: Your stance is also essential for doing a successful hop step. You should be in a low stance with your knees bent and your weight evenly distributed between your feet. It will allow you to move quickly and easily in any direction.

    1. Familiarize yourself with the right landing stance

    Your landing stance is critical when doing a basketball hop step. You want to be in a low stance with your knees bent and your weight evenly distributed between your feet. It will allow you to move quickly and easily in any direction.

    2. Bend your knees and stay low

    When you’re doing the hop step, you want to stay low so you can move quickly. It would be best to bend your knees when you jump to get more height and power.

    3. Keep your head up

    It’s essential to keep your head up when you’re doing the hop step. It will help you stay focused and avoid getting hit in the head.

    4. Practice small hops first

    Before you try doing the basketball hop step, practice doing small hops. It will help you get used to jumping and landing in a low stance.

    5. Land with both feet

    When you land after the hop step, make sure to land with both feet. It will help you stay balanced and in control.

    6. Limit your pivot

    When you do the hop step, you want to limit your pivot. It will help you stay in control and make it harder for defenders to block your shot.

    Part 2. Practicing With the Ball

    1. Dribble the ball slowly down the court

    When you’re practicing the hop step, start by dribbling the ball slowly down the court. It will help you get comfortable with the move.

    2. Jump into the hop step with restraint

    When you jump into the hop step, don’t jump too high. You want to jump just high enough to get past your defender.

    3. Land with both feet simultaneously

    When you land after the hop step, make sure to land with both feet. It will help you stay balanced and in control.

    4. Practice your single pivot

    Once you’ve mastered the essential hop step, start practicing your single pivot. It will allow you to make a quick move in any direction.

    5. Finish with a pass or a shot

    Once you’ve completed the hop step, finish with a pass to a teammate or a shot at the basket.

    Part 3. Practicing Without the Ball

    1. Jog slowly down the court

    When you’re practicing the hop step without the ball, start by jogging slowly down the court. It will help you get comfortable with the move.

    2. Drive with your leading foot

    When you drive to the hoop, use your leading foot to take your defender off balance. It will create more space for a shot or a layup.

    3. Land on both feet simultaneously

    When you land after the hop step, make sure to land with both feet. It will help you stay balanced and in control.

    4. Pivot once

    When you pivot, make sure to do it in a controlled manner. It will help you stay in control and make it harder for defenders to block your shot.

    Part 4. Receiving a Pass with the Hop Step

    1. Get a friend and a ball

    You may use this hop step to make several good shots in a row. You can practice passing by yourself or with a partner. By doing this, you will be able to get more comfortable with the hop step.

    2. Coordinate movement with the teammate in possession

    Your teammate in possession must be aware of your movement and coordinate with you. If the player dribbling down the court cannot see you, they will not be able to pass you the ball.

    3. Drive with your leading foot into a small hop

    When you drive to the hoop and receive the pass, use your leading foot to take your defender off balance. It will create more space for a shot or a layup.

    4. Catch the ball and land with both feet

    Take a look at yourself and have your work evaluated by your buddy. Have you landed on both feet at the same time? Are your legs bent, and are you low to the ground? If so, you’re doing great! Make sure you keep practicing.

    5. Pivot and shoot or pass

    If you have successfully caught the ball and landed with both feet, take a quick pivot on your leading foot. It will give you more power to shoot or pass the ball.

    6. Practice receiving a pass on your own

    It is a simple change for most skilled individuals, but the mechanics involved make it tough to do correctly. Playing catch on your own as follows:

    • Jumping into the air
    • Landing and then pivoting on one foot
    • Finishing with a pass or shot

    You will develop muscle memory and be able to execute this move in a game setting better.

    1. What is a basketball hop step?

    A basketball hop step is a move that allows a player to get around an opponent by jumping off one foot and landing on the other. The player gains more space to shoot or drive to the basket by doing this.

    2. How do you do a basketball hop step?

    You can get closer to the basket by doing a basketball hop step while taking less steps. It is done by jumping off of one foot and then hopping onto the other foot, pushing off the ground with the ball of your foot to get closer to the basket. You can then shoot or pass the ball.

    3. What are the benefits of doing a basketball hop step?

    There are a few benefits of doing a basketball hop step. One is that it can help you get around defenders more easily. It can also help you create more space for yourself when you’re shooting or trying to drive to the basket. Finally, it can also help you maintain your balance better when you’re dribbling the ball.

    4. When is the best time to use a basketball hop step?

    There is no definitive answer, as the best time to use a basketball hop step will vary depending on the situation. However, one general guideline is to use a basketball hop step when you want to create space between you and your defender to get an open shot.

    5. Are there any other steps that can be used in place of a basketball hop step?

    A few other steps can be used in place of the basketball hop step. One is a crossover step, which is used to change direction quickly. Another is the jump stop, which is used to stop quickly and maintain balance.

    Conclusion

    That’s it! You now know how to do a proper hop step. As we mentioned earlier, this move can make a big difference on the court, so be sure to practice and perfect it. And if you’re looking for more tips and tricks on how to improve your basketball game, be sure to check out our other posts. Thanks for reading.

    Basketball is one of the most loveable sports in the world. It is usually played indoors on a basketball court where players from each side score points by throwing a ball through the hoop.

    A basketball hoop is a ring usually made up of metal supporting a net. It is elevated 10-feet above the ground and attached to a backboard. In the past, peach baskets were used, but later they were replaced by metal hoops with nets and backboards.

    Drawing a basketball hoop is not a difficult task. You only need to know how to draw the basic shapes and must be good at drawing.

    By following this step-by-step guide, the entire process of drawing a basketball hoop will become a lot easier for you.

    You will need the following things to draw a basketball hoop:

    1. Drawing board
    2. Drawing paper
    3. Pencil
    4. Ruler
    5. Markers or crayons (depends on your choice)

    Follow these easy steps to draw a basketball hoop with a backboard.

    1. As basketball hoops are attached to the backboards, it is ideal to draw a backboard first. In NBA and international basketball games, backboards are rectangular in shape. Therefore, we are also going to make a rectangular-shaped backboard.

    How to do a basketball hop stepTake a ruler and draw a rectangular shape. This will be the outline of the backboard. The size of the rectangle depends on the size of paper you are using.

    1. Next, draw one or two rectangles inside the outline of the backboard to add details.
    2. Draw a small square in the middle of the backboard at the bottom to add further details to the backboard. Make sure there are no overlapping lines.
    3. After drawing a backboard, it’s time to draw the rim of the basketball hoop. First, draw a flattened oval and then draw another oval inside the first oval. This all should be done at the bottom of the square you made on the backboard.
    4. After the rim, draw an outline of the net. Start from one side of the rim and draw a downward curved line. Same, on the other side of the hoop, draw another downward curved line. Make sure the net is wide from the top and narrow at the bottom.
    5. We all know that nets have crisscross patterns, so we need to draw that pattern to make a complete basketball net.

    Start by making V-shaped lines right beneath the hoop. After completing the first line, proceed to the second and so on. Create the entire net by following the same pattern.

    1. To color the picture, use markers or crayons. Try to use bright colors in your drawing.

    Congratulations! Your basketball hoop drawing is now complete. If you got an assignment to draw a basketball hoop, you can submit it to your class teacher or share it with others on different social media platforms.


    Basketball is a fascinating game sport, played all around the world. The popularity of the game inspires the new players to level up their game and stand out amongst others.

    To excel any game, there’s only one key to it, that is to practice the most. As you practice more, you will learn new techniques and bring consistency of excellence in your performance.

    For improving your game of basketball, you will need to have your own basketball hoop right in your driveway or yard, so you can shoot some baskets every day.

    There are many options in the market for you, but the best and safest ones are those who have their foundation in the ground.

    The In-ground hoop offers the best stability and professional-level play. However, installing these hoops is not an easy task at all.

    This is why we are here to help you. We will guide you about the installation of in-ground basketball hoop, so you can install one by yourself.

    Having a hoop will not just uplift your game to the next level, but it will surely be the best weekend fun for your friends and family.

    Table Of Contents

    Factors to Consider While Installing In Ground Basketball Goal

    Before we start digging the hole, there are some important things to consider and look upon. Make a decision wisely so you don’t have to regret it later.

    Location

    This is the first thing to consider after buying an in-ground hoop. Choose a location where you want to install your hoop. The ground should be flat and have enough space for the half-court. The size of the NBA court is 94 by 50 feet. It can be your driveway, backyard, or wherever you want.

    Make sure to check for underground pipes and adhere to homeowners association rules if necessary.

    Arrange the basic supplies

    You have the hoop and you have chosen your location. Now its time for arranging the things you will need in the process. These are the tools and materials you will need:-

    – Hammer and nails

    – Wrench (size according to instructions)

    How to Install In ground Basketball Goal Step By Step

    Let’s start our process step by step so you can be clear with the instructions.

    Step 1: Dig a Hole

    Dig a hole where you want to install your hoop. Follow the manufacturer instructions to know how to dig the hole, and how big it should be. You can dig with a shovel or any other digging equipment.

    Step 2: Pour Concrete

    The secret to a long-lasting basketball hoop lies is in the foundation. Follow the instructions to achieve the perfect mixture of concrete and water.

    In this step, you will need your friends to help you. Place the pole in the hole you dug and hold the pole as still as you can. Then have someone pour the mixture into the hole.

    When the hole is half full, insert the steel bars. They need to be aligned as in the instructions. Then fill the hole until its full. Smooth out the top, clean any excess, and level it.

    Leave the cement to dry for at least 24 to 48 hours. Keep checking to make sure the pole doesn’t shift or lean.

    Step 3: Raise the Pole

    You can skip to the next step of your hoop only includes a pole in the cement. But if you have an adjustable-height type of hoop, you will have to assemble and raise the pole.

    Not every model is the same, so follow the manual instructions of your model and assemble the lift mechanism.

    Take the help of your friends and lift up the pole. Make sure it matches up with the anchor piece in the cement. Adjust and make the pole completely level.

    Step 4: Attach the Backboard

    Now it’s time to attach the backboard of the hoop. Remember this is a very heavy component so you will need at least 4-5 adults to help you with the safe lift. Take all the safety precautions.

    With the help of your team, lift the backboard up in place to support arms and secure it to the support mount.

    After safely mounting the backboard, tighten all the screws.

    Step 5: Install the Rim and Net

    After attaching the backboard, you will now install the rim and net. This is an easy part as mostly rims are preassembled at the factory. All you need to do is fix it with four screws to the backboard.

    If you’ve opted for a breakaway rim, follow your manual instructions for the extra assembling required.

    Now attach the net on each of the hooks on the rim and get ready for hours of fun and excitement.

    Step 6: Finishing Touches

    By this step, you have finished installing your hoop. And now it’s time for the additional accessories (if any) such as court lighting or padding which is attached around the backboard and pole. These finishing touches are generally optional but they can prevent injuries when accidentally bumping into the pole.

    Adjust the height of the hoop to the desired height if you have an adjustable-height basketball hoop. Use the height stickers provided as they will help you to easily adjust the mechanism.

    You are done with all the mechanical work now. It’s time to go a little colorful as colors enhance the beauty of things.

    Paint the basketball court lines on the pavement to get a professional feel. Do it after measuring the lines and marking off with painter’s tape. Remove the tape after you paint it.

    And now you are good to play and shoot some basketballs with your friends and family in your own basketball court.

    If you are still confused here is the video.

    Conclusion

    Installing an In-ground hoop may seem a difficult job, but following the instructions correctly will just ease the task. The step by step guide will help you to carefully understand each step.

    Take every safety precaution to avoid injuries during the process. Follow the above steps and the manufacturer’s instructions to install the hoop correctly.

    It will take a bit of work to set up but in the end, it is worth it. As this will be a source of enjoyment for you and your family for years to come.

    I have been playing basketball for more than a decade now, and my passion and enthusiasm for it drove me to write about it. I am Ahmed, a professional basketball player and a fan who has now become a writer to help fellow basketball players and enthusiasts to opt for the best possible basketball accessories and essentials. Stay tuned to feast yourself with the content you might not have seen anywhere else.

    Practice, Repetition and Consistency

    Many people believe that if they practice basketball shooting drills every day, they will naturally improve their basketball skills… and they would be right! Constant effort builds basketball skills that are essential to success of the game. In addition to passing, dribbling, and stamina, basketball shooting is the number one most important aspect of the game. Your shot needs to be worked on to be an effective shooter. The more shots you can take the better, using a shooting machine you can take hundreds of practice shots simply by avoid chasing rebounds. Executing a lethal shot is made simple with this 10-step guide.

    Step 1: Shot Preparation

    The first step you need to take in executing your shot is to take a deep breath and relax for about 10 seconds. Try these three tips:

    • Start with your knees and hips slightly bent: This will give you better balance and improve your chances of making the shot.
    • Show target hands: This will loosen your grip and allow you to control the ball better.
    • Be mentally prepared to shoot: Be confident in your ability to make the shot. Do not overthink it; just shoot and let go.

    Step 2: Hand Placement on the Ball

    Knowing exactly where your hands lay on the ball will increase shooting accuracy.

    Point your palm up, slightly bent, with your index finger pointing forward. Press your thumb on the ball to give it more pressure. As you shoot, pull down without bending your wrists. Keep your elbows down and your arms extended. The key is being comfortable.

    Step 3: Balanced Base

    Keep your head, eyes, and feet shoulder width apart and towards the hoop as you shoot. This is important to set a strong shooting foundation.

    Step 4: Keeping the Ball Close

    Keeping your shooting arm close is essential if you want to shoot well. That way, you keep your arm securely against your body so it doesn’t fly all over while making shots. Keep your shooting arm close to your side when shooting a basketball. The closer it is, the more accurate you will be when releasing the ball.

    Step 5. The Jump Shot

    It might seem like a no-brainer, but getting ready for a jump shot you should bend your knees and extend to launch straight up fully extending your legs to get as much height as possible before you release the ball. Don’t hunch over or lean back either; as you land you should fall into the same place your feet launched from.

    Step 6. Shoot from Your Core

    As soon as you start shooting, focus your core and abs. This is especially important when shooting three-pointers because they require more strength to shoot further. Keep your shot balanced by shooting with your core.

    Step 7. Support your Wrists

    Support your wrist and keep your shooting arm as straight as possible to get the most out of your shot. To get into position, start in a wide stance with your knees bent slightly and weight distributed evenly between both feet. When it’s time to shoot, use your non-shooting hand to raise the ball above your shoulder and keep your wrists strong while you follow through with your shot.

    Step 8. Holding the Follow Through

    As you release the ball, point your index finger toward the basketball hoop and backboard. The point is to let the ball leave your hand without slowing your motion, especially of the wrist and fingers. If you don’t follow through, that means your hand stops when the ball leaves it. That means your hand was already decelerating before the ball left it, which will cause a bunch of mechanical problems, the biggest of which is less backspin on the ball. Keep your follow through strong.

    Step 9. Eyes on the backboard

    While shooting the ball, keep your eyes on the target from start to finish. You should be looking at the front of the rim, not the back of the rim. When shooting you must follow the previous steps to get the best result from your shot. If you look at your hands, your ball will likely miss. Instead, focus on keeping your head still and looking up at the rim as much as possible during shooting time.

    Step 10. Practice and Consistency

    To be the best shooter possible, it takes consistency, practice and repetition. The best shooter is the one that is up early in the morning and last one shooting after practice is over. This is because they can get hundreds and even thousands of shots in a single session. If you want to take it to the next level, get a basketball shooting machine from Shoot-A-Way. The Gun basketball shooting machine allows you to get a pass from anywhere on the court and shoot up to 1800 shots per hour. Customize your Gun to personalize your own basketball shooter.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    The Euro Step is an extremely effective move that allows a player with the ball to evade a defender and finish at the basket with a wide open layup.

    It’s a move that has become much more popular in recent years.

    It was used in European leagues for years, but wasn’t seen much in North America until around 1989, when Šarūnas Marčiulionis brought it to the NBA.

    Manu Ginóbili popularized the Euro Step even further in the 2000s, and now we see players such as James Harden and Giannis Antetokounmpo use it regularly to devastating effect.

    What is a Euro Step?

    The Euro Step is a move where the player with the ball will pick up their dribble, take a step in one direction, and then quickly take a second step in a different direction before shooting or passing.

    The intention is to get the defender moving one way, and then quickly stepping back the opposite way to create space.

    Basketball rules allow ball handlers to take two steps toward the basket to complete a layup or dunk after they pick up their dribble, and the Euro Step is a creative way to use those two steps.

    Like any move in basketball, in order to master the Euro Step, you must learn each step and practice it over and over again.

    I’ll show you how.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    How to Execute a Euro Step in 5 Steps:

    There are many variations of the Euro Step that players can use.

    But for the below example, we’ll keep things simple and assume a player is attacking the hoop from the right side of the floor.

    Now, time for the tutorial:

    1. Dribble Toward the Basket

    A traditional euro step starts with a player who has the ball attacking the basket.

    It doesn’t matter which hand your dribbling with or which side of the court you’re on, the euro step can be used anywhere on the court.

    During this example, remember there’s a player between you and the basket

    (or else you wouldn’t need to use a euro step, would you?)

    Make sure you aren’t dribbling the ball too far in front of you, otherwise there’s a chance the defender might steal the ball from you.

    2. Pick Up the Ball

    As you’re closing in on the basket and the defender in front of you, pick up the basketball while your left foot is on the floor.

    The key is to pick up the basketball when you’re close to the defender and close enough to the basket that you can finish with a layup.

    3. Take Your First Step

    After you’ve picked up the ball, take your first step with your right foot.

    Remembering that our example uses a player attacking on the right side of the floor, this step should be towards the baseline side of the defender.

    4. Take Your Second Step

    At this point, the defender has hopefully taken a step towards the baseline to cut off where they thought you were going to go.

    It’s at this point that you sweep the basketball across your body and take your second step – with your left foot – in the opposite direction.

    The offensive player can sweep the ball low (knee height), across the body (chest height), or high (above the head).

    (if you sweep the ball high, please make sure your elbows don’t come into contact with the defenders forehead!)

    5. Lay the Basketball in the Hoop

    If you’ve executed the euro step correctly, you’ll hopefully find yourself wide open in front of the basket.

    Jump off your left foot, extend towards the basket with either your right or left hand, and drop the basketball into the hoop.

    You’ve officially completed the euro step 🙂

    Tips for the Perfect Euro Step

    There are several things you should keep in mind while executing the Euro Step (or teaching it to your team).

    a. Exaggerate the first step

    Some players struggle with the Euro Step because they’re unable to “sell” the fake when they take the first step in their layup.

    Exaggerate the movement of your head and body to force the defender to shift.

    If you do this correctly, the other steps will be much easier.

    b. Slow down

    The Euro Step isn’t meant to be rushed.

    Slow down and allow the defender to slide themselves out of the play before you attempt to finish with a layup or shot.

    c. Trouble with finishing?

    Some players have a lot of trouble putting the ball in the hoop after this move.

    It’s an odd movement for players who haven’t practiced it much.

    For example, a player executing a right -> left euro step might need to finish with their left hand while their momentum takes them the same direction.

    Make sure you practice this move from all angles.

    d. Euro Step to pass

    You don’t have to finish with a shot every time you use this move.

    Players will often find that after executing the euro step, a help defender steps across to contest the shot.

    This is often the perfect time to drop the ball off to a teammate for a layup or to toss the ball out to a teammate for a three-pointer.

    Conclusion

    The Euro Step is a relatively new move in basketball, even though it has been in the NBA for about 20-30 years now.

    Still, it wasn’t truly popularized until the early 2000s and improved upon again only in recent seasons.

    The Euro Step is one of the most dramatic moves a ball handler can make while they dribble.

    It’s meant to fake a defender into thinking you’re heading to the basket one way, only to quickly change gears and head to the basket in the other direction.

    This will create space between the ball handler and the defender, making for a much easier layup chance and easy basket.

    Introduction: Mini Paper Basketball Hoop

    How to do a basketball hop step

    How to do a basketball hop step

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Mini paper basketball hoop great for a constant distraction from homework and other things and can take less than a minute to make.

    Step 1: Materials

    All you need is a 2 pieces of regular printer paper to make the hoop and the paper basketballs.

    Step 2: Step 1

    Fold the Top right corner down to form a triangle, with a small rectangle below it.

    Step 3: Part 2

    Now do the opposite and fold the Top left corner down to form a triangle, with a rectangle below it.

    Step 4: Part 3

    The next part is slightly tricky, you have to pinch the center of where the 4 triangle meets above the rectangle and then push the top down.

    Step 5: Creating the Hoop

    Now to form the hoop you have the triangle and you stick one end into the other forming a hole, push them in tight so they hold together and create a stable hoop.

    Step 6: Creating the Stand Part 1

    Now to form the stand theres the end of triangle in the back and you take those ends that are out to the side and you bring them to the center then crease the side of the paper.

    Step 7: Creating the Stand Part 2

    Now do the same thing with the other side and then the stand will be done.

    Step 8: Paper Basketballs

    Simply take a small piece of torn papr and crumbl into a ball.

    Step 9: Finished Product

    Now you have your 5 minute distraction during school and other things uninteresting.

    Be the First to Share

    Did you make this project? Share it with us!

    January 27, 2015

    How to do a basketball hop step

    2 out of 3 of these basketball finishing moves did not even exist 15 years ago.

    And I’m going to get this article started off on the right foot by explaining my favorite one.

    How To Pro Hop

    This move started in the NBA, hence the name, and now is something that most all players big and small should practice to help themselves finish in the paint.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Just Stretching After A Game

    The reason that this move is effective is because you can cover alot of ground with it.

    The best time to use it is when you penetrate to the basket and a help defender steps up to contest you.

    Instead of trying to finish high over the defender simply jump past them using a pro hop and finish where there is no defense.

    Of course that sounds alot easier than it is, but with practice it definitely can become instinctual.

    Ok, lets get into exactly how to use this finishing move.

    If you are penetrating with the basketball in your right hand then you should jump off our left foot and vice versa.

    But the landing is the most important aspect of this finishing move.

    You must land with both feet at the same time to avoid being called for a travel.

    Watch as a referee explains why this move gets called as a travel so often.

    So as you can see if the foot you jump off of is the first foot that hits the ground after the hop you will be called for a travel.

    Ok, let’s head over to the gym now and let me walk you through this move step by step:

    Like any new basketball move you learn, you need to spend hours upon hours practicing the move before you even think about trying to do it in a game.

    With that said here is a drill you can do to work on your pro hop. Use the buttons below to share this page and unlock the drill.

    Ok, lets get into #2 on our list of basketball finishing moves.

    How To Euro Step

    This finishing move is called the Euro Step because it was brought over to the NBA from European players.

    I’m actually writing this from Europe right now and I can tell you that this is definitely something that is used here and I’ve seen so many players do this move over here and do it very well.

    In the NBA I see players like James Harden, Dwyane Wade, and Manu Ginobili use this move all the time.

    Here’s a picture of D-Wade using it:

    How to do a basketball hop step

    When you shoot a layup off of one foot you are allowed to take 2 steps. A Eurostep is basically when you use those two steps to fake in when direction, go around the defender in the other direction, and finish with a layup.

    The first step is important as that is the step you will use to fake out the defense.

    If the ball is in your right hand then you will first step with your right foot first and vice versa.

    Make sure you step hard too, and wait for the defender to react. Once he does you are going to now step in the opposite direction and finish with a layup.

    There are a few ways you can shoot the layup and you can even shoot a floater, but what I teach my players to do is to finish with a “Goofy Reverse.”

    This is the easiest way due to the fact that you are on balance and it is more natural feeling.

    To see the exact footwork check out the video below.

    The better you get with this move the more you will find yourself using your 2 steps to maneuver around help defenders to get layups.

    Here is the complete breakdown:

    So that’s it for the Eurostep, now lets check out a move that Hakeem Olajuwon made famous and Rajon Rondo loves to use.

    How To Rondo

    I call this “The Rondo” but my teammate who played at the University of Milwaukee said his coach in college loved this move and taught it to his players and they called it “The Donut.”

    I’m going to stick with “The Rondo” though.

    This is basically an unorthodox shot fake.

    It’s the counter to a “Goofy Reverse.”

    There are few things that you must do to make this move work and they are:

    • Be a threat to finish the Goofy Reverse.
    • Attack at full speed.
    • Stop on a dime.
    • Use the ball as the fake.
    • Pivot back quickly into your finish.

    Here is a quick look at Rondo using this as it is one of his favorite basketball finishing moves.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Here is the complete breakdown:

    Ok, so I hope you enjoyed this article and I hope you take these 3 basketball finishing moves and start practicing them in the gym.

    Of course, these are not the only options when trying to finish inside but these are 3 of my favorites and ones that can be developed and utilized over time.

    If you liked this please share and tell your friends about Baller Boot Camp and our youtube channel as well.

    Also, leave me a comment if you have any questions.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Playing basketball is a great way to get some exercise, and installing your own goal means you can shoot hoops whenever you want.

    If you can’t wait to hit the ‘court,’ Quikrete Fast-Setting Concrete is the speedy solution for setting a strong foundation.

    Here’s how to set an in-ground basketball goal.

    1. Dig the hole.

    How to do a basketball hop stepA post hole digger is the most efficient tool for digging a hole.

    First, call 811 to make sure there are no underground utilities where you want the basketball goal. If your goal post comes with a set of instructions for hole depth and width, make sure you follow those guidelines.

    Once you get the all-clear, grab a post hole digger and dig a hole — the edge of the hole should be, at most, 6 inches away from your playing surface. A hole that is 24 inches wide and 24 inches deep should give your post the necessary stability it needs for everyday use.
    The bottom 6 inches will be used for something other than concrete. (You’ll see why in a second.)

    2. Add the base.

    How to do a basketball hop stepConcrete is porous, so it’s important to add a layer of gravel for proper drainage.

    Pour 6 inches of gravel or crushed stone into the hole — then use a 2-by-4 to compact and level the base. This creates a strong barrier between the concrete and the ground, ensures proper drainage and prevents the concrete’s erosion.

    Tip: If the soil is sandy, use a building form
    . The tubular form, made of ridged fiber, is used for pouring cylinder-shaped concrete foundations.

    3. Set the post.

    Place the basketball pole in the hole and use a level to make sure it’s perfectly vertical. Then pour Fast-Setting Concrete into the hole, just four inches below ground level.

    You’ll need those four inches for the next step: pouring water inside the hole to saturate the concrete. Ensure the water reaches the bottom of the concrete by stirring or stabbing the mixture with a stick.

    Check the basketball goal’s instructions for any special steps you need to take. We’re pouring concrete around a pole for this how-to, but some in-ground basketball goals require a different installation process.

    Either way, the concrete sets hard in 20 to 40 minutes, and you can attach the backboard after four hours — and shoot hoops before the day is done!

    How to do a basketball hop stepInstalling an in-ground basketball goal takes no time compared to the countless hours of use that goal will get.
    (DepositPhotos)

    Two Post Moves Demonstrated in the Video:

    1. Drop Step – Baseline

    Drop Step – Middle

    The goal of the drop step is to get the defensive stuck on your back so he can not disrupt your shot as you drop step towards the basket for a lay up. A great counter-move to the drop step is the Drop Step, Inside Pivot, Jump Shot.

    How to Drop Step towards the Baseline

    • Plant your inside foot as the pivot foot and
    • As you receive the pass, drop step towards the goal with your outside leg.
    • Drive your knee of the leg that originally was your pivot foot up towards the goal and complete the lay up.

    How to Drop Step towards the Middle

    • Plant your outside foot as the pivot foot and
    • As you receive the pass, drop step towards the goal with your inside leg.
    • Drive your knee of the leg that originally was your pivot foot up towards the goal and complete the lay up.

    Keep Your Hips Low – Approach the chair and keep your hips low. Just like in a game you want to maintain a low center of gravity to keep a solid base so you are not easily pushed around. If you get lower than the defensive player with a solid foundation and you bump into the defender, it is more likely to knock the defender off balance which will open up more scoring opportunities.

    Long and Strong – I like to remind players to take a long step and go up strong towards the goal. This helps them get to the goal quickly and prepares them for contact by the goal.

    Advanced Variations:

    Power Drop Step – Take one hard dribble and come to a jump stop with both feet before powering up for the lay up.

    Drop Step w/ Contact – Nudge the player as he goes towards the goal with a pad or your hands. This will help condition them to power up towards the goal through contact.

    Related Products & Articles

    Do you have any questions or suggestions for this drill? Let us know by leaving your comments.

    Can you replace the base of a basketball hoop?

    Compatibility with different SHAPE AND SIZE poles. PROBASE replaces the plastic base on all types of portable basketball hoops. It is compatible with all poles on the market, regardless of their shape or size. Once you remove the base, insert the pole directly in PROBASE.

    How do you transport a basketball hoop on a truck?

    Use pieces of bubble wrap to protect the backboard and pole from breakage. Place smaller pieces, such as the rim and net, inside a box with packing peanuts to avoid bending or ripping of the materials. The base can be placed in a larger box so it does not shift around the truck while moving.

    How heavy is a basketball hoop?

    In short, an average basketball hoop weighs around 130 pounds (59 kilos) dry weight, which means the weight of the hoop when its base is not filled with sand nor water.

    Do basketball hoops come apart?

    They are hard to get a part but is you take a metal stake and a hammer, you can hammer the pieces apart. Need to hammer a couple times, rotate pole a quarter turn, rinse and repeat until the pieces come apart.

    How do you loosen a dance pole?

    Stand on your tiptoes or use a step-stool to reach the top section of your pole. Stick a hex key into each screw and turn them counterclockwise to loosen the screws a bit. Don’t remove them completely—just keep them loose so you can disassemble the pole. A hex key is also called an Allen wrench.

    Is sand or water better for basketball hoop?

    Sand is denser than water, and it weighs more per gallon, so it can help increase stability. But while it may make for a more stable hoop, sand can also make hoops difficult to move. Using a funnel while filling the base can help decrease the chances of spilling sand.

    How do you fix the base on a basketball hoop?

    4 Simple Ways to Repair Cracked Basketball Hoop Base

    1. Use adhesive or resin. Sadly, no strong adhesive can be used in conjunction with fiberglass cloth to build a solid patch over a crack.
    2. Use heat to patch it up (the best move)
    3. Use fiberglass-reinforced caulk or sealant (easiest option)
    4. Concrete, silicone, and alternatives.

    How do you fix a rusty basketball pole?

    How to remove rust from basketball pole and keep it that way

    1. Buy a wire brush for a drill and use it. Make sure you wear safety glasses and long sleeves; small bits of hot metal would be all over the place.
    2. Use a wire brush to clean rust off the metal facade.
    3. Use an all surface enamel oil primer to prime the pole.

    Can you move an inground basketball hoop?

    It is possible to move modern in-ground hoops, but professionals are always needed. Newer in-ground hoops are designed so they can be moved. The main part of the basket is detachable from the in-ground base that is in the hardened cement.

    How do you move a basketball net?

    Place one foot against the base of the goal where the wheels are. Place your foot straight up and down against the middle section of the base so that the ball of your foot touches the ground and the top rests along the top of the base. Put your other foot slightly behind you for support.

    How tall do you have to be to dunk?

    To dunk, you‘ll need to be jumping around 35 inches high, which would be considered impressive even in professional sports. In the NBA there are players who consistently produce 40+ inch running vertical jumps that enable them to perform spectacular dunks in games.

    How far is the 3 point line?

    The arc typically stretches to 23 feet, nine inches, but is not uniform. In the corners, the distance between it and the basket is only 22 feet. The NBA decided to redraw the arcs so that they sat 22 feet away from the basket across the board.

    What should I look for when buying a basketball hoop?

    There are some additional factors to consider when buying a basketball hoop including installation, the basketball goal’s backboard, height adjustability, overhang, pole finish, size, and shape, basketball rim and net, and accessories.

    • Home
    • Forums
    • Dynasties
    • Blogs
    • Reviews
    • Features
    • Guides
    • Press Releases
    • Screenshots
    • Videos

    More Links

    • About
    • Like OS on Facebook
    • Follow OS on Twitter
    • OS Amazon Link
    • OS Staff Blogs
    • OS Radio Shows – Tune in!
    • OS Real Time
    • My Arena
    • Blog
    • Dynasty
    • Chalkboard
    • Friends
    • Albums
    • Scores
    • Forums
    • Sign Up
    • OS
    Communicate
    Friends
    Chalkboard

    Hop Jumpers, Hop Step Layups and Step Back Jumper Tutorial (Video Inside)

    This is a discussion on Hop Jumpers, Hop Step Layups and Step Back Jumper Tutorial (Video Inside) within the NBA 2K Basketball forums.

    Search Forums
    Advanced Forums Search
    Search Blogs
    Advanced Search
    Go to Page.
    Page 2 of 2 2

    but what if you’re camera is different? (such as broadcast camera). it’s impossible DRIVING TOWARDS the hoop FROM THE MIDDLE and doing a stepback cos you either point the left analog stick to the left or right.

    *doing a stepback j, you have to point your left analog stick UP (cos it says in the controller settings “drive laterally (lateral)”

    but what if you’re camera is different? (such as broadcast camera). it’s impossible DRIVING TOWARDS the hoop FROM THE MIDDLE and doing a stepback cos you either point the left analog stick to the left or right.

    *doing a stepback j, you have to point your left analog stick UP (cos it says in the controller settings “drive laterally (lateral)”

    Learning the basics is vital to your success on the court. Here is everything you need to know.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    How to do a basketball hop step

    NBA 2K21 is here, so it’s time for players to make sure they fully understand all their options with the many controls.

    Here’s our complete controls guide for 2K’s newest basketball sim.

    Latest News – Shooting Hotfix

    For some players, no matter which way they shot in NBA 2K21, not enough baskets were going down (and greening was much too difficult).

    SLIGHTLY OFF: It’s quite hard to nail a shot in NBA 2K21, most often ending in slightly early or slightly late – but this has changed in the shooting hotfix

    In response, 2K Games pushed out a shooting hotfix less than a week after NBA 2K21 launched, which eases up the new shot meter on players playing in lower difficulties, and playing anywhere outside of The Neighborhood.

    You can read over what all has come in the NBA 2K21 shooting hotfix update here.

    Offense Controls

    Here is everything you need to know for when you have the ball in hand!

    On-Ball Offense

    There are two key areas within offence that you will have to master the NBA 2K21 controls.

    The first is on-ball. This is used in modes where you are in control of the full team such as MyTEAM or Play Now.

    Off-Ball Offense

    For modes where you control just one player – such as MyCAREER or BlackTop – there is a different set of NBA 2K21 controls for you to learn.

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Having a good basketball court in the house is kind of necessary especially in this modern era. It can keep the family happy and healthy. A basketball hoop can also be a source of a good memory.

    Buying a basketball hoop is kind of easy. As it is a popular sport, there are a lot of products available on the market. All we have to do is research and ask around.

    But if you have bought a hoop for playing, then many other things come alongside which cannot be ignored. You need to install the hoop. You also need to maintain and take care of it so that it can run for a long time.

    How to Install a Basketball Hoop: Tips and Guide

    The main challenge starts after buying the hoop. Installing a hoop can be a challenge. But with a few tips and tricks, it can be done. All we have to do focus and take time. Here are a few tips I used for installing the basketball hoop.

    Research for the Information

    Before installing a little bit of online search can help. I came to know there are seven types of basketball goals.

    1. Pool Basketball Goal
    2. Portable Basketball Goal
    3. Outdoor Basketball Goal
    4. Kids Basketball Goal
    5. Indoor Basketball Goal
    6. Adjustable Basketball Goal
    7. Mini Basketball Goal

    Types of Basketball Hoops and Installing Them

    Now that all this basketball has 3 main types of systems

    • Wall Mount
    • Portable
    • In-Ground Hoops

    We have to know which type of basketball hoop we did buy and follow that specific instruction.

    In-Ground, Wall Mount and Portable these three have completely different types of the hoop, so they have completely different types of tips and tricks.

    In-ground is necessary when you have someone professional or who can actually play. Otherwise, it’s just expensive and will take a lot of places.

    Wall Mount is a really nice option. It was a quite popular option a few years before. It is quite cheap and does not take a lot of space. But installing it can be quite difficult. The wall mount is great instability.

    The portable basketball hoop for driveway is now the most popular option. It came in a wide range of styles and fit into any budget. But it has issued instability. So have to be very careful around it.

    Reading the instruction

    Like wearing the best shoes for basketball guards, having proper hoops for playing basketball is important. Sometimes when we think about installing stuff at our house, we don’t read the instruction. It works most of the time. Installing a table or fridge is really easy. As, the instruction is a good way of playing basketball, installing it also needs instructions.

    Few errors can be solved easily. But when it comes to the basketball hoop, few mistakes can be extremely harmful. It can be a reason for the vital accident.

    So, How to install a lifetime basketball hoop in the ground?

    Here is the video of the Spalding in-ground basketball hoop installation process.

    There’s so many screw and step. And following each and every step is very important. Read the instruction carefully first. Then do it step by step.

    This is actually the most important step when it comes to installing the basketball hoop. Read properly, it’s like baking. Even a small mistake can destroy the whole thing.

    Choose a Proper Place for the Hoop

    Choosing a perfect place for basketball hoop is also important. Installing a hoop is always a challenge so changing its place time after time can be overwhelming and lots of extra work.

    If the hoop is higher-priced, then there’s a possibility that anchor system kits will work on that.

    By using an anchor system kit, we can move basketball hoop anywhere even if it’s installed. But if it doesn’t work with an anchor kit then choosing the perfect place for the first time is the best choice.

    Call in Reinforcements is a Good Thing

    Working alone with the hoop can look manly but can be a big hassle. So asking for help from friends and family is always the best choice. It will minimize the chore and make it fun. And a few hands are always better than one hand.

    With pizza and people, the installation can be an event. Get the people you enjoy spending time with. Experienced one who has already a basketball hoop should be the first choice. They can help the most.

    Taking Professional Help on How to Install a Basketball Hoop

    If the task becomes hard to handle. Professional help is always available.

    Installing a basketball hoop is not easy. It’s actually hard. Sometimes people especially dad want to prove that they are good with tools. But after a few tries if nothing works, ask for professional help.

    They will do it in a short time and watching it can be fun. So that next time, you will be able to do it alone. If you don’t do it properly the hoop will be untuneful and it will do more bad than good.

    How Much Does In-Ground Basketball Hoop Installation Cost?

    This is not easier to tell how actually will the whole process costs. However, we have looked for the answers in different forums and websites. It can cost from $250 to $400 depending on the experts or team you are hiring to do the whole process.

    We have some experiences of installing a basketball hoop for the driveway, and it doesn’t cost as much as doing it for professional usage.

    Taking Time for Installing Hoops

    Installation takes time. Normally it takes one to two weeks (based on which system you bought and how fast you work). At first phase things can be tough, most people give up on that stage. But, let’s not be emotional.

    It should be done like how we do most of our work. If the work becomes monotonous and we don’t get the punch, a break can always help.

    So, it’s easy. All we have to do is research, read the instruction. Then with time and proper help it can be done. Like all the other new thing all we have to do is beat the fear. Installing a basketball hoop can be the best gift for yourself and family.

    Good footwork and agility are keys to success on the court. To be effective on both offense and defense, you need the ability to change direction while maintaining balance. Improve your footwork, and you’ll quickly see improvements to everything from dribbling to shooting.

    The best way to improve your footwork and agility is with agility ladder drills that mimic on-court movements. These basketball footwork drills develop foot speed, control, landing coordination, balance, and forward and backward movement, all of which make you a better athlete on the court. (Here are 5 essential training keys to getting quicker for basketball.) You can perform them on a ladder, or do them on a staircase as shown in this video:

    Below are five footwork drills for basketball that are great for improving your movement on the court. Perform them during a speed workout once or twice per week. For an additional challenge, perform them on stairs.

    Basketball Footwork Drills

    Four-Step Run

    Start the drill behind ladder. Run through ladder placing both feet in each box, then step again with both feet in same box. These are small steps, similar to stutter-steps. Lead with opposite foot on second set.

    Sets/Reps: 2xDrill

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Two Up, One Back

    Start behind ladder. Step into second box, skipping first box. Step back into first box. Repeat two-up, one-back pattern through entire ladder. Lead with opposite foot on second set.

    Sets/Reps: 2xDrill

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Inside Hop Scotch

    Start behind ladder. Hop into first box, landing on one foot. Hop into next box, landing on both feet. Hop into the third box, landing on opposite foot. Continue pattern through entire ladder.

    Sets/Reps: 2xDrill

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Scissor Hops

    Start behind ladder. Hop and land with both feet outside first rung. Hop and land with right foot in first box and left foot in second box. Hop and land with both feet outside of first rung. Hop and land with left foot in first box and right foot in second box. Hop and land with both feet outside of second rung. Continue pattern through entire ladder.

    Sets/Reps: 2xDrill

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Forward Carioca

    Start behind ladder. Step into center of first box with left foot. Cross right foot behind left in first box. Step slightly to left with left foot, then slightly to right with right foot to assume start position. Continue pattern through entire ladder. Lead with opposite foot on second set.

    Sets/Reps: 2xDrill

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Looking for more drills to challenge your footwork? Check out STACK’s Speed Ladder Training Guide for more speed ladder drills to round out your agility workout.

    Alternative / Cardiovascular / Total Body / Beginner

    How to do a basketball hop step

    Equipment Needed

    • Basketball
    • Basketball Hoop

    My Performance

    Sitewide Performance

    • All
    • Male
    • Female

    Average Sitewide Basketball Time

    Average Male Basketball Time

    Average Female Basketball Time

    How to do Basketball:

    • Step 1: Start with a basketball and a basketball hoop.
    • Step 2: Dribble the basketball for the desired amount of times make sure that you are staying balanced on your feet, keeping your eyes up, and being in athletic position.
    • Step 3: After you pick the ball up you have the option of shooting or passing to a teammate. When shooting the ball bend at the knees, jump straight up in the air, and hold your follow through as you shoot.
    • Step 4: Once you stop your dribble you are only allowed to take 2 steps before you must pass or shoot.
    • Step 5: If you are playing by yourself, shoot the ball at the hoop and then go run down your rebound and reset to another spot on the floor to shoot the ball.
    • Step 6: If you are playing against an opponent, try to make the ball in the hoop but if you miss or lose the ball then you become the defender and have to guard your opponent.
    • Step 7: When playing defense make sure that you bend your knees to a 90 degree angle, slide your feet, and be ready to move either direction.
    • Step 8: Guard your man till you either steal the ball, they score, or your rebound their miss. When going to rebound box your man out and then go jump your highest and grab the rebound.
    • Step 9: The goal of the game is to keep your man or the other team from scoring and to score as many points as you can. If shooting by yourself make your goal to see how many shots you can make.
    • Muscles Worked

      How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step How to do a basketball hop step

      Details

      basketball is a alternative, cardiovascular, and total body exercise that primarily targets the hamstrings and to a lesser degree also targets the calves, forearms, glutes, groin, hip flexors, lower back, obliques, outer thighs, quads, shoulders and triceps . more

      basketball is a alternative, cardiovascular, and total body exercise that primarily targets the hamstrings and to a lesser degree also targets the calves, forearms, glutes, groin, hip flexors, lower back, obliques, outer thighs, quads, shoulders and triceps.

      The only basketball equipment that you really need is the following: basketball and basketball hoop. There are however many different basketball variations that you can try out that may require different types of basketball equipment or may even require no equipment at all.

      Learning proper basketball form is easy with the step by step basketball instructions, basketball tips, and the instructional basketball technique video on this page. basketball is a exercise for those with a beginner level of physical fitness and exercise experience. Watch the basketball video, learn how to do the basketball, and then be sure and browse through the basketball workouts on our workout plans page!

      Now, you may be wondering� how the heck can I shoot the ball that quickly or how can I teach my players to do that.

      Developing a “quick shot” is all about eliminating wasted movement and excess motion.

      Here are seven keys to developing a quick shot release:

      1. Be prepared before you catch the ball.

      Every time you catch the ball, your knees should be bent and your feet should be aligned with the basket a split second before you catch the ball. So now all you have to do is catch and go right up with your shot.

      On the other hand, if you catch the ball and then bend your knees, that is excess motion and wasted time. This gives your defender extra time to block your shot.

      Along the same lines, you should cut with your knees bent.

      Reggie Miller and Richard Hamilton are two examples of NBA players who are great at moving without the ball and getting their shot off quickly. If you watch them on TV, they always cut off screens with their knees bent. So when they get open, they only have to catch and shoot.

      Bottom line, always have your knees bent and feet ready before you catch the ball.

      Provide passers with a target near your shot pocket.

      Your shot pocket is the place you put the ball before going into your shot motion.

      How to do a basketball hop step

      Having great passers on your team can help you get your shot off quicker. To help them give you more accurate passes, you should always provide them with a hand target right at your shot pocket.

      If you’re moving in your shot-hand direction, then your target can be your exact shot pocket. If you are moving in the direction of your off-hand, you should provide a target as much in line with your shot pocket as possible and use your off hand to get the ball over to the pocket as quickly as possible.

      This is pretty subtle, but the idea is that rather than reaching over to bring the ball over with your shooting hand, you are emphasizing the force of the off-hand on the ball to deliver it to the proper position. Even though you are catching the ball with both hands, you will find that you’re gaining a split second of quickness by developing this off-hand-force habit.

      Put the ball in shot pocket immediately.

      The quicker you can move the ball in your shot pocket, the quicker you can shoot. This takes practice!!

      You need to practice moving the ball into you shot pocket off the catch and off the dribble. This takes thousands and thousands of practice repetitions.

      You need to practice catching the ball, then quickly and fluidly moving the ball directly into your shot pocket. If you fumble the ball, then the defense has an extra split second to contest your shot. This is a very subtle movement you must practice over and over.

      Eliminate wasted movement in your shot delivery.

      When you catch the ball, it should go immediately into your shot pocket, and then you should go right up into your shot from there.

      You should not put the ball in your shot pocket and then dip your knees or move the ball downward. The ball should go straight up, along with the rest of your body (legs, hips, etc).

      Any such excess motion adds time to your delivery, plus it is doing nothing positive for your shot. The simpler your motion, the more it is continually upward from your loaded stance, the quicker your shot will be.

      Shoot just before the top of your jump.

      Shooting a split second before the top of your jump improves quickness, too. If you wait until the very top, that may be all the time needed for a quick defender to get up for the block.

      Try dipping rapidly

      Another concept that can sometimes help players is to dip rapidly as you’re catching the ball.

      To get your shot off as quickly as possible from your jump stop, you should work on a rapid dip into a squared-up jump stop rather than a leap that gets you into the air and covers distance. This dipping technique involves a sudden crouch into your jump stop, catching the ball in your shot pocket as it returns from a dribble, and springing right up into your shot. It is a sudden delivery that gives the defender hardly any time at all to react to your shot.

      Think shot, shot, shot.

      One way to improve all the areas above, is to be in the new triple threat position every time you touch the ball, the triple threat of “Shot, Shot, Shot.” In other words, any time you touch the ball, you have the ball in your shot pocket, your eyes on the rim, and your feet and stance loaded in case you have an opportunity to take a good shot.

      Note that this doesn’t mean that you should shoot every time you touch the ball. No, that wouldn’t make much sense; but you should be ready to shoot every time you touch the ball. You will find it much easier to move from that readiness into a pass or dribble than to transition from a passing or dribbling expectation into a shot-ready mentality.

      Related Products & Helpful Resources

      Recommended Shooting Product

      Contents

      • 1 Purpose
      • 2 Techniques
        • 2.1 Single hop test
        • 2.2 Triple hop test
        • 2.3 Crossover hop test
        • 2.4 6 meter timed hop test
      • 3 Evidence
      • 4 Reliability
      • 5 References

      Purpose [ edit | edit source ]

      A series of hop tests are routinely used in the assessment for return to sports post-injury, be it an ankle sprain, stress fracture or anterior cruciate ligament reconstruction. They are both functional and quantitative, allowing a measurement of power and strength of the affected to unaffected leg.

      1. Single hop test
      2. Triple hop test
      3. Crossover hop test
      4. 6 meter timed hop test

      Techniques [ edit | edit source ]

      Single hop test [ edit | edit source ]

      In this test, the aim is to jump as far as possible on a single leg, without losing balance and landing firmly. The distance is measured from the start line to the heel of the landing leg. The goal is to have a less than 10% difference in hop distance between the injured limb and uninjured limb.

      Triple hop test [ edit | edit source ]

      In the triple hop test, the aim is to jump as far as possible on a single leg three consecutive times, without losing balance and landing firmly. The distance is measured from the start line to the heel of the landing leg. The goal is to have a less than 10% difference in hop distance between the injured limb and uninjured limb.

      Crossover hop test [ edit | edit source ]

      In the crossover hop test, the aim is to jump as far as possible on a single leg three consecutive times, without losing balance and landing firmly. Between each hop, the athlete has to jump across a midline, hence including side-to-side movement in this test. The distance is measured from the start line to the heel of the landing leg. The goal is to have a less than 10% difference in hop distance between the injured limb and uninjured limb.

      6 meter timed hop test [ edit | edit source ]

      In the 6 meter timed hop test, the aim is to jump as fast as possible on a single leg over a distance of 6 meters, without losing balance and landing firmly. The goal is to have a less than 10% time difference in the time taken to hop through between the injured limb and uninjured limb.

      Evidence [ edit | edit source ]

      It is recommended that an athlete has to score >90% on the tests to have a reduced risk of reinjury or injury. Quality of take-off and landing mechanics should also be assessed, on top of quantitative scores. Even with meeting the criteria for the hop tests, there is still a chance of an injury again. However, the risk of reinjury is much lower should these criteria be met [5] .

      The hop tests are also not used as standalone assessment in return to sports, Recent research has shown that RTS should be based on meeting a series of key performance criteria [6] , rather than just timeline after an injury.

      Other functional tests commonly included in return to sports include the T-test for agility, shuttle runs, beep tests. These look at a combination of power, endurance and functional movement patterns, providing a qualitative look at the specialized movements required in different sports.

      On top of functional testing, other clinical tests include muscular strength, flexibility as well as range of motion of affected joint. Subjective assessments include the International Knee Documentation Committee Subjective Knee Form (IKDC 2000), which has been shown to be a valid outcome measure for knee function in patients with ACL injuries. [7]

      Reliability [ edit | edit source ]

      Single leg hop tests have shown to have a strong intra-rater reliability, with the ICC (Intraclass Correlations Coefficient) to be 0.85 for dominant and non-dominant legs). [8]

      It is also a reliable and reproducible outcome measure, with ICC ranging from 0.92-0.97 for test-retest reliability for the single leg hop tests. The standard error of measurement (SEM) for the single-leg hop tests ranges from 4.61-17.74 cm, while the SEM for the 6-m hop for time test was 0.06 seconds. [9]

      How to do a basketball hop stepMaking jump shots on the basketball court is no easy task. It takes hours of hard work to learn how to put that ball through the hoop.

      Even more frustrating, there are a million techniques taught by so-called experts, all claiming to be the right way to shoot the ball. I’m going to let you in on a little secret. The most important thing about shooting a basketball is to put the ball through the rim. It doesn’t matter how it gets there. Great shooters make shots. I teach the traditional way to shoot a basketball, because it has worked for me throughout my career (I shot 40% from 3-point range in college and in the pros). I believe it gives you the best chance to make shots consistently.

      The most important thing you need to learn is to shoot the same shot every single time.

      How to Shoot a Basketball: The BEEF Method

      I advocate the BEEF method, which establishes a solid foundation for building an accurate jump shot. I’ll run you through the four fundamentals of how to shoot a basketball, which will allow you to be consistent every time the ball leaves your hand.

      1. Base (or Balance)

      How to do a basketball hop step

      A solid base gives your jump shot great balance from start to finish as you start your shooting motion.

      Maintaining great balance throughout your shot requires two things: positioning your feet about shoulder-width apart and firmly under your shoulders (if your feet are staggered or narrow, you can be off balance); and pointing your torso and head toward the basket throughout your shot (meaning your body is pointed in a straight line toward the target, so you can direct the ball toward your target instead of off to the side.)

      You want your weight to be equally distributed between both legs and to have a slight bend in your knees.

      2. Elbow

      How to do a basketball hop step

      A common mistake poor shooters make is jutting their elbow out to the side of their body, giving the ball unwanted sidespin or an unpredictable flight path. You want your elbow to be directly underneath the basketball and your biceps to be at about a 90-degree angle with your torso as you prepare to shoot. This will provide a consistent shooting pocket and help you shoot the basketball in a straight line.

      “Elbow under the basketball. You don’t want your elbow (outside of your wrist), because the ball will fall off your hand. Elbow up underneath the basketball,” says Jonathan White, Youth Basketball Coordinator at the Cavaliers Academy.

      You want the fingers of your shooting hand to contact the ball rather than allowing it to rest in your palm. Your off hand should make contact with the side of the ball and keep it on your shooting hand, but shouldn’t play any role in the power of your shot.

      3. Eyes

      How to do a basketball hop step

      Your eyes are your body’s navigation system. Once you start your shot, your eyes tell the rest of your body where you want the ball to go. This becomes even more crucial when you are shooting off screens or shooting while moving.

      I look at the front of the rim, but I know great shooters who look at the back of the rim when they get their eyes up. Steph Curry focuses his eyes on the hooks that attach the net to the rim. More specifically, he focuses on the hooks closest to him and imagines arcing the ball just over top of them, but perhaps you’ll shoot better when focusing on the hooks furthest away from you. It’s all about experimentation until you find that perfect aiming point. Whatever part of the rim you decide to focus on, the important thing is that your head looks up before you start your shooting motion.

      Another thing to remember: Don’t follow the flight of the ball as you release it into the air. This takes your focus off the rim and makes you less accurate. Keep your eyes on that aiming point.

      4. Follow-Through (flick your wrist)

      How to do a basketball hop step

      Following through and flicking your wrist is the last piece of the shooting motion, and it’s a crucial component when learning how to shoot a basketball.

      When you release the ball, your wrist should flick toward the target as if you were reaching on top of a high shelf to grab a cookie out of a jar.

      “We always talk about finish. Don’t just shoot it and drop your arms. We call that pulling the string. That takes off some of the power of your shoot. So follow it and see it all the way through,” White says.

      When you follow through properly, the ball should roll off your tips of your pointer finger and middle finger, which will produce good backspin on the ball, giving your shot a soft touch and increasing your chance of getting a friendly roll on the rim. You know you will have done it correctly if your wrist is flexed to the point where your fingers point down toward the ground.

      Having a good base, proper elbow positioning, an effective eye target, and a solid follow-through can instantly help even the most clueless of players develop a solid basketball shot.

      How to do a basketball hop stepInstalling an in-ground basketball hoop always seems more daunting than it really is. To help relieve these fears, we’ll start by learning how to dig a hole for a basketball pole. This is actually a simple process, you just need to follow the instructions.

      For a start, you need to check if the weather conditions are fine, choose an appropriate spot, check for the underground pipes, and get the right tools for the job.

      The general guidelines for digging a hole would be to dig a 30” squareish or round hole 8” deeper than the frost depth. With the end goal to have a round column that extends to the frost depth then flares out. Having it flare below the frost is an excellent solution to protect the base from heaving.

      Your anchor is properly installed (at the correct depth) when you ensured that it is below the frost line and there is sufficient concrete weight to offset the weight of the basketball hoop.

      In this article we’ll also talk about pouring the concrete, handling the potential lighting, digging below the frost and problems you could experience during this process.

      Remember, if you can do this, it should all be downhill from there. Now let’s take a look at the five steps you need to do to dig a hole for a basketball pole.

      Step 1 – Choosing a location

      The first step should be easy. You need to choose the future spot for your basketball hoop. To do that, start with ensuring that it’s located next to and leveled with the playing surface.

      Assure that the playing area is clear of any obstacles. The backyard and driveway work well. The pole needs to be far enough from windows and cars to avoid any inconvenience.

      In the best case scenario, your playing area should be at least 10 feet wide so that the adults have enough amble space. If you want to mark a three-point line, it’s 23 feet 9 inches from the rim.

      Just find the best solution that you can, it doesn’t have to be perfect. After you solved this, the real work can begin.

      Also, check these things before starting to dig

      Digging the hole means definitely deciding where your in-ground basketball hoop is going to be. That’s why you need to ask some questions to yourself and see if the conditions for digging the hole are good to get started.

      Consider the following:
      • Underground utilities: Are there could be gas/water pipes in the ground that you might accidentally strike? Call 811 to check.
      • Playing area surface: You need a suitable surface for playing basketball – smooth but hard. Something like concrete.
      • Playing area size: Will there be enough room to play without any worries for injuries?
      • Playing area availability: Will there be cars parked occasionally? Or more often?
      • Backboard misses: We already mentioned windows, but there’s also a danger of ball going over the fence.
      • Ground markings: If you thought about painting the playing area, is your surface suitable for it?

      Step 2 – Making sure that the weather condition is appropriate for digging

      Since the quick concrete doesn’t have the same composition as the concrete used on streets, it’s important to watch out from rain or snow. In cold months, quick concrete seems to freeze and chip, developing a greenish color and becoming too weak to support the hoop.

      The perfect timing for digging and installation would be with the daytime temperature around 39 degrees. Don’t dig or install basketball anchor and pole if the daytime temperature goes below freezing point. Also, don’t do it if it rained 5 hours before the cement pour.

      In wet areas, you’ll often see pits on the concrete, developed with the help of rain. Basically, rain gathers at the lower portion of the hole, which weakens the concrete causing intensified ”aging” of the hoop.

      Step 3 – Getting the right tools

      Tools Required:
      – 80 lb. bags of concrete (11-12)
      – Post hole digger (1)

      Step 4 – Digging the hole

      There’s a so-called rule-of-thumb that implies that ¼ of the poles length must be in underground and that the hole should be three times wider. Shorting the depth means increasing the width.

      Dimensions of the hole should be provided by the manufacturer of your in-ground basketball hoop. Although, there’s not much difference between them. Spalding, Pro Dunk, and Hercules recommend digging a 48” deep and 24′ square hole.

      Following the instruction manual, make an outline using wood planks, attaching it using screws or glue. A square hole will give basketball goal and driveway more official look.

      Don’t forget to check if the ground is level with your playing area before digging the hole for basketball pole. The internal dimensions of your square need to match the recommended width and length given in the manufacturer’s manual.

      Then dig a few inches deep hole that matches your wooden outline. Place the shape in the ground, so that’s it’s flush with court baseline. The wood should be parallel to the surface, make sure it’s perfectly positioned.

      Finally, you can dig the hole down to the recommended depth. Ensure that the sides match the wooden piece you’ve laid down. You can eventually bell out the bottom of the hole 26” to give extra stability to the footing. If the frost line in your city is below 48” it is best to dig to the standard frost line.

      Step 5 – Mixing the concrete

      A large number of basketball hoops has a rebar-mounted anchor which you push into the concrete after it you poured it into the hole. If this is the case with your hoop, mix up your concrete and fill the hole up to surface level.

      Use shovel to agitate it every ten seconds or so to fill any voids. When you fill up the hole, place the rebar into the concrete. Ensure it’s approximately in the middle of the square.

      What do we recommend?

      We recommend buying 11-12 bags of Quikrete concrete mix. This concrete follows the ASTM C387 Standard Specifications for concrete.

      While the guidelines state you only need 11 bags, it’s a good idea to have an extra bag or two on hand in the process if the installation gets a little messy. If you’re not familiar with it, the concrete mix can be difficult to move, and you can easily tear a bag.

      How to mix?

      If you collected all the materials, open a few bags and pour them into a container. Start adding water following the instructions. For an 80 lb. bag, you’ll need 6 pints or 2.8L of water, and for a 60 pound. bag, the appropriate amount is 4 pints or 1.9 L per bag of concrete.

      Next thing you’ll do is to create a depression in the dry mix so that you can pour water here. Take hoe or something similar and consistently mix. What you should get is wet, but solid concrete with the solid-like shape.

      If it’s too hot outside, you might want to add more water, as it can evaporate quickly. Remember to keep the mix moving. Repeat this until you have a needed amount of concrete.

      Wrapping up

      That’s it guys, the five best ways to dig a hole for basketball pole. Now you just need to finish installing the hoop, and you’re ready to rumble.

      Seriously, this is really not that hard, you just need to take time and follow the step-by-step process. We hope we made it somehow more manageable for you with this article. For more on hoops, stay tuned to Improve Hoops.

      January 8, 2017 By Deirdre

      Yesterday I describe each of the steps in a STEM engineering design process. A copy of the steps in the process display in a printable poster and a student planning document are shared in that post. Today I want to walk you through the STEM Engineering design process steps. I will be sharing a recent project we did at my house.

      Walking Through the STEM Engineering Design Process

      The first step in the process is to define the problem. JDaniel has been exploring levers as part of a Scout enrichment unit. The problem we focused on had to do with creating a lever to do a simple task like put a basketball in a basket. If you want to leave your project more open ended you could ask your children to find a way to use a lever to complete a simple task.

      After defining the problem, you will need to look at the constraints of the project. The supplies available to you and the availability of boxes for the project would really be a constraint of this project. (We had a variety of engineering supplies available to us.) Time might also be another constraint.

      Imagine

      Brainstorming is a challenging part of the STEM engineering process. Your children will let their imaginations shine as they share their ideas.

      One of the key elements we needed to brainstorm was how to create the hoop for the basketball. There were two main ideas that were discussed. The first was to attach something like a plastic spool leftover from Christmas ribbon to the box. The second was to create the hoop from a part of the box. After a little discussion, it was time to decided that we would use part of the box.

      The planning set involves creating a diagram of what you are going to make. Then you will create a list of the supplies you will need.

      Here is a list of the supplies we used:

      • Box with attached lid
      • Paper clips
      • Plastic spoon
      • Rubberband
      • Variety of toy balls
      • Jar lid
      • Scissors
      • Ruler
      • Pencil

      Create

      After planning our creation, it was now time to put it together and test it out.Our task had several distinct tasks. First, a hoop needed to be traced onto a section of the box and then cut out. Then the hoop section needs to be attached to the box with paper clips. Finally, a lever needed to be created.

      Once everything was put together. We needed to test it out the lever and see if we could make a basket.

      Improve

      It is during this step in the process that you look at what worked and what needs to be improved. We decided we need to test out a way of attaching the paper clips that made it easier for the ball to fall through.

      This post is part of STEM series hosted by Little Bins for Little Hands on understanding STEM for A-Z.

      About Deirdre

      Welcome! My name is Deirdre and I am JDaniel4’s Mom. After teaching in Virginia for twenty years, I was a stay at home mom learning and growing beside my son JDaniel the 4th for five years. I recently went back to teaching at a local school here in South Carolina.

      Comments

      What a great way to repurpose a pizza box!

      Welcome!

      Welcome! My name is Deirdre and I am JDaniel4’s Mom. After teaching in Virginia for twenty years, I was a stay at home mom learning and growing beside my son JDaniel the 4th for five years. I recently went back to teaching at a local school here in South Carolina. Read More…

      Definition of Hook Shot

      : a shot in basketball made usually while the ball is released from behind the backboard, as opposed to a layup where the ball is released from the side of the basket.
      It is also called a reverse layup. The name comes from the shape of the ball when it comes off the backboard. The ball has a hook shape.

      How to Do a Hook Shot in Basketball in 2022?

      Basketball is a sport that is often thought of as requiring little skill. After all, anyone can just throw the ball up and hope it goes in, right? Well, believe it or not, there is more to basketball than just shooting at the hoop. To be an effective player, you need to know how to do different shots. One of the most important shots to learn is the hook shot. This article will show you how to do a hook shot in basketball.

      Part 1. Getting in Position

      1. Understand the right time for a hook shot:

      A hook shot in basketball is a relatively low-percentage shot, but it can be highly effective if used correctly. When shooting a hook shot, you want to get the ball into the air as quickly as possible and release it before your defender has a chance to block it. Therefore, you should only attempt a hook shot when you are close to the basket and have a clear path to the hoop.

      2. Start by positioning your body as if you were going to do a regular jump shot:

      Stand with your feet spread shoulder-width apart, and bend your knees so that you are in a crouching position.

      3. Square your shoulders:

      Make sure your shoulders are parallel to the basket and then take a step towards the hoop with your dominant foot.

      4. Get low:

      Bend your knees even further and lean towards the hoop to give yourself a better chance of making the shot.

      5. Look at the basket:

      Keep your eyes on the hoop as you release the ball so that you can adjust your shot if necessary.

      Part 2. Making the Shot

      1. Jump up:

      Once you have the ball in your hands, jump up into the air and extend your arm towards the hoop.

      2. Release the ball:

      As you reach the peak of your jump, release the ball and guide it towards the hoop with your fingers.

      3. Use your non-shooting arm strategically:

      Your non-shooting arm can be used to help you control the ball and make your shot more accurate. For example, you can use your non-shooting arm to shield the ball from defenders or to help guide it into the hoop.

      Part 3. Following Through

      1. Make sure your shooting arm completes its motion:

      After you release the ball, make sure your shooting arm continues its motion to the end. It will help you generate more power and increase your chances of making the shot.

      2. Land with grace:

      After you release the ball, make sure you land gracefully so that you can get back into a defensive position quickly.

      3. Watch for the rebound:

      Make sure you keep an eye on the ball as it sails towards the hoop so that you can rebound it if necessary.

      1. How do you perform a hook shot in basketball?

      To perform a hook shot in basketball, you will need to set it up in a way that allows for a clear path to the hoop.

      It usually means getting into the paint and setting yourself up near the basket.

      You will then want to extend your arm towards the hoop while keeping your elbow bent.

      From here, you can release the ball and use your arm and hand to guide it into the hoop.

      2. What are the benefits of using a hook shot in basketball?

      There are many benefits to using a hook shot in basketball.

      One of the most apparent benefits is that it is a very effective way to score points.

      In addition, the hook shot is a very versatile move that can be used in a variety of situations.

      It can be used when you are close to the basket or when you are further away from the hoop.

      Finally, using a hook shot can help you to stay out of foul trouble.

      3. Are there any tips you can offer on how to improve your hook shot?

      There are a few things you can do to improve your hook shot.

      First, make sure your shooting shoulder is lined up with the basket.

      Second, keep your elbow close to your body and snap your wrist at the release point.

      And third, follow through with your shooting hand.

      These tips should help you improve your hook shot and score more points.

      4. When is the best time to use a hook shot in a basketball game?

      The best time to use a hook shot in a basketball game is when your opponent is closely guarding you, and you have no other option available.

      When using a hook shot, it’s essential to keep your body turned towards the basket. You should also take a step towards the basket with your lead foot so that you can get closer to the hoop.

      When you release the ball, make sure to flick your wrists so that the ball curves towards the hoop.

      5. How do you defend against an opponent’s hook shot?

      There are a few ways to defend against an opponent’s hook shot.

      One way is to block the shot with your hand or arm. Another way is to move quickly out of the way so that the ball doesn’t hit you. A third way is to try and intercept the ball before it hits the ground. Whichever method you choose, remember to stay in control and keep your balance.

      Conclusion

      That’s it! You now know how to do a hook shot in basketball. Just remember to keep your elbow close to your body, use your fingers to guide the ball, and shoot at an angle. Practicing these steps will help you make this difficult shot more consistently. So what are you waiting for? Start practicing and show your opponents who’s boss on the court. Do you have any questions about doing a hook shot? Let me know in the comments, and I’ll be happy to answer them.

      More firmly you can palm the ball, more control you will have on the ball. And more control means you can throw, dribble and pass the ball as you want.

      The very first skill that a beginner should gain is to learn how to palm the basketball. Because if you can’t hold the ball confidently in your hand, you are nothing on the ground.

      Here we are going to unearth the approaches to palm the ball with the physical exercises that you need to do on the court.

      So, if you are a beginner and want to improve your control over the ball, you will be benefited by following strategies and physical exercises.

      How You Palm A Basketball

      Step-1: Line Up ​​​​the Fingers

      Place your thumb on the middle grooves of the ball. While placing, line up all of your fingers on the grooves above the center groove.

      You can palm the ball from any side but when you are in the learning stage, this way will be the best. Don’t worry if you can’t stretch your pinky to the groove, just try your best to set the finger as close as possible.

      Step-2: Grip the Ball

      Try to grip the ball by pressing your thumb, index, middle and ring fingertips on the ball.

      Basically, during the game, all the works of grabbing the balls are done by the fingertips. Once you got this gripping, your palm will not have much contribution to grip the ball during the match.

      Step-3: Squeezing the Ball

      Once you got the position, spend time squeezing your fingertips into the ball. It will help you to strengthen your fingers. Do the squeezing using your both hands.

      Step-4: Practice

      After getting the balance on a constant ball, practice passing and throwing the ball. Remember to apply the palming technique every time you catch the ball until it comes naturally.

      Exercises to Increase Your Fitness

      With an ordinary palm, you will hardly get control over the ball. To get the full control, you have to do some physical exercises related to your palms that would strengthen your palm and help you control the ball however you want.

      Practice Finger Stretches

      Find a flat surface and place your both palms on it. Stretch your fingers out on the surface as flat as possible. Hold this position for 30 to 60 seconds before moving on.

      In the beginning, you may find palming down completely difficult for you, work on it. You will improve.

      Claw Stretches

      Release your hand in front of you. Now bend the fingers until your fingertips touch the base of your fingers joints. This movement will resemble a claw.

      Palms Stretching

      Lay your hand palm-down on a flat ground spreading your fingers. Try to stretch your pinky as out as possible. Lift your hand off from the surface keeping your fingers pushed onto the surface.

      Thumb Stretching

      Again, keep both of your hand free from the body. Open up your fingers and try to spread your thumb as far as possible. Keep touching the farthest part of your hand for 30-60 seconds. With an interval, repeat this process.

      Strength Your Grip

      Find two 5lb plates and attach them together. Now grip these plates only with your four fingers (without the thumb). Hold this attachment for 20 seconds. When 5lb weight will be easier for you, you can add more weight to it.

      Besides these exercises, you can also do reverse curls, fingertip push up, pull-ups as your physical workouts. This kind of exercises not only help you to palm the ball but also help you to stay active and energetic during the game.

      Final Words

      As a basketball player, to play well and be better than others, you need a good height and apt gripping palms. If your palms are wide, you may work less; if not, you should work on it consistently to get a good shape.

      Just believe in you and start doing those exercises today. You will be able to palm the basketball like a pro in no time.

      Learn how to shoot a basketball lay-up in 6 easy steps. Discover the keys to better basketball shooting skills and sink more lay-ups consistently.

      How to do a basketball hop step

      The lay-up is the highest percentage shot in basketball. It’s considered a “gimme” shot. A shot you’re expected to make.

      Well, that may be true for more experience players, but I can tell you from experience, they’re not easy for beginners.

      Like anything new, learning how to shoot a basketball lay-up can be difficult for youth basketball players. It requires hand-eye-foot coordination that’s hard for little ones.

      I’ve found it works well to break down the basketball shooting technique into a progression of 6 steps.

      The layup is only one of several basic shots that young players need to learn. Follow the links below to find helpful coaching tips for shooting other kinds of basketball shots.

      Basketball Lay-Up
      Overhand lay-up

      There are different kinds of lay-ups, but beginners should start with the basic overhand lay-up.

      Let’s start with a right-handed lay-up.

      As the names suggests, you’ll shoot the ball with your right hand from the right side of the basket as you’re facing it.

      Note: Even if you’re left-handed, you’ll shoot a lay-up from the right side of the basket with your right hand. That’s really important. I’ll explain why later. (Lefties, you’ll get your chance to shine when we move to the other side of the basket for a left-handed lay-up.)

      How to do a basketball hop step

      Stand on the right side block.

      It’s the first mark on the free throw lane closest to the endline.

      This is just about the place you will leave the floor when you go up for your lay-up.

      Look up at the basket and locate the small square painted in the center of the backboard. That’s your target.

      You want to aim for the upper right hand corner of that square.

      When the ball hits the backboard at that spot, it has a real good chance of dropping through the basket.

      How to do a basketball hop step

      I recommend taking a few minutes to watch this excellent basketball shooting video which gives a really good intro into how to shoot a basketball lay-up.

      Basketball Lay-Up
      3-Step approach

      The footwork is the trickiest part. So, let’s start there.

      The lay-up basically involves a 3-step approach. For a right-handed lay-up, the pattern for your feet isВ left-right-left.

      Let’s break it down.

      You don’t need a ball yet.

      Step #1: Take one step

      Starting on the block, take one step backward up the key.

      Facing the basket and keeping your eye on your target (the upper right corner of the square),В take one stepВ with yourВ leftВ foot.

      That should put you just about on the block.

      When your left foot hits the ground, immediately hop straight up toward the basket off of your left foot.

      Go back and repeat this step over and over until you feel comfortable with it.

      Step #2: Add the shooting motion

      Go back to your starting spot one step above the block.

      Take one step with yourВ leftВ foot and hop up just like you’ve been doing.

      This time on the hop, extend yourВ rightВ arm up toward the basket like you’re shooting the ball.

      Pretend there’s a string attached from your right elbow to your right knee. When you extend your right arm, the string pulls your right knee up with it. When your right arm comes down, your right knee comes down.

      Try that several times.В

      Step #3: Add the ball

      If the player is young, you definitely want to use a shorter basketball goal or even just use a spot on a wall as a target. At this stage, we’re not concerned about the ball going in the basket. We’re just trying to get the footwork and timing down.

      Start one step up from the block just like you’ve been doing.

      Hold the ball with both hands toward the right side of your body.

      Take one step with yourВ leftВ foot, hop, extend your right arm, and pull your right knee up.

      As you extend your right arm, the ball goes from being held in 2 hands to being held in the palm of your right hand.

      Have you ever seen a waiter carrying a tray of food? Pretend you’re a waiter, and the ball is a tray of food. Your palm will face up and the ball will be by your right ear.

      As you extend your right arm, shoot the ball up toward your target by rolling it off your fingertips and snapping your wrist.

      If your target is too high, find a lower one. Your success is not determined if the ball goes in at this stage.

      You want to get your footwork down first, then hit your target, and then sink the shot.

      Step #4: Add the 2nd step

      Take 2 steps up from the block.

      Hold the ball in both hands toward your right side.

      Step first with yourВ rightВ foot, then with yourВ left, hop, extend, and shoot.

      Repeat that until it feels more comfortable.

      Step #5: Add the 3rd step

      Go back to the block and back up 3 steps.

      Your first step will be with yourВ leftВ foot, then your right, then your left, hop, extend, and shoot.

      Repeat that several times.В

      Step #6: Put it all together

      Now, back up to the free throw line and try coming in with a dribble.

      When you get about 3 steps from the block, start your 3-step left-right-left approach.

      Pick up the ball with both hands when your left foot hits the first time, and keep it on your right side.

      Go nice and slow at first and then pick up speed.

      Move back to half-court and try coming in full speed.

      Don’t worry if your feet get messed up every now and then. That will happen. You may even have to stutter step to get your steps to work out right.

      To be a complete player, you’ve got to know how to shoot a basketball lay-up from both sides of the court.

      To shoot a left-handeded lay-up from the left side of the basket, start back at Step #1, but all the instructions will be just the opposite.

      Make sure the approach step is right-left-right.

      During your training for basketball with young players, they will probably have more success if you use a youth-size basketball . The smaller ball is lighter and will fit their hands better.

      When you’re ready to advance your game, learn how to shoot a basketball underhand lay-up, power lay-up, and reverse lay-up.

      By: Steve Silverman

      Published: 18 May, 2009

      Putting up a basketball hoop in the driveway or the backyard is an American tradition. The portable basketball hoop has been a huge boon for the industry as well as for family members who can disassemble the basketball goal and take it with them if and when they move and then put it up again when they get to their new location.

      Put the base of the basketball goal on the side of the driveway (or wherever else you decide to put it up). To solidify the base, fill it up with a 50-pound bag of sand. This will keep it in place and keep it from moving around during windy or stormy conditions.

      Hook up the main arm of the basketball goal. This is what the backboard and rim will sit on when the hoop gets built. The main arm of the hoop is connected to the base by two supporting braces that are connected with nuts and bolts.

      Connect the backboard once the main arm of the basketball goal is secured in place. The backboard is secured to that arm with six nuts and bolts.

      Attach the net to the rim. The net is strung through the rim by going over and under through a series of wire connections on the underside of the rim. There are usually 16 connections on the standard rim.

      Raise the support arm until it locks into place. The rim should be 10 feet off the ground and it will likely have an adjusting lever to lower the rim to 7-, 8- or 9-feet so smaller children can play. The portable basketball goal can be disassembled for moving purposes or if the owner wants to take it down during the winter. Most owners leave up their basketball goals until they decide to move.

      Allow yourself three to four hours to put together your basketball goal.

      Airplane – see chain ( video )

      Basketball Turn / Pivot Turn – s s (often turning 1/2 or 1/4) ( video )

      Billy D – s ds s dbl-h lift ( video )

      Birmingham – s dbl s s dbl s s b up ds ds rs ( video )

      Black Mountain – ds h h flang b up ( video )

      Boogie Bouncer – dbl b b h s h s out together up ( video )

      Brush ((br)) – ds h up ( video )

      Brush Over Vine – ds br(up) ds rs ds ds(xib) ds rs ( video )

      Bubble Gum- dbl-down dr dr dr ( video )

      Bunny Basic – bounce bounce lift ds rs ( video )

      Canadian Basic – ds dbl hop tch ( video )A

      Casanova – ds dbl(b) t-h(xib) rs t-h(xib) rs ds br(up) ( video )

      Chain /Push Off – ds rs rs rs ( video )

      Charleston – ds tch(f) t-h tch(b) ( video )

      Charleston Brush – ds tch(f) tch(b) br(up) ( video )

      Cinnamon Roll – ds sl s ds ds sl s hop h-t s dbl up ( video )

      Clamato – ds slur s ds ds(xif) s s rs br(up)( video )

      Clogover – ds ds(xif) ds ds(xib) ds ds(xif) ds rs ( video )

      Clogover Break & Dig – ds ds(xif) ds ds(xif) ds ds(xif) h h up ( video ) ( advance version )

      Clogover Turn / Triple Loop & Fancy Double – ds ds(xif) ds loop s ds ds rs rs ( video )

      Cowboy – ds ds ds br up ds rs rs rs ( video )

      Cowboy Spank – ds ds ds br(f) br s br s br s br s ( video )

      Cowboy Pullback – ds ds ds br up ds s br-s s br-s br-s tch up ( video )

      Cowgirl – ds ds ds br(up) th rs ds ds ( video )

      Crazy Lucy – ds sk(up) th(xif) tch(b) h ( video )

      Crimp Burton – ds t t h h rs sk(up) br s ( video )

      Crossover Rock – ds dbl(xif) dbl(o) rs ( video )

      Broken Glass – dbl-fl h up ( video )

      Dog Paddle – hop s(xib) hop s(xib) hop s(xib) rs ( video )

      Double Step / Lick / Runs – ds ( video )

      Double Basic – ds ds rs ( video )

      Double Heel Rock – ds ds h s rs ( video )

      Double Rock ‘n’ Pull – ds dbl (up) r h dr s ( video )

      Eric – ds dbl(up) r h rs ( video )

      Fancy Double – ds ds rs rs ( video )

      Fireball – dbl tch tch ds rs ( video )

      Fireball Pull – ds dbl tch tch r-h s ( video )

      Flea Flickers – ds dbl h dbl h dbl h ( video )

      Finn – ds(xib) r hs t(up) snap s ( vide0 )

      Ghostbuster – ds dbl(xif) dbl(0) b b b b-h br ds rs ( video )

      Half Tappin’ – ds dbl rs dbl rs dbl rs ( video )

      Hard Step / Flatlander – dbl(b) h br(up) ds rs ( video )

      Heel Chain – ds h-t s h-t s h-t s (video)

      Joey – ds b(xib) b(o) b(o) b(xib) b(o) s ( video ) Buck Joey ( advance video )

      Karate / Chug-A-Lug – ds k s br(up) ( video )

      Karate Rock Brush – ds k(turn) rs br(up) ( video )

      Laura’s Way – s ds(xif) s s(o) s(xif) s h-lift ds rs dr(up) ( video )

      Layover – ds ds(xif) s rs ( video )

      Liberty – ds dbl hop t(b) t(b) s dbl hop t(b) t(b) s dbl hop t(b) s dbl hop t(b) hop ( video )

      Little Red – ds rs dr s rs dr s rs ds rs ( video )

      Long Charleston Brush – ds tch(f) th(b) tch(b) tch(f) th(b) rs br(up) ( video )

      Loop Basic / Western Basic – ds loop s ds rs ( video )

      Louisiana / Drag Back and Turn – ds ds dr s dr s sl s sl s ( video )

      Lucy – ds br(up xif) th tch(up) h ( video )

      Kentucky Loop Vine – ds hop s(xif) ds loop s(xib) ds hop s(xif) ds rs ( video )

      McNamara – ds b(o) b(xib) b(o) h(o) b(o) b(xib) b(o) h(o) ( video )

      Mountain Basic – s dbl(up) ds rs ( video )

      Mountain Goat -ds rs(xif) rs(o) b sl ( video )

      MJ – ds ds(xib) r(o) h t s rs ds ds rs ( video )

      MJ Gypsy – ds ds(xib) r(o) h t s rs dbl rs dbl rs ( video )

      Mr. Haney Vine – s ds(xif) rs(xib) rs(xif) h h rs ds ds ( video )

      Only Wanna – ds dbl(up) b b b-h ( video )

      Outhouse – ds tch(o) tch(xif) tch(o) ( video )

      Outhouse Toe Heel -ds tch(o) tch(xif) t h ( video )

      Over the Log – s s clap s s clap ( video )

      Pothole / Pigeon Lift – dbl out in up ( video )

      Restless Joey – ds dr s h s ds b(xib) b(o) b(o) b(xib) b(o) s ( video )

      Reverse Slur / Dirty Toes – ds dr dr dr up ( video )

      Rock-Namera – r h s s(xib) ( video )

      Rocking Chair – ds br up ds rs ( video )

      Rooster Run – ds ds(xif) rs(xif) rs(xib) ds ds(xif) rs(xif) rs(xib) ( video )

      RT Turn – ds dbl(b) t h br(up) tch(xif) tch(o) ds rs ( video )

      Sam Rock Heel / Sammy Rock Heel – ds ds(xif) dr s dr s r h s ds rs ( video )

      Samantha – ds ds(xif) dr s dr s rs ds ds rs ( video )

      Samantha Toe Heel – ds ds(xif) dr s dr s rs ds t-h t-h ( video )

      Sammy Rock Brush – ds ds(xif) dr s dr s rs ds rs br(up) ( video )

      Short T-Step – ds ds ds br hop rs(xif) hop ( video )

      Showoff – ds rs in-out bounce down ( video )

      Simone – dbl(b) br(up) tch(xif) tch(xif) tch(o) tch(xif) ds rs ( video )

      Simone Stomp – ds ds s s dr sl ( video )

      Slam – ds br(around) rs(o) rs(xib) rs(o) br(up) ds rs ( video )

      Slur Vine – ds t(half circle) s ds ds(xif) ds t(half circle) s ds rs ( video )

      Slur Vine Rock – ds ne – ds t(half circle) s ds ds(xif) ds t(half circle) s rs rs ( video )

      Soccer Turn – ds dbl(up) ds rs ( video )

      Sonic Rhythm – ds dbl s tch s dbl s tch lift ( video )

      Stagger Lee – dbl-h t(xif) h rs ( video )

      Step Brush Triplet / Stomp Brush Triplet – s br(up) s dbl rs ( video ) ( advance version )

      Stomp Double – s ds ds rs ( video ) Stomp Double Advanced – ( video )

      Stompy Thing (Happy Dance) – s ds(xif) b b b b-h h b b b-h h s rs ( video )

      Swing Basic – ds rs ks rs ks rs ds rs ( video )

      Syncopated- s dbl rs dbl rs ( video )

      T-Step – ds ds ds ds ds br hop rs(xif) hop ( video )

      Tell Mama – ds br(xif) ds br(xif) ds t(xib) s(b) ds rs ( video )

      Tennessee – ds h h t t ( video )

      Tennessee Basic / Daydream – ds h h t t h h t s rs ( video )

      Time Bomb or Time Step – s(xif) s(b) s(o) s(xif) s(b) s(o) s(xif) ( video )

      Toe Tapper – ds tch dbl t h ( video )

      Travel Clog -ds(f) pull s s s(f) pull s s s(f) br up ds rs ( video )

      Triple – ds ds ds rs ( video )

      Triple Brush – ds ds ds br up ( video )

      Triple Crazy Chug – ds ds ds k rs ds rs k ( video )

      Triple Stomp – ds ds ds s s ( video )

      Turkey – h t s(xib) ds rs ( video )

      Turkey Run – h s(xib) r-h s(xib) ( video )

      Twisty Bounce – dbl twist dbl twist dbl twist twist twist ( video )

      Unclog – stamp s sk(up) ( video )

      Utah Rocker – ds br(up) ds rs rs br(up) ds rs ( video )

      Vine Ankle Break – ds ds(xif) ds ds(xib) s(f) s(b) s(f) ds rs ( video )

      Walk It – ds ds dr s dr s rs ds ds rs ( video )

      Walk Over Joey – ds ds(xif) dr s(xib) s(o) s(xif) ( video )

      Walk the Dog – ds ds h h rs ( video )

      3-2-1 – ds ds ds dbl(up) dbl(up) ds rs br(up) ( video )

      8-Count Donkey ds tch(xif) tch(o) tch(xif) tch(o) tch(xib) ds rs ( video )

    How to calculate double declining depreciation

    This topic presents an overview of the 150 percent reducing balance method of depreciation.

    When you set up a fixed asset depreciation profile and select 150% reducing balance in the Method field on the Depreciation profiles page, fixed assets that are assigned the depreciation profile are depreciated by the same percentage in each depreciation period. This percentage is calculated based on the service life of the asset. For example, if an asset has a service life of five years, the percentage is calculated as 30 percent (150% Г· 5).

    To set up 150% reducing balance depreciation, you must also select options in the Depreciation year field and the Period frequency field on the Depreciation profiles page. The options that are available in the Period frequency field vary, depending on the value that is selected in the Depreciation year field.

    Selection of depreciation year

    You can select either Calendar or Fiscal in the Depreciation year field on the Depreciation profiles page.

    The default value is Calendar. Your selection determines the options that are available in the Period frequency field. This field defines the depreciation accrual posting dates and amounts throughout the calendar year.

    Calendar

    You can keep the default value in the Depreciation year field, Calendar.

    The Calendar option updates the depreciation base on January 1 of each year. Typically, the depreciation base is the net book value minus the scrap value. In the examples later in this topic, the depreciation base is the numerator in the first expression in the calculations column.

    If you select Calendar as the depreciation year, the following options are available in the Period frequency field:

    • Yearly posts an amount on December 31.
    • Monthly posts a monthly amount at the end of each calendar month.
    • Quarterly posts a quarterly amount at the end of each calendar quarter (March 31, June 30, September 30, and December 31).
    • Half-Yearly posts a half-yearly amount at the calendar half year (June 30 and December 31).
    • Daily posts the depreciation amount for the daily depreciation method by using one transaction for each day.

    Fiscal

    If you select Fiscal in the Depreciation year field, 150% reducing balance depreciation is calculated based on the fiscal year for the fiscal calendar that is specified for the book, or for the fiscal calendar that is selected on the Ledger page. Fiscal calendars are set up on the Fiscal calendars page.

    For example, for the fiscal year July 1 through June 30, the depreciation calculation starts on July 1. The fiscal year can be longer or shorter than 12 months. The depreciation is adjusted for each period. The length of the next fiscal year is determined by the setup of periods on the Fiscal calendars page.

    If you select Fiscal as the depreciation year, the following options are available in the Period frequency field:

    • Yearly posts the total amount of the depreciation that is calculated for the fiscal year on the last day of the fiscal year.
    • Fiscal period posts the total amount of the depreciation that is calculated for the fiscal year. This amount is accrued into the fiscal periods that are defined on the Fiscal calendars page.

    Example of 150% reducing balance depreciation

    В В
    Acquisition cost 11,000
    Salvage value 1,000
    Depreciation base 10,000
    Service life years 5
    Yearly depreciation percentage 30%

    The 150% reducing balance method divides 150 percentВ by the service life years. That percentage will be multiplied by the net book value of the asset to determine the depreciation amount for the year.

    Period Calculation of the yearly depreciation amount Book value Net book value at the end of the year
    Year 1 (11,000 – 1,000) × 30% = 3,000 11,000 – 3,000 = 8,000 11,000 – 1,000 – 3,000 = 7,000
    Year 2 7,000 × 30% = 2,100 8,000 – 2,100 = 5,900 7,000 – 2,100 = 4,900<